79667665 Siemens Power Engineering Guide Transmission Distribution
-
Upload
suresh-k-krishnasamy -
Category
Documents
-
view
578 -
download
30
description
Transcript of 79667665 Siemens Power Engineering Guide Transmission Distribution
Power Engineering GuideTransmission and Distribution
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Your local representative:
Distributed by:Siemens AktiengesellschaftPower Transmission and Distribution GroupInternational Business Development,Dept. EV IBD
P.O. Box 3220D-91050 ErlangenPhone: ++49-9131-73 4540Fax: ++49-9131-73 4542
Power Transmission and Distributiongroup online:http://www.siemens.ev.de
Power Engineering GuideTransmission and Distribution For further information to each chapter:
High VoltageDesign of Air-insulated Outdoor SubstationsFax.: ++49-9131-73 18 58
Gas-insulated Swichgear for SubstationsFax.: ++49-9131-73 46 62
Gas-insulated Transmission LinesFax.: ++49-9131-734490Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kVFax.: ++49-3 03 86-2 58 67
High-voltage Direct Current TransmissionFax.: ++49-9131-73 35 66
Power Compensation in Transmission SystemsFax.: ++49-9131-73 45 54Power Compensation in Distribution SystemsFax.: ++49-9131-73 13 74
Surge ArrestersFax.: ++49-3 03 86-2 67 21
Worldwide Service for High- and Medium-voltage Switchgear and SubstationsFax.: ++49-9131-73 44 49
Medium VoltagePrimary DistributionFax.: ++49-9131-73 46 39Containerized SwitchgearFax.: ++49-68 94-89 12 94
Secondary DistributionFax.: ++49-9131-73 46 36
Medium Voltage DevicesFax.: ++49-9131-73 46 54
Low VoltageSIVACONFax.: ++49-3 41-4 47 04 00
TransformersDistribution TransformersFax.: ++49-70 21-50 85 48
Power TransformersFax.: ++49-9 11-4 34 2147
Power CablesLow- and Medium-Voltage CablesFax.: ++49-9131-73 24 55 and ++49-9131-7310 92High- and Extra High CablesFax.: ++49-9131-73 47 44
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage CablesFax.: ++49-23 31-35 7118
Accessories for High-Voltage CablesFax.: ++49-23 31-35 71 18
Protection and Substation ControlFax.: ++49-911-4 33-85 89
Power Systems ControlSCADA/EMS/DMSFax.: ++49-9 11-4 33-81 22Control Room TechnologyFax.: ++49-911-433-8183
Power Network TelecommunicationFax.: ++49-89-722-2 44 53 or ++49-89-7 22-4 1982
Energy MeteringFax.: ++49-9 11-4 33-80 37
Overhead Power LinesFax.: ++49-9131-72 95 93
System PlanningFax.: ++49-9131-73 44 45
High-Voltage Power Transmission SystemsFax.: ++49-9131-734672
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Contents
High Voltage
Medium Voltage
Low Voltage
Transformers
Power Cables
Protection and Substation Control
Power Systems Control
Energy Metering
Overhead Power Lines
System Planning
High-Voltage Power Transmission Systems
Annex: Conversion Factors and TablesSupplement: Facts and Figures
Adress Index of Local Siemens Partners
ForewordGeneral Introduction
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Quality and Environmental Policy
Quality – Our first priority
Transmission and distribution equipmentfrom Siemens means worldwide activitiesin engineering, design, development, man-ufacturing and service.The Power Transmission and DistributionGroup of Siemens AG, with all of its divi-sions and relevant locations, has beenawarded and maintains certification toDIN/ISO 9001 (EN 29001).
Certified quality
Siemens Quality Management Systemgives our customers confidence in thequality of Siemens products and services.Certified to be in compliance withDIN/ISO 9001 (EN 29001), it is the reg-istered proof of our reliabilty.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Siemens AG is one of the world’sleading international electrical andelectronics companies.With 370 000 employees in more than190 countries worldwide, the companyis divided into various groups.The Power Transmission and Distribu-tion Group of Siemens with 22 500employees around the world plans,develops, designs, manufactures andmarkets products, systems and com-plete turn-key electrical infrastructureinstallations. These involve high-voltageand HVDC, medium-voltage and low-voltage components and systems,switchyards, switchgear and switch-boards, transformers, cables, telecon-trol systems and protection relays,network and substation control, power-factor correction and load-flow man-agement system. Also included are therequired software, application engi-neering and technical services.The group owns a growing number ofengineering and manufacturing facili-ties. Presently we account for 57 plantsand more than 70 joint ventures inmore than 100 countries throughout theworld. All plants are, or are in the pro-cess of being certified to ISO 9000/9001practices. This is of significant benefitfor our customers. Our local manufac-turing capability makes us strong inglobal sourcing, since we manufactureproducts to IEC as well as ANSI/NEMAstandards in plants at various locationsaround the world.
This Power Engineering Guide is de-vised as an aid to electrical engineerswho are engaged in the planning andspecifying of electrical power genera-tion, transmission, distribution, control,and utilization systems. Care has beentaken to include the most importantapplication, performance, physical andshipping data of the equipment listed inthe guide which is needed to performpreliminary layout and engineeringtasks for industrial- and utility-type in-stallations.The equipment listed in this guide isdesigned, rated, manufactured andtested in accordance with the Interna-tional Electrotechnical Commissions(IEC) recommendations.However, a number of standardizedequipment items in this guide are de-signed to take other national standardsinto account besides the above codes,and can be rated and tested to ANSI/NEMA, BS, CSA, etc. On top of that, wemanufacture a comprehensive range oftransmission and distribution equipmentspecifically to ANSI/NEMA codes andregulations.Two thirds of our product range isless than five years old. For our cus-tomers this means energy efficiency,environmental compatibility, reliabilityand reduced life cycle cost.For details, please see the individualproduct listings or inquire.Whenever you need additional infor-mation to select suitable products fromthis guide, or when questions abouttheir application arise, simply call yourlocal Siemens office.
Foreword by the Executive Management
Siemens Power Transmission and Dis-tribution Group is capable of providingeverything you would expect from anelectrical engineering company with aglobal reach.The Power Transmission and Distribu-tion Group is prepared and competent,to perform all tasks and activities in-volving transmission and distributionof electrical energy.Siemens Power Transmission andDistribution Group is active worldwidein the field of power systems and com-ponents, protection, management andcommunication systems (details shownin supplement “Facts and Figures“).Siemens’ service includes the settingup of complete turnkey installations,offers advice, planning, operation andtraining and provides expertise andcommitment as the complexity of thistask requires.Backed by the experience of worldwideprojects, Siemens can always offer itscustomers the optimum cost-effectiveconcept individually tailored to theirneeds.We are there – wherever and when-ever you need us – to help you buildplants better, cheaper and faster.
Klaus VogesVice President
Siemens AktiengesellschaftPower Transmission and Distribution
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
HV/HVtransformer level
feeding the subtrans-mission systems
Remotehydro-electricpower station
Generatorunit trans-former
Subtransmission system up to 145 kV
Regional supply system
Urban and/or industrialareas, also with localpower stations
Internal supply system
Large industrial com-plexes also with ownpower generation
Regional supply system
Rural areas
HV/MVStep-down trans-
former level
Interconnected transmission system up to 550 kV
Long-distance transmissionEHV AC up to 800 kV or HV DC
Power generation
Main substation with transformers up to 63 MVA
HV switchgear MV switchgear
General Introduction –Transmission and Distribution
The sum of experience forintegral solutions
The world’s population is on the increaseand the demand for electrical energy inthe developing and newly industrializingnations is growing rapidly. Safe, reliableand environmentally sustainable powertransmission and distribution is thereforeone of the great challenges of our time.Siemens is making an important contribu-tion towards solving this task, with future-oriented technologies for the construction,modernization and expansion of powersystems at all voltage levels.The Siemens Power Engineering GuideTransmission and Distribution gives a shortsummary of the activities and products ofthe Power Transmission and DistributionGroup.Transmission and distribution networks arethe link between power generation and theconsumers, whose requirements for elec-trical energy determine the actual genera-tion. Industry, trade and commerce as wellas public services (transportation and com-munication systems including data pro-cessing), not to mention the private sector(households), are highly dependent upona reliable and adequate energy supply ofhigh quality at utmost economical condi-tions. These are the basic conditions forinstallation and operation of transmissionand distribution systems.
Transmission
The transmission of electrical energy fromthe generating plants, which are locatedunder the major constraints of primary en-ergy supply, cooling facilities and environ-mental impact, to the load centers, whoselocations are dictated by high-density urbanor industrial areas, requires a correspond-ingly extensive transmission system.These mostly interconnected systems, e.g.up to 550 kV, balance the daily and season-al differences between local available gen-erating capacity and load requirements andtransport the energy to the individual re-gions of demand. For long-distances and/orhigh-capacity transmission, extra-high-volt-age levels up to 800 kV or DC transmissionsystems are in use.In interconnected transmission systems,more and more substations for the sub-transmission systems with high-voltagelevels up to 145 kV are needed as closeas possible to the densely populated areas,feeding the regional supply of urban or in-dustrial areas. This calls for space-savingenclosed substations and the applicationof EHV and/or HV cable systems.
Fig. 1: Transmission: Principle configuration of transmission system
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Distribution
In order to feed local medium-voltagedistribution systems of urban, industrial orrural distribution areas, HV/MV main sub-stations are connected to the subtransmis-sion systems. Main substations have tobe located next to the MV load center foreconomical reasons. Thus, the subtrans-mission systems of voltage levels up to145 kV have to penetrate even further intothe populated load centers.The far-reaching power distribution sys-tem in the load center areas is tailored ex-clusively to the needs of users with largenumbers of appliances, lamps, motordrives, heating, chemical processes, etc.Most of these are connected to the low-voltage level.The structure of the low-voltage distri-bution system is determined by load andreliability requirements of the consumers,as well as by nature and dimensions ofthe area to be served. Different consumercharacteristics in public, industrial andcommercial supply will need differentLV network configurations and adequateswitchgear and transformer layout. Espe-cially for industrial supply systems withtheir high number of motors and highcosts for supply interruptions, LV switch-gear design is of great importance forflexible and reliable operation.Independent from individual supply charac-teristics in order to avoid uneconomicalhigh losses, however, the substations withthe MV/LV transformers should be locatedas close as possible to the LV load centersand should therefore be of compact de-sign.The superposed medium-voltage systemhas to be configured to the needs of thesesubstations and the available sources(main substation, generation) and leadsagain to different solutions for urban orrural public supply, industry and large build-ing centers.Despite the individual layout of networks,common philosophy should be an utmostsimple and clear network design to obtain flexible system operation clear protection coordination short fault clearing time and efficient system automation.The wide range of power requirementsfor individual consumers from a few kW tosome MW, together with the high numberof similar network elements, are the maincharacteristics of the distribution systemand the reason for the comparatively highspecific costs. Therefore, utmost standard-ization of equipment and use of mainte-nancefree components are of decisive im-portance for economical system layout.Siemens components and systems caterto these requirements based on worldwideexperience in transmission and distributionnetworks.
Fig. 2: Distribution: Principle configuration of distribution systems
Consumers
MV/LVtransformer
level
Low-voltage supply system
Large buildings withdistributed transformersvertical LV risers andinternal installation per floor
Industrial supply withdistributed transformerswith subdistribution boardand motor control center
Public supplywith pillars andhouse connectionsinternal installation
Local medium-voltage distribution system
Ring type
Connection oflarge consumer
Industrial supplyand large buildings
Public supply
Spot systemFeeder cable
Medium voltage substations
MV/LV substationlooped in MV cableby load-break switch-gear in differentcombinations forindividual substationdesign, transformersup to 1000 kVA
LV fuses
Circuitbreaker
Load-breakswitch
Consumer-connection substation loopedin or connected to feeder cable with circuitbreaker and load-break switches for connec-tion of spot system in different layout
Main substation with transformers up to 63 MVA
HV switchgear MV switchgear
General Introduction –Transmission and Distribution
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
General Introduction –Transmission and Distribution
Fig. 3: Protection, operation and control:Principle configuration of operation, protection and communication systems
Power system switchgear
SCADA functions Distributionmanagementfunctions
Network analysis
Power andschedulingapplications
Graficalinformationsystems
Training simulator
System coordination level
Control room equipment
Unit protection– Overcurrent– Distance– Differential etc.
Unit switchinginterlocking
Control
Unit coordination levelOtherunit
Substation protection Substation control Data processing
Switchgearinterlocking
Data and signalinput/output
Automation
Otherunit
Substation coordination level
Power system substation
Power network telecommunication systemsOthersub-stations
Othersub-stations
Power line carriercommunication
Fiber-opticcommunication
Protection, operation and control
Safe, reliable and economical energy sup-ply is also a matter of fast, efficient andreliable system protection, data transmis-sion and processing for system operation.The components required for protectionand operation benefit from the rapid devel-opment of information and communicationtechnology.Modern digital relays provide extensivepossibilities of selective relay setting andprotection coordination for fast fault clear-ing and minimized interruption times. Ad-ditional extensive system data and infor-mation are generated as an essential basisfor systems supervision and control.Powerful data processing and manage-ment system have been developed. Modu-lar and open structures, full-graphics userinterface as well as state-of-the-art appli-cations are a matter of course.Siemens network control systems assurea complete overview of the current oper-ating conditions – from the interconnectedgrid right up to the complete distributionnetwork. This simplifies system manage-ment and at the same time makes it morereliable and more economical. The openarchitecture of the power system controloffers great flexibility for expansion to meetall the demands made and can be integrat-ed into existing installations without anyproblems. Visualization of system behaviorand supply situation by advanced controlroom equipment assist the highly respon-sible function of systems operators.
Overall solutions – System planning
Of crucial importance for the quality ofpower transmission and distribution is theintegration of diverse components to formoverall solutions.Especially in countries where the increasein power consumption is well above theaverage besides the installation of gener-ating capacity, construction and extensionof transmission and distribution systemsmust be developed simultaneously andtogether with equipment for protection,supervision and control. Also, for the exist-ing systems, changing load structure and/or environmental regulations, together withthe need for replacement of aged equip-ment will require new installations.Integral power network solutions are farmore than just a combination of productsand components. Peculiarities in urban de-velopment, protection of the countrysideand of the environment, and the suitabilityfor expansion and harmonious integrationin existing networks are just a few of thefactors which future-oriented power sys-tem planning must take into account.
1/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-voltage Switchgear for Substations
Introduction
High-voltage substations form an importantlink in the power transmission chain be-tween generation source and consumer.Two basic designs are possible:
Air-insulated outdoor switchgearof open design (AIS)
AIS are favorably priced high-voltage sub-stations for rated voltages up to 800 kVwhich are popular wherever space restric-tions and environmental circumstances donot have to be considered. The individualelectrical and mechanical components ofan AIS installation are assembled on site.Air-insulated outdoor substations of opendesign are not completely safe to touchand are directly exposed to the effects ofweather and the environment (Fig. 1).
Gas-insulated indoor or outdoorswitchgear (GIS)
GIS compact dimensions and design makeit possible to install substations up to550 kV right in the middle of load centersof urban or industrial areas. Each circuit-breaker bay is factory assembled andincludes the full complement of isolatorswitches, grounding switches (regularor make-proof), instrument transformers,control and protection equipment, inter-locking and monitoring facilities commonlyused for this type of installation. Theearthed metal enclosures of GIS assurenot only insensitivity to contamination butalso safety from electric shock (Fig. 2).
Fig. 1: Outdoor switchgear
Fig. 2: GIS substations in metropolitan areas
1/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-voltage Switchgear for Substations
A special application of gas-insulatedequipment are: Gas-insulated transmis-sion lines (GIL)
Gas-insulated transmission lines (GIL)are always used where high-voltage cablescome up against the limits of their per-formance.High-voltage switchgear is normally com-bined with transformers and other equip-ment to complete transformer substationsin order to Step-up from generator voltage level
to high-voltage system (MV/HV) Transform voltage levels within the
high-voltage grid system(HV/HV) Step-down to medium-voltage level
of distribution system (HV/MV)
The High-Voltage Division plans and con-structs individual high-voltage switchgearinstallations or complete transformer sub-stations, comprising high-voltage switch-gear, medium-voltage switchgear, majorcomponents such as transformers, andall ancillary equipment such as auxiliaries,control systems, protective equipment,etc., on a turnkey basis or even as generalcontractor.The spectrum of installations suppliedranges from basic substations with singlebusbar to regional transformer substationswith multiple busbars or 1 1/2 circuit-break-er arrangement for rated voltages up to800 kV, rated currents up to 8000 A andshort-circuit currents up to 100 kA, all overthe world.The services offered range from systemplanning to commissioning and after-salesservice, including training of customer per-sonnel.The process of handling such an installa-tion starts with preparation of a quotation,and proceeds through clarification of theorder, design, manufacture, supply andcost-accounting until the project is finallybilled. Processing such an order hinges onmethodical data processing that in turncontributes to systematic project handling.All these high-voltage installations havein common their high-standard of engi-neering, which covers power systems,steel structures, civil engineering, fire pre-cautions, environmental protection andcontrol systems (Fig. 3).
Every aspect of technology and each workstage is handled by experienced engineers.With the aid of high-performance computerprograms, e.g. the finite element meth-od (FEM), installations can be reliably de-signed even for extreme stresses, suchas those encountered in earthquake zones.All planning documentation is produced onmodern CAD systems; data exchange withother CAD systems is possible via stand-ardized interfaces.By virtue of their active involvement innational and international associations andstandardization bodies, our engineers arealways fully informed of the state of theart, even before a new standard or specifi-cation is published. Our own high-perform-ance, internationally accredited test labora-tories and a certified QA system testify tothe quality of our products and services.
Ancillaryequipment
Design
CivilEngineering
Buildings,roads,foundations
StructuralSteelwork
Gantries andsubstructures
Major com-ponents,
e.g. trans-former
SubstationControl
Control andmonitoring,measurement,protection, etc.
AC/DC
auxililiaries
Surge
diverters
Earthing
syste
m
Pow
er c
able
sC
ontr
ol a
ndsi
gnal
cab
les
Carrier-frequ.
equipment
Ventilation
Lightning
Environmentalprotection
Fireprotection
Fig. 3: Engineering of high-voltage switchgear
Milestones along the road tocertification:
1983: Introduction of a qualitysystem on the basis of Canadianstandard CSA Z299 Level 1.
1989: Certification in accordancewith DIN ISO 9001 by the GermanAssociation for Certification ofQuality Systems (DQS)
1992: Accreditation of the test labora-tories in accordance with DIN EN 45001by the German Accreditation Body forTechnology (DATech).
A worldwide network of liaison and salesoffices, along with the specialist depart-ments in Germany, support and advise ourcustomers in all matters of switchgeartechnology.Siemens has for many years been a lead-ing supplier of high-voltage equipment,regardless of whether AIS, GIS or GIL hasbeen concerned. For example, outdoorsubstations of longitudinal in-line designare still known in many countries underthe Siemens registered tradename “Kiel-linie”. Back in 1968, Siemens supplied theworld’s first GIS substation using SF6 asinsulating and quenching medium. Gas-in-sulated transmission lines have featuredin the range of products since 1976.
1/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Design of Air-insulated Outdoor Substations
Standards
Air-insulated outdoor substations of opendesign must not be touched. Therefore,air-insulated switchgear (AIS) is always setup in the form of a fenced-in electrical op-erating area, to which authorized personshave access only.Relevant IEC specifications apply to out-door switchgear equipment. Insulationcoordination, including minimum phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground clearances,is effected in accordance with IEC 71.Outdoor switchgear is directly exposed tothe effects of the environment such as theweather. Therefore it has to be designedbased on not only electrical but also envi-ronmental specifications.Currently there is no international standardcovering the setup of air-insulated outdoorsubstations of open design. Siemens de-signs AIS in accordance with DIN/VDEstandards, in line with national standardsor customer specifications.The German standard DIN VDE 0101 (erec-tion of power installations with rated volt-ages above 1 kV) demonstrates typicallythe protective measures and stresses thathave to be taken into consideration for air-insulated switchgear.
Protective measures
Protective measures against direct contact,i. e. protection in the form of covering,obstruction or clearance and appropriatelypositioned protective devices and mini-mum heights.Protective measures against indirect touch-ing by means of relevant grounding meas-ures in accordance with DIN VDE 0141.Protective measures during work onequipment, i.e. during installation mustbe planned such that the specificationsof DIN VDE 0105 (e.g. 5 safety rules) arecomplied with Protective measures during operation,
e.g. use of switchgear interlock equip-ment
Protective measures against voltagesurges and lightning strike
Protective measures against fire, waterand, if applicable, noise insulation.
Stresses
Electrical stresses, e.g. rated current,short-circuit current, adequate creepagedistances and clearances
Mechanical stresses (normal stressing),e.g. weight, static and dynamic loads,ice, wind
Mechanical stresses (exceptionalstresses), e.g. weight and constantloads in simultaneous combination withmaximum switching forces or short-circuit forces, etc.
Special stresses, e.g. caused by instal-lation altitudes of more than 1000 mabove sea level, or earthquakes
Variables affecting switchgearinstallation
Switchgear design is significantly influ-enced by: Minimum clearances (depending on
rated voltages) between various activeparts and between active parts andearth
Arrangement of conductors Rated and short-circuit currents Clarity for operating staff Availability during maintenance work,
redundancy Availability of land and topography Type and arrangement of the busbar
disconnectors
The design of a substation determines itsaccessibility, availability and clarity. Thedesign must therefore be coordinated inclose cooperation with the customer. Thefollowing basic principles apply:Accessibility and availability increase withthe number of busbars. At the same time,however, clarity decreases. Installationsinvolving single busbars require minimuminvestment, but they offer only limited flex-ibility for operation management and main-tenance. Designs involving 1 1/2 and 2 cir-cuit-breaker arrangements assure a highredundancy, but they also entail the high-est costs. Systems with auxiliary or bypassbusbars have proved to be economical.The circuit-breaker of the coupling feederfor the auxiliary bus allows uninterruptedreplacement of each feeder circuit-breaker.For busbars and feeder lines, mostly wireconductors and aluminum are used. Multi-ple conductors are required where currentsare high. Owing to the additional short-circuit forces between the subconductors(pinch effect), however, multiple conduc-tors cause higher mechanical stressing atthe tension points. When wire conductors,particularly multiple conductors, are usedhigher short-circuit currents cause a risenot only in the aforementioned pinch ef-fect but in further force maxima in theevent of swinging and dropping of the con-ductor bundle (cable pull). This in turn re-sults in higher mechanical stresses on theswitchgear components. These effects canbe calculated in an FEM simulation (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4: FEM calculation of deflection of wire conductors in the event of short circuit
Horizontaldisplacement in m
Vertical displacement in m
-1.4 -1.0 -0.6 -0.2 0.2 0.6 1.0 1.4
-1.4
-1.2
-1.0
-0.8
-0.6
-1.6
-1.8
-2.0
-2.20
1/5Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
When rated and short-circuit currents arehigh, aluminum tubes are increasingly usedto replace wire conductors for busbars andfeeder lines. They can handle rated cur-rents up to 8000 A and short-circuitcurrents up to 80 kA without difficulty.Not only the availability of land, but alsothe lay of the land, the accessibility andlocation of incoming and outgoing over-head lines together with the number oftransformers and voltage levels considera-bly influence the switchgear design aswell. A one- or two-line arrangement, andpossibly a U arrangement, may be theproper solution. Each outdoor switchgear,especially for step-up substations in con-nection with power stations and largetransformer substations in the extra-high-voltage transmission system, is thereforeunique, depending on the local conditions.HV/MV transformer substations of the dis-tribution system, with repeatedly usedequipment and a scheme of one incomingand one outgoing line as well as two trans-formers together with medium-voltageswitchgear and auxiliary equipment, aremore subject to a standardized designfrom the individual power supply compa-nies.
Preferred designs
The multitude of conceivable designs in-clude certain preferred versions, which aredependent on the type and arrangement ofthe busbar disconnectors:
H arrangement
The H arrangement is preferrably used inapplications for feeding industrial consum-ers. Two overhead lines are connectedwith two transformers and interlinked by asingle-bus coupler. Thus each feeder of theswitchgear can be maintained withoutdisturbance of the other feeders. This ar-rangement guarantees a high availability.
Special layout for single busbars upto 145 kV (withdrawable circuit-breakerarrangement)
Further to the H arrangement that is builtin many variants, there are also designsfeaturing withdrawable circuit-breakerswithout disconnectors for this voltagerange. The circuit-breaker is moved electro-hydraulically from the connected positioninto the disconnected position and vice-versa.In comparison with a single busbar withrotary disconnectors, roughly 50% lessground space is required (Fig. 5).
Design of Air-insulated Outdoor Substations
Fig. 5: Substation with withdrawable circuit-breaker
Fig. 6: Substation with rotary disconnector, in-line design
In-line longitudinal layout, with rotarydisconnectors, preferable up to 170 kV
The busbar disconnectors are lined up onebehind the other and parallel to the longitu-dinal axis of the busbar. It is preferable tohave either wire-type or tubular busbarslocated at the top of the feeder conductors.Where tubular busbars are used, gantriesare required for the outgoing overheadlines only. The system design requires onlytwo conductor levels and is therefore clear.If, in the case of duplicate busbars, thesecond busbar is arranged in U-form rela-tive to the first busbar, it is possible to ar-range feeders going out on both sides ofthe busbar without a third conductor level(Fig. 6).
Top view Dimensions in mm
6500
Section A-B Section C-D
A
C
B
D
6500
7000 6500 1330027000
13300
2500
8000 7500
Top view
Section A-A
20500
R1 S1 T1 R2S2T2
8400 1940048300
9000A
A
6500
4500
End bay
Normalbay 9000
8000
2500Dimensions in mm
1/6 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Design of Air-insulated Outdoor Substations
Central tower layout with rotarydisconnectors, normally only for 245 kV
The busbar disconnectors are arrangedside by side and parallel to the longitudinalaxis of the feeder. Wire-type busbars locat-ed at the top are commonly used; tubularbusbars are also conceivable. This arrange-ment enables the conductors to be easliyjumpered over the circuit-breakers and thebay width to be made smaller than that ofin-line designs. With three conductor levelsthe system is relatively clear, but the costof the gantries is high (Fig. 7).
Diagonal layout with pantographdisconnectors, preferable up to 245 kV
The pantograph disconnectors are placeddiagonally to the axis of the busbars andfeeder. This results in a very clear, space-saving arrangement. Wire and tubular con-ductors are customary. The busbars canbe located above or below the feeder con-ductors (Fig. 8).
1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,preferable up to 245 kV
The 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement as-sures high supply reliability; however, ex-penditures for equipment are high as well.The busbar disconnectors are of the panto-graph, rotary and vertical-break type. Verti-cal-break disconnectors are preferred forthe feeders. The busbars located at the topcan be of wire or tubular type. Of advan-tage are the equipment connections, whichare very short and allow even in the caseof multiple conductors that high short-cir-cuit currents are mastered. Two arrange-ments are customary: External busbar, feeders in line with
three conductor levels Internal busbar, feeders in H arrange-
ment with two conductor levels (Fig. 9).
Fig. 7: Central tower design
Fig. 8: Busbar area with pantograph disconnector of diagonal design, rated voltage 420 kV
Fig. 9: 1 1/2 circuit-breaker design
18000
9000
3000Dimensions in mm
12500
16000
7000 17000 17000
Section
10000
10400
Top view
180005000
13300
Dimensions in mm
Bus system By-pass bus
8000 28000 48000 10000
400040005000
29000
4000Dimensions in mm
18000
17500
480008500
1/7Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Design of Air-insulated Outdoor Substations
Planning principles
For air-insulated outdoor substations ofopen design, the following planning princi-ples must be taken into account: High reliability
– Reliable mastering of normal andexceptional stresses
– Protection against surges and light-ning strikes
– Protection against surges directlyon the equipment to be protected(e.g. transformer, HV cable)
Good clarity and accessibility– Clear conductor routing with few
conductor levels– Free accessibility to all areas (no
equipment located at inaccessibledepth)
– Adequate protective clearances forinstallation, maintenance and transpor-tation work
– Adequately dimensioned transportroutes
Positive incorporation into surroundings– As few overhead conductors as
possible– Tubular instead of wire-type busbars– Unobtrusive steel structures– Minimal noise and disturbance level
EMC grounding systemfor modern control and protection
Fire precautions and environmentalprotection– Adherence to fire protection speci-
fications and use of flame-retardantand nonflammable materials
– Use of environmentally compatibletechnology and products
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-9131- 73 18 58
1/8 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Common characteristic featuresof switchgear installation
Because of its small size and outstandingcompatibility with the environment, SF6 -insulated switchgear (GIS) is gaining con-stantly on other types. Siemens has beena leader in this sector from the very start.The concept of SF6 - insulated metal-en-closed high-voltage switchgear has proveditself in more than 64,000 bay operatingyears in over 5,500 installations in all partsof the world. It offers the following out-standing advantages.
Small space requirements
The availability and price of land play animportant part in selecting the type ofswitchgear to be used. Siting problemsarise in Large towns Industrial conurbations Mountainous regions with narrow
valleys Underground power stationsIn cases such as these, SF6-insulatedswitchgear is replacing conventionalswitchgear because of its very small spacerequirements.
Full protection against contact withlive parts
The all-round metal enclosure affordsmaximum safety to the personnel underall operating and fault conditions.
Protection against pollution
Its metal enclosure fully protects theswitchgear interior against environmentaleffects such as salt deposits in coastalregions, industrial vapors and precipitates,as well as sandstorms. The compactswitchgear can be installed in buildingsof simple design in order to minimize thecost of cleaning and inspection and tomake necessary repairs independent ofweather conditions.
Free choice of installation site
The small site area required for SF6-insu-lated switchgear saves expensive gradingand foundation work, e.g. in permafrostzones. Other advantages are the shorterections times and the fact that switch-gear installed indoors can be servicedregardless of the climate or the weather.
Protection of the environment
The necessity to protect the environmentoften makes it difficult to erect outdoorswitchgear of conventional design, where-as buildings containing compact SF6-insu-lated switchgear can almost always bedesigned so that they blend well with thesurroundings.SF6-insulated metal-enclosed switchgearis, due to the modular system, very flexibleand can meet all requirements of configu-ration given by network design and operat-ing conditions.
Each circuit-breaker bay includes the fullcomplement of disconnecting and ground-ing switches (regular or make-proof),instrument transformers, control and pro-tection equipment, interlocking and moni-toring facilities, commonly used for thistype of installation (Fig. 10).Beside the conventional circuit-breakerfield, other arrangements can be suppliedsuch as single-bus, ring cable with load-break switches and circuit-breakers, single-bus arrangement with bypass-bus, coupler,bay for triplicate bus. Combined circuit-breaker and load-break switch feeder, ringcable with load-break switches, etc. arefurthermore available for the 145 kV level.
Fig. 10: Typical circuit arrangements of SF6-switchgear
1/9Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Main product range of GISfor substations
SF6 switchgear up to 550 kV(the total product range covers GIS from66 up to 800 kV rated voltage).
The development of the switchgear isalways based on an overall production con-cept, which guarantees the achievementof the high technical standards requiredof the HV switchgear whilst providing themaximum customer benefit.This objective is attained only by incorpo-rating all processes in the quality manage-ment system, which has been introducedand certified according to DIN EN ISO9001 (EN 29001).
Fig. 11: Main product range
Siemens GIS switchgear meets allthe performance, quality and reliabilitydemands such as
Compact space-saving designmeans uncomplicated foundations, a widerange of options in the utilization of space,less space taken up by the switchgear.
Minimal weight by lightweight constructionthrough the use of aluminum-alloy and theexploitation of innovations in developmentsuch as computer-aided design tools.
Safe encapsulationmeans an outstanding level of safetybased on new manufacturing methodsand optimized shape of enclosures.
Environmental compatibilitymeans no restrictions on choice of locationby means of minimum space requirement,extremely low noise emission and effec-tive gas sealing system (leakage < 1% peryear per gas compartment).
Economical transport
means simplified and fast transport andreduced costs because of maximum possi-ble size of shipping units.
Minimal operating costsmeans the switchgear is practically mainte-nance-free, e.g. contacts of circuit-breakersand disconnectors designed for extremelylong endurance, motor-operated mecha-nisms self-lubricating for life, corrosion-freeenclosure. This ensures that the first in-spection will not be necessary until after25 years of operation.
Reliabilitymeans our overall product concept whichincludes, but is not limited to, the use offinite elements method (FEM), three-dimensional design programs, stereolitho-graphy, and electrical field developmentprograms assures the high standard ofquality.
Smooth and efficientinstallation and commissioningtransport units are fully assembled andtested at the factory and filled with SF6 gasat reduced pressure. Plug connection of allswitches, all of which are motorized, fur-ther improve the speediness of site instal-lation and substantially reduce field wiringerrors.
Routine testsAll measurements are automatically docu-mented and stored in the EDP informationsystem, which enables quick access tomeasured data even if years have passed.
50044
80
5170
All dimensions in mm
Switchgear type 8DN9 8DP3 8DQ1
Details on page 1/10 1/11-1/12 1/13
Bay width [mm] 1200 2200 3600
Rated voltage [kV] up to 145 up to 300 up to 550
Rated power [kV] up to 275 up to 460 up to 740frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning [kV] up to 650 up to 1050 up to 1550impulse withstandvoltage
Rated switching [kV] – up to 850 up to 1250impulse withstandvoltage
Rated normal current [A] up to 3150 up to 5000 up to 6300busbars
Rated normal current [A] up to 2500 up to 4000 up to 4000feeder
Rated breaking [kA] up to 40 up to 50 up to 63current
Rated short-time [kA] up to 40 up to 50 up to 63withstand current(1s)
Rated peak [kA] up to 100 up to 135 up to 170withstand current
SF6-gas pressure [bar] up to 4.3 up to 4.0 up to 4.3(gauge) switchgear
SF6-gas pressure [bar] up to 6.0 up to 6.0 up to 6.5(gauge) circuit-breaker
Inspection > 20 years > 20 years > 20 years
5000
3800
3400
3200
1/10 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
SF6-insulated switchgearup to 145 kV, type 8DN9
The clear bay configuration of the light-weight and small 8DN9 switchgear isevident at first sight. Control and monitor-ing facilities are easily accessible in spiteof the compact design of the switchgear.The horizontally arranged circuit-breakerforms the basis of every bay configuration.The operating mechanism is easily acces-sible from the operator area. The other baymodules – of single-phase encapsulateddesign like the circuit-breaker module –are located on top of the circuit-breaker.The three-phase encapsulated passivebusbar is partitioned off from the activeequipment.Thanks to “single-function” assemblies(assignment of just one task to each mod-ule) and the versatile modular structure,even unconventional arrangements can beset up out of a pool of only 20 differentmodules.The modules are connected to each otherby a standard interface which allows anextensive range of bay structures. Theswitchgear design with standardized mod-ules and the scope of services mean thatall kinds of bay structures can be set up ina minimal area.The compact design permits the supply ofdouble bays fully assembled, tested in thefactory and filled with SF6 gas at reducedpressure, which guarantees smooth andefficient installation and commissioning.The following major feeder control levelfunctions are performed in the local controlcabinet for each bay, which is integrated inthe operating front of the 8DN9 switch-gear: Fully interlocked local operation and
state-indication of all switching devicesmanaged reliably by the Siemens digitalswitchgear interlock system
Practical dialogue between the digitalfeeder protection system and centralprocessor of the feeder control system
Visual display of all signals required foroperation and monitoring, together withmeasured values for current, voltage andpower
Protection of all auxiliary current andvoltage transformer circuits
Transmission of all feeder information tothe substation control and protectionsystem
Factory assembly and tests are significantparts of the overall production conceptmentioned above. Two bays at a time un-dergo mechanical and electrical testingwith the aid of computer-controlled stands.
12
3 4
5
12
1011
67
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
11
1213
14
15
16
17
1 Busbar I2 Busbar II3 Busbar disconnector I4 Busbar disconnector isolator II5 Grounding switch6 Make-proof grounding switch7 Cable isolator8 Voltage transformer9 Cable sealing end
10 Current transformer11 Grounding switch12 Circuit-breaker13 Hydraulic storage cylinder14 Electrohydraulic operating unit15 Oil tank16 Circuit-breaker control
with gas monitoring unit17 Local control cabinet
Fig. 12: Switchgear bay 8DN9 up to 145 kV
Fig. 13: 8DN9 switchgear for operating voltage 145 kV
1/11Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
SF6-insulated switchgearup to 300 kV, type 8DP3
A switchgear system with entirely individ-ual enclosure of all modules for the three-phase system.Similar to the design concept of the 8DN9switchgear, a horizontally arranged circuit-breaker has been chosen to be the baseunit for the 8DP3 switchgear although theencapsulation is entirely single-phase in-stead of three-phase (busbar). Making useof the experience gained with previous145 kV GIS, the current transformer wasintegrated in the circuit-breaker enclosure.Mounted on top of the circuit-breaker tankare housings containing disconnectors,or grounding switches, or both devices.Depending on the application up to twogrounding switches can be installed inthese enclosures. One grounding switchserves as a work-in-progress groundingdevice for the circuit-breaker, whereas theother external switch may be of the stand-ard slow-moving type or be equipped witha spring-drive mechanism to achieve “faultmaking” capabilities. This feature is oftenrequired at incoming or outgoing feederterminations.The standard design is arranged to accom-modate the double-bus-bar circuits prima-rily used. Naturally all other common circuitrequirements for this voltage level, such asdouble or single bus with bypass and the1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement, can befulfilled as well.Care has been taken to design the bussections in such a way that the standardwidth of each bay, including the associatedbusbar section, does not exceed 2.2 m.This solution allows preassembly and test-ing at the factory to a large extent. For ex-ample, a complete 245 kV bay of the GIStype 8DP3 can be shipped pre-tested andonly requiring a minimum amount of instal-lation work on site.Circuit-breaker modules with one inter-rupter unit will meet the requirements foroperating voltages up to 245 kV normally.Voltages above 245 kV, however, as wellas high switching capacities require circuit-breaker units with two interrupter unitsper pole.
1 Busbar disconnector II2 Busbar II3 Busbar disconnector I4 Busbar I5 Grounding switch6 Local control cabinet7 Gas monitoring unit8 Circuit-breaker control unit9 Oil tank
10 Electrohydraulic operating unit11 Hydraulic storage cylinder12 Circuit-breaker13 Current transformer14 Cable sealing end15 Voltage transformer16 Make-proof grounding switch17 Cable disconnector18 Grounding switch
1234
5
6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14
15
161718
42
3 1
5
12
1318
16
17
1415
Fig. 15: Complete 8DP3 bay for operating voltage 245 kV being unloaded at site
Fig. 14: Switchgear bay 8DP3 up to 245 kV
1/12 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
1 Busbar disconnector II2 Busbar II3 Busbar disconnector I4 Busbar I5 Grounding switch6 Local control cabinet7 Gas monitoring unit8 Circuit-breaker control unit9 Oil tank
10 Electrohydraulic operating unit11 Hydraulic storage cylinder12 Circuit-breaker13 Current transformer14 Cable sealing end15 Voltage transformer16 Make-proof grounding switch17 Cable disconnector18 Grounding switch
1234
5
6
7 8 9 10 11 12
13
14
15161718
42
3 1
5
12
1318
16
17
1415
Fig. 18: Switchgear bay 8DP3 up to 300 kV
Fig. 16: 8DP3 switchgear for operating voltage 245 kV and 40 kA Fig. 17: 8DP3 switchgear for operating voltage 245 kV and 50 kA
1/13Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
SF6-insulated switchgearup to 550 kV, type 8DQ1
A modular switchgear system for highpower switching stations with individualenclosure of all modules for the three-phase system.The design concept of the 8DQ1 switch-gear follows in principle that of the 8DP3for voltages above 245 kV, i.e. the baseunit for the switchgear forms a horizontallyarranged circuit-breaker on top of whichare mounted the housings containing dis-connectors, grounding switches, currenttransformers, etc. The busbar modules arealso single-phase encapsulated and parti-tioned off from the active equipment.As a matter of course the busbar modulesof this switchgear system are passiveelements, too.Additional main characteristic features ofthe switchgear installation are: Circuit-breakers with two interrupter
units up to operating voltages of 550 kVand breaking currents of 63 kA (from63 kA to 100 kA, circuit-breakers withfour interrupter units have to be con-sidered)
Low switchgear center of gravity bymeans of circuit-breaker arranged hori-zontally in the lower portion
Utilization of the circuit-breaker trans-port frame as supporting device for theentire bay
The use of only a few modules andcombinations of equipment in one enclo-sure reduces the length of sealing facesand consequently lowers the risk ofleakage
10 Grounding switch11 Current transformer12 Cable sealing end13 Local control cabinet14 Gas monitoring unit
(as part of control unit)15 Circuit-breaker control unit16 Electrohydraulic operating unit17 Oil tank18 Hydraulic storage cylinder
1 Busbar disconnector I2 Busbar I3 Busbar II4 Busbar disconnector II5 Grounding switch6 Circuit-breaker7 Voltage transformer8 Make-proof grounding
switch9 Cable disconnector
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
4
3
2
1
181716151413
12
23
1 4
5
6
1110
8
9
7
Fig. 19: Switchgear bay 8DQ1 up to 550 kV
Fig. 20: 8DQ1 switchgear for operating voltage 420 kV
1/14 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Air con-ditioningsystem
26.90
23.20
Relay room
Groundingresistor
Shuntreactor
13.8 kVswitchgear
15.95
11.50
8.90Cable duct
40 MVA transformer
Radiators
Compensator
2.20
-1.50
Gas-insulatedswitchgear type8DN9
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Scope of supply andbattery limits
For all types of GIS Siemens suppliesthe following items and observes theseinterface points: Switchgear bay with circuit-breaker inter-
rupters, disconnectors and groundingswitches, instrument transformers, andbusbar housings as specified. For thedifferent feeder types, the following bat-tery limits apply:– Overhead line feeder:
the connecting stud at the SF6-to-airbushing without the line clamp.
– Cable feeder:according to IEC 859 the terminationhousing, conductor coupling, and con-necting plate are part of the GIS deliv-ery, while the cable stress cone withmatching flange is part of the cablesupply (see Fig. 24 on page 1/18).
– Transformer feeder:connecting flange at switchgear bayand connecting bus ducts to trans-former including any compensatorare delivered by Siemens. The SF6-to-oil bushings plus terminal enclo-sures are part of the transformerdelivery, unless agreed otherwise(see Fig. 25 on page 1/18)*.
Each feeder bay is equipped withgrounding pads. The local groundingnetwork and the connections to theswitchgear are in the delivery scopeof the installation contractor.
Initial SF6-gas filling for the entireswitchgear as supplied by Siemens isincluded. All gas interconnections fromthe switchgear bay to the integral gasservice and monitoring panel are sup-plied by Siemens as well.
Hydraulic oil for all circuit-breaker oper-ating mechanisms is supplied with theequipment.
Terminals and circuit protection for aux-iliary drive and control power are pro-vided with the equipment. Feeder cir-cuits and cables, and installation materialfor them are part of the installation con-tractor’s supply.
Local control, monitoring, and interlock-ing panels are supplied for each circuit-breaker bay to form completely oper-ational systems. Terminals for remotemonitoring and control are provided.
Mechanical support structures aboveground are supplied by Siemens; em-bedded steel and foundation work ispart of the installation contractor’s scope.
Fig. 21: Special arrangement for limited space. Sectional view of a building showing the compact nature ofgas-insulated substations
* Note: this interface point should always be closelycoordinated between switchgear manufacturer andtransformer supplier.
1/15Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Some examples for specialarrangement
Gas-insulated switchgear – usually accom-modated in buildings (as shown in a tower-type substation) – is expedient wheneverthe floor area is very expensive or restrict-ed or whenever ambient conditions neces-sitate their use (Fig. 21).For smaller switching stations, or in casesof expansion when there is no advantagein constructing a building, a favorablesolution is to install the substation in acontainer (Fig. 22).
Mobile containerized switchgear –even for high voltage
At medium-voltage levels, mobile contain-erized switchgear is the state of the art.But even high-voltage switching stationscan be built in this way and economicallyoperated in many applications.The heart is the metal-enclosed SF6-in-sulated switchgear, installed either in asheet-steel container or in a block housemade of prefabricated concrete elements.In contrast to conventional stationaryswitchgear, there is no need for complicat-ed constructions, mobile switching sta-tions have their own ”building“.Mobile containerized switching stationscan be of single or multi-bay design usinga large number of different circuits andarrangements. All the usual connectioncomponents can be employed, such asoutdoor bushings, cable adapter boxes andSF6 tubular connections. If necessary, allthe equipment for control and protectionand for the local supply can be accommo-dated in the container. This allows exten-sively independent operation of the instal-lation on site. Containerized switchgear ispreassembled in the factory and ready foroperation. On site, it is merely necessaryto set up the containers, fit the exteriorsystem parts and make the external con-nections. Shifting the switchgear assemblywork to the factory enhances the qualityand operational reliability. Mobile container-ized switchgear requires little space andusually fits in well with the environment.Rapid availability and short commissioningtimes are additional, significant advantagesfor the operators. Considerable cost re-ductions are achieved in the planning, con-struction work and assembly.
Transformer
-Z1
-Z1
-T1
-00 -052
-T2-T5
-051 -08 -09-Z2
OHL
-Z2
5806
3500
Overhead line
Transformer
-Z2-08-09-T5-T2-052
-00
-T1-051
-Z1
The standard dimensions and ISO cornerfittings will facilitate handling during trans-port in the 20 ft frame of containership andon a low-loader truck.Operating staff can enter the containerthrough two access doors.
GIS up to 300 kV in a container
The 8DP3 switchgear requires a containerwith a length of 7550 mm, a width of2800 mm and a height of 3590 mm.In any case, the container equipment caninclude full thermal insulation, lighting andan air-conditioning and ventilation unit.
Building authority approvals are either notrequired or only in a simple form. The in-stallation can be operated at various loca-tions in succession, and adaptation to localcircumstances is not a problem. These arethe possible applications for containerizedstations: Intermediate solutions for the
modernization of switching stations Low-cost transitional solutions when
tedious formalities are involved in thenew construction of transformer sub-stations, such as in the procurement ofland or establishing cable routes
Quick erection as an emergency stationin the event of malfunctions in existingswitchgear
Switching stations for movable, geo-thermal power plants
145 kV GIS in a standard container
The dimensions of the new 8DN9 switch-gear made it possible to accommodateall active components of the switchgear(circuit-breaker, disconnector, groundingswitch) and the local control cabinet in astandard container.The floor area of 20 ft x 8 ft complieswith the ISO 668 standard. Although thecontainer is higher than the standarddimension of 8 ft, this will not cause anyproblems during transportation as provenby previously supplied equipment.German Lloyd, an approval authority, hasalready issued a test certificate for an evenhigher container construction.
Fig. 22: Containerized 8DN9 switchgear with stub feed in this example
Fig. 23: 8DP3 switching bay being hoisted intoa container
1/16 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Specification guide formetal-enclosed SF6-insulatedswitchgear
The points below are not considered tobe comprehensive, but are a selection ofthe important ones.
General
These specifications cover the technicaldata applicable to metal-enclosed SF6 gas-insulated switchgear for switching anddistribution of power in cable and/or over-head line systems and at transformers.Key technical data are contained in thedata sheet and the single-line diagramattached to the inquiry.A general “Single-line diagram” and asketch showing the general arrangementof the substation and the transmission lineexist and shall form part of a proposal.The switchgear quoted shall be completeto form a functional, safe and reliable sys-tem after installation, even if certain partsrequired to this end are not specificallycalled for.
Applicable standards
All equipment shall be designed, built,tested and installed to the latest revisionsof the applicable IEC standards (IEC-Publ. 517 “High-voltage metal-enclosedswitchgear for rated voltages of 72.5 kVand above”, IEC-Publ. 129 “Alternatingcurrent disconnectors (isolators) andgrounding switches”, IEC-Publ. 56 “High-voltage alternating-current circuit-break-ers”). IEEE P 468-1 Gas-Insulated Sub-station (GIS) Standards. Other standardsare also met.
Local conditions
The equipment described herein will beinstalled indoors. Suitable lightweight,prefabricated buildings shall be quoted ifavailable from the supplier.Only a flat concrete floor will be providedby the buyer with possible cutouts in caseof cable installation. The switchgear shallbe equipped with adjustable supports(feet). If steel support structures are re-quired for the switchgear, these shall beprovided by the supplier.
For design purposes indoor temperaturesof – 5 °C to +40 °C and outdoor temper-atures of –25 °C to +40 °C shall be consid-ered.For parts to be installed outdoors(overhead line connections) the appli-cable conditions in IEC-Publication 517or IEEE 0468-1 shall also be observed.
Work, material and design
Field welding at the switchgear is notpermitted.Factory welders must be specially qualifiedpersonnel under continuous supervisionof the associated welding society.Material and process specifications neededfor welding must meet the applicable re-quirements of the country of manufacture.Maximum reliability through minimumamount of erection work on site is re-quired. Subassemblies must be erectedand tested in the factory to the maximumextent. The size of the sub-assembliesshall be only limited by the transport con-ditions.The material and thickness of the enclo-sure shall be selected to withstand an in-ternal arc and to prevent a burn-through orpuncturing of the housing within the firststage of protection, referred to a short-circuit current of 40 kA.Normally exterior surfaces of the switch-gear shall not require painting. If done foraesthetic reasons, surfaces shall be appro-priately prepared before painting, i.e. allenclosures are free of grease and blasted.Thereafter the housings shall be paintedwith no particular thickness required but tovisually cover the surface only. The interiorcolor shall be light (white or light grey).In case painted the outside color of theenclosures shall be grey preferably; how-ever, manufacturer’s standard paint color isacceptable. A satin mat finish with a highscratch resistance is preferred.All joints shall be machined and all cast-ings spotfaced for bolt heads, nuts andwashers.Assemblies shall have reliable provisionsto absorb thermal expansion and contrac-tions created by temperature cycling. Forthis purpose metal bellows-type compen-sators shall be installed. They must beprovided with adjustable tensioners.All solid post insulators shall be providedwith ribs (skirts). Horizontally mountedbushings require cleaning openings in theenclosure.
For supervision of the gas within the en-closures, density monitors with electricalcontacts for at least two pressure levelsshall be installed at a central and easilyaccessible location (central gas supervisorycabinet) of each switchgear bay. Thecircuit- breakers, however, might be moni-tored by density gauges fitted in circuit-breaker control units.The manufacturer guarantees that thepressure loss within each individual gascompartment – and not referred to thetotal switchgear installation only – will benot more than 1% per year per gas com-partment.Each gas-filled compartment shall beequipped with static filters of a capacityto absorb any water vapor penetrating intothe switchgear installation over a periodof at least 20 years.Long intervals between the necessary in-spections shall keep the maintenance costto a minimum. A minor inspection shallonly become necessary after ten years anda major inspection preferably after a periodexceeding 20 years of operation unless thepermissible number of operations is metat an earlier date, e.g. 6,000 operations atfull load current or 20 operations at ratedshort-circuit current.
1/17Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Arrangement and modules
ArrangementThe arrangement shall be single-phaseenclosed preferably.The assembly shall consist of completelyseparate pressurized sections designedto minimize the risk of damage to person-nel or adjacent sections in the event of afailure occurring within the equipment.Rupture diaphragms shall be provided toprevent the enclosures from uncontrolledbursting and suitable deflectors provideprotection for the operating personnel.In order to achieve maximum operatingreliability, no internal relief devices maybe installed because adjacent compart-ments would be affected.Modular design, complete segregation,arc-proof bushings and “plug-in” connec-tion pieces shall allow ready removal ofany section and replacement with mini-mum disturbance of the remaining pres-surized switchgear.
BusbarsAll busbars shall be three-phase or single-phase enclosed and be plug-connectedfrom bay to bay.
Circuit-breakersThe circuit-breaker shall be of the singlepressure (puffer) type with one interrupterper phase*. Heaters for the SF6 gas arenot permitted.The circuit-breaker shall be arranged hori-zontally and the arc chambers and contactsshall be freely accessible.The circuit-breaker shall be designed tominimize switching overvoltages and alsoto be suitable for out-of-phase switching.The specified arc interruption performancemust be consistent over the entire operat-ing range, from line-charging currents tofull short-circuit currents.The complete contact system (fingers,clusters, jets, SF6 gas) shall be designedto withstand at least 20 operations at fullshort-circuit rating without the necessityto open the circuit-breaker for service ormaintenance.The maximum tolerance for phase dis-agreement shall be 3 ms, i.e. until the lastpole has been closed or opened, respec-tively after the first.A highly reliable hydraulic operating mech-anism shall be employed for closing andopening the circuit-breaker. A standard sta-tion battery required for control and trip-ping may also be used for recharging thehydraulic operating mechanism.
The hydraulic storage cylinder will holdsufficient energy for all standard close-open duty cycles.The control system shall provide alarmsignals and internal interlocks, but inhibittripping or closing of the circuit-breakerwhen there is insufficient energy capacityin the hydraulic storage cylinder, or theSF6 density within the circuit-breaker hasdropped below a minimum permissiblelevel.
DisconnectorsAll three-phase isolating switches shall beof the single-break type. DC motor opera-tion (110, 125, 220 or 250 V), completelysuitable for remote operation, and a manu-al emergency drive mechanism is required.Each motor-drive shall be self-containedand equipped with auxiliary switches inaddition to the mechanical indicators.Life lubrication of the bearings is required.
Grounding switchesWork-in-progress grounding switches shallgenerally be provided on either side of thecircuit-breaker. Additional grounding switch-es may be used for the grounding of bussections or other groups of the assembly.DC motor operation (110, 125, 220 or250 V), completely suitable for remoteoperation, and a manual emergency drivemechanism is required.Each motor drive shall be self-containedand equipped with auxiliary positionswitches in addition to the mechanical in-dicators. Life lubrication of the bearingsis required.
High-speed grounding switchesMake-proof high-speed grounding switchesshall generally be installed at cable andoverhead-line terminals. DC motor opera-tion (110, 125, 220 or 250 V), completelysuitable for remote operation, and a manu-al emergency drive mechanism is required.Each motor drive shall be self-containedand equipped with auxiliary positionswitches in addition to the mechanical in-dicators. Life lubrication of the bearingsis required.These switches shall be equipped witha rapid closing mechanism to provide fault-making capability.
Instrument transformersCurrent transformers (C. T.) shall be of thedry-type design not using epoxy resin asinsulation material. Cores shall be providedwith the accuracies and burdens as shownon the SLD. Voltage transformers shall beof the inductive type, with ratings up to200 VA. They shall be foil-gas-insulated andremovable without disturbing the gas com-partment to which they are attached.* two interrupters for voltages exceeding 245 kV
1/18 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Cable terminations
Single- or three-phase, SF6 gas-insulated,metal-enclosed cable-end housings shallbe provided. The stress cone and suitablesealings to prevent oil or gas from leakinginto the SF6 switchgear are part of thecable manufacturer’s supply. A mating con-nection piece, which has to be fitted to thecable end, will be made available by theswitchgear supplier.The cable end housing shall be suitablefor oil-type, gas-pressure-type and plastic-insulated (PE, PVC, etc.) cables as speci-fied on the SLD, or the data sheets.Facilities to safely isolate a feeder cableand to connect a high-voltage test cableto the switchgear or the cable shall beprovided.
Overhead line terminations
Terminations for the connection of over-head lines shall be supplied completewith SF6-to-air bushings, but without lineclamps.
Fig. 26: Outdoor termination module –High-voltage bushings are used for transition fromSF6-to-air as insulating medium. The bushings can bematched to the particular requirements with regardto arcing and creepage distances. The connectionwith the switchgear is made by means of variable-design angular-type modules.
Control
An electromechanical or solid-state inter-locking control board shall be supplied as astandard for each switchgear bay. This fail-safe interlock system will positively pre-vent maloperations. Mimic diagrams andposition indicators shall give clear demon-stration of the operation to the operatingpersonnel.Provisions for remote control shall besupplied.
Tests required
Partial discharge tests
All solid insulators fitted into the switch-gear shall be subjected to a routine partialdischarge test prior to being installed.No measurable partial discharge is allowedat 1.1 line-to-line voltage (approx. twicethe phase-to-ground voltage). Tolerance:max. 0.4 µV measured at 60 ohms (lessthan 1 pC). This test ensures maximumsafety against insulator failure, good long-term performance and thus a very highdegree of reliability.
Pressure tests
Each enclosure of the switchgear shallbe pressure-tested to at least double theservice pressure, so that the risk of mate-rial defects will be fully excluded.
Leakage tests
Leakage tests are performed on the sub-assemblies shall ensure that the flangesand covers faces are clean, and that theguaranteed leakage rate will not be ex-ceeded.
Power frequency tests
Each assembly shall be subjected to pow-er-frequency withstand tests to verify thecorrect installation of the conductors andalso the fact that the insulator surfaces areclean and the switchgear as a whole is notpolluted inside.
Fig. 25: Transformer/reactor termination module –These termination modules form the direct connec-tion between the GIS and oil-insulated transformersor reactance coils. They can be matched economi-cally to various transformer dimensions by way ofstandardized modules.
Fig. 27: Typical arrangements of bay terminationmodules
Fig. 24: Cable termination module –Cable termination modules conforming to IEC areavailable for connecting the switchgear to high-volt-age cables. The standardized construction of thesemodules allows connection of various cross-sectionsand insulation types. Parallel cable connections forhigher rated currents are also possible using thesame module.
1/19Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Switchgear for Substations
Additional technical data
The supplier shall point out all dimensions,weights and other applicable data of theswitchgear that may affect the local con-ditions and handling of the equipment.Drawings showing the assembly of theswitchgear shall be part of the quotation.
Instructions
Detailed instruction manuals about instal-lation, operation and maintenance of theequipment shall be supplied by the con-tractor in case of an order.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-9131-7-346 62
Fig. 30: 8DN9 circuit-breaker operating mechanismwith plug connections of control circuits
Fig. 28: 8DN9 circuit-breaker control cubicle with gasmonitoring devices
Fig. 29: OHL connection of a 420 kV system
Fig. 33: 8DP3 transformer termination modules
Fig. 32: 8DP3 cable termination modules
Fig. 31: Double-bay arrangement of 8DN9 switchgearbeing loaded for transport
1/20 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Transmission Lines (GIL)
Introduction
For high-power transmission systemswhere overhead lines are not suitable,alternatives are gas-insulated transmissionlines (GIL).The GIL exhibits the following differencesin comparison with cables: High power ratings
(transmission capacity up to 3000 MVAper System)
Suitable for long distances(100 km and more without compensa-tion of reactive power)
High short-circuit withstand capability(including internal arc faults)
Possibility of direct connection to gas-insulated switchgear (GIS) and gas-insu-lated arresters without cable entrancefitting
Multiple earthing points possible Not inflammableThe innovations in the latest Siemens GILdevelopment are the considerable reduc-tion of costs and the introduction of buriedlaying technique for GIL for long-distancepower transmission.SF6 has been replaced by a gas mixtureof SF6 and N2 as insulating medium.
Siemens experience
Back in the 1960s with the introduction ofsulphur hexafluoride (SF6) as an insulatingand switching gas, the basis was found forthe development of gas-insulated switch-gear (GIS).On the basis of GIS experience, Siemensdeveloped SF6 gas-insulated lines to trans-mit electrical energy too. In the early 1970sinitial projects were planned and imple-mented. Such gas-insulated lines wereusually used within substations as busbarsor bus ducts to connect gas-insulatedswitchgear with overhead lines, the aimbeing to reduce clearances in comparisonto air-insulated overhead lines.Implemented projects include GIL laying intunnels, in sloping galleries, in verticalshafts and in open air installation.Flanging as well as welding has been ap-plied as jointing technique.
The gas-insulated transmission line tech-nique has proved a highly reliable systemin terms of mechanical and electrical fail-ures. Once a system is commissioned andin service, it can run reliably without anydielectrical or mechanical failures reportedover the course of 20 years. For example,one particular Siemens GIL will not under-go its scheduled inspection after 20 yearsof service, as there has been no indicationof any weak point.Fig. 34 shows the arrangement of sixphases in a tunnel.
Fig. 34: GIL arrangement in the tunnel of the Wehr pumped storage station(4000 m length, in service since 1975)
Fig. 35: Siemens lab prototype for dielectric tests
Basic design
In order to meet mechanical stability crite-ria, gas-insulated lines need minimumcross-sections of enclosure and conductor.With these minimum cross-sections, highpower transmission ratings are given.Due to the gas as insulating medium, lowcapacitive loads are assured so that com-pensation of reactive power is not needed,even for long distances of 100 km andmore.
1/21Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Gas-insulated Transmission Lines (GIL)
Several development tests have been car-ried out in Siemens test labs as well as incooperation with the French utility compa-ny Electricité de France (EDF). Dielectrictests have been undertaken on a lab proto-type as shown in Fig. 35.Results of these investigations show thatthe bulk of the insulating gas for industrialprojects involving a considerable amountof such a substance should be nitrogen,a nontoxic natural gas.
Reduction of SF6 content
However, another insulating gas should beadded to nitrogen in order to improve theinsulating capability and to minimize sizeand pressure. A N2/SF6 gas mixture withhigh nitrogen content (and sulphur hexa-fluoride portion as low as possible) wasfinally chosen as insulating medium.To determine the percentage of SF6 anoptimization process was needed to findthe best possible ratio between SF6 con-tent, gas pressure and enclosure diameter.The basic behaviour of N2/SF6 gas mixturesshows that with an SF6 content of only15–25%, an insulating capability of 70–80%of pure SF6 can be attained at the samegas pressure.The technical data of the GIL are shown inFig. 36.
Jointing technique
In order to improve the gas-tightnessand to facilitate laying, flanges have beenavoided as jointing technique. Instead,welding has been chosen to join the vari-ous GIL construction units.The welding process is highly automated,with the use of an orbital welding machineto ensure high quality of the joints. Thisorbital welding machine contributes tohigh productivity in the welding processand therefore speeds up laying. The relia-bility of the welding process is controlledby an integrated computerized qualityassurance system.
Anti-corrosion protection
Directly buried gas-insulated transmissionlines will be safeguarded by a passive andactive corrosion protection system. Thepassive corrosion protection system com-prises a PE or PP coating and assures atleast 40 years of protection. The activecorrosion protection system provides pro-tection potential in relation to the alumi-num sheath. An important requirementtaken into account is the situation of anearth fault with a high current of up to63 kA to earth.
Laying
The most recently developed SiemensGILs are scheduled for directly buriedlaying.The laying technique must be as compat-ible as possible with the landscape andmust take account of the sequence of
Fig. 37: GIL laying technique
seasons. The laying techniques for pipe-lines have been developed over manyyears and have proved reliable. The high-voltage gas-insulated transmission lineneeds special treatment where the pipe-line technique has to be adapted.The laying process is illustrated in Fig. 37.The assembly area needs to be protectedagainst dust, particles, humidity and otherenvironmental factors that might disturbthe dielectric system. Clean assemblytherefore plays a major role in setting upcross-country GILs under normal environ-mental conditions. The combination ofclean assembly and productivity is en-hanced by a high level of automation ofthe overall process. A clean assemblytent is essential.
References
Siemens has gathered experience withgas-insulated transmission lines at ratedvoltages of up to 550 kV and with systemlengths totalling more than 30 km.The first GIL stretch built by Siemens isthe connection of the turbine generator/pumping motor of a pumped storagestation with the switchyard. The 420 kVGIL is laid in a tunnel through a mountainand has a length of 4000 m (Fig. 34). Thisconnection was commissioned in 1975 atthe Wehr pumped storage station in theBlack Forest in Southern Germany.
For further information please contact:
Fax ++ 49-9131-7-34490
Fig. 36: GIL technical data
Technical data
up to 550 kV
2000–4600 A
1500–3000 MVA
2.2*lr for 10 min.
1.9*lr for 1 h
≈ 60 nF/km
1–100 km
10%/90%up to35%/65%
directly buried
in tunnels/sloping galleries/vertical shafts
open air installation
Rated voltage
Rated current lr
Transmissioncapacity
Overload capacity
Capacitance
Typical length
Gas mixture SF6/N2ranging from
Laying
P/M
CD
1/22 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
Introduction
Circuit breakers are the main module ofboth AIS and GIS switchgear. They have tomeet high requirements in terms of: Reliable opening and closing Consistent quenching performance with
rated and short-circuit currents evenafter many switching operations
High-performance, reliable maintenance-free operating mechanisms.
Technology reflecting the latest state ofthe art and years of operating experienceare put to use in constant further develop-ment and optimization of Siemens circuitbreakers. This makes Siemens circuitbreakers able to meet all the demandsplaced on high-voltage switchgear.The comprehensive quality system,ISO 9001 certified, covers development,manufacture, sales, installation and after-sales service. Test laboratories are accred-ited to EN 45001 and PEHLA/STL.
Main construction elements
Each circuit breaker bay for gas-insulatedswitchgear includes the full complementof isolator switches, grounding switches(regular or proven), instrument transform-ers, control and protection equipment, in-terlocking and monitoring facilities, com-monly used for this type of installation(See chapter GIS, page 1/8 and following).Circuit breakers for air-insulated switch-gear are individual components and areassembled together with all individualelectrical and mechanical components ofan AIS installation on site.All Siemens circuit breaker types, whetherair- or gas-insulated, consist of the samecomponents of a parts family, i.e.: Interrupter unit Operating mechanism Sealing system Operating rod Control elements.
SF6-insulated circuit breakers
Controlelements
Interrupterunits
Operatingmechanism
Sealing systems
Parts family
Fig. 38: Circuit breaker parts family
1/23Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
The blast cylinder (4) encloses the arc-quenching arrangement like a pressurechamber. The compressed SF6 flows ra-dially into the break by the shortest routeand is discharged axially through the noz-zles (6). After arc extinction, the contacttube (3) moves into the open position.In the final position, handling of test volt-ages in accordance with IEC and ANSI isfully guaranteed, even after a number ofshort-circuit switching operations.
Major features
Erosion-resistant graphite nozzles Consistently high dielectric strength Consistent quenching capability across
the entire performance range High number of short-circuit breaking
operations High levels of availability Long maintenance intervals.
The operating mechanism
The operating mechanism is a centralmodule of the high-voltage circuit breakers.Two different mechanism families are avail-able for Siemens circuit breakers: Electrohydraulic mechanism for all
AIS and GIS types Spring-stored energy mechanism for
AIS types up to 170 kV.
The electrohydraulic operating mechanism
All hydraulically operated Siemens circuitbreakers have a uniform operating mecha-nism concept, whether for 72 kV circuitbreakers with one interrupter unit per poleor breakers from the 800 kV level with fourinterrupter units per pole. Identical operat-ing mechanisms (modules) are used forsingle or triple-pole switching of outdoorcircuit breakers.The electrohydraulic operating mecha-nisms have proved their worth all over theworld. The power reserves are ample, theswitching speed is high and the storagecapacity substantial. The working capacityis indicated by the permanent self-monitor-ing system.
The interrupter unit
Current-path assembly
The conducting path is made up of theterminal plates (1 and 7), the fixed tubes(2) and the spring-loaded contact fingersarranged in a ring in the moving contacttube (3).
Arc-quenching assembly
The fixed tubes (2) are connected bythe contact tube (3) when the breaker isclosed. The contact tube (3) is rigidly cou-pled to the blast cylinder (4), the two to-gether with a fixed annular piston (5) inbetween forming the moving part of thebreak chamber. The moving part is drivenby an operating rod (8) to the effect thatthe SF6 pressure between the piston (5)and the blast cylinder (4) increases.When the contacts separate, the movingcontact tube (3), which acts as a shutoffvalve, releases the SF6. An arc is drawnbetween one nozzle (6) and the contacttube (3). It is driven in a matter of millisec-onds between the nozzles (6) by the gasjet and its own electrodynamic forces andis safely extinguished.
1
2
36
4
5
2
8
7
Arc
Breaker inclosed position
Precompression Gas flow duringarc quenching
Breaker inopen position
Upper terminalplateFixed tubesMoving contacttubeBlast cylinderBlast pistonArc-quenchingnozzlesLower terminalplateOperating rod
1
23
456
7
8
Fig. 39: The interrupter unit
1/24 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
The force required to move the piston andpiston rod is provided by differential oilpressure inside a sealed system. A hydrau-lic storage cylinder filled with compressednitrogen provides the necessary energy.Electromagnetic valves control the oil flowbetween the high- and low-pressure sidein the form of a closed circuit.
Main features:
Plenty of operating energy Long switching sequences Reliable check of energy reserves
at any time Switching positions are reliably
maintained, even when the auxiliarysupply fails
Excessive strong foundations Low-noise switching No oil-leakage and consequently
environmentally compatible Maintenancefree.
Description of function
Closing:The hydraulic valve is opened by elec-tromagnetic means. Pressure from thehydraulic storage cylinder is therebyapplied to the piston with two differentsurface areas. The breaker is closed viacouplers and operating rods moved bythe force which acts on the larger sur-face of the piston. The operating mech-anism is designed to ensure that, in theevent of a pressure loss, the breakerremains in the particular position.
Tripping:The hydraulic valve is changed overelectromagnetically, thus relieving thelarger piston surface of pressure andcausing the piston to move onto theOFF position. The breaker is ready forinstant operation because the smallerpiston surface is under constant pres-sure. Two electrically separate trippingcircuits are available for changing thevalve over for tripping.
M
P P
M
Oil tank
Hydraulic storagecylinder
Operating cylinder
Releases
Operating piston
Pilot control
On Off
N2
Main valve
Auxiliaryswitch
Monitoring unitand hydraulic
pump with motor PP
Fig. 43: Schematic diagram of a Q-range operating mechanism
Fig. 40: Operating unit of the Q-range AIS circuitbreakers
Fig. 42: Operating cylinder with valve block andmagnetic releases
Fig. 41: Q-range operating unit for GIS circuitbreaker 8DN9
1/25Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
The spring-stored energyoperating mechanism
Optional to the hydraulic operating mecha-nism, Siemens circuit breakers for voltagesup to 170 kV can be equipped with spring-stored energy operating mechanisms.These drives are based on the same prin-ciple, which has been proving its worth inSiemens low and medium voltage circuitbreakers for decades. The design is simpleand robust with few moving parts and avibration-isolated latch system of highestreliability. All components of the operatingmechanism, the control and monitoringequipment and all terminal blocks arearranged compact and yet clear in onecabinet.Depending on the design of the operat-ing mechanism, the energy required forswitching is provided by individual com-pression springs (i.e. one per pole) or bysprings that function jointly on a triple-polebasis.The principle of the operating mechanismwith charging gear and latching is identicalon all types. The differences betweenmechanism types are in the number, sizeand arrangement of the opening and clos-ing springs.
Major features at a glance
Uncomplicated, robust constructionwith few moving parts
Maintenancefree Vibration-isolated latches Load-free uncoupling of charging
mechanism Ease of access 10,000 operating cycles
1234567
89
10111213141516
1718
Corner gearsCoupling linkageOperating rodClosing releaseCam plateCharging shaftClosing springconnecting rodClosing springHand-wound mechanismCharging mechanismRoller levelClosing damperOperating shaftOpening damperOpening releaseOpening springconnecting rodMechanism housingOpening spring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
818
17
1615
14
1312
11
10
9
Fig. 44
Fig. 45: Combined operating mechanism and monitoring cabinet
1/26 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
Circuit breakersfor air-insulated switchgearstandard live-tank breakers
The construction
All circuit breakers are of the same generaldesign, as shown in the illustrations. Theyconsist of the following main components:1) Interrupter unit2) Closing resistor (if applicable)3) Operating mechanism4) Insulator column (AIS)5) Operating rod6) Breaker base7) Control unitThe simple design of the breakers andthe use of many similar components, suchas interrupter units, operating rods andcontrol cabinets, ensure high reliability be-cause the experience of many breakersin service could be used for the improve-ment of the design. The interrupter unitfor example has proven its reliability inmore than 60,000 units all over the world.The control unit includes all necessarydevices for circuit-breaker control and mon-itoring, such as: Pressure/SF6 density monitors Gauges for SF6 and hydraulic pressure
(if applicable) Relays for alarms and lockout Antipumping devices Operation counters (upon request) Local breaker control (upon request) Anticondensation heaters.
Transport, installation and commissioningare performed with expertise and effi-ciency.The tested circuit breaker is shipped inthe form of a small number of compactunits. If desired, Siemens can provideappropriately qualified personnel for instal-lation and commissioning.
Fig. 46: 145 kV circuit breaker 3AQ1FG with triple-polespring stored-energy operating mechanism
Fig. 47: 800 kV circuit breaker 3AT5
Fig. 48: 245 kV circuit breaker 3AQ2
1/27Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
1 Interrupter unit2 Arc-quenching nozzles3 Moving contact4 Filter5 Blast cylinder6 Blast piston7 Insulator column8 Operating rod9 Hydraulic operating mechanism10 Control unit11 SF6 density monitor
1
2
3
4
56
7
8
910 11
Fig. 50: Type 3AQ1-E
1 Interrupter unit2 Arc-quenching nozzles3 Moving contact4 Filter5 Blast piston6 Blast cylinder7 Bell-crank mechanism8 Insulator column9 Operating rod10 Hydraulic operating mechanism11 ON/OFF indicator12 Oil tank13 Control unit
12
9
8
10114
13
653721
1 Interrupter unit2 Closing resistor3 Valve unit4 Electrohydraulic
operatingmechanism
5 Insulator columns6 Breaker base7 Control unit
1
5
3
4
7
6
2
Fig. 49: Type 3AT4/5
Fig. 51: Type 3AQ2
1/28 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
d
h
d
h
Type 3AP1/3AQ1
72.5 123 145 170 2451
Spring-stored-energy/Electrohydraulic
140 230 275 325 460
325 550 650 750 1050
For rated voltage < 300 kV, no tests with switching impulse withstand voltage prescribed4000 4000 4000 4000 400040 40 40 40/50 50100 100 100 100/125 125
Triple-pole or single- and triple-pole 3 cycles (3AP/3AQ)
48…250= or ~120…240 V/50 Hz, 120…280 V/60 Hz48…250 V=
700 1250 1250 1500 22001813 3625 3625 4250 61501350 1500 1500 2000 3000660 660 660 1280 12803810 4360 4360 4065 5485
25 years or 6000 operating cycles
Electrical data
Rated voltageInterrupter units per poleType of operating mechanismStandardsRated power frequencywithstand voltage 1 min [kV]Rated lightning impulsewithstand voltage 1.2/50 µs [kV]Switching impulsewithstand voltage 250/2500 µs [kV]Rated current up to [A]Rated-short-time current (1–3 s) [kA]Rated peak withstand current [kA]AutoreclosureBreak time 3AP/3AQ
3ATRated duty cycleAuxiliary power supply foroperating mechanism motorControl voltages
Basic design
Minimum striking distance [mm]Minimum creepage distance [mm]Circuit breaker weight approx. [kg]Main dimensions: Depth d [mm]
Height h [mm]
Maintenance
Inspection due after
Fig. 52: Product range/ratings
The values stated are nominal (VDE, IEC). Other values on request.
1/29Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
d
h
d
h
3AQ2/3AT2/3AT3* 3AT4/3AT5*
245 300 362 420 550 362 420 550 765/8002 4
Electrohydraulic Electrohydraulic DIN VDE, IEC, ANSI
460 435 520 610 800 450/520 520/610 620/760 830/1100
1050 1050 1175 1425 1550 1175 1425 1550 2100
850 950 1050 1175 950 1050 1175 1425/15504000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 400050/80 50/63 50/63 50/63 50/63 80 80 80 63125/200 125/160 125/160 125/160 125/160 200 200 200 160
Single- and triple-pole
2cycles (3AT)O-0,3 sec-CO-3 min-CO or CO-15 sec-CO
48…250 V= or ~ 280/120…500/29848…250 V=
2200 2750/2200 2750/2200 3300 3800 2700 3300 3800 50006150/6050 7875/6050 7875/7165 10375/9075 13750 7165 9075 10190 138603600/5980 4390/6430 5010/9090 5500/8600 12500 14400 14700 19200 234002995/4060 3895/4025 3695/4280 4195/4280 5135 6830 6830 7505 90603790/4490 4385/4490 4400/9300 10500/10100 13690 4990 6000 6550 8400
25/20 years or 6000 operating cycles 20 years or 6000 operating cycles
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
* with closing resistor
1/30 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
Circuit breakersin dead-tank design
For certain substation designs, dead-tankcircuit breakers might be required insteadof the standard live-tank breakers. Forthese purposes Siemens can offer thedead-tank circuit breaker types.
Main features at a glance
Reliable opening and closing
Proven contact and arc-quenchingsystem
Consistent quenching performancewith rated and short-circuit currentseven after many switching operations
Similar uncomplicated design for allvoltages
High performance, reliable operatingmechanisms
Easy-to-actuate spring operatingmechanisms
Hydraulic operating mechanisms withon-line monitoring
Economy
Perfect finish Simplified, quick installation process Long maintenance intervals High number of operating cycles Long service life
Individual service
Close proximity to the customer Order specific documentation Solutions tailored to specific problems After-sales service available promptly
worldwide
The right qualifications
Expertise in all power supply matters 30 years of experience with SF6-insulat-
ed circuit breakers A quality system certified to ISO 9001,
covering development, manufacture,sales, installation and after-sales service
Test laboratories accredited to EN 45001and PEHLA/STL
Fig. 53: SPS-circuit breaker 145 kV
Subtransmission breaker
Type SPS power circuit breakers are de-signed as general, definite-purpose break-ers for application at maximum rated volt-ages of 121 and 145 kV. Rated interruptingcapacities are 20, 25, 31.5 or 40 kA. Con-tinuous current ratings are up to 3000 A(Fig. 53).
Bushings Current transformers
Interrupters
Control cabinetand SE-4 springmechanism
Base legs
Pressuregauges
1/31Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
Transmission class puffer
Type TCP (transmission class puffer)breakers are designed as general, definite-purpose breakers for application at maxi-mum rated voltages of 121, 145, 169 and242 kV. Rated interrupting capacities forthe 121 and 145 kV breakers are 20, 25,31.5, 40 or 50 kA. The 169 and 242 kVunits have interrupting ratings of up to60 kA. Continuous current ratings are upto 3000 A.The breakers are designed and tested tomeet ANSI, IEEE, NEMA, IEC standards(Fig. 54/55).
Features are:
Dead-tank construction State-of-the-art interrupter design Extension of the high quality, reliable
SP-72.5 breaker SE-4 spring mechanism Light weight, simple design Porcelain bushings Bushing current transformers
(space for 3 per bushing) Low operating pressure Tested and verified for seismic appli-
cation Minimal noise 40 °C/–50 °C application Shipped fully assembled.
Savings in installation
Factory preassembly, testing and timingwith no internal field adjustments
Minimal gas handling. Shipped with0.5 bar positive pressure
Minimal transportation and equipmenthandling. Truck shipment to site
Easy access for final wiring Negligible foundation loading Location of control cabinet allows for
easy, direct breaker replacement forsystem upratings
Compact design allows use of existingfoundations.
Fig. 54: TCP-circuit breaker 145 kV
Fig. 55: SP-circuit breaker 72.5 kV
1/32 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
The construction
The type SPS breaker consists of threeidentical pole units mounted on a commonsupport frame. The opening and closingforce of the SE-4 spring operating mecha-nism is transferred to the moving contactsof the interrupter through a system of con-necting rods and a rotating seal at the sideof each phase.The tanks and the porcelain bushingsare charged with SF6 gas at a nominalpressure of 5.5 bar. The SF6 serves as bothinsulation and arc-quenching medium.A control cabinet mounted at one endof the breaker houses the spring operatingmechanism and breaker control compo-nents.Interrupters are located in the aluminumhousings of each pole unit. The interrupt-ers use the latest Siemens puffer arc-quenching system.The spring operating mechanism is thesame design as used with the SiemensSP breakers. This design has been in ser-vice for years, and has a well documentedreliability record.Customers can specify up to four (in somecases, up to six) bushing type currenttransformers (CT) per phase. These CTs,mounted externally on the aluminum hous-ings, can be removed without disturbingthe bushings.
Operating mechanism
The type SE-4 mechanically and electricallytripfree spring mechanism is used on typeSPS breakers. The type SE-4 closing andopening springs hold a charge for storing”open-close-open“ operations (Fig. 56).A weatherproof control cabinet has a largedoor, sealed with rubber gaskets, for easyaccess during inspection and maintenance.Anticondensation units (475 W) offer con-tinuous inside/outside temperature differ-ential for prevention of condensation.
SF6 monitoringequipment
Transformerterminal blocks
Control terminalblocks
Auxiliaryswitch
Closingmechanism
Controlpanel Closing spring Motor
Fig. 56: Operating mechanism
Included in the control cabinet are neces-sary auxiliary switches, cutoff switch, latchcheck switch, alarm switch and operationcounter. The control relays and three con-trol knife switches (one each for the con-trol, heater and motor) are mounted on acontrol panel. Terminal blocks on the sideand rear of the housing are available forcontrol and transformer wiring.The SE-4 is ideally suited for high-speedreclosing. Reclosing speeds of 10 cyclesfrom the instant of initial tripping impulseuntil the current is reestablished are com-mon.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49 -303 86 -2 5867
1/33Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
The new 3AT2/3-DTCircuit Breaker
Composite insulators
The new 3AT2/3-DT is available with bush-ings made from composite insulators –this has many practical advantages.The SIMOTEC® composite insulators man-ufactured by Siemens consist of a basicbody made of epoxy resin reinforced glassfibre tubes. The external tube surface iscoated with vulcanised silicone. As is thecase with porcelain insulators, the externalshape of the insulator has a multishedprofile. Field grading is implemented bymeans of a specially shaped screeningelectrode in the lower part of the compos-ite insulator.The bushings and the metal tank of thecircuit breaker surround a common gasvolume. The composite insulator used onthe bushing of the 3AT2/3-DT is a one-piece insulating unit. Compared with con-ventional housings, composite insulatorsoffer a wide range of advantages in termsof economy, efficiency and safety.
Interrupter unit
The 3AT2/3-DT pole consists of two break-ing units in series impressive in the sheersimplicity of their design. The tried andtested Siemens contact system with dou-ble graphite nozzles guarantees faultlessoperation, consistently high arc-quenchingcapacity and a long operating life, even athigh switching frequencies. Thanks to con-stant further development, optimisationand consistent quality assurance, Siemensarc-quencing systems meet all the require-ments placed on modern high voltagetechnology.
Hydraulic Drive
The operating energy required for the3AT2/3-DT interrupters is provided by thehydraulic drive, which is manufactured in-house by Siemens. The functional principleof the hydraulic drive constitutes a techni-cally clear solution which offers certainfundamental advantages.Hydraulic drives provide high amounts ofenergy economically and reliably. In thisway, even the most demanding switchingrequirements can be mastered in shortopening times.
Fig. 57: The new 3AT2/3-DT circuit breaker with SIMOTEC composite insulator bushings
Siemens hydraulic drives are maintenance-free and have a particulary long operatinglife. They meet the strictest criteria forenviromental acceptability. In this respect,too, Siemens hydraulic drives have proventhemselves through decades of operation.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49- 30386- 258 67
1/34 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
Fig. 58: Product range/ratings
Electrical data
Rated voltage [kV]
Interrupter units per pole
Type of operating mechanism
Standards
Rated power frequencywithstand voltage 1 min [kV]
Rated lightning impulsewithstand voltage 1.2/50 µs [kV]
Rated current up to [A]
Rated-short-time current (1–3 s) [kA]Rated peak withstand current [kA]
Autoreclosure
Break time [cycles]
Rated duty cycle
Auxiliary power supply foroperating mechanism motor
Control voltages
Basic design
Minimum striking distance [mm]
Minimum creepage distance [mm]
Circuit breaker weight approx. [kg]
Main dimensions: Depth d [mm]Height h [mm]
Maintenance
Inspection due after
Type SP/SPS* SPS
72.5 121 145
1 1 1
Spring-stored-energy
ANSI/IEEE/NEMA/IEC
160 260 310
350 550 650
3000 3000 3000
20/31.5/40 20/25/31.5/40 20/25/31.5/4054/85/108 54/67/85/108 54/67/85/108
Triple-pole
3 3 3
O-CO-15 s-CO
250/125 VDC or 110/230 VAC single-phase
125/250 VDC
480 (730) 1160 1160
1280 (1850) 2360 2360
1750 3250 3250
1600 (2400) 2100 21003330 (3500) 2780 2780
6 years/2000 operating cycles
* The design of these breakers is slightly different. For details please inquire.
d
h
h
d
1/35Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Circuit Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV
TCP* 3AT2/3-DT
121 145 169 242 550
1 1 1 1 2
Electrohydraulic Hydraulic
ANSI/IEEE/NEMA/IEC ANSI/IEC
260 310 365 425 860
550 650 750 900 1800
3000 3000 3000 3000 4000
20/31.5/40/50 20/31.5/40/50/63 6354/85/108/135 54/85/108/135/170 170
Triple-pole Single- and triple-pole
3 3 3 3 2
O-CO-15 s-CO O-0.3 s-CO-3 s-CO or CO-15 s-O
250/125 VDC or 110/230 VAC single-phase 60…250 VDC or 120…380 VAC
125/250 VDC 60…250 VDC
1190 1190 1620 1620 4460
2330 2330 3550 3550 11000
4300 4300 5500 5500 21800
2330 2330 2590 2590 2250 (single-pole)4036 4036 4780 4780 8440
25 years
h
d
h
d
1/36 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-voltage Direct Current Transmission
Fig. 61: Long-distance transmission
Special features
Valve technology
Simple, easy-to-maintain mechanicaldesign
Use of fire-retardant, self-extinguish-ing material
Minimized number of electricalconnections
Minimized number of components Avoidance of potential sources of
failure ”Parallel“ cooling for the valve levels Oxygen-saturated cooling water.After about 20 years of operation thevalves have demonstrated the superiorityof these design criteria as well as excellentreliability.
Control system
High-performance standard system withmany applications in different fields.Use of ”state-of-the-art“ microprocessorsystems for all functions.Redundant design for fault-tolerantsystems.
Filter technology
Single-, double- and triple-tuned as wellas high-pass passive filters, or any combi-nation thereof, can be installed.Active filters, mainly for the DC circuit,are available.Wherever possible, identical filters areselected so that the performance does notsignificantly change when one filter hasto be switched off.
HVDC
Where AC technology reaches its limits,DC expands the possibilities, e.g.
For economic transmission of bulkpower over long distances
For power across the sea over adistance of ≈ 50 km
For the connection of asynchronouspower grid systems
For the connection of synchronous butweak power grid systems
For additional active power exchangewithout increasing the short-circuitpower
For the increase of transmission capacityon existing rights-of-way.
Siemens offers HVDC systems as Back-to-Back (B/B) Cable Transmission (CT) and Long-distance Transmission Systems
(LD).
Back-to-Back (B/B):
To connect asynchronous high voltagepower systems or systems with differentfrequencies.To stabilize weak AC links or to supplyeven more active power, where the ACsystem reaches the short-circuit capability.
Cable transmission (CT):
To transmit power across the sea withcables to supply islands/offshore platformsfrom the mainland and vice versa.
Long-distance transmission (LD):
To transmit bulk power over longdistances, e.g. 1000 km and more.
Turnkey service
Experienced staff is prepared to designand install the whole HVDC system ona trurnkey basis and ready for operation.Siemens is also able to assist in findinga proper project financing.
General services
Studies for: System dynamic response Load flow and reactive power balance HVDC system basic design Interference of radio and PLC Harmonic voltage distorsion Insulation coordination Assistance for drafting the specification Maintenance Upgrading/replacement of components/
redesign for older schemes, e.g. mer-cury-arc valves or relay-based controls
General support from the very beginningof a HVDC planning to assistance duringoperation.
Typical values
Typical values are found in but not limitedto the following ranges:B/B: 100 ... 600 MWCT: 100 ... 800 MWLD: 300 ... 3000 MW (bipolar)Where the lower value is mainly deter-mined by economic aspects and the uppervalue is limited by the constraints of theconnected networks.
Fig. 62: Earthquakeproof, fire-retardent thyristor valves in Sylmar East, Los Angeles, CA
Fig. 59: Interconnected system operation
Fig. 60: Cable transmission
1/37Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-voltage Direct Current Transmission
Fig. 64: Man-machine Interface with structure of HVDC control system
Higher availability means more operatinghours, better utilization and higher profitsfor the owner.The new Man-Machine Interface (MMI)system enhances the user friendliness andincreases the reliability considerably dueto the operator guidance. This excludes amaloperation by the operator, because anincorrect command will be ignored by theMMI.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49- 9131-73 35 66
Rehabilitation andmodernization of existingHVDC stations
The integration of state-of-the-art micro-processor systems or thyristors allows theowner better utilization of his investment,e.g. Higher availability Fewer outages Fewer losses Better performance values Less maintenance.
SER
MMI
VCSPole 1
OLCPole 1
OLCSC
OLCPole 2
VCSPole 2
LAN
CLCVBEPole 1
CLCVBEPole 2
OLCPole 2
TFRTFR
DC Yard
DC Protection
Communi-cation link tothe load dis-patch center
Communi-cation link tothe remotestation
GPS
Communi-cation link tothe remotestation
MMI Man-machine InterfaceGPS Global Positioning SystemOLC Open Loop ControlCLC Closed Loop ControlVBE Valve Base ElectronicsVCS Valve Cooling SystemsSER Sequence of Event
RecordingTFR Transient Fault RecordingLAN Local Area Network
Fig. 63: HVDC outdoor valves, 533 kV
1/38 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Compensation in Transmission Systems
1 Transformer2 Thyristo-controlled reactor (TCR)3 Fixed connected capacitor/filter bank4 Thyristor-switched capacitor bank
(TSC)
3442
1
Voltage controlReactive power controlOvervoltage limitation at load rejectionImprovement of AC-system stabilityDamping of power oscillationsReactive power flow controlIncrease of transmission capabilityLoad reduction by voltage reductionSubsynchronous oscillation damping
Types of reactive powercompensation
Parallel compensation
Parallel compensation is defined as anytype of reactive power compensation em-ploying either switched or controlled units,which are connected parallel to the trans-mission network at a power system node.In many cases switched compensation(reactors, capacitor banks or filters) canprovide an economical solution for reactivepower compensation using conventionalswitchgear.
In comparison to mechanically-switchedreactive power compensation, controlledcompensation (SVC, Fig. 65) offers the ad-vantage that rapid dynamic control of thereactive power is possible within narrowlimits, thus maintaining reactive powerbalance.Fig. 66 is a general outline of the problem-solving applications of SVCs in high-volt-age systems.
Series compensation
Series compensation is defined as inser-tion of reactive power elements into trans-mission lines. The most common applica-tion is the series capactior.By providing continuous control of trans-mission line impendance, the AdvancedSeries Compensation (ASC, Fig. 67)scheme offers several advantages toconventional fixed series capacitor instal-lations. These advantages include continu-ous control of the desired compensationlevel, direct smooth control of power flowwithin the network and improved capaci-tor-bank protection.
Introduction
In many countries increasing powerconsumption leads to growing and moreinterconnected AC power systems. Thesecomplex systems consist of all types ofelectrical equipment, such as power plants,transmission lines, switchgear transform-ers, cables etc., and the consumers.Since power is often generated in thoseareas of a country with little demand, thetransmission and distribution system hasto provide the link between power gener-ation and load centers.Wherever power is to be transported, thesame basic requirements apply: Power transmission must be economical The risk of power system failure must
be low The quality of the power supply must
be highHowever, transmission systems do notbehave in an ideal manner. The systemsreact dynamically to changes in active andreactive power, influencing the magnitudeand profile of the power systems voltage.
Examples:
A load rejection at the end of a long-dis-tance transmission line will cause highovervoltages at the line end. However, ahigh load flow across the same line willdecrease the voltage at its end.
The transport of reactive power througha grid system produces additional lossesand limits the transmission of activepower via overhead lines or cables.
Load-flow distribution on parallel lines isoften a problem. One line could be load-ed up to its limit, while another only car-ries half or less of the rated current.Such operating conditions limit the actu-al transmittable amount of active power.
In some systems load switching and/orload rejection can lead to power swingswhich, if not instantaneously damped,can destabilize the complete grid systemand then result in a “Black Out”.
Reactive power compensation helps toavoid these and some other problems.In order to find the best solution for a gridsystem problem, studies have to be car-ried out simulating the behavior of the sys-tem during normal and continuous operat-ing conditions, and also for transientevents. Study facilities which cover digitalsimulations via computer as well as analogones in a transient network analyser labo-ratory are available at Siemens.
Fig. 67: Advanced Series Compensation (ASC). Example: Single-line diagram ASC Kayenta
Damping circuitCircuitbreaker
Circuitbreaker
Conventionalseriescapacitor 40 Ω
Conventionalseriescapacitor 55 Ω
Damping circuit
Thyristor valve
Reactors
MOVarrester
MOVarrester
MOVarrester
ASC 15 to 60 Ω
Fig. 66: Duties of SVCsFig. 65: Typical single-line diagram of staticVAr compensator (SVC)
1/39Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Compensation in Transmission Systems
Comparison of reactive powercompensation facilities
Below are the characteristics andapplication areas of series and parallelcompensation and the influence on vari-ous parameter such as short-circuitrating, transmission phase angle andvoltage behavior at the load.
1
2
3
4
5
6 Long transmission lines;Power flow distributionbetween parallel linesand SSR damping
Voltage stabilizationat high load
Reactive powercompensation at lowload; limitation oftemporary overvoltage
Reactive power andvoltage control;damping of powerswings to improvesystem stability
Long transmission lineswith high transmissionpower rating
Short lines, limitationof S. C. power
High
(Very) low
Low
Littleinfluence
Littleinfluence
Littleinfluence
Muchsmaller
(Much)larger
Muchsmaller
Very good
(Very) slight
Very good
Controlled
Voltagedrop
Voltagerise
Littleinfluence
Littleinfluence
Littleinfluence
Increased
Reduced
VariableAdvancedseries com-pensation(ASC)scheme
Seriesreactor
Seriescapacitor
StaticVAr com-pensator(SVC)
Shuntreactor
Shuntcapacitor
Compen-sationelement
Location Short-circuitlevel
Voltageinfluence
Transmis-sion phaseangle
Voltageafter loadrejection
Good for
Behavior of compensation element
E U
E U
SVCE U
E U
E U
(Very) high
(Very) low
Limited bycontrol
ASC
E U
Fig. 68: Components for reactive power compensation
Further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-9131-73 45 54
1/40 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Compensation in Distribution Systems
Introduction
SIPCON (Siemens Power Conditioner) isa system for the improvement of powerquality in low- and medium-voltage distri-bution networks. This system fits withinthe general framework of EQM equipment(Energy Quality Management). The tre-mendous progress of recent years, withregards to the rating and price of powersemiconductor technology, is reflected inthis system. Using the same hardware,there are various SIPCON configurations.Each configuration is coupled to the electri-cal network in a different manner and hasone or more specific tasks to fulfill.
Areas of application
The manner in which SIPCON is coupledto the network is dependent on the tasksthe system will perform. To distinguishbetween the various configurations, theinitial of the coupling method is attachedto the name SIPCON, leading to thenames SIPCON-P (parallel), SIPCON-S(series) and SIPCON-U (unified). In general,the SIPCON-P is intended for conditioningof the current flowing from a load into thenetwork. It improves the network current.The SIPCON-S improves the quality of thevoltage supplied by the network to theload. It improves the supply voltage quality.The SIPCON-U is a combination of theother two variants and unites theircapabilities.
SIPCON-P improvesnetwork currents
The coupling of the SIPCON-P is three-phase, in parallel to the network and theload (Fig. 69).To fullfill its control task,improvement of the network current, theSIPCON-P injects currents into the PCC(point of common coupling).
Possible applications
1. Active filtering
The current flowing from the load intothe network is measured and dividedinto fundamental and harmonic compo-nents. The SIPCON-P injects currents suchthat load harmonic currents are exclusivelyexchanged between the SIPCON-P andthe load, Harmonic currents thus do notflow on the network side.
2. Dynamic reactive power compensation
The SIPCON-P can dynamically supplystepless reactive power, in both capacitiveand inductive modes. It is possible to gofrom no-load operation to nominal opera-tion in about two network periods. Powerfactor control (cos ϕ-control) is also possi-ble in this mode.
3. Active load balancing
SIPCON-P can inject both positive- andnegative-sequence currents into the PCC.It is thus possible to eliminate negative-sequence currents associated with unbal-anced load conditions, thereby performingactive load balancing.
4. Flicker compensation
Variation in the brightness of lighting sys-tems that is uncomfortable to humans iscalled flicker. Flicker is caused by sudden,stochastic load current peaks which causevoltage drops at the PCC across the net-work impedance.A special flicker algorithm has been de-veloped for SIPCON-P, whereby the peakload currents are exchanged between theSIPCON-P and the load, rather than sup-plied by the network.
5. Active power exchange
An energy source can be connected tothe DC link capacitor, thus allowing energytransfer into the network from the convert-er. The SIPCON-P injects energy in a verynetwork-friendly manner, causing practi-cally no harmonics below 3 kHz.
SIPCON-S improvesthe supply voltage
The series-connected SIPCON-S is coupleddirectly into the power flow via a trans-former (Fig. 70).The SIPCON-S can be viewed as a control-led voltage source connected in serieswith the network.
PCC
IGBT converter
DC link capacitor
SIPCON-PGrid Load
Couplinginductivity
Diodebridge
Trans-former
IGBTconverter
DC link capacitor
SIPCON-SGrid Load
Fig. 71: SIPCON-UFig. 69: SIPCON-P connection
Fig. 70: SIPCON-S connection
Possible applications
1. Voltage sags and swellsIt is possible for the SIPCON-S to add anadditional voltage component to the net-work voltage, thereby compensating volt-age sags and swells.
2. Harmonic reductionBesides the fundamental voltage it isalso possible to generate harmonic volt-ages. If the supply voltage contains har-monic distortion, the SIPCON-S can addup to three discrete voltage harmonicsto the network voltage. The load thussees a less distorted supply voltage.
SIPCON-U improves the networkcurrents and the supply voltage
The SIPCON-U is a combination of theSIPCON-P and SIPCON-S systems.The DC link capacitors of both systemsare connected in parallel, forming a singleDC link capacitor used by both systems(Fig. 71).The SIPCON-U is in fact a UPFC (UnifiedPower Flow Controller) for distribution net-works. The possible applications of such asystem are given by the union of the fea-tures of each single system. In addition,the SIPCON-U can transfer active power inboth directions, so that one SIPCON-U canbe used to compensate both voltage sagsand swells.
Couplinginductivity
Trans-former
IGBTconverter
DC link capacitor
SIPCON-UGrid Load
IGBTconverter
1/41Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Compensation in Distribution Systems
Power Factor Correction andHarmonic suppression
Basic principles
The vast majority of electrical loads drawnot only active power but also reactivepower which, in the case of motors andtransformers, for example, is required formagnetization and, in the case of staticconverters, as control and communicationreactive power.Generators, overhead transmission lines,cables, transformers and switchgear arerequired for generation and distribution ofelectric power. In addition to active power,reactive power must also be generatedand distributed. This is uneconomical, andthe less reactive power a plant consumes,i.e. the higher its power factor cosϕ is, thelower are the power costs for the plant.The load on the electrical distribution sys-tem can be reduced by installing power-factor correction capacitors close to theloads in the low-voltage system since thereactive power is then supplied by thecapacitors.The transmission losses are less, the pow-er costs are lower and expensive upratingof the distribution system can be avoidedsince more active power can now be trans-mitted by the existing equipment.Capacitors may be employed for individualcompensation, for group compensationor for centralized compensation.It has become standard practice for manyutilities to specify a power factor greaterthan or equal to 0.9.
Harmonics
As a result of continuing development ofpower electronic equipment, the numberof converter-fed loads has increased con-siderably in recent years. Advanced tech-nology employing thyristors is now com-mon to a broad range of applications. Forexample, drives with variable speed andoutput can be operated more economicallyby using converter-fed motors.
20 kV
Incoming feeder frompower system
400 V
M
Iw Ib
Fig. 72: Principle of power factor correction employ-ing low voltage power capacitors
The converter current is composed of aseries of sinusoidal currents, with a funda-mental power frequency component anda series of harmonics, whose frequency isan integer multiple of the power frequen-cy. The harmonic currents are injected inthe three-phase power supply system. Asa result, harmonic voltages, which appearacross the power system impedances,are superimposed on the fundamental fre-quency and thus distort the system volt-age. This can lead to disturbances in thesystem and may cause failure of otherloads.
Design and operation of filter circuits
The effect of harmonic currents on thepower supply system can be reduced toa significant extent by connecting filtercircuits which comprise series resonantcircuits employing reactors in series withcapacitors. The resonant circuits are tunedso as to present an impedance for the indi-vidual harmonic currents, which is almostzero and thus negligible in comparison tothe impedance of the power system. Theharmonic currents of the converters arethus largely absorbed by the filter circuits.Only the remainder flows into the powersupply system. So the voltage is distortedto a lesser degree and interference withother loads is largely obviated.
Power-factor correction by means ofinductive-type capacitors
The use of inductive-type capacitors forpower-factor correction is often necessaryin order to avoid resonance effects. Theirdesign is similar to that of filter circuits,but their resonant frequency lies belowthe 5th harmonic.
As a result, the capacitor unit presents aninductive reactance to all the harmonicscontained in the converter current so thatresonant frequencies cannot occur. Induc-tive-type capacitors and power-factor cor-rection units should be selected and em-ployed in the same manner asnormal capacitors and control units.It is recommended that inductive-typecapacitors be used for cases where morethan 20% of the load is made up of equip-ment which generates harmonics (Fig. 74).
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49- 9131-7313 74
Fig. 73: Resolving of converter current into fundamen-tal-frequency and harmonic components
0 π 2π
UPh
IL
I(1)I(7)I(5)
ϕt
M
to powersystem
Primary distribution system
fromconverterΣI(υ)
Transformer
Low-voltage
Converter
to filtercircuits
υ=5 υ=11,13
υ=7
Filter circuits orinductive-typecapacitors
Fig. 74: Removing the harmonic currents by meansof filter circuits or inductive-type capacitors
1/42 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Surge Arresters
The main task of an arrester is to protectequipment from the effects of overvolt-ages. During normal operation, it shouldhave no negative effect on the powersystem. Moreover, the arrester must beable to withstand typical surges withoutincurring any damage. Nonlinear resistorswith the following properties fulfill theserequirements: Low resistance during surges so that
overvoltages are limited High resistance during normal operation,
so as to avoid negative effects on thepower system and
Sufficient energy absorption capabilityfor stable operation
With this kind of nonlinear resistor, thereis only a small flow of current when contin-uous operating voltage is being applied.When there are surges, however, excessenergy can be quickly removed from thepower system by a high discharge current.Nonlinear resistors, whether comprisingsilicon (SiC) carbide or the metal oxide(ZnO), have proved especially suitable forthis. These two kinds of resistors havedifferent degrees of nonlinearity. Fig. 75shows the current/voltage characteristicsof both types. When SiC resistors areused, series gaps have to be connected inseries to the resistors, whereby the seriesgaps separate the resistors from the pow-er system under power-frequency voltageconditions. Otherwise, an excessively largeamount of current would flow with thiskind of resistor during normal operation.In order to stabilize the sparkover voltageof the series gaps, RC control devices areused (Fig. 76).The nonlinearity of ZnO is considerablymore pronounced than of SiC. For this rea-son, MO arresters, as the arresters withZnO resistors are known today, normallydo not need series gaps.Siemens has many years of experiencewith arresters – whether SiC or MO-based– in low-voltage systems, distribution sys-tems and transmission systems. They areusually used for protecting transformers,generators, motors, capacitors, tractionvehicles, cables and substations.There are special applications such as theprotection of Equipment in areas subject to
earthquakes or heavy pollution Surge-sensitive motors and dry-type
transformers Generators in power stations with
arresters which posses a high degreeof short-circuit current strength
Gas-insulated high-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear (GIS)
Arrester voltage referredto continuous operatingvoltage Û/ÛC
Current through arrester Ia [A]
150 °C
20 °C
115 °C
2
1
010-4
SiC
ZnO
Rated voltage ÛR
Continuous operatingvoltage ÛC
10-3 10-2 10-1 102 103 1041 10
SiC arrester MO arrester
Series spark gapand RC control
SiC dischargeresistor
MO dischargeresistor
Thyristors in HVDC transmissioninstallations
Static compensators Airport lighting systems Electric smelting furnaces in the glass
and metals industries High-voltage cable sheaths Test laboratory apparatus.
Fig. 76: Equivalent circuit diagrams of the two kinds of arresters
Fig. 75: Current/voltage characteristics of non-linear SiC and ZnO resistors
1/43Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Surge Arresters
The availability of both technologies,SiC and MO, ensures that arresters canbe inexpensively provided for any kind ofovervoltage problem whatsoever. Due tothe different ways in which they work andtheir different operating characteristics,each kind of arrester technology has itsown very specific advantages.Because of the simpler base materials andmanufacturing procedures of SiC resistors,SiC arresters are less expensive than MOarresters, especially for distribution sys-tems. In addition, the special current/volt-age characteristic of SiC is more favoura-ble for certain applications. It makes senseto use SiC arrester where the qualities ofthe MO arrester cannot be fully exploited.MO arresters are best used in high andextra-high-voltage power systems withsolid neutral earthing. Here, the very lowprotection level and the high energy ab-
sorption capability provided during switch-ing surges are especially important. Forhigh voltage levels, the simple constructionof MO arresters is always an advantage.In contrast, SiC arresters for higher voltag-es are becoming increasingly complicatedin structure and therefore less economical.Another very important advantage of MOarresters is their high degree of reliabilitywhen used in areas with a problematicclimate, for example in coastal and desertareas, or regions affected by heavy indus-trial air pollution. Furthermore, some spe-cial applications have become possibleonly with the introduction of MO arresters.One instance is the protection of capacitorbanks in series reactive-power compen-sation equipment which requires extremlyhigh energy absorption capabilities.Fig. 77 shows two Siemens MO arresterswith different types of housing. In additionto what has been usual up to now – theporcelain housing – Siemens offers alsothe latest generation of high-voltage surgearresters with polymeric housing.Fig. 78 shows the sectional view of suchan arrester. The housing consists of a fiber-glass-reinforced plastic tube with insulatingsheds made of silicone rubber. The advan-tages of this design are absolutely safeand reliable pressure relief characteristics,high mechanical strength even after pres-sure relief and excellent pollution-resistant
Flange with gas diverter nozzle
Seal
Pressure relief diaphragm
Compressing spring
Metal oxide resistors
Composite polymeric housingFRP tube/silicone sheds
properties. The very good mechanical fea-tures mean that Siemens arresters withpolymeric housing (type 3EQ/R) can serveas post insulators as well. The pollution-resistant properties are the result of thewater-repellent effect (hydrophobicity) ofthe silicone rubber, which even transfersits effects to pollution.The polymeric-housed high-voltage arrest-er design chosen by Siemens and the high-quality materials used by Siemens providea whole series of advantages includinglong life and suitability for outdoor use,high mechanical stability and ease of dis-posal.Please find an overview about thecomplete range of Siemens arresters inFig. 79a and 79b.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-3 0386 -26721
Fig. 78: Cross section of a polymeric-housed arrester
Fig. 77: Measurement of residual voltage onporcelain-housed (foreground) and polymeric-housed(background) arresters
1/44 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Surge Arresters
3EG4
Metal Oxide MO (gapless type)Silicon Carbide (SiC)(gapped type)
Type
3EA2 3EF13EF23EF3
3EC2 3EE2 3EH2 3EG5 3EG6 3EK5
Application
Maximumsystemvoltage [kV]
Maximumratedvoltage [kVr]
Nominaldischargecurrent [kA]
Maximumenergy ab-sorptioncapability(thermal sta-bility con-dition) [kJ/kVr]
Maximum longduration dis-charge current,2 ms [A]
Maximumpressure reliefcurrent [kA]
Housingmaterial
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Poly-meric
Metal
3EE13EA1
Over-headlinesys-tems
Over-headlinesys-tems
Distri-butionsys-tems,switch-gear
Distri-butionsys-tems,switch-gear
Distri-butionsys-tems,switch-gear
Distri-butionsys-tems,switch-gear
Distri-butionsystems,metal-enclosedgas-insulatedswitch-gear (GIS)with plug-in connec-tion
Distri-butionsystems,genera-tors,motors,electricfurnaces,6 arresterconnec-tions,powerplants
Distri-butionsystems,genera-tors,motors,electricfurnaces,6 arresterconnec-tions,powerplants
Surgelimiters,motors,dry-typetrans-formers,airfieldlightingsystems
DCsystems,tractionsystems,vehicles
1 24 36 1 12 4 36 52 36 24 36
1 24 42 1 12 4 45 52 45 30 45
5 5 1 5 1 10 10 5 5/10 5/10 10
– 0.3 2.1 0.80.84
– 15 2.2 2.2 2.2 5–
150 150 700 150 2002001300
800 200 2502001700 500
5 ADiscon-nector
20 300 5 ADis-con-nector
40 20 300 16 20 16 20
Poly-meric
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Poly-meric
Poly-mericPorce-lainPoly-meric
3EK6
Distri-butionsys-tems,switch-gear
36
45
10
4.5
300
20
Poly-meric
(1ms)
Fig. 79a: Low- and medium-voltage arresters
1/45Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Surge Arresters
3EP1
Metal Oxide MO (gapless type)SiliconCarbide (SiC)(gapped type)
Type
3EP2 3EP3 3EQ1 3EQ2 3EQ33ER3
3EP2-K 3EP2-K3 3EP3-K
Application Transmissionsystems,substations
Trans-missionsys-tems,sub-stations
Trans-missionsys-tems,sub-stations
Trans-missionsys-tems,sub-stations,HVDC,SVC
Trans-missionsys-tems,sub-stations
Trans-missionsys-tems,sub-stations
Trans-missionsys-tems,sub-stations,HVDC,SVC
Trans-missionsystems,sub-stations,metal-enclosedgas-insulatedswitch-gear(GIS)
Trans-missionsystems,sub-stations,metal-enclosedgas-insulatedswitch-gear (GIS,three-phase)
Maximumsystemvoltage [kV]
245 170 420 765 245 525 525 170 170 525
Maximumratedvoltage [kVr]
216 180 384 612 225 444 444 168 168 444
Nominaldischargecurrent [kA]
10 10 20 20 10 20 20 20 20 20
Maximumline dischargeclass
2 2 4 5 3 5 5 4 4 5
2.1 5 10 20 8 13 20 10 10 13
Maximum longduration dis-charge current,2 ms [A]
700 500 1200 3900 800 1600 3900 1200 1200 1600
Maximumpressure reliefcurrent [kA]
50/63 40 50/63 100 40 63 80 63 63 63
Maximumpermissiblecantilevermoment [kNm]
12.5* 2.1* 12.5* 34* 4.6**(> 50 % after pressure relief)
20** 60** – – –
Housingmaterial
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Porce-lain
Poly-meric
Poly-meric
Poly-meric
Metal Metal Metal
* Dynamic load acc. to DIN 48113 ** 1.5 · M.M.L. acc. to IEC 36/118/CD
3EM2
Maximumenergy ab-sorptioncapability(thermal sta-bility con-dition) [kJ/kVr]
Trans-missionsystems,sub-stations,metal-enclosedgas-insulatedswitch-gear(GIS)
3EQ1-B
DC sys-tems,tractionsys-tems,vehicles
25
37 (AC) 4 (DC)
10
3
8
800
40
2
Poly-meric
Fig. 79b: High-voltage arresters
1/46 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Worldwide Service forHigh- and Medium-voltage Switchgear and Substations
Siemens provides services for
Circuit-breakers and devices SF6-insulated switchgear Air-insulated switchgear plants Personnel training.
Scope of service:
Maintenance contracts– for switchgear and substations
Regular maintenance– visual inspection– extended visual inspection– overhaul
Emergency troubleshooting– simply call
Phone: ++ 49 - 9131- 74 33 33Mobile: ++ 49 - 171- 337 8653Fax: ++ 49 - 9131- 73 44 49
Fault detection and repair– by experts who will go to the site
on short notice Spare parts delivery
– Reliable, quick and specifically foreach serial number
Documentation– for spare parts and maintenance kits
Assistance in final disposal– classification, storage, organization of
final disposal Personnel training for e.g.
– high voltage, medium voltage,low voltage
– protection and control, generator,transformer, cable accessories
– interlocking device, station controlsystems.
Fig. 80: Extended visual check on site
Fig. 82: Example for a maintenance plan (high voltage,number of years in operation with normal switchingfrequencies)
Visual inspection:to be carried out by suitably trainedcustomer personnel or Siemensmaintenance staffExtended visual inspection:to be carried out by suitably trainedcustomer personnel or Siemensmaintenance staffOverhaul:to be carried out by Siemensmaintenance staff together withcustomer personnel
Number of years
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
1920
21
22
23
24
25
26
2728
29
30
31
3233
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
4142
43
44
13
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-9131-73 4449
Fig. 81: View of the internal components of control unit of an outdoor type high-voltage circuit-breaker
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/2
Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Introduction
Primary and secondary distribution standsfor the two basic functions of the medium-voltage level in the distribution system(Fig. 1).
‘Primary distribution’ means the switch-gear installation in the HV/MV transformermain substations. The capacity of equip-ment must be sufficient to transport theelectrical energy from the HV/MV trans-formers input (up to 63 MVA) via busbarto the outgoing distribution lines or cablefeeders. The switchgear in these mainsubstations is of high importance for thesafe and flexible operation of the distribu-tion system. It has to be very reliable dur-ing its lifetime, flexible in configuration,easy to operate with a minimum of mainte-nance.The type of switchgear insulation (air orSF6) is determined by local conditions, e.g.space available, economic considerations,building costs, environmental conditionsand the relative importance of mainte-nance.Design and configuration of the busbarare determined by the requirements of thelocal distribution system.These are: The number of feeders is given by the
outgoing lines of the system The busbar configuration depends on
the system (ring, feeder lines, oppositestation, etc.)
Mode of operation under normal condi-tions and in case of faults
Reliability requirements of consumer,etc.
Double busbars with longitudinal sectional-izing give the best flexibility in operation.However, for most of the operating situa-tions, single busbars are sufficient if thedistribution system has adequate redun-dancy (e.g. ring-type system).If there are only a few feeder lines whichcall for higher security, a mixed configura-tion is advisable.It is important to prepare enough sparefeeders or at least space in order to extendthe switchgear in case of further develop-ment and the need of additional feeders.As these substations, especially in denselypopulated areas, have to be located right inthe load center, the switchgear must bespace-saving and easy to install.The installation of this switchgear needsthorough planning in advance, including thesystem configuration and future area de-velopment. Especially where existing in-stallations have to be upgraded, the situa-tion of the distribution system should beanalyzed for simplification (system plan-ning and architectural system design).
‘Secondary distribution’ is the local areasupply of the individual MV/LV substationsor consumer connecting stations.The power capacity of MV/LV substa-tions depends on the requirements of theLV system. To reduce the network losses,the transformer substations should beinstalled directly at the load centers withits typical transformer ratings of 400 kVAto max. 1000 kVA. Due to the great num-ber of stations, they must be space-savingand maintenance-free.For high availability, MV/LV substations aremostly looped in by load-break switches.The line configuration is mostly of theopen-operated ring type or of radial strandswith opposite switching station. In case ofa line fault, the disturbed section will beswitched free and the supply is continuedby the second side of the line. This callsfor reliable switchgear in the substations.Such transformer substations can be pre-fabricated units or single components, in-stalled in any building or rooms existing onsite, consisting of medium-voltage switch-gear, transformers and low-voltage distri-bution.Because of the extremely high numberof units in the network high standardizationof equipment is necessary. The mosteconomical solution for such substationsshould have climate-independent andmaintenancefree equipment, so that opera-tion of equipment does not require anymaintenance during its lifetime.Consumers with high power requirementshave mostly their own distribution systemon their building area. In this case, a con-sumer connection station with metering isnecessary. Depending on the downstreamconsumer system, circuit breakers or load-break switches have to be installed.For such transformer substations nonex-tensible and extensible switchgear, for in-stance RMUs, have been developed usingSF6 gas as insulation and arc-quenchingmedium in the case of load-break systems(RMU), and SF6-gas insulation and vacuumas arc-quenching medium in the case ofextensible modular switchgear, consistingof load break panels with or without fuses,circuit-breaker panels and measuringpanels.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/3
Medium-Voltage Switchgear
Fig. 1: Medium voltage up to 36 kV – Distribution system with two basic functions: Primary distribution and secondary distribution
Customer station with circuit breakerincoming panel and load break switchoutgoing panels
Diagram 1:
Substation
Diagram 2: Diagram 3:
open ring
closed ring
HV/MV transformers up to 63 MVA
MV up to 36 kV
Primary distribution
Secondary distribution
Subtransmission up to 145 kVMain substation
Extensible switchgear for substationwith circuit-breakers e.g. Type 8DH
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/4
Double busbars withdual-feeder breakers
Single busbar withbus-tie breaker
Balancing of feeders on two systemsduring operation
Access to busbars required during oper-ation.
In double-busbars switchboards with dualfeeder breakers it is possible to connectconsumers of less importance by single-busbar panels. This guarantees the highavailability of a double-busbar switchboardfor important panels as, e.g. incomingfeeders, with the low costs and the lowspace requirement of a single-busbarswitchboard for less important panels.These composite switchboards can beachieved with the types 8BK20, 8BJ50 and8DC11.
Type of insulation
The most common insulating mediumhas been air at atmospheric pressure, plussome solid dielectric materials. Under se-vere climatic conditions this requires pre-cautions to be taken against internal con-tamination, condensation, corrosion, orreduced dielectric strength in high alti-tudes.
General
Codes, standards and specifications
Design, rating manufacture and testing ofour medium-voltage switchboards is gov-erned by international and national stand-ards. Mainly all applicable IEC recommen-dations and narrative VDE/DIN standardsapply to our products, whereby it shouldbe noted that in Europe all national electro-technical standards have been harmonizedwithin the framework of the current IECrecommendations.Our major products in this section complyspecifically with the following code publi-cations: IEC 298 AC metal-enclosed switchgear
and controlgear for rated voltages above1 kV and up to and including 72.5 kV
IEC 694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and controlgearstandards
IEC 56 High-voltage alternating-currentcircuit breakers
IEC 265-1 High-voltage switches IEC 470 High-voltage alternating current
contactors IEC 129 Alternating current disconnec-
tors (isolators) and grounding switches IEC 185 Current transformers IEC 186 Voltage transformers IEC 282 High-voltage fusesIn terms of electrical rating and testing,other national codes and specifications canbe met as well, e.g. ANSI C37, 20C,BS 5227, etc.In case of switchgear manufactured out-side of Germany in Siemens factories orworkshops, certain local standards can alsobe met; for specifics please inquire.
Busbar system
Switchgear installations for normal serviceconditions are preferably equipped withsingle-busbar systems. These switch-boards are clear in their arrangement,simple to operate, require relatively littlespace, and are low in inital cost and oper-ating expenses.Double-busbar switchboards can offeradvantages in the following cases: Operation with asynchronous feeders Feeders with different degrees of impor-
tance to maintain operation during emer-gency conditions
Isolation of consumers with shock load-ing from the normal network
Since 1982, insulating sulfur-hexafluoridegas (SF6-gas) at slight overpressure hasalso been used inside totally encapsulatedswitchboards as insulating medium formedium voltages to totally exclude thesedisturbing effects.All switchgear types in this section, withthe exception of the gas-insulated models8D, use air as their primary insulation me-dium. Ribbed vacuum-potted epoxy-resinpost insulators are used as structural sup-ports for busbars and circuit breakersthroughout.In the gas-insulated metal-clad switchgear8D, all effects of the environment on high-voltage-carrying parts are eliminated.Thus, not only an extremely compact andsafe, but also an exceptionally reliablepiece of switchgear is available. The addi-tional effort for encapsulating and sealingthe high-voltage-carrying parts requiresa higher price – at least in voltage ratingsbelow 24 kV. For a price comparison, seethe curves on the following page (Fig. 3, 4).
Primary DistributionSelection Criteria and Explanations
Fig. 2: Basic basbar configurations for medium voltage switchgear
Double busbars withsingle-feeder breakers
Double-busbars switchboardwith single busbar feeders
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/5
8BJ508DC118DA108BK20
VoltagekV
Single busbar
160
130120110100
908070
0
Percentage
7.2 12 15 24 36
8BJ508DB10
8BK20
Voltage
(8BK20 = 100)!(8BK20 = 100)!
kV
Double busbar
160
130120110100
908070
0
Percentage
7.2 12 15 24 36
Enclosure, Compartmentalization
IEC Publ. 298 subdivides metal-enclosedswitchgear and controlgear into threetypes: Metal-clad switchgear and controlgear Compartmented switchgear and con-
trolgear Cubicle switchgear and controlgear.Thus “metal-clad” and “cubicle” are sub-divisions of metal-enclosed switchgear,further describing construction details.In metal-clad switchgear the componentsare arranged in 3 seperate compartmentsas: Busbar compartment Circuit-breaker compartment Feeder-circuit compartmentwith earthed metal partitions betweeneach compartment.Whereas the cubicle switchgear (type8BJ50) has no compartments within thepanel. The protection against contact withlive busbar is granted by a removeable pro-tective barrier. The protective barrier canbe inserted into the panel without openingthe front door and fulfills the conditions forpartitions according IEC 298.IEC 298-1990-12 Annex AA specifies a“Method for testing the metal-enclosedswitchgear and controlgear under condi-tions of arcing due to an internal fault“.Basically, the purpose of this test is toshow that persons standing in front of, oradjacent to a switchboard during internalarcing are not endangered by the effectsof such arcs. All switchboards describedin this section have successfully passedthese type tests.
Isolating method
To perform maintenance operations safely,one of two basic precautions must betaken before grounding and short-circuitingthe feeder: 1. Opening of an isolator switch with
clear indication of the OPEN condition. 2. Withdrawal of the interrupter carrier
from the operating into the isolationposition.
In both cases, the isolation gap must belarger than the sparkover distance fromlive parts to ground to avoid sparkoverof incoming overvoltages across the gap.The first method is commonly found infixed mounted interrupter switchgear,whereas the second method is appliedin withdrawable switchgear.Withdrawable switchgear has primarilybeen designed to provide a safe environ-ment for maintenance work on circuit inter-
rupters and instrument transformers.Therefore, if interrupters and instrumenttransformers are available that do not re-quire maintenance during their lifetime, thewithdrawable feature becomes obsolete.With the introduction of maintenancefreevacuum circuit-breaker bottles, and instru-ment transformers which are not subjectto dielectric stressing by high voltage,it is possible and safe to utilize totally en-closed, fixed-mounted and gas-insulatedswitchgear. Models 8DA, 8DB and 8DCdescribed in this section are of this design.Due to their much fewer moving parts andtheir total shielding from the environment,they have proved to be much more reliable.All air-insulated switchgear models in thissection except the 8FG10 are of the with-drawable type.
Switching device
Depending on the switching duty in indi-vidual switchboards and feeders, basicallythe following types of primary switchingdevices are used in the switchgear cubi-cles in this section:(Note: Not all types of switching devices can be used inall types of cubicle.)
1. Vacuum circuit-breakers 2. Vacuum contactors in conjunction
with HRC-fuses 3. Vacuum switches or gas-insulated
three-position switch disconnector inconjunction with HRC-fuses.
To 1: Vacuum circuit breaker
In the continuing strive for safer and morereliable medium-voltage circuit breakers,the vacuum interrupter is clearly the firstchoice of buyers of new circuit breakers ona worldwide basis.It is maintenancefree up to 10,000 oper-ating cycles without any limitation by time
and it is recommended for all general-purpose applications. If high numbers ofswitching operations are anticipated (es-pecially autoreclosing in overhead linesystems and switching of high-voltage mo-tors), their use is indicated. They are avail-able in all ratings – see selection matrix onpage 2/66–2/67 for all power switchgearlisted in this section.Due to their freedom of maintenance thesebreakers can be installed inside totallyenclosed and gas-insulated switchgear.
To 2: Vacuum contactors
Vacuum contactors with rated current upto 450 A are used for frequent switchingoperations in motor, transformer, and ca-pacitor bank feeders. They are type-tested,extremely reliable and compact devicesand they are totally maintenancefree. Sincecontactors cannot interrupt fault currents,they must always be used with current-limiting fuses to protect the equipmentconnected. Vacuum contactors can be in-stalled in the metal-enclosed, metal-cladswitchgear type 8BK20 and 8BK30.
To 3: Vacuum switches or …
Vacuum switches and gas-insulated three-position switch disconnectors in primarydistribution switchboards are used mostlyfor small transformer feeders such as aux-iliary transformers or load center substa-tions. Because of their inability to interruptfault currents they must always be usedwith current-limiting fuses. Vacuum switch-es can be installed in the air-insulatedswitchboard type 8BK20 and 8BJ50. Gas-insulated three-position switch disconnec-tors can be installed in the switchboardtype 8DC11.For details of these switching devices seethe following pages!
Primary DistributionSelection Criteria and Explanations
Fig. 3: Price relation Fig. 4: Price relation
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/6
Primary DistributionSelection Matrix
Fig. 5: Primary Distribution Selection Matrix
Standards Insulation Busbar system Enclosure,compartmentalization
Isolating method
Type-tested indoorswitchgear toDIN VDE 0670, Part 6IEC 298
Disconnector,fixed-mounted
Disconnector,fixed-mounted
Disconnector,fixed-mounted
Disconnector,fixed-mounted
Metal-enclosed,cubicle-type
Metal-enclosed,metal-clad
Metal-enclosed,metal-clad
Metal-enclosed,metal-clad
Metal-enclosed,metal-clad
Metal-enclosed,cubicle-type
Metal-enclosed,metal-clad
Triple-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad
Single-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad
Single-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad
Metal-enclosed,cubicle-type
Single busbar
Air-insulated Generatorcircuit-breaker
Double busbar
Single busbar
Double busbar
Generatorcircuit-breaker
Air-insulated
SF6-insulated
Switchgear toDIN VDE 0101
Draw-out section
Draw-out section
Draw-out section
Draw-out section
Draw-out section
Draw-out section
Draw-out section
Containerized switchgear equipped with air-insulated or SF6-insulated switchgear
Disconnector,fixed-mounted
Triple-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/7
Primary DistributionSelection Matrix
Technical data
Maximum rated short-timecurrent [kA], 1/3 s
Maximum busbar ratedcurrent [A]
Maximum feeder ratedcurrent [A]
4000 4000 2000 2500*
7.2kV
12/15kV
17.5/24kV
36kV
Switchingdevice
Switchgeartype
8BJ50
8BK20
8BK30
8BK40
8BK41
8BJ50
8BK20
8DC11
8DA10
8DB10
8FG10
4000 4000 2500 2500*
7.2kV
12/15kV
17.5/24kV
36kV
50 50 25 31.5*
7.2kV
12kV
17.5/24kV
36kV
2500 2500 2000 –2500 2500 2500 –40 40 25 –
400 400 – –4000 4000 – –50 50 – –
5000 5000 5000** –5000 5000 5000** –63 63 63** –
12500 12500 12500** –– – – –80 80 80** –
2500 2500 2000 –2500 2500 2500 –40 40 25 –
4000 4000 2000 2500*4000 4000 2500 2500*50 50 25 31.5*
1250 1250 1250 –1250 1250 1250 –25 25 25 –
2500 2500 2500 25003150 3150 3150 250040 40 40
2500 2500 2500 25003150 3150 3150 250040 40 40
12500 12500 12500** –– – – –80 80 80** –
Vacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switch
Vacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switchVacuum contactor
Vacuum contactor
Vacuumcircuit-breaker
Vacuumcircuit-breaker
Vacuumcircuit-breaker
Vacuum circuit-breakerSwitch-disconnector
Vacuumcircuit-breaker
Vacuumcircuit-breaker
Vacuumcircuit-breaker
* 36 kV panel: metal enclosed, compartmented ** up to 17.5 kV
Page
2/12
2/8
2/17
2/20
2/24
2/26
2/32
2/32
2/39
2/8
2/12
2/418FF1 ratings acc. to the installed switchgear type
40
40
Vacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switchVacuum contactor
8DC11Vacuum circuit-breakerSwitch-disconnector 1250 1250 1250 –1250 1250 1250 –25 25 25 – 2/26
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/8
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BJ50
Stationary part
The cubicle is built as a self-supportingstructure, bolted or riveted together fromrolled galvanized steel sheets and profiles.Cubicles for rated voltages up to 24 kV areof identical construction.A removable protective barrier is used forshielding the busbars without isolatingthem in order, e.g., to work inside the cubi-cle. The protective barrier can be insertedinto the panel without opening the frontdoor and fulfills the conditions for parti-tions according IEC 298. Therefore, thispartition provides same safety features asa metal-clad design.Any overpressure inside the cubicle result-ing from fault arcing is released by pres-sure relief flaps. To reduce internal arcingtimes and thus consequential damages,pressure switches can be installed that tripthe incoming feeder circuit breaker(s) inless than 100 msec. This is an economicalternative to busbar differential protection.
Breaker carriage
The carriage normally supports a vacuumcircuit breaker with the associated operat-ing mechanism and auxiliary devices.Vacuum switches, with or without HV HRCfuses, are optional. By manually movingthe carriage with the spindle drive it can bebrought into a distinct “Connected” and
“Disconnected/Test” position. To thiseffect, the arc- and pressure-proof frontdoor remains closed.To remove the switching element com-pletely from its cubicle, a central servicetruck is used. Inspection can easily andsafely be carried out with the circuit break-er in the “Disconnected/Test” position.All electrical and mechanical parts areeasily accessible in this position.Mechanical spring-charge and contact-position indicators are visible through theclosed door.Local mechanical ON/OFF pushbuttons areactived through the door as well.For complete remote control, the circuit-breaker carriage can be equipped formotor operation.
Low-voltage compartment
All protective relays as well as monitoringand control devices of a feeder can be ac-commodated in a metal-enclosed LV com-partment on top. Device mounting plates,cabling troughs and the central LV terminalstrip(s) are located behind a separate locka-ble door. Full or partial plexiglass windows,or mimic diagrams are available for thesedoors.
Cubicle-type switchgear 8BJ50,air-insulated
From 7.2 to 24 kV Single- and double-busbar
(back-to-back or face-to-face) Air-insulated Type-tested Metal-enclosed Cubicle-type Withdrawable vacuum breaker Vacuum switch optional For indoor installation
Specific features
General-purpose switchgear Circuit breaker mounted on horizontal
slide behind front door Cable connections from front
Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel
All switching operations behind closeddoors
Positive and robust mechanicalinterlocks
Arc-fault-tested metal enclosure Complete protection against contact
with live parts Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenancefree vacuum breaker
Tolerance to environment
Sealed metal enclosure with optionalgaskets
Complete corrosion protectionand tropicalization of all parts (option)
Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy-insulatorswith high tracking resistance
General description
8BJ50 switchboards consist of metalenclosed cubicles of air-insulated switch-gear with withdrawable vacuum circuitbreakers. The breaker carriage is fully inter-locked with the interrupter and the station-ary cubicle. It is manually moved in hori-zontal direction from the “Connected”position behind the closed front door andwithout the use of auxiliary equipment.A fully isolated low-voltage compartmentis integrated. All commonly used feedercircuits and auxiliary devices are available.The switchgear cubicles and interruptersare factory-assembled and type-tested asper the applicable standards.
Fig. 6: Panel of cubicle-type switchgear 8BJ50(inter-cubicle partition removed)
Fig. 7: Cross section through cubicle-type switchgear8BJ50
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/9
Fig. 8: Double busbar: back-to-back arrangement (cross section)
Fig. 9: Double busbar: face-to-face arrangement (cross section)
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BJ50
Main enclosure
The totally enclosed and sealed cubiclepermits installation in most equipmentrooms. With the degree of protection ofIP4X/IP3XD, the switchgear is safeguardedagainst internal contamination, small ani-mals and rodents, and naturally againstcontact with live parts. This eliminates theusual reasons for arc faults.
Busbars and primary disconnects
Rectangular busbars drawn from purecopper are used exclusively. They aremounted in standard cast-resin bushingssupported in the inter-cubicle partitions.The taps to the upper fixed isolating con-tact are mounted on ribbed, cast-resinpost insulators which are sized to take upthe dynamic forces resulting from shortcircuits. The fixed isolating contacts aresilverplated stubs.The movable parts of the line and load-side primary disconnects have flat, spring-loaded and silver-plated hemisphericalpressure contacts for low contact resist-ance and good ventilation. The parallel con-necting arms are designed to increase con-tact pressure during short circuits.
Instrument transformers
Up to three multicore block-type currenttransformers plus three single-phasepotential transformers can be installedwithin the termination zone.The C.T.s carry the cable-connectingbars and lugs, and the fixed contacts ofthe grounding switch. All common burden and accuracy ratingsof instrument transformers are available.Bus bar metering PTs can be fixed installedwithin the busbar zone or in a meteringcubicle, withdrawable PTs and optionallywith current-limiting fuses.
Cable and bar connections
Cables and bars are connected frombelow; entrance from above requires anauxiliary structure behind the cubicle.Single-phase or three-phase solid-dielectriccables can be connected from the front ofthe cubicle; stress cones are installed con-veniently inside the cubicle.Make-proof grounding switches with man-ual operation can be installed below theC.T.s, engaging contacts behind the cablelugs. Operation of the fully interlockedgrounding switch is possible only with thebreaker carriage in the “Disconnected/Test” position.
Interlocking system
A series of sturdy mechanical interlocksforces the operator into the only safe oper-ating sequence of the switchgear, positive-ly preventing the following: Moving the carriage with the breaker
closed and protective barrier inserted. Switching the breaker in any but the
locked “Connected” or “Disconnected/Test” position.
Engaging the grounding switch with thecarriage in the “Connected” position,and moving the carriage into this posi-tion with the grounding switch engaged.
Degrees of protection
Degree of protection IP 4X:In the “Connected” and the “Discon-nected/Test” position of the carriage, theswitchgear is totally protected againstcontact with live parts by objects largerthan 1 mm in diameter.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/10
Rated voltage
Width
Height min.
Depth single busbardouble busbar
Approx. weightincl. breaker(single busbar cubicle)
7.2
Weights and dimensions
800
2150
1125
500
17.5/24
800/1000
2150
1430
700
12[kV]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm][mm]
[kg]
225011252250
800
2150
500
2860
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BJ50
Installation
The switchboards are shipped in sectionsof up to three cubicles on stable woodenpallets which are suitable for rolling andforklift handling. These sections are boltedor spot-welded to channel iron sectionsembedded in a flat and level concrete floor.The switchboard can be installed againstthe wall or freestanding. Double-busbarinstallations in back-to-back configurationare installed freestanding. Cable feed-inis through corresponding cutouts in thefloor; plans for which are part of theswitchgear supply. Three-phase (armored)cables for voltages above 12 kV requiresufficient clearance below the switchgearto split up the phases (cable floor, etc.).Circuit breakers are shipped mounted ontheir carriages inside the switchgear cubi-cles. For preliminary dimensions andweights, see the table to the right.
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
Technical data
* 40 kA/1 s
7.2
12
17.5/24width 800 mm
17.5/24width 1000 mm
Ratedvoltage
Ratedlightning-impulsetest voltage
[kV] [kV]
60
75
95/125
95/125
20
28
38/50
38/50
16202531.540*
16202531.540*
162025
162025
40506380
100
40506380
100
405063
405063
––
––
––
––
–––––
–––––
–––
–
––
––
–––
–––
Ratedpower-frequencywithstandvoltage
[kV]
Rated short-circuitbreaking current/short-time current(1 s or 3 s available)
[kA](rms)
Rated feedercurrents
630[A]
1250[A]
2000[A]
2500[A]
Rated busbarcurrents
1250[A]
2500[A]
Rated short-circuit makingcurrent
[kA](peak)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/11
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BJ50
Fig. 12: Available circuit options
8BJ50
SectionalizerPanel
Withdraw-able parts
Fixed parts Meteringpanel
Busbarmodules
Bus riser panel Busbar connec-tion panel
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/12
Metal-clad switchgear 8BK20,air-insulated
From 7.2 to 36/38 kV Single- and double-busbar
(back-to-back or face-to-face) Air-insulated Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad up to 24 kV Compartmented above 24 kV Withdrawable vacuum breaker Vacuum contactor optional Vacuum switch optional For indoor installation
Specific features
General-purpose switchgear Circuit breaker mounted on horizontal
slide behind front door Cable connections from front or rear
Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel
All switching operations behind closeddoors
Positive and robust mechanicalinterlocks
Arc-fault-tested metal enclosure Complete protection against contact
with live parts Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenancefree vacuum breaker
Tolerance to environment
Metal enclosure with optional gaskets Complete corrosion protection and
tropicalization of all parts. Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy insulators
with high tracking resistance
General description
8BK20 switchboards consist of metal-cladcubicles (compartmented above 24 kV) ofair-insulated switchgear with withdrawablevacuum circuit breakers. Fused vacuumswitches up to 24 kV/800 A and vacuumcontactors up to 12 kV and 400 A can beused optionally. The breaker carriage is ful-ly interlocked with the interrupter and thestationary cubicle. It is manually moved inhorizontal direction from the ”Connected“position behind the closed front door andwithout the use of auxiliary equipment.A fully isolated low-voltage compartmentis integrated. All commonly used feedercircuits and auxiliary devices are available.
Fig. 13: Metal-clad switchgear type 8BK20 (inter-cubicle partition removed)
The switchgear cubicles and interruptersare factory-assembled and type-tested asper the applicable standards.
Stationary part
The cubicle is built as a self-supportingstructure, bolted together from rolled gal-vanized steel sheets and profiles. Cubiclesfor rated voltages up to 24 kV are of identi-cal construction; the 36/38 kV model islarger and uses fiberglass-reinforced epoxyinternal partitions, making it compartment-ed. Each cubicle is divided into threesealed and isolated compartments by parti-tions, i.e. the busbar, cable connection andcircuit-breaker compartment.In the 24 kV version, the fixed contacts ofthe primary disconnects are located withinbushings, effectively maintaining the com-partmentalization in all operating conditionsof the switchgear.The bushings are covered by automaticsteel safety shutters upon removal of thecircuit-breaker carriage from the ”Con-nected“ position.In the 36 kV version, the compartmentsare formed by internal barriers made offiberglass-reinforced epoxy plates withindividual-phase safety shutters that sealin both directions.Each compartment in every model has itsown pressure-relief device. To reduce inter-nal arcing times and thus consequential
damages, pressure switches can be in-stalled that trip the incoming feeder circuitbreaker(s) in less than 100 msec. This is aneconomical alternative to busbar differen-tial protection.
Breaker carriage
The carriage normally supports a vacuumcircuit breaker with the associated operat-ing mechanism and auxiliary devices.Vacuum contactors up to 12 kV and fusedvacuum switches up to 24 kV are optional. By manually moving the carriage with thea spindle drive it can be brought into a dis-tinct ”Connected“ and ”Disconnected/Test“ position. To this effect, the arc- andpressure-proof front door remains closed.To remove the switching element com-pletely from its compartment, a centralservice truck is used. Inspection can easilyand safely be carried out with the circuitbreaker in the ”Disconnected/Test“ posi-tion. All electrical and mechanical parts areeasily accessible in this position.Mechanical spring-charge and contact-position indicators are visible through theclosed door. Local mechanical ON/OFFpushbuttons are actived through the dooras well.For complete remote control, the circuit-breaker carriage can be equipped for motoroperation.
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK20
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/13
Low-voltage compartment
All protective relays, monitoring and con-trol devices of a feeder can be accommo-dated in a metal-enclosed LV compartmenton top (up to 24 kV) or alongside (36/38 kV)the HV enclosure. Device-mounting plates,cabling troughs, and the central LV terminalstrip(s) are located behind a separate lock-able door. Full or partial plexiglass win-dows, or mimic diagrams are available forthese doors.
Main enclosure
The totally enclosed and sealed cubiclepermits installation in most equipmentrooms. With the optional dust protection,the switchgear is safeguarded againstinternal contamination, small animals androdents, and naturally against contact withlive parts. This eliminates the usual rea-sons for arc faults.Should arcing occur, nevertheless, thearc can be guided towards the end of thelineup, where damages are repaired mosteasily. For the latter reason, parititions be-tween individual cubicles of the same bussections are normally not used.
Fig. 14: Cross-section through 8BK20 cubicle
Busbars and primary disconnects
Rectangular busbars drawn from pure cop-per are used exclusively. They are mount-ed on ribbed, cast-resin post insulatorswhich are sized to take up the dynamicforces resulting from short circuits. Solid-dielectric busbar insulation is available.The movable parts of the line- and load-side primary disconnects have flat, spring-loaded and silver-plated hemipherical pres-sure contacts for low contact resistanceand good ventilation. The parallel connect-ing arms are designed to increase contactpressure during short circuits. The fixedcontacts are silver-plated stubs within thecircuit-beaker bushings (24 kV), or the bus-bar mounts (36 kV).
Instrument transformers
Up to three multicore block-type currenttransformers plus three single-phasepotential transformers can be installed inthe lower compartment; PTs optionally onwithdrawable modules up to 24 kV.The C.T.s carry the cable-connecting barsand lugs, and the fixed contacts of the (op-tional) grounding switch. All common bur-den and accuracy ratings of instrumenttransformers are available. Busbar meter-ing PTs with their current-limiting fuses areinstalled on withdrawable carriages, identi-cally to breaker carriages.
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK20
Cable and bar connections
Cables and bars are connected frombelow; entrance from above requires anauxiliary structure behind the cubicle.Single-phase or three-phase solid-dielectriccables can be connected from the front orthe rear of the cubicle (specify); stresscones are installed conveniently inside thecubicle.Regular and make-proof grounding switch-es with manual operation can be installedbelow the C.T.s, engaging contacts behindthe cable lugs. Operation of the fully inter-locked grounding switch is possible onlywith the breaker carriage in the ”Discon-nected/Test“ position.
Interlocking system
A series of sturdy mechanical interlocksforces the operator into the only safe oper-ating sequence of the switchgear, prevent-ing positively the following: Moving the carriage with the breaker
closed. Switching the breaker in any but the
locked ”Connected“ or ”Disconnected/Test“ position
Engaging the grounding switch with thecarriage in the ”Connected“ position,and moving the carriage into this posi-tion with the grounding switch engaged.
Degrees of protection
Degree of protection IP 4X:In the ”Connected“ and the ”Discon-nected/Test“position of the carriage,the switchgear is totally protected againstcontact with live parts by objects largerthan 1 mm in diameter.Optionally, the cubicles can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against dripping water (IP 51).
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/14
Installation
The switchboards are shipped in sectionsof up to three cubicles on stable woodenpallets which are suitable for rolling andforklift handling. These sections are boltedor spot-welded to channel iron sectionsembedded in a flat and level concrete floor.Front-connected types can be installedagainst the wall or freestanding, rear-con-nected cubicles require service aisles.Double-busbar installations in back-to-backconfiguration are installed freestanding.Cable feed-in is through corresponding cut-outs in the floor; plans for which are partof the switchgear supply. Three-phase(armored) cables for voltages above 12 kVrequire sufficient clearance below theswitchgear to split up the phases (cable-floor, etc.). Circuit breakers are shippedmounted on their carriages inside theswitchgear cubicles. For dimensions andweights, see Fig.17.
Fig. 15: Cross section through switchgear type 8BK20in back-to-back double-busbar arrangement for rated voltages up to 24 kV
Fig. 16: Cross section through switchgear type 8BK20in single-busbar arrangement for front cable connection and 36/38 kV 170 kV/BIL
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK20
Fig. 17
Rated voltage
Panel spacing
Width
Depth front conn.without channelwith channel
Depth rear conn.
Approx. weightincl. breaker
7.2
Weights and dimensions
800
2050
1650
17.5 36/38
1775
800
1775
1000
2250
2025
2150
1000
2150
1500
2220
–
2245
1600
2220
24[kV]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm][mm]
[mm]
[kg]
800
2050
1650
1775
800
1775
800
2050
1650
1775
800
1775
1000
2250
2025
2150
1000
2150
12 15
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/15
7.2
12
15
17.5
24
36/38
Ratedvoltage
Lightningimpulsetest voltage
[kV]
60
75
95
95
125
170
20
28
36
38
50
70/80
16202531.540*50*
16202531.540*50*
16202531.540*50*
162025
162025
162531.5
40506380
110125
40506380
110125
40506380
110125
405063
405063
406380
Powerfrequencytest voltage
[kV]
Rated short-circuit-breakingcurrent/shorttime current(1 or 3savailable)
[kA](rms)
Rated feeder current* Rated busbar currentRatedshort-circuitmakingcurrent
[kA]
–––
–––
–––
–
–––
630[A]
1250[A]
––
–
––
–
––
–
––
–
–––
2000[A]
––
––
––
–––
–––
2500[A]
––––
––––
––––
–––
–––
–––
3150[A]
––––
––––
––––
–––
–––
–––
40001)
[A]
Technical data
1250[A]
2000[A]
2500[A]
–––
–––
–––
3150[A]
–––
–––
–––
4000[A][kV]
* 1 s1) Ventilation unit with or without fan and ventilation slots in the front of the cubicle required.
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK20
Fig. 18
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/16
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK20
Fig. 19: Available circuit options
On right endcubicle or bussectonalizer
with solid-insu-lated busbarsbetween twocubicles
8BK20 switchgear up to 24 kV
8BK20 switchgear 36/38 kV
Withdraw-ableparts
PanelFixed busbar Sectionalizer
Model 1Two panels
SectionalizerPanel
Withdraw-ableparts
Fixed parts Meteringpanel
Busbarmodules
Bus riser panel Busbar connec-tion panel
Model 2Two panels with underpass
Meteringpanel
Busbar connec-tion panel(left endpanel only)
Busbarmodules
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/17
Vacuum contactormotor starters 8BK30,air-insulated
From 3.6–12 kV Single-busbar Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad Withdrawable vacuum contactors
and HRC current-limiting fuses For direct lineup with 8BK20 switchgear For indoor installation
Specific features
Designed as extension to 8BK20 switch-gear with identical cross section
Contactor mounted on horizontally mov-ing truck – 400 mm panel spacing
Cable connection from front or rear Central or individual control power trans-
former Integrally-mounted electronic multifunc-
tion motor-protection relays available.
Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel
All switching operations behind closeddoors
Positive and robust mechanical inter-locks
Arc-fault-tested metal enclosure Complete protection against contact
with live parts Absolutely safe fuse replacement Maintenancefree vacuum interrupter
tubes
Tolerance to environment
Metal enclosure with optional gaskets Complete corrosion protection and tropi-
calization of all parts Vacuum-potted ribbed expoy insulators
with high tracking resistance
Fig. 20: Metal-clad switchgear type 8BK30 with vacuum contactor (inter-cubicle partition removed)
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK30
Fig. 21
3.67.212
Ratedvoltage
BIL
[kV] [kV]
406060
102028
100020003000
400400400
PFWV
[kV]
Maximumrating ofmotor
[kW]
Rated busbar currentFeederrating
[A]
1250[A]
2000[A]
3150[A]
2500[A]
4000[A]
Technical data
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/18
General description
8BK30 motor starters consist of metal-enclosed, air-insulated and metal-clad cubi-cles. Vacuum contactors on withdrawabletrucks, with or without control powertransformers, are used in conjunction withcurrent-limiting fuses as starter devices.The truck is fully interlocked with the struc-ture and is manually moved from the”Connected“ to the ”Disconnected/Test“position. A fully isolated low-voltage com-partment is integrated. All commonly usedstarter circuits and auxiliary devices areavailable.The starter cubicles and contactors arefactory-assembled and type-tested as perapplicable standards.
Fig. 22: Available circuits
The stationary part
The cubicle is constructed basically thesame as the matching switchgear cubicles8BK20, with the exception of the contactortruck.
Contactor truck
Vacuum contactor, HRC fuses, and controlpower transformer with fuses (if ordered)are mounted on the withdrawable truck.Auxiliary devices and interlocking compo-nents, plus the primary disconnects com-plete the assembly.
Low-voltage compartment
Space is provided for regular bimetallic orelectronic motor-protection relays, plus theusual auxiliary relays for starter control.The compartment is metal-enclosed andhas its own lockable door. All customerwiring is terminated on a central terminalstrip within this compartment.
Main enclosure
Practically identical to the associated8BK20 switchgear.
Busbars and primary disconnects
Horizontal busbars are identical to the onesin the associated 8BK20 switchgear. Pri-mary disconnects are adapted to the lowfeeder fault currents of these starters.Silver-plated tulip contacts with round con-tact rods are used.
C.T.s and cable connection
Due to the limited let-through current ofthe HRC fuse, block-type C.T.s with lowerthermal rating can be used. Depending onthe protection scheme used, C.T.s withone or two secondary windings areinstalled.All commonly used feeder cables up to300 mm2 can be terminated and connect-ed at the lower C.T. terminals.Grounding switches or surge-voltagelimiters are installed optionally below thecurrent transformers.
Reduced-voltage nonreversing (RVNR)with starter (reactor starting)
Full-voltagenonreversing(FVNR)
Reduced-voltage nonreversing (RVNR)with external reactor autotransformer”Korndorffer Method“
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK30
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/19
Interlocking system
Contactor, truck and low-voltage plugs areintegrated into the interlocking system toguarantee the following safeguards: The truck cannot be moved into the
”Connected“ position before the LV plugis inserted.
The LV plug cannot be disconnectedwith the truck in the ”Connected“ posi-tion.
The truck cannot be moved with thecontactor in the ON position.
The contactor cannot be operated withthe truck in any other but the locked”Connected“ or ”Disconnected/Test“position.
The truck cannot be brought into the”Connected“ position with the ground-ing switch engaged.
The grounding switch cannot be en-gaged with the truck in the ”Connect-ed“ position.
Degrees o protection
Degree of protection IP 4X:In the ”Connected“ and the ”Disconnect-ed/Test“ positions of the truck, the starteris totally protected against contact withlive parts with objects larger than 1 mm indiameter.Optionally, the starters can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against dripping or spray water in the”Operating“ position (IP 51).
Installation
Identical to the procedures outlined for8BK20 switchgear. Only the HRC fuses areshipped outside the enclosure, separatelypacked.
Fig. 23: Cross section through switchgear type 8BK30
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK30
Fig. 24
Rated voltage
Width
Height
Depth
Approx. weightincl. contactor
3.6
Weights and dimensions
2 x 400
2050
1650
700
7.2 12[kV]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg]
2 x 400
2050
1650
700
2 x 400
2050
1650
700
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/20
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK40
Metal-clad switchgear 8BK40,air-insulated
From 7.2 to 17.5 kV Single- and double-busbar
(back-to-back or face-to-face) Air-insulated Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad Withdrawable vacuum breaker For indoor installation
Specific features
General-purpose switchgear for ratedfeeder/busbar current up to 5000 A andshort-circuit breaking current up to63 kA
Circuit breaker mounted on horizontallymoving truck
Cable connections from front
Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel
All switching operations behind closeddoors
Positive and robust mechanicalinterlocks
Complete protection against contactwith live parts
Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenancefree vacuum circuit
breaker
Tolerance to environment
Sealed metal enclosure with optionalgaskets
Complete corrosion protection and tropi-calization of all parts
Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy-insulatorswith high tracking resistance
Generator vacuum circuit breaker panel
Suitable for use in steam, gas-turbine,hydro and pumped-storage power plants
Suitable for use in horizontal, L-shapedor vertical generator lead routing
Fig. 26: Cross section through type 8BK40 generator panel
Fig. 25: Metal-clad switchgear type 8BK40 with vacuum circuit breaker 3AH(inter-cubicle partition removed)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/21
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK40
General description
8BK40 switchboards consist of metal-cladcubicles of air-insulated switchgear withwithdrawable vacuum circuit breakers. Thebreaker truck is fully interlocked with theinterrupter and the stationary cubicle.It is manually moved in horizontal directionfrom the ”Connected“ position behind theclosed front door and without the use ofauxiliary equipment. A fully isolated low-voltage compartment is integrated.All commonly used feeder circuits and aux-iliary devices are available.The switchgear cubicles and interruptersare factory-assembled and type-tested asper applicable standards.
Stationary part
The cubicle is built as a self-supportingstructure, bolted together from rolled gal-vanized steel sheets and profiles.Cubicles for rated voltages up to 17.5 kVare of identical construction. Each cubicleis divided into three sealed and isolatedcompartments by partitions, i.e. the bus-bar, cable connection and circuit-breakercompartment.The fixed contacts of the primary discon-nects are located within insulating breakerbushings, effectively maintaining the com-partmentalization in all operating conditionsof the switchgear. The bushings are cov-ered by automatic steel safety shuttersupon removal of the circuit-breakerelement from the ”Connected“ position.Each compartment in every model has itsown pressure-relief device. To reduce inter-nal arcing times and thus consequentialdamages, pressure-switches can be in-stalled that trip the incoming-feeder circuitbreaker(s) in less than 100 msec. This is aneconomic alternative to busbar differentialprotection.
Interrupter truck
The truck normally supports a vacuumcircuit breaker with the associated operat-ing mechanism and auxiliary devices.By manually moving the truck with the aspindle drive it can be brought into a dis-tinct ”Connected“ and ”Disconnected/Test“ position. To this effect, the frontdoor remains closed.Inspection can easily and safely be carriedout with the circuit breaker in the ”Discon-nected/Test“ position. All electrical andmechanical parts are easily accessible inthis position.
Mechanical spring-charge and contact-posi-tion indicators are visible through theclosed door. Local mechanical ON/OFFpushbuttons are actived through the dooras well.For complete remote control, the circuitbreaker carriage can be equipped for motoroperation.
Low-voltage compartment
All protective relays, monitoring and con-trol devices of a feeder can be accommo-dated in a metal-enclosed LV compartmenton top the HV enclosure. Device-mountingplates, cabling troughs, and the centralLV terminal strip(s) are located behinda separate lockable door. Full or partialplexiglass-windows, or mimic diagramsare available for these doors.
Main enclosure
The totally enclosed and sealed cubiclepermits installation in most equipmentrooms. With the optional dust protection,the switchgear is safeguarded againstinternal contamination, small animals androdents, and naturally against contact withlive parts. This eliminates the usual rea-sons for arc faults. Should arcing occur,
nevertheless, the arc can be guidedtowards the end of the lineup, where dam-ages are repaired most easily. For the lat-ter reason, partitions between individualcubicles of the same bus sections are nor-mally not used.
Busbars and primary disconnects
Rectangular busbars drawn from purecopper are used exclusively. They aremounted on ribbed, cast-resin post insula-tors which are sized to take up the dyna-mic forces resulting from short circuits.The movable parts of the line- and load-side primary disconnects have flat, spring-loaded and silver-plated hemisphericalpressure contacts for low contact resist-ance and good ventilation. The parallel con-necting arms are designed to increase con-tact pressure during short circuits. Thefixed contacts are silver-plated stubs withinthe circuit-breaker bushings.
Instrument transformers
Up to three multicore block-type currenttransformers plus three single-phasepotential transformers can be installed inthe lower compartment; PTs optionallyon withdrawable modules.
Fig. 27: Cross-section through panel type 8BK40
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/22
7.2
Technical data
Ratedvoltage
Lightning-impulsetestvoltage
Power-frequencytest
Ratedshort-circuit-breakingcurrent/short timecurrent
kA [rms]
Ratedshort-circuit-makingcurrent
[kA]
Rated feedercurrent
1250[A]
2500[A]
3150[A]
5000[A]
5000[A]
5063
20
28
36
38
60
75
95
95
12
15
17.5
125160
[kV] [kV]
Ratedbusbarcurrent
5063
5063
5063
125160
125160
125160
[kV]
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK40
The C.T.s carry the cable-connecting barsand lugs, and the fixed contacts of the (op-tional) grounding switch. All common bur-den and accuracy ratings of instrumenttransformers are available. Busbar meter-ing PTs with their current-limiting fuses areinstalled on a withdrawable truck, identicalto the breaker truck.
Cable and bar connections
Cables and bars are connected frombelow; entrance from above requires anauxiliary structure behind the cubicle.Single-phase or three-phase solid-dielectriccables can be connected from the front ofthe cubicle; stress cones are installed con-veniently inside the cubicle.Regular and make-proof grounding switch-es with manual operation can be installedbelow the C.T.s, engaging contacts behindthe cable lugs. Operation of the fully inter-locked grounding switch is possible onlywith the breaker carriage in the ”Discon-nected/Test“ position.
Interlocking system
A series of sturdy mechanical interlocksforces the operator into the only safe oper-ating sequence of the switchgear, prevent-ing positively the following: Moving the truck with the breaker
closed. Switching the breaker in any but the
locked ”Connected“ or ”Disconnected/Test“ position.
Engaging the grounding switch withthe truck in the ”Connected“ position,and moving the truck into this positionwith the grounding switch engaged.
Degrees of protection
Degree of protection IP 4X:In the ”Connected“ and the ”Disconnect-ed/Test“ position of the truck, the switch-gear is totally protected against contactwith live parts by objects larger than 2 mmin diameter.Optionally, the cubicles can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against drip water (IP 51).
Installation
The switchboards are shipped in sectionsof one cubicle on stable wooden pallettswhich are suitable for rolling and forklifthandling. These sections are bolted orspot-welded to channel iron sections em-bedded in a flat and level concrete floor.
Front-connected types can be installedagainst the wall or freestanding. Double-busbar installations in back-to-back configu-ration are installed freestanding.Cable feed-in is through corresponding cut-outs in the floor; plans for which are partof the switchgear supply. Three-phase(armored) cables for voltages above 12 kVrequire sufficient clearance below theswitchgear to split up the phases (cablefloor, etc.). Circuit breakers are shippedmounted on their trucks inside the switch-gear cubicles. For preliminary dimensionsand weights, see Fig. 28.
Fig. 29
Fig. 28
7.2
1100
2500
2300
2800
Rated voltage
Width
Height
Depth
Approx. weightincl. breaker
Weight and dimensions
12 17.515[kV]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg]
1100
2500
2300
2800
1100
2500
2300
2800
1100
2500
2300
2800
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/23
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK40
Fig. 30: Available circuit options for switchgear/generator panel type 8BK40
8BK40 switchgear up to 17.5 kV
PanelWithdraw-ableparts
Fixed parts Meteringpanel
Busbarmodules
Sectionalizer Bus riser panel
8BK40 generator vacuum c.b. panel
Variants Additional parts Optional parts
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/24
Generator circuit breaker unit8BK41, air-insulated
From 7.2 to 17.5 kV Air-insulated Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad Withdrawable vacuum breaker For indoor installation
Specific features
One cubicle 8BK40 per generator phase Circuit breaker mounted on horizontally
moving truck Suitable for installation in walk-in switch-
gear containers Antimagnetic sheet steel for frames,
partitions and barriers
Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel
All switching operations behind closeddoors which are part of the interlocking
Positive and robust mechanical interlocks
Complete protection against contactwith live parts
Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenancefree vacuum circuit-
breaker
Tolerance to environment
Sealed metal enclosure with optionalgaskets
Complete corrosion protection and tropi-calization of all parts
Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy-insulatorswith high tracking resistance
Performance ranges
Rated voltages from 7.2 to 17.5 kV Rated short-circuit breaking currents
up to 80 kA Rated currents up to 12.000 A Generator ratings up to
220 MVA at 10.5 kV285 MVA at 13.8 kV325 MVA at 15.75 kV
Applications
Combined-cycle power plants Hydro and pumped-storage power plants Heating and general industrial power
plants
Installation
The generator c. b. unit 8BK41 is shippeddivided into three single cubicles on stablewooden palletts which are suitable for roll-ing and forklift handling. These cubicles arebolted or spot-welded to channel iron sec-tions embedded in a flat and level concretefloor. Circuit breakers are shipped mountedon their trucks in one packing unit.For preliminary dimensions and weights,see Fig. 32.
Fig. 31: Metal-clad generator c. b. unit type 8BK41 (inter-cubicle partition removed)
Fig. 32
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK41
7.2
3 x 1200
2500
2300
3 x 2800
Rated voltage
Width
Height
Depth
Approx. weightincl. breaker
Weights and dimensions
17.5[kV]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg]
3 x 1200
2500
2300
3 x 2800
3 x 1200
2500
2300
3 x 2800
3 x 1200
2500
2300
3 x 2800
12 15
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/25
Fig. 33
Fig. 34: Available circuit options for generator c. b. unit type 8BK41
Air-insulated SwitchgearType 8BK41
Basic equipment Standard equipment Maximum equipment
Vacuum circuit breaker,type 3AH on truck
Isolating contacts
Grounding switch(optionally make-proof)
Voltage transfomer
Protective capacitor
Grounding switch withremanence switchingcapacity
Lightning arrester
Generator-side CT
Transfomer-side CT
9
8
7
6
541
2
3
12
6
2
4
12
6
2
4
5
3
12
6
2
4
5
3
9
7
8
4000[A]
6300[A]
–
–
–
8000[A]
––
––
––
–
10000[A]
–––
–––
–––
––
12500[A]
7.2
Technical data
Ratedvoltage
Lightningimpulsetestvoltage
Powerfrequencytestvoltage
Rated short-circuit-breakingcurrent/short timecurrent
kA [rms]
Ratedshort-circuit-makingcurrent
[kA]
Ratedcurrent
40506380
40506380
40506380
506380
20
28
36
38
60
75
95
95
12
15
17.5
110150190225
110150190225
110150190225
150190225
[kV] [kV][kV]
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/26
Gas-insulated switchgeartype 8DC11
From 3.6 up to 24 kV Triple-pole primary enclosure SF6-insulated Vacuum circuit breakers, fixed-mounted Hermetically-sealed, welded, stainless-
steel switchgear enclosure Three-position disconnector as busbar
disconnector and feeder earthing switch Make-proof grounding with
vacuum circuit breaker Width 600 mm for all versions
up to 24 kV Plug-in, single-pole, solid-insulated bus-
bars with outer conductive coating Cable termination with external cone
connection system to DIN 47 636and CEN HD50651
Operator safety
Safe-to-touch and hermetically-sealedprimary enclosure
All high-voltage parts, including the cablesealing ends, busbars and voltage trans-formers are surrounded by groundedlayers or metal enclosures
Capacitive voltage indication for check-ing for ”dead“ state
Operating mechanisms and auxiliaryswitches safely accessible outside theprimary enclosure (switchgear enclo-sure)
Type-tested enclosure and interrogationinterlocking provide high degree of inter-nal arcing protection
Arc-fault-tested acc. to IEC 298 No need to interfere with the SF6-insu-
lation
Fig. 35: Gas-insulated swichgear with vacuum circuit breakers
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11
General description
Due to the excellent experience with vacu-um circuit breaker, gas-insulated switch-gear, there is a worldwide rapidly increas-ing demand of this kind of switchgear evenin the so-called low-range field.The 8DC11 is the result of the economicalcombination of the SF6-insulation and thevacuum technology. The insulating gas SF6is used for internal insulation only; circuitinterruption takes place in standard vacu-um breaker bottles. The safety for the per-sonnel and the environment is maximized.The 8DC11 is completely maintenance-free. The welded gas-tight enclosure ofthe primary part assures an endurance of30 years without any gasworks.
Operational reliability
Hermetically-sealed primary enclosurefor protection against environmentaleffects (dirt, moisture and insects androdents). Degree of protection IP65
Operating mechanism componentsmaintenancefree in indoor environment(DIN VDE 0670 Part 1000)
Breaker-operating mechanisms accessi-ble outside the enclosure (primary enclo-sure)
Inductive voltage transformer metal-enclosed for plug-in mounting outsidethe main circuit
Toroidal-core current transformerslocated outside the primary enclosure,i.e. free of dielectric stress
Complete switchgear interlocking withmechanical interrogation interlocks
Welded switchgear enclosure, perma-nently sealed
Minimum fire contribution Installation independent of attitude for
feeders without HRC fuses Corrosion protection for all climates
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/27
Fig. 36: Cross section through switchgear type 8DC11
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11
Fig. 37: Principle of gas monitoring (with ”Ready for service“ indicator)
1. Modular design and compactdimensions
The 8DC switchboards consist of: The maintenancefree SF6-gas-insulated
switching module is three-phase encap-sulated and contains vacuum circuitbreaker and 3 position selector switch(ON/OFF/READY TO EARTH)
Parts for which single-phase encapsula-tion is essential are safe to touch, easilyaccessible and not located in the switch-ing module, e.g. current and potentialtransformers
The busbars are even single-phaseencapsulated, i.e. they are insulated bysilicone rubber with an outer groundedcoating. The plugable design guaranteesa high degree of flexibility and makesalso the installation of busbar c.t.s. andp.t.s. simple.
2. Factory-assembled well-proven test-ed components
A switchgear based on well-proven compo-nents!The 8DC switchgear design is based onassembling methods and componentswhich have been used for years in our SF6-insulated Ring Main Units (RMU). For ex-ample, the stainless-steel switchgear en-closure is hermetically-sealed by weldingwithout any gaskets. Bushings for the bus-bar, cable and PT connection are welded inthis enclosure, as well as the bursting disc,which is installed for pressure relief in theunlikely event of an internal fault. Siemenshas had experience with this techniquesince 1982 because 50,000 RMUs are run-ning troublefree.Cable plugs with the so-called outer-conesystem have been on the market for manyyears.The gas pressure monitoring system is nei-ther affected by temperature fluctuationsnor by pressure fluctuations and showsclearly whether the switchpanel is ”readyfor service“ or not. The monitor is magnet-ically coupled to an internal gas-pressurereference cell, mechanical penetrationthrough the housing is not required. A de-sign safe and reliable and, of course, well-proven in our RMUs.The vacuum circuit breaker, i.e. the vacu-um interrupters and the drive mechanism,is also used in our standard switchboards.The driving force for the primary contactsof the vacuum interrupters is transferredvia metal bellows into the SF6-gas-filledenclosure. A technology that has been suc-cessfully in operation in more than 100,000vacuum interrupters over 20 years.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
34
5
67
89
10
11 12
13
14
14
2
15
15
Low-voltage compartmentBusbar voltage transformer
Busbar current transformer
Busbar
SF6-filled enclosure
Three-position switch
Three-position switchoperating mechanism
Circuit-breaker operatingmechanismCircuit-breaker(Vacuum interrupter)
Current transformers
Double cable connectionwith T-plugs
PT-disconnector
Voltage transformers
Cable
Pressure relief duct
5
6
74
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signalling contact
Magnet
”Ready for service“ indicator
Pressure cell
Red indicator: Not ready
Green indicator: Ready
Magnetic coupling
Stainless-steelenclosure filled withSF6 gas at 0.5 bar(gauge) at 20 °C
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/28
3. Current and potential transformersas per user’s application
A step forward in switchgear design with-out any restriction to the existing system!New switchgear developments are some-times overdesigned with the need for high-ly sophisticated secondary monitoring andprotection equipment, because current-and potential-measuring devices are usedwith limited rated outputs.The result:Limited application in distribution systemsdue to interface problems with existingdevices; difficult operation and resetting ofparameters.The Siemens 8DC switchgear has no re-strictions. Current and potential transform-ers with conventional characteristics areavailable for all kinds of protection require-ments. They are always fitted outside theSF6-gas-filled container in areas of single-pole accessibility, the safe-to-touch designof both makes any kind of setting and test-ing under all service conditions easy.Current transformers can be installed inthe cable connection compartment at thebushings and, if required additionally, atthe cables (inside the cable connectioncompartment). Busbar CTs for measuringand protection can be placed around thesilicone-rubber-insulated busbars in anypanel.Potential transformers are of the metal-clad plugable design. Busbar PTs aredesigned for repeated tests with 80% ofthe rated power-frequency withstand volt-age, cable PTs can be isolated from thelive parts by means of a disconnectiondevice which is part of the SF6-gas-filledswitching module. This allows high-voltagetesting of the switchboard with AC and thecable with DC without having to removethe PTs.
4. No gas work at site and simplifiedinstallation
The demand for reliable, economical andmaintenancefree switchgear is increasingmore and more in all power supply sys-tems. Industrial companies and power sup-ply utilities are aware of the high invest-ment and service costs needed to keep areliable network running. Preventive main-tenance must be carried out by trained andcostly personnel.A modern switchgear design should notonly reduce the investment costs, also theservice costs in the long run!The Siemens 8DC switchgear has beendeveloped to fulfill those requirements.The modular concept with the mainte-nancefree units does not call for installa-tion specialists and expensive testing andcommissioning procedures. The switchingmodule with the circuit breaker and thethree-position isolator is sealed for life bygas-tight welding without any gaskets.All other high-voltage components are con-nected by means of plugs, a technologywell-known from cable plugs with long-lasting service and proven experience.All cables will be connected by cable plugswith external cone connection system.In case of XLPE cables, several manufac-turers even offer cable plugs with an outerconductive coating (also standard for thebusbars). Paper-insulated mass-impregnat-ed cables can be connected as well byRaychem heat-shrinkable sealing ends andadapters.The pluggable busbars and PTs do notrequire work on SF6 system at site. In-stallation costs are considerably reduced(all components are pluggable) because,contrary to standard GIS, even the siteHV tests can be omitted. Factory-testedquality is ensured thanks to simplifiedinstallation without any final adjustmentsor difficult assembly work.
5. Minimum space and maintenance-free, cost-saving factors
Panel dimensions reduced, cable-connec-tion compartment enlarged!The panel width of 600 mm and the depthof 1225 mm are just half of the truth. Moreimportant is the maximized size of the 8DCswitchgear cable-connection compartment.The access is from the switchgear frontand the gap from the cable terminal to theswitchgear floor amounts to 740 mm.There is no need for any aisle behind theswitchgear lineup and a cable cellar is su-perfluous. A cable trench saves civil engi-neering costs and is fully sufficient withcompact dimensions, such as width 500mm and depth 600 mm.Consequently, the costs for the plot of landand civil work are reduced. Even more,a substation can be located closer to theconsumer which can also solve cablerouting problems.
Busbar
Features
Single-pole, plug-in version Made of round-bar copper, silicon-
insulated Busbar connection with cross pieces
and end pieces, silicon-insulated Field control with the aid of electro-
conductive layers on the silicon-rubberinsulation (both inside and outside)
External layers earthed with the switch-gear enclosure to permit access
Intensive to dirt and condensation Shock-hazard protected in form of metal
covering Switchgear can be extended or panels
replaced without affecting the SF6 gasenclosures.
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11
Fig. 38: Plug-in busbar (front view with removed low-voltage panel)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/29
Optional equipment indicated by means of broken linescan be installed/omitted in part or whole.
Vacuum circuit breakerpanel and three-positiondisconnector
Disconnector panelwith three-positiondisconnector
Switch-disconnectorpanel with three-positionswitch disconnectorand HV HCR fuses
Busbar section with2 three-positiondisconnectors andvacuum circuit breakerin one panel
Busbar make-proofgrounding switch
Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector panel Switch-disconnectorpanel with fuses
1)
Busbar section Busbar make-proofearthing switch
Basic versions
Fig. 41: Switchpanel versions
1) Current transformer; electrically, this is assigned to the switchpanel,its actual physical location, however, is on the adjacent panel.
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11
5 6 7
1
4 2 3 1
23
4567
Primary part SF6-insulated,with vacuum interrupterPart of swtichgear enclosureOperating-mechanism box(open)Fixed contact elementPole supportVacuum interrupterMovable contact elementMetal bellowsOperating mechanism
8 9
89
Fig. 39: Vacuum circuit-breaker (open on operating-mechanism side)
Fig. 40: Vacuum circuit-breaker (sectional view)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/30
[mm]
[mm]
[mm][mm]
[kg][kg]
600
Weights and dimensions
2250
12252400
7001200
Width
Height
Depth single-busbardouble-busbar
Weight single-busbar(approx.) double-busbar
Fig. 42: Technical data of switchgear type 8DC11
Fig. 43
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11
Climate and ambient conditions
The 8DC11 fixed-mounted circuit breakeris fully enclosed and entirely unaffectedby ambient conditions. All medium-voltage switching devices
are enclosed in a stainless-steel housing,which is welded gas-tight and filled withSF6 gas
Live parts outside the switchgear enclo-sure are single-pole enclosed
There are no points at which leakagecurrents of high-voltage potentials areable to flow off to ground
All essential components of the operat-ing mechanism are made of noncorrod-ing materials
Ambient temperature range:–5 to +55°C.
Internal arc test
Tests have been carried out with 8DC11switchgear in order to verify its behaviorunder conditions of internal arcing.The resistance to internal arcing complieswith the requirements of: IEC 298 AA DIN VDE 0670 Part 601, 9.84These guidelines have been applied inaccordance with PEHLA Guideline No. 4.
Protection against electric shockand the ingress of water and solidforeign bodies
The 8DC11 fixed-mounted circuit breakeroffer the following degrees of protection: IP3XD for external enclosure IP65 for high-voltage components of
switchpanels without HV HRC fusesin accordance with:– DIN VDE 0470 Part 1– IEC 298 and 529– DIN VDE 0670 Part 6
Cable connection systems
Features
8DC11 switchgear for thermoplastic-insulated cables with cross setionsup to 630 mm2
Standard cable termination height of740 mm
High connection point, simplifyingassembly and cable-testing work
Phase reversal simple, if necessary,due to symmetrical arrangement ofcable sealing ends
Cover panel of cable termination com-partment earthed
Nonconnected feeders:– Isolate– Ground– Secure against re-energizing(e.g. with padlock)
Types of cable termination
Circuit-breaker and disconnector panelswith cable T-plugs for ASG 36-400 bush-ings, with M16 terminal thread accordingto DIN 47 636 Part 6.Switch disconnector panels with elbowcable plugs for ASG 24-250 bushings, withplug-in connection according to DIN 47 636Parts 3 and 4.
7.2Rated voltage
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitbreaking currentRated short-timecurrent, 3s
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Rated busbar current
Rated feeder current
Rated current of switch-disconnector panelswith fuses
Technical data
20
60
25
63
1250
1250
100
12
28
75
25
63
1250
1250
100
36
95
25
63
1250
1250
100
15
50
125
25
40
1250
1250
100
24
38
95
25
63
1250
1250
100
17.5[kV]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
[A]
[A]
max.
max.
max. fuse
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/31
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11
Fig. 45: Types of cable termination, outer cone system
Fig. 44: Double busbar: Back-to-back arrangement (cross section)
Single cable Double cable Termination for surge arrester Terminationfor switch discon-nector panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Low voltage compartment
Operating mechanism
Cable connection
Current transformer
Panel link
Busbar
Gas compartment
Three-position switch
Voltage transformer
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/32
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
Gas-insulated switchgeartype 8DA/8DB10
Single-busbar: type 8DADouble-busbar: type 8DB
From 7.2 to 40.5 kV Single- and double-busbar Gas-insulated Type-tested Metal-clad (encapsulated) Compartmented Fixed-mounted vacuum breaker
Specific features
Practically maintenancefree compactswitchgear for the most severe serviceconditions
Fixed-mounted maintenancefree vacuumbreakers
Only two moving parts and two dynamicseals in gas enclosure of each pole
Feeder grounding via circuit breaker Only 600 mm bay width and identical
dimensions from 7.2 to 40.5 kV
Safety and reliability
Safe to touch – hermetically-sealedgrounded metal enclosure.
All HV and internal drive parts mainte-nancefree for 20 years
Minor gas service only after 10 years Arc-fault-tested Single-phase encapsulation –
no phase-to-phase arcing All switching operations from dead-front
operating panel Live line test facility on panel front Drive mechanism and c.t. secondaries
freely and safely accessible Fully insulated cable and busbar connec-
tions available Positive mechanical interlocking External parts of instrument transform-
ers free of dielectric stresses.
Tolerance to environment
Hermetically-sealed enclosure protectsall high-voltage parts from the environ-ment
Installation independent of altitude Corrosion protection for all climates.
General description
The switchgear type 8DA10 represents thesuccessful generation of gas-insulated me-dium-voltage switchgear with fixed-mount-ed, maintenancefree vacuum circuit break-ers. The insulating gas SF6 is used forinternal insulation only; circuit interruptiontakes place in standard vacuum breakerbottles.
1. Encapsulation
All high-voltage conductors and interrupterelements are enclosed in two identicalcast-aluminum housings, which are ar-ranged at 90° angles to each other. Thealuminum alloy used is corrosionfree.The upper container carries the copperbusbars with its associated vacuum-pottedepoxy insulators, and the three-way selec-tor switch for the feeder with the threepositions ON/ISOLATED/GROUNDINGSELECTED. The other housing containsthe vacuum breaker interrupter. The twohousings are sealed against each other,and against the cable connecting area byarc-proof and gas-tight epoxy bushingswith O-ring seals. Busbar enclosure andbreaker enclosures form separate gascompartments.The hermetical sealing of all HV compo-nents prevents contamination, moisture,and foreign objects of any kind – the lead-ing cause of arcing faults – from enteringthe switchgear. This reduces the require-ment for maintenance and the probabilityof a fault due to the above to practicallyzero. All moving parts and items requiringinspection and occasional lubrication arereadily accessible.
2. Insulation medium
Sulfur-hexafluoride (SF6) gas is the primeinsulation medium in this swichgear.Vacuum-potted cast-resin insulators andbushings supplement the gas and canwithstand the operating voltage in the ex-tremely unlikely case of a total gas loss ina compartment. The SF6 gas serves addi-tionally as corrosion inhibiter by keepingoxygen away from the inner components.The guaranteed leakage rate of any gascompartment is less than 1% per year.Thus no scheduled replenishment of gas isrequired. Each compartment has itsown gas supervision by contact-pressuregauges.
3. Three-position switch and circuitbreaker
The required isolation of any feeder fromthe busbar, and its often desired groundingis provided by means of a sturdy, mainte-nancefree three-way switch arranged be-tween the busbars and the vacuum break-er bottles. This switch is mechanicallyinterlocked with the circuit breaker. Theoperations ”On/Isolated“ and ”Isolated/Grounding selected“ are carried out bymeans of two different rotary levers. Thegrounding of the feeder is completed byclosing the circuit breaker. To facilitatereplacement of a vacuum tube with thebusbars live, the switch is located entirelywithin the busbar compartment.The vacuum circuit breakers used are ofthe type 3AH described on pages 2/66 ffof this section. Mounted in the gas-insulat-ed switchgear, the operating mechanism isplaced at the switchgear front and the vac-uum interrupters are located inside the gasfilled enclosures. The number of operatingcycles is 30,000. Since any switching thatoccurs arc is contained within the vacuumtube, contamination of the insulating gas isnot possible.
4. Instrument transformers
Toroidal-type current transformers withmultiple secondary wingdings are arrangedoutside the metallic enclosure around thecable terminations. Thus there is no highpotential exposed on these c.t.s and sec-ondary connections are readily accessible.All commonly used burden and accuracyratings are available.Bus metering and measuring are by induc-tive, gas-insulated potential transformerswhich are plugged into fully insulated andgas-tight bushings on top of the switch-gear.
5. Feeder connections
All commonly used solid-dielectric insulat-ed single- and three-phase cables can beconnected conveniently to the breaker en-closures from below. Normally, fully insu-lated plug-in terminations are used. Also,fully insulated and gas-insulated busbarsystems of the DURESCA/GAS LINK typecan be used. The latter two terminationmethods maintain the fully insulated andsafe-to-touch concept of the entire switch-gear, rendering the terminations mainte-nance-free as well.In special cases, air-insulated conventionalcable connection is available.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/33
8DB10
12345
6
7
8
9
10
13
12
11
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
Fig. 46: Schematic cross section for switchgear type 8DA10, single-busbar
Fig. 47: Schematic cross section for switchtgear type 8DB10, double-busbar
Low-voltage cubicleSecondary equipmentBusbarCast-aluminumDisconnectorOperating mechanism andinterlocking devicefor three-position switchThree-position switchC. B. pole with upper and lowerbushingsC. B. operating mechanismVacuum interrupterConnectionCurrent transformerRack
8DA10
123456
78
910111213
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
13
12
11
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/34
6. Low-voltage cabinet
All feeder-related electronic protectiondevices, auxiliary relays, and measuringand indicating devices are installed in met-al-enclosed low-voltage cabinets on top ofeach breaker bay. A central terminal stripof the lineup type is also located there forall LV customer wiring. PCB-type protec-tion relays and individual-type protectiondevices are normally used, depending onthe number of protective functions re-quired.
7. Interlocking system
The circuit breaker is fully interlocked withthe isolator/grounding switch by means ofsolid mechanical linkages. It is impossibleto operate the isolator with the breakerclosed, or to remove the switch from theGROUND SELECTED position with thebreaker closed. Actual grounding is donevia the circuit breaker itself.Busbar grounding is possible with theavailable make-proof grounding switch.If a bus sectionalizer or bus coupler is in-stalled, busbar grounding can be done viathe three-way switch and the correspond-ing circuit breaker of these panels.The actual isolator position is positivelydesplayed by rigid mechanical indicators.
Switchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar
The double-busbar switchgear is devel-oped from the components of the switch-gear type 8DA10. Two three-positionswitches are used for the selection of thebusbars. They have their own gasfilledcomponents. The second busbar system islocated phasewise behind the first busbarsystem.The bay width of the switchgear remainsunchanged, depth and height of each bayare increased (see dimension drawingsFig. 49).For parallel bus couplings, only one bay isrequired.
Fig. 48: Dimensions of switchgear type 8DA10, single-busbar
Fig. 49: Dimensions of switchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
*) dependent on height of frame
850 *
*
2350(2550*)
2660
1525
600
2250
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/35
Degrees of protection
Degree of protection IP 65:By the nature of the enclosure, all high-voltage-carrying parts are totally protectedagainst contact with live parts, dust andwater jets.Degree of protection IP 3XD:The operating mechanism and the low-voltage cubicle have degree of protectionIP 3XD against contact with live parts withobjects larger than 1 mm in diameter. Pro-tection against dripping water is optionallyavailable. Space heaters inside the operat-ing mechanism and the LV cabinet areavailable for tropical climates.
Installation
The switchgear bays are shipped in prefab-ricated assemblies up to 5 bays wide onsolid wooden pallets, suitable for rolling,skidding and fork-lift handling. Double-bus-bar sections are shipped as single or dou-ble bays. The switchgear is designed forindoor operation; outdoor prefabricated en-closures are available. Each bay is set ontoembedded steel profiles in a flat concretefloor, with suitable cutouts for the cablesor busbars. All conventional cables can beconnected, either with fully insulated plug-in terminations (preferred), or with conven-tional air-insulated stress cones. Fully insu-lated busbars are also connected directly,without any HV-carrying parts exposed.Operating aisles are required in front ofand (in case of double-busbar systems)behind the switchgear lineup.
Fig. 50
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
Fig. 51
Fig. 52
Ambient temperature and current-carrying capacity:
40 °C
35 °C
–5 °C
30 °C
35 °C
40 °C
45 °C
50 °C
Rated ambient temperature (peak)
Rated 24-h mean temperature
At elevated ambient temperatures,the equipment must be derated as follows(expressed in percent of current at ratedambient conditions).
110%
105%
100%
90%
80%
Minimum temperature
=
=
=
=
=
Weights and dimensions
600
6001150
[mm]
[mm][mm]
[mm][mm]
[kg][kg]
Width
Height
Depth
Weight per bay
single-busbardouble-busbar
single-busbardouble-busbar
single-busbardouble-busbar
22502350/2550
15252660
(8DA)(8DB)
(8DA)(8DB)
(8DA)(8DB)
Rated voltage7.2/12/15 kV
Plug size
to 240
120 to 300
Cable cross sections for plug-in terminations
1
2
3
4
17.5/24 kV 36 kV
Cable cross section[mm2] [mm2] [mm2]
400 to 630
to 185
95 to 300
400 to 630
–
to 185
240 to 500
up to 1200 up to 1200 up to 1200
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/36
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
Fig. 53
or
Options for circuit-breaker feeder ofswitchgear type 8DA10, single-busbar
Cable or barconnection,nondisconnectibleor disconnectible
or
or
or
or
Voltagetransformer,nondisconnectibleor disconnectible
Make-proofearthingswitch
Busbar currenttransformer
Busbar accessories
Mounted onbreaker housing
Mounted on currenttransformer housing
Mounted onpanel connections
Panelconnection options
Totally gas orsolid-insulated bar
3 x plug-in cablesizes 1 or 2
3 x plug-in cablesize 3
5 x plug-in cablesizes 1 or 2
2 x plug-in cablesizes 1 to 3 withplug-in voltagetransformer
Totally solid-insulatedbar with plug-involtage transformer
Air-insulated cabletermination
Air-insulated bar
Surgearrester
Currenttransformer
1 x plug-in cablesizes 1 to 3 Mounted on
panel connections
Mounted onpanel connections
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
Mounted onpanel connections
Mounted onpanel connections
Mounted onpanel connections
Sectionalizerwithout additionalspace required
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/37
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
Fig. 54
Options for circuit-breaker feeder ofswitchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar
or
Mounted onpanel connections
Currenttransformer
Voltagetransformer,nondisconnectible
Voltagetransformer,disconnectible
Cable or barconnection,nondisconnectible
Make-proofearthingswitch
Sectionalizerwithout additionalspace required
Busbar currenttransformer
Cable or barconnection,disconnectible
Totally gas orsolid-insulated bar
3 x plug-in cablesizes 1 or 2
3 x plug-in cablesize 3
5 x plug-in cablesizes 1 or 2
2 x plug-in cablesizes 1 to 3 withplug-in voltagetransformer
Totally solid insulatedbar with plug-involtage transformer
Air-insulated cabletermination
Air-insulated bar
1 x plug-in cablesizes 1 to 3
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
Surgearrester
or
or
orand
BB1 BB2
BB1 BB2
BB1 BB2
BB1 BB2 BB1BB2
BB1 BB2 BB1BB2
orBB1 BB2
or
Mounted onpanel connections
Mounted onpanel connections
Mounted onpanel connections
Mounted onbreaker housing
Mounted on currenttransformer housing
BB1BB2
Busbar accessories
BB1BB2
orand
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/38
SF6-insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10
Fig. 55
7.2
20
60
40
110
3150
2500
12
28
75
36
95
110
15
50
125
24
38
95
17.5[kV]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
[A]
Technical data
Rated voltage
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitbreaking currentand rated short-timecurrent 3s,
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Rated current busbar
Rated current feeder
max.
max.
max.
max.
36 40.5
40
110
40
3150
2500
3150
2500
110
3150
2500
110
3150
2500
110
2500
2500
80
2500
2500
70 80
170 180
31.5404040
For further information please contact:
++ 49 - 91 31-73 46 39
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/39
Generator circuit breakermodule type 8FG10
From 7.2 to 17.5 kV Air-insulated Metal-enclosed
Applications
Combined-cycle power plants Hydro and pumped-storage power plants Heating and general industrial power
plants
Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel
All switching operations behind closeddoors which are part of the interlocking
Positive and robust mechanicalinterlocks
Complete protection against contactwith live parts
Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenancefree vacuum breaker
Tolerance to environment
Sealed metal enclosure with optionalgaskets
Complete corrosion protection and tropi-calization of all parts
Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy-insulatorswith high tracking resistance
Specific features
Arrangement of circuit breaker anddisconnector in the horizontal bus runwithout current loops
Suitable for indoor or outdoorinstallation
Technical data
Rated voltages from 7.2 to 17.5 kV Rated short-circuit breaking currents
up to 80 kA Rated currents up to 12.500 A Generator ratings up to
220 MVA at 10.5 kV285 MVA at 13.8 kV325 MVA at 15.75 kV
7.2
3200
3200
6300
10,500
Rated voltage
Width
Height
Depth
Approx. weight incl. breaker
Weights and dimensions
[kV]
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
[kg]
12
3200
3200
6300
10,500
15
3200
3200
6300
10,500
17.5
3200
3200
6300
10,500
Generator SwitchgearType 8FG10
Fig. 56: Metal-enclosed generator c. b. module type 8FG10 with vacuum circuit breakers 3AH
Fig. 57: Cross section through generator c. b. module type 8FG10
Fig. 58
Generator Transformer
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/40
Generator SwitchgearType 8FG10
Fig. 60: Circuit options: Generator c. b. module type 8FG10
Fig. 59: Ratings for generator c.b. module type 8FG10
Generator side Transformer side
3AH vacuumcircuit breaker
Disconnector
Grounding switch(optionally make-proof)
Voltage transformer
Protective capacitor
Grounding switchwith remanenceswitching capacity
Generator-side CT
Transformer-side CT
Lightning arrester
Disconnector for startingequipment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Maximumcomplement
7 8
9
Frequentcomplement
6
5
2
Standard
3
4
1
10
10
–––
–––
–––
––
12500[A]
10000[A]
––
––
––
–
8000[A]
–
–
–
4000[A]
6300[A]
Ratedshort-circuit-makingcurrent
[kA]
110150190225
110150190225
110150190225
150190225
Rated short-circuit-breakingcurrent/short timecurrent
kA [rms]
40506380
40506380
40506380
506380
Power-frequencytestvoltage
20
28
36
38
[kV]
7.2
Technical data
Ratedvoltage
Ratedcurrent
12
15
17.5
[kV]
Lightning-impulsetestvoltage
60
75
95
95
[kV]
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/41
Containerized switchgear andcontrolgear in modular design
Projects in developing countries or on fast-track schedules frequently do not allow forthe use of conventionally installed electri-cal equipment due to the lack of facilities,skilled labor, or simply time. Modular con-struction of the plants has been used suc-cessfully in these cases, including the pre-fabrication of electrical substations, andother control and automation equipmentcenters. Recognized advantages of thisconcept are: Fabrication of critical electrical subsys-
tems under controlled conditions atmanufacturer’s location
Pretested and commissioned subsys-tems, installed ready for connection offield cables
Shifting of some detailed engineeringto the manufacturer
Containerized Switchgear
Fig. 61: Packaged Substation Hauted el Hamra in the desert Sahara
This results in lower overall constructionperiods and reduced risks in engineeringand scheduling. Direct cost savings arepossible.A variety of standardized and custom-engineered containers is available fromSiemens to meet these requirements.Basically, they are metal-enclosed weather-proof enclosures in self-supporting design,sized to optimally house the specified elec-trical and auxiliary equipment. The contain-ers are outfitted per customer’s specifica-tions on the manufacturer’s premisesunder his direct supervision and are thenshipped as single units to the jobsite. Con-tainers are installed on flat or raised-pierfoundations before the field cables areconnected and the unit is placed in service.Examples of such prefabricated substa-tions include power distribution centers,offshore platform supply systems, pipelinecompressor supply and control stations,high-power variable-speed drive systemsupply and control equipment, diesel and
gas-turbine generating systems, tele-communications and telecontrol stationsfor remote and hostile locations, etc.For details on our standardized containerssee the following pages.
For further information please contact:
++ 49 - 68 94 - 89 12 94
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/42
Standard containers forswitchgear
Factory-assembled packagedsubstations
Walk-in switchgear containers Switchgear operated from the container
aisle
Application/General features
Versatile product range Wide range of container dimensions Ready for connection Installation in any location,
can be moved without difficulty Substations (containers) can be placed
together in rows Fully air-conditioned and pressurized
if required Special versions available, e.g. with bat-
tery compartment, personnel accomoda-tion, office space, cooking facilities,workshop, store room, standby dieselgenerator, etc.
Brief description
All containers are of the same basic con-struction. The load bearing sections are ofhot-dip galvanized steel with folded edges,and welded.The frame consists of the floor, four corneruprights and several central uprights. Theside walls consist of single panels placedbetween the central uprights.The wall panels and doors can be arrangedas required.The cross beams required for the loadpoints (e.g. where switchgear or batteriesare located) can be welded into the floorframe.Large switchgear is installed preferablythrough a temporary opening on the frontface of the substation; for this purpose oneof the uprights is bolted in position ratherthan welded.
Special features of the individualsubstation ranges
Type 8FF11 range
Wall panels in sandwich construction,with 1-mm-thick smooth outer and innersheets; fitted and clamped from outside;wall panels removable.
Inside
Outside
Wall panel
Joint plate
Fig. 62: Packaged substation type 8FF11 including complete Power Control Center
Fig. 63: Packaged substation type 8FF11 wall element construction
Fig. 64: Packaged substation type 8FF12 wall element construction
Containerized Switchgear
Inside
Outside
Wall panel
Joint plate
Ribbed steel plate
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/43
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
8 9 1011 12 13
Roof rim
Roof structure
Threaded bush fortransport frame
Filter
Central uprightwith cover strip
Crane lifting lug
Corner support
Grounding connection
Foundation reinforcement
Steel outer doorwith panic hardware
Opening bar
Wall panel
Floor structure
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Fig. 65: Packaged substation, type 8FF11
Containerized Switchgear
Fig. 66 Fig. 67: Design features; packaged substation, type 8FF11
12
3
4
56
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Wall panelsinside and outside smooth,1 mm thick, sendzimir galvanized,with primer and top coat; 60 mmthick polyester foam fillling
Switchgear floor3 x U sections, 50 mm
Cross beamsPE 120, distance betweeneach beam depending onswitchpanel arrangement
Base structurehot-dip galvanized and weldedsteel plates, with folded edges,5 mm thick
Aislecompressed impregnatedwooden floor boards,35 mm thick
Cable compartmentfor internal wiring
Continuous foundationsconcrete (supplied by customer)
Roofinside and outside trapezoidalsections 1 mm thick, sendzimirgalvanized, with primer andtop coat; 100 mm thick mineralwool filling
Roof structurehot-dip galvanized and weldedsteel plates with folded edges,4 mm thick
Type 8FF12 range
Wall panels in sandwich construction,with 1-mm-thick smooth inner sheet;exterior consisting of continuous weldedsteel sections (3 mm thick). The wall pan-els are fixed and clamped from the inside.
Type 8FF13 range
Special lightweight containers of smalldimensions.
Type 8FF14 range
Special large-dimension container for majorprojects.
150 kg/m2
500 kg/m2
300 kg/m2
RAL 1019RAL 10150.41 W/m2 °K0.56 W/m2 °K
IP 54DIN 4102approx. 10 yearsapprox. 20 years
RoofFloor structureWall panelsColour ofload bearing partswall panelK-value of roofK-value of wall panels,doorsDegree of protectionFire resistanceCorrosion resistanceOperating life
Permitted load
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/44
Order No.suffixes
Length
Height
Width
substationtype
54321
4321
4321
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 F F 1
1173410236873872405742
Internaldimensions[mm]
3500325027502500
3420320629962778
6. Digit
8. Digit
7. Digit
5. Digit
From switchgear flooringor aisle surface
1 = With smooth individual outer wall panels2 = With continuous welded steel section outer wall
Order No.suffixes
Length
Height
Width
Substationtype
54321
4321
4321
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 88 F F 1
1173410236873872405742
Internaldimensions*[mm]
3500325027502500
3420320629962778
*External dimensions = internal dimensions + xfor length (Floor structure) x = 208 mm
(Roof structure) x = 250 mmfor height x = 520 mmfor width x = 208 mm
–
Fig. 68: Determining Order Nos. for packaged substation containers
Fig. 69: Example: Plan view of packaged station (Container), type 8FF11
Heater HeaterFilter fan Filter fan Power socketLight switch
Battery
Battery chargerFilter
Distribution box
2778
11734
Emergency lightingFluorescent lamps
SwitchboardAuxiliarytrans-former
Dimensions in mm
Containerized Switchgear
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/45
60°≥
Containerized Switchgear
Transport
The substations can be transported byroad or ship. For loading and unloading,four crane lifting lugs are provided, boltedto the two roof crossbeams. Four diagonaltie bars are attached to each side; theseare removed after unloading.The substations are supplied ready forconnection, with all equipment installed,including the transformer.Special models in the type 8FF14 rangeabove 18 m length are split up for trans-port.
Installation
Packaged substation containers are prefer-ably installed individually, but they can alsobe arranged as shown in the illustration.If containers are combined on-site, theconnecting walls are temporary and areremoved prior to installation. For sea trans-port, the units are sealed and protectedagainst water ingress and damage of thejointing surfaces.The substation can be placed on flat con-crete or steel foundations or on raised stripor pier foundations.
Fig. 72: Substation type 8FF11 with medium-voltageand low-voltage switchgear; split double housing
Fig. 73: Substation type 8FF11 with mimic boardinstalled
Fig. 70: Substation type 8FF11 with split-type airconditioners
Fig. 71: Substation type 8FF11 with control room,fitted sun roof and exterior lighting
Fig. 75: Lifting substation by single craneFig. 74: Arrangement variations substation type 8FF1
L-shaped arrangement
Individual
Side by side
End to end
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/46
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear and Transformer Substations
General
The secondary distribution network withits basic design of ring-main systems withcounter stations as well as radial-feedtransformer substations are designed inorder to reduce network losses and toprovide an economical solution for switch-gear and transformer substations.They are installed with an extremely highnumber of units in the distribution net-work. Therefore, high standardization ofequipment is necessary and economical.The described switchgear will show suchqualities.To reduce the network losses the trans-former substations should be installeddirectly at the load centers.The transformer substations consisting ofmedium-voltage switchgear, transformersand low-voltage distribution can be de-signed as prefabricated units or singlecomponents installed in any building orrooms existing on site.Due to the large number of units in thenetworks the most economical solution forsuch substations should have climate-inde-pendent and maintenancefree equipmentso that operation of the equipment doesnot need any maintenance work during itslifetime.For such transformer substations nonex-tensible and extensible switchgear, for in-stance RMUs, have been developed usingSF6-gas as insulation and arc-quenchingmedium in the case of load-break systems(RMU), and SF6-gas insulation and vacuumas arc-quenching medium in the case ofextensible modular switchgear, consistingof load break panels with or without fuses,circuit-breaker panels and measuringpanels.Siemens developed RMUs in accordancewith these requirements.Ring-main units type 8DJ10, 8DJ20,8DJ30, 8DJ40 and 8DH10 are type-tested,factory-finished, metal-enclosed, SF6-insu-lated indoor switchgear installations. Theyverifiably meet all the demands encoun-tered in network operation by virtue of thefollowing features:
Features
Maximum personnel safety
High-grade steel housing and cable con-nection compartment tested for resist-ance to internal arcing
Logical interlocking Guided operating procedures Capacitive voltage indication integrated
in unit Safe testing for dead state on the
closed-off operating front Locked, grounded covers for fuse as-
sembly and cable connection compart-ments
Safe, reliable, maintenancefree
Corrosion-resistant hermetically weldedhigh-grade steel housing without sealsand resistant to pressure cycles
Insulating gas retaining its insulating andquenching properties throughout theservice life
Single-phase encapsulation outsidethe housing
Clear indication of readiness foroperation, unaffected by temperatureor altitude
Complete protection of the switchdisconnector/fuse combination, evenin the event of thermal overload ofthe HV HRC fuse (thermal protectionfunction)
Reliable, maintenancefree switchingdevices
Excellent resistance to ambient conditions
Robust, corrosion-resistant and mainte-nancefree operating mechanisms
Maintenancefree, all-climate, safe-to-touch cable terminations
Creepage-proof and free from partialdischarges
Maintenancefree, safe-to-touch,all-climate HV HRC fuse assembly
Environmental compatibility
Simple, problemfree disposal of theSF6 gas
Housing material can be recycled bynormal methods
Standards
The fixed-mounted ring-main unitstype 8DJ10, 8DJ20, 8DJ30, 8DJ40 and8DH10 comply with the followingstandards:
In accordance with the harmonizationagreement reached by the IEC memberstates, that their national specificationsconform to IEC Publication No. 298.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31-73 46 36
IEC 694
IEC 298
IEC 129
IEC 282
IEC 265–1
IEC 420
IEC 56
IEC Standard VDE Standard
VDE 0670 part 1000
VDE 0670 part 6
VDE 0670 part 2
VDE 0670 part 4
VDE 0670 part 301
VDE 0670 part 303
VDE 0670 part 101–107
Fig. 76
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/47
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear and Transformer Substations
Fig. 77: Secondary Distribution Network
G
RMU for transformersubstationsType 8DJ
Secondarydistribution
Primarydistribution
Extensible switchgearfor consumersubstationsType 8DH or 8AA
Extensible switchgearfor substations withcircuit breakersType 8DH or 8AA
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/48
Nonextensible
Codes,standards
Type ofinstallation
Insulation Enclosure Switchingdevice
Metal -enclosedfixed-mounted Load-break switch
Medium-voltageindoor switchgear,type-testedaccording to:IEC 298DIN VDE 0670, Part 6
Extensible
SF6 -gas-insulated
Air-insulated Metal-enclosedLoad-break switchVacuumc. b.Measurement panels
Switchgear
Transformer-substations Execution ofthe transformer substation
Prefabricated, factory-assembled substation
Load-break switchVacuumc. b.Measurement panels
Metal -enclosedfixed-mounted
SF6-gas-insulated
Secondary DistributionSelection Matrix
Fig. 78
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/49
3s1s
2/50
2/53
2/58
2/62
Switchgeartype
RMU for transformersubstations 8DJ10
Single panel, fusedfor one transformer
8DJ20
Ultracompact RMUup to 12 kV
8DJ30
8DJ40RMU for extreme lowsubstation housings
Consumer substationc. b. switchgear 8DH10
8AA20
Technical data Page
InsulationBIL7.2/12[kV]
17.5/24[kV]
Design voltageInsulation
[kV]
Maximum ratedshort-time current
[kA] [kA]
Rated current
Busbar max.[A]
Feeder[A]
60/75 95/125
60/75 95/125
60/75 95/125
7.2–24
7.2–24
7.2–12
7.2–24
25 20
25 20
25 20
20 20
630 up to 630
Consumer substationc. b. switchgear
25 20
20 11.5
20 11.5
16 9.3
7.2–15
17.5–24
7.2–12
17.5–24
1250 up to 630
1000 up to 1000
630 up to 630
Packagesubstation type(Example)
8FB12/64
2/56
2/54
Page
Application
8FB108FB118FB12
8FB158FB168FB17
Type of housing
630 kVA
up to 1000/1250 kVA
Transformerrating
8DJ108DJ208DJ308DJ40
HV-sectionMedium-voltageswitchgear type
630 up to 630
630 up to 630
630 up to 630
60/75 95/125
60/75 95/125
60/75 95/125
Secondary DistributionSelection Matrix
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/50
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ10
Fig. 79: Nonextensible RMU, type 8DJ10
Ring-main unit type 8DJ10,7.2–24 kVnonextensible, SF6-insulated
Typical use
SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed fixed-mount-ed Ring-main units (RMU) type 8DJ10 areused for outdoor transformer substationsand indoor substation rooms with a varia-bility of 25 different schemes as a standarddelivery program.More than 55,000 RMUs of type 8DJ10are in worldwide operation.
Specific features
Maintenancefree, all-climate SF6 housings have no seals Remote-controlled motor operating
mechanism for all auxiliary voltages from24 V DC to 230 V AC
Easily extensible by virtue of trouble-freereplacement of units with identical cableconnection geometry
Standardized unit variants for operator-compatible concepts
Variable transformer cable connectionfacilities
Excellent economy by virtue of ambientcondition resistant, maintenancefreecomponents
Versatile cable connection facilities,optional connection of mass-impregnat-ed or plastic-insulated cables or plugconnectors
Cables easily tested without having tobe dismantled
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/51
Fig. 81: Cross section of SF6-insulated ring-main unit 8DJ10
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ10
Fig. 82: “Three-position load-breakswitch”ON–OFF–EARTH
Rated frequency
Rated current ofcable feeders
Rated current oftransformer feeders2)
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitmaking current of cablefeeder switches
Rated short-circuitmaking current oftransformer switches
Rated short-circuit current, 1s
Ambient temperature
7.2
50/60
400/630
200
20
60
63
25
25
min. – 50max. +80
[Hz]
[A]
[A]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[kA]
[°C]
1) Higher values on request2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly
12
50/60
400/630
200
28
75
52
25
21
50/60
400/630
200
36
95
52
25
21
50/60
400/630
200
38
95
52
25
21
50/60
400/630
200
50
125
40
25
16
15 17.5 24[kV]
Technical data (rated values)1)
Rated voltage andinsulation level
min. – 50max.+80
min. – 50max. +80
min. – 50max. +80
min. – 50max. +80
Fig. 80
1
2
3
4
5
6
HRC fuse boxes
Hermetically-scaled weldedstainless steel enclosure
SF6 insulation/quenching gas
Three-position load-break switch
Feeder cable with insulatedconnection alternative withT-plug system
Maintenancefree stored energy
1
2
3
4
5
6
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/52
Fig. 83: Schemes and dimensions
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ10
Dimensions [mm]
800
800
1360
1760
1170
800
1360
1760
1630
800
1360
1760
2070
800
1360
1760
1450
800
1105
1505
1700
800
Scheme 64Scheme 61
Examples out of 25 standard schemes
Without HV HRC fuses Combinations
With integrated HV HRC fuse assembly
Dimensions [mm]
WidthDepthHeight Version with
low support frameVersion withhigh support frame
Scheme 10 Scheme 71 Scheme 81
Scheme 70
1360
1760
WidthDepthHeight Version with
low support frameVersion withhigh support frame
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/53
Single panel forone transformer feeder,type 8DJ20, 7.2–24 kVnonextensible, SF6-insulated
Typical use
SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed, fixed-mounted single panels type 8DJ20 areused for dead-end lines to feed one trans-former, e.g. instead of pole-mountedequipment, installed in substation housingsor any indoor rooms.
Specific features
Minimal dimensions Ease of operation Proven components from the
8DJ10 range Metal-enclosed All-climate Maintenancefree Capacitive voltage taps for
– incoming feeder cable– outgoing transformer feeder
Optional double cable connection Optional surge arrester connection Transformer cable connected via straight
or elbow plug Motor operating mechanism for auxiliary
voltages of 24 V DC–230 V ACFig. 84: Nonextensible single panel for transformer feeder type 8DJ20
Fig. 85
1) Higher values on request2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly
[kV]
[Hz]
[A]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[°C]
7.2
50/60
200
20
60
25
min. – 40max. +70
10
12
50/60
200
28
75
25
10
15
50/60
200
36
95
25
10
17.5
50/60
200
38
95
25
10
24
50/60
200
50
125
25
10
Rated frequency
Rated current oftransformer feeders2)
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitmaking current oftransformer switches
Rated short-circuit current, 1s
Ambient temperature
Technical data (rated values)1)
Rated voltage andinsulation level
min. – 40max. +70
min. – 40max. +70
min. – 40max.+70
min. – 40max.+70
575
760
1400
[mm]
[mm]
[mm]
Width
Depth
Height
Dimensions
Transformer spur panel
Fig. 86
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ20
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/54
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ30
Fig. 87: Nonextensible RMU, type 8DJ30
Ring-main unittype 8DJ30, 7.2–12 kVultracompact, nonextensibleSF6-insulated
Typical use
SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed, fixed-mounted Ring-main units type 8DJ30 aredesigned as ultracompact transformer sub-stations with extremly small dimensions.
Specific features
Optimized compact design Ease of cable testing by means
of bushings Test bushing covers arranged and
locked panel by panel,minimal effortlogical interlocking
Variable cable connectionwith cable plugs andconventional sealing ends
Optional floor orwall mounting
All-climate Maintenancefree Capacitive voltage taps for
– incoming feeder cable– optional outgoing transformer feeder
Optional motor operating mechanismfor auxiliary voltagesof 24 V DC–230 V AC
Optional plug-in grounding links
Rated frequency
Rated current ofcable feeders
Rated current oftransformer feeders2)
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitmaking current of cablefeeder switches
Rated short-circuitmaking current oftransformer switches
Rated short-circuit current, 1s
Ambient temperature
[kV]
Technical data (rated values)1)
Rated voltage andinsulation level
7.2 12
50/60
400/630
200
20
60
63
25
25
min. – 40max. +70
50/60
400/630
200
28
75
52
25
21
1) Higher values on request2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly
[Hz]
[A]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[kA]
[°C]
[kV]
[A]
min. – 40max. +70
Fig. 88
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/55
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ30
Fig. 89: Schemes and dimensions
920
540
945
1700
670
540
945
1700
1140
540
945
12001200 1200
1700
Width
Depth
Height
Scheme 10 Scheme 32 Scheme 71
Versionwall-mountedwithout support frame
Version withlow support frame
Version withhigh support frame
Dimensions [mm]
Individual panels
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/56
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ40
Ring-main unittype 8DJ40, 7.2–24 kVnonextensible, SF6-insulated
Typical use
SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed, fixed-mounted. Ring-main units type 8DJ40 aremainly used for transformer compact sub-stations. The main advantages of thisswitchgear is the extremely high cable ter-mination for easy cable connection and ca-ble testing works.
Specific features
8DJ40 units are type-tested, factory-finished, metal-enclosed SF6-insulatedswitchgear installations and meet thefollowing operational specifications: High level of personnel safety and
reliability High availability High-level cable connection Minimum space requirement Uncomplicated design Separate operating mechanism
actuation for switch disconnectorand make-proof grounding switch,same switching direction in linewith VDEW recommendation
Ease of installation Motor operating mechanism
retrofittable Optional stored-energy release for
ring cable feeders Maintenancefree All-climate
Fig. 90: Nonextensible RMU, type 8DJ40
Fig. 91
Rated frequency
Rated current ofcable feeders
Rated current oftransformer feeders
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitmaking current ofcable feeder switches
Rated short-circuitmaking current oftransformer switches2)
Rated short-time currentof cable feeder switches
Rated short-circuit time
Rated filling pressureat 20 °C
Ambient temperature
[kV]
Technical data (rated values)1)
Rated voltage andinsulation level
12 24
50
400/630*
≤ 200
28
75
50 (31.5)*
25
1
20 (12.5)*
0.5
min. – 40max. +70
[Hz]
[A]
[A]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[kA]
[s]
[barg]
[°C]
50
400/630*
≤ 200
50
125
40 (31.5)*
25
1
16 (12.5)*
0.5
min. – 40max. +70
1) Higher values on request* With snap-action/stored-energy operating mechanism up to 400 A/12.5 kA, 1s2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/57
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ40
Fig. 92: Schemes and dimensions
Width
Depth
Height
Scheme 10 Scheme 32
1140
760
1400/1250
909
760
1400/1250
Scheme 71
1442
760
1400/1250
Dimensions [mm]
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/58
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DH10
The units have an grounded outer enclo-sure and are thus shockproof. This alsoapplies to the fuse assembly and thecable terminations. Plug-in cable sealingends are housed in a shock-proof metal-enclosed support frame
Fuses and cable connections are onlyaccessible when earthed
All bushings for electrical and mechani-cal connections are welded gas-tightwithout gaskets
Three-position switches are fitted forlead switching, disconnection andgrounding, with the following switchpositions: closed, open and grounded.Make-proof earthing is effected by thethree-position switch (shown at page2/51)
Each switchgear unit can be composedas required from single panels and(preferably) panel blocks, which maycomprise up to three combined singlepanels
The 8DH10 switchgear is maintenance-free
Integrated current transformer suitablefor digital protection relays and protec-tion systems for c.t. operation release
Fig. 93: Extensible, modular switchgear type 8DH10
Consumer substationmodular switchgear type 8DH10extensible, SF6-insulated
Typical use
SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed fixed-mount-ed switchgear units type 8DH10 are indoorinstallations and are mainly used for powerdistribution in customer substations ormain substations.The units are particularly well suited forinstallation in industrial environments,damp river valleys, exposed dusty or sandyareas and in built-up urban areas.They can also be installed at high altitudeor where the ambient temperature is veryhigh.
Specific features
8DH10 fixed-mounted switchgear units aretype-tested, factory-assembled, SF6-insulat-ed, metal-enclosed switchgear units com-prising circuit-breaker panels, disconnectorpanels and metering panels.They meet the demands made on medi-um-voltage switchgear, such as High degree of operator safety, reliability
and availability No local SF6 work Simple to install and extend Operation not affected by environmental
factors Minimum space requirements Freedom from maintenance is met sub-
stantially better by these units than byearlier designs.
Busbars from panel blocks are locatedwithin the SF6 gas compartment. Con-nections with individual panels and otherblocks are provided by solid-insulatedplug-in busbars
Single-phase cast-resin enclosed insulat-ed fuse mounting outside the switch-gear housing ensures security againstphase-to-phase faults
All live components are protectedagainst humidity, contamination, corro-sive gases and vapours, dust and smallanimals
All normal types of T-plugs for thermo-plastic-insulated cables up to 300 m2
cross-section can be accommodated
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/59
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DH10
Fig. 94: Cross section of transformer feeder panel
Fig. 96: Combination of single panels with plug-in type, silicon-insulated busbar.No local SF6 gas work required during assembly or extension
Fig. 97: Cross section of silicon-pluged busbarsection.
LV cabinet
extensibleextensible
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
67
8
10
9
Fuse assemblyThree-position switchTransformer/cable feeder connectionHermetically-welded gas tankPlug-in busbar up to 1250 A
12345
Low-voltage compartmentCircuit-breaker operating mechanismMetal bellow welded to the gas tankPole-end kinematicsSpring-assisted mechanism
12345
Three-position switchRing-main cable termination(400/630 A T-plug system)Hermetically-welded RMU housingBusbar (up to 1250 A)Overpressure release system
67
89
10
Fig. 95: Cross section of circuit-breaker feeder panel
2
43
1
Plug bushing welded to the gas tank
Silicon adapter
Silicon-insulated busbar
Removable insulation cover toassemble the system at site
1
2
3
4
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/60
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DH10
Fig. 98
Rated frequency
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-circuitbreaking current ofcircuit-breakers
Rated short-circuitcurrent, 1s
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Busbar rated current
Feeder rated current– Circuit-breaker panels– Ring-main panels– Transformer panels*
Rated current of bussectionalizer panels– without HV HRC fuses– with HV HRC fuses*
Technical data (rated values)1)
Rated voltage andinsulation level
7.2
[Hz]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
[max. A][max. A][max. A]
[A][A]
12 15 17.5 24
50/60
20
60
25
25
63
6301250
400/630200
400/630400/630200
50/60
28
75
25
25
63
6301250
400/630200
400/630400/630200
50/60
36
95
20
20
50
6301250
400/630200
400/630400/630200
50/60
38
95
20
20
50
6301250
400/630200
400/630400/630200
50/60
50
125
16
16
50
6301250
400/630200
400/630400/630200
1) Higher values on request* Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly
[kV]
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/61
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DH10
Fig. 99: Schemes and dimensions
2 3 2 3
Width
Depth
Height
500
780
2000
Individual panels
Ring-main panel Transformer panel Billing meteringpanel
Busbar meteringand grounding panel
Dimensions [mm]
350
780
1400
500
780
1400
600*/850
780
1400/2000**
500
780
1450
Width
Depth
Height
700
780
1400
Blocks
Ring-main feeders Ring-main feeders Transformer feeders
1050
780
1400
Transformer feeders
1000
780
1400
1500
780
1400
Dimensions [mm]
* Width for version with combined instrument transformer** With low-voltage compartment
Circuit-breaker panel
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/62
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated short-time current 1s
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Rated busbar current1)
Rated feeder current
Technical data (rated values)1)
Rated voltage andinsulation level
1) Higher values on request
7.2
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
[A]
20
60
20
50
630
630
12
28
75
20
50
630
630
17.5
38
95
16
40
630
630
24
50
125
16
40
630
630
Fig. 100: Extensible modulares switchgear type 8AA20
Load-breaker panels
Circuit-breaker panels
Metering panels
Dimensions Width Height Depth
12/24 kV[mm]
600/750
750/750
600/750
665/790 or 931/1131
931/1131
665/790 or 931/1131
2000
2000
2000
[mm]12/24 kV[mm]
Consumer substationmodular switchgeartype 8AA20, 7.2–24 kVextensible, air-insulated
Typical use
The air-insulated modular indoor switch-gear is used as a flexible system with a lotof panel variations. Panels with fused andunfused load-break switches, with truck-type vacuum circuit breakers and meteringpanels can be combined with air-insulatedbusbars.The 8AA20 ring-main units are type-tested,factory-assembled metal-enclosed indoorswitchgear installations. They meet opera-tional requirements by virtue of the follow-ing features:
Personnel safety
Sheet-steel enclosure tested for resist-ance to internal arcing
All switching operations with doorclosed
Testing for dead state with door closed Insertion of barrier with door closed
Safety, reliability/maintenance
Complete mechanical interlocking Preventive interlocking between barrier
and switch disconnector Door locking
Excellent resistance to ambientconditions
High level of pollution protection byvirtue of sealed enclosure in all operat-ing states
Insulators with high pollution-layerresistance
Standards
The switchgear complies with thefollowing standards:IEC-Publ. 56, 129, 256-1, 298,
420, 694VDE 0670 Part 2, 4 and 6
Part 101–107Part 301, 303Part 1000
In accordance with the harmonizationagreement reached by the EC memberstates, their national specifications con-form to IEC-Publ. No. 298.
Fig. 101
Fig. 102: Dimensions
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8AA20
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/63
Fig. 103a: Cross section of cable feeder panel
1
2
1
2
34
Load-break switchGrounding switch
12
Vacuum circuit breakerCurrent transformerPotential transformerGrounding switch
1234
Fig. 104: Schemes
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8AA20
Resistance to internal arcing
– IEC-Publ. 298, Annex AA– VDE 0670, Part 6 and Part 601
Type of service location
Air-insulated ring-main units can be usedin service locations and in closed electricalservice locations in accordance withVDE 0101.
Specific features
Switch disconnector fixed-mounted Switch disconnector with integrated
central operating mechanism Standard program includes numerous
circuit variants Operations enabled by protective inter-
locks; the insulating barrier is included inthe interlocking
Extensible by virtue of panel design Cubicles compartmentalized (option) Minimal cubicle dimensions without
extensive use of plastics Lines up with earlier type 8AA10 Withdrawable circuit-breaker section can
be moved into the service and discon-nected position with the door closed
Individual panels
Scheme 11/12
Circuit-breaker panels
Scheme 13/14
Scheme 21/22
Load-breaker panels
Scheme 23/24 Scheme 25/26
Scheme 33/34
Metering and cable panels
Fig. 103b: Cross section of withdrawable typevacuum circuit-breaker panel
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/64
Fig. 105: Steel-clad outdoor substation 8FB1 for rated voltages up to 24 kV and transformers up to 1000 kVA
Factory-assembledpackaged substationstype 8FB1 (example )
Factory-assembled transformer substationsare available in different designs and di-mensions. As an example of a typical sub-station program, type 8FB1 is shown here.Other types are available on request.The transformer substations type 8FB1with up to 1000 kVA transformer ratingsand 7.2–24 kV are prefabricated and facto-ry-assembled, ready for connection of net-work cables on site.Special foundation not necessary. Distribution substations for
public power supply Nonwalk-in type Switchgear operated with open substa-
tion doors
General features/Applications
Power supply for LV systems, especiallyin load centers for public supply
Power supply for small and mediumindustrial plants with existing HV sidecable terminations
Particularly suitable for installation atsites subject to high atmospheric humid-ity, hostile environment, and stringentdemands regarding blending of the sta-tion with the surroundings
Extra reliability ensured by SF6-insulatedring-main units type 8DJ, which requireno maintenance and are not affected bythe climate
Brief description
The substation housing consists of a tor-sion-resistant bottom unit, with a concretetrough for the transformer, embedded inthe ground, and a hot-dip galvanized steelstructure mounted on it. It is subdividedinto three sections: HV section, transform-er section and LV section. The lateral sec-tion of the concrete trough serves asmounting surface for the HV and LV cubi-cles and also closes off the cable entrycompartments at the sides. These com-partments are closed off at the bottom andfront by hot-dip galvanized bolted steelcovers.Four threaded bushes for lifting the com-plete substation are located in the floor ofthe concrete trough. The substations arearc-fault-tested in order to ensure person-nel safety during operation and for the pe-destrians passing by the installed substa-tion.
HV section (as an example):
8DJ SF6-insulated ring-main unit(for details please refer to RMU‘s page2/50–2/61)
Technical data:
Rated voltages and insulation levels7.2 kV 12 kV 15 kV 17.5 kV 24 kV60 75 95 95 125 kV (BIL)
Rating of cable circuits: 400 / 630 A Rating of transformer circuits: 200 A Degree of protection for HV parts: IP 65 Ambient temperature range:
–30°C/+55°C (other on request)
Transformer-section:
Oil-cooled transformer with ratings up tomax. 1000 kVA. The transformer is con-nected with the 8DJ10 ring-main unit bythree single-core screened 35 mm2 plasticinsulated cables. The connection is madeby means of right-angle plugs or standardair-insulated sealing ends possible at thetransformer side.
LV section:
The LV section can take various forms tosuit the differing base configurations. Theconnection to the transformer is made byparallel cables instead of bare conductors.Incoming circuit: Circuit breaker, fused loaddisconnector, fuses or isolating links.Outgoing circuits: Tandem-type fuses,load-break switches, MCCB, or any otherrequested systems.Basic measuring and metering equipmentto suit the individual requirements.
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear and Transformer Substations
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/65
Fig. 106: Technical data, dimensions and weights
HV section:SF6-insulatedring-main unit(RMU)
High-voltagesection
Substationhousing type:
8FB17
H
Transformersection
T
Low-voltagesection
L
Transformer rating 1000 kVA
Overall dimensions,weights:LengthWidthHeight abovegroundHeight overallFloor areaVolumeWeight withouttransformer
[mm][mm][mm]
[mm][mm2][mm3]
[kg]
329013001650
21004.287.06approx. 2280
257021001650
21005.408.91approx. 2530
210021001650
21004.417.28approx. 2400
386015501700
23505.9810.17approx. 3400
312023001700
23507.1812.20approx. 3800
235023001700
23505.419.19approx. 3600
L H
H T L H T L T
8FB10 8FB11 8FB12 8FB15 8FB16
HL
H T L TH T L
630 kVA 630 kVA 630 kVA 1000 kVA 1000 kVA
Fig. 107: HV section:Compact substation 8FB with SF6-insulated RMU(two loop switches, one transformer feeder switchwith HRC fuses)
Fig. 108: Transformer section:Cable terminations to the transformer, as a example
Fig. 109: LV section:Example of LV distribution board
Secondary DistributionSwitchgear and Transformer Substations
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/66
Medium-Voltage DevicesProduct Range
Devices formedium-voltage switchgear
With the equipment program for switch-gear Siemens can deliver nearly everydevice which is required in the medium-voltage range between 7.2 and 36 kV.Fig. 110 gives an overview about the avail-able devices and their main characteristics.All components and devices conform tointernational and national standards,as there are:
Vacuum circuit breakers
IEC 56 IEC 694 BS5311 DIN VDE 0670
Vacuum switches
IEC 265-1 DIN VDE 0670, Part 301in combination with Siemens fuses: IEC 420 DIN VDE 0670, Part 303
Vacuum contactors
IEC 470 DIN VDE 0660, Part 103 UL 347
Switch disconnectors
IEC 129 IEC 265-1 DIN VDE 0670, Part 2 DIN VDE 0670, Part 301
HV HRC fuses
IEC 282 DIN VDE 0670, Part 4
Current and voltage transformers
IEC 185, 186 DIN VDE 0414 BS 3938, 3941 ANSI C57.13
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31 - 73 46 54
Fig. 110: Equipment program for medium-voltage switchgear
Short-timecurrent(3s)
[kA]
3AH
3AF3AG
Type Ratedvoltage
[kV]
Short-circuitcurrent
[kA]
Indoor and outdoorcurrent and voltagetransformers
Device
Indoor vacuumcircuit breaker
Outdoor vacuumcircuit breaker
Modular assembly setwith indoor VCB
Indoor vacuum switch
Indoor vacuumcontactor
Vacuum interrupter
Indoor switchdisconnector
Indoor disconnectingand grounding switch
HV HRC fuses
Fuse bases
Indoor post insulators,bushings
7.2 … 36
12, 36
7.2 … 15
7.2 … 24
3.6 … 12
7.2 … 40.5
7.2 … 24
7.2 … 36
7.2 … 36
7.2 … 36
3.6 … 36
12 … 36
3CG
3TL
VS
3CJ
3D
3GD
3GH
3FA
3M
13.1 … 63
25
25 … 44
–
–
12.5 … 72
–
–
31.5 … 80
–
–
13.1 … 63
25
25 … 44
16 … 20
8 (1s)
12.5 … 72
16 … 20 (1s)
16 ... 63 (1s)
–
–
–
–
44peak withstandcurrent
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/67
Medium-Voltage DevicesProduct Range
PageRatedcurrent
[A]
2/68
2/72
2/73
2/74
2/76
2/77
2/78
2/79
2/80
2/80
2/81
2/82
mechanical
Applications/remarksOperating cycles
All applications, e.g. overhead lines, cables, transformers,motors, generators, capacitors, filter circuits, arc furnaces
All applications, e.g. overhead lines, cables, transformers,motors, generators, capacitors, filter circuits
Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) and retrofit
All applications, e.g. overhead lines, cables, transformers,motors, capacitors; high number of operations; fusesnecessary for short-circuit protection
All applications, especially motors with very high numberof operating cycles
For circuit breakers, switches and gas-insulated switchgear
Small number of operations, e.g. distribution transformers
Protection of personnel working on equipment
Short-circuit protection; short-circuit current limitation
Accommodation of HV HRC fuse links
Insulation of live parts from another,carrying and supporting function
Measuring and protection
with ratedcurrent
with short-circuit current
25 … 100
30 … 50
–
–
–
25 … 100
–
–
–
–
–
–
10,000 …30,000
10,000
–
10,000
0.25x105 ... 2x106
10,000 …30,000
800 … 4000
1600
1250 … 3150
800
400 … 450
800 … 4000
630
400 … 2500
6.3 … 250
400
–
–
20
–
–
–
–
–
1000
–
–
–
–
–
10,000 …120,000
10,000
–
10,000
1x106 ... 3x106
10,000 …30,000
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/68
Indoor vacuum circuit breakerstype 3AH
The 3AH vacuum circuit breakers arethree-phase medium-voltage circuit break-ers for indoor installations.As standard circuit breakers they are avail-able for the entire medium-voltage range.Circuit breakers with reduced pole centerdistances, circuit breakers for very highnumbers of switching cycles and single-phase versions are part of the program.The following breaker types are available: 3AH1 – the maintenancefree circuit
breaker which covers the rangebetween 7.2 kV and 24 kV. It hasa lifetime of 10,000 operating cycles
3AH2 – the circuit breaker for 60,000operating cycles in the range between7.2 kV and 24 kV
3AH3 – the maintenancefree circuitbreaker for high breaking capacities inthe range between 7.2 kV and 36 kV.It has a lifetime of 10,000 operatingcycles
3AH4 – the circuit breaker for up to120,000 operating cycles
3AH5 – the economical circuit breaker inthe lower range for 10,000 maintenance-free operating cycle
The 3AH circuit breakers are suitable for: Rapid load transfer, synchronization Automatic reclosing up to 31.5 kA Breaking short-circuit currents with
very high initial rates of rise of the recov-ery voltage
Switching motors Switching transformers and reactors Switching overhead lines and cables Switching capacitors Switching arc furnaces
Fig. 111: The complete 3AH program
Rated short-circuit breakingcurrent [kA]
7.2
12
15
17.5
24
36
13.1 16 20 25 31.5 40 50 63
800 800-1250
800-2500
800-1250
1250-3150
1250-4000
1250-2500
–-2500
Rated voltage[kV]
3AH1 3AH2 3AH3 3AH4 3AH5
800-1250
800-1250
1250-3150
Rated current[A]
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AH
Properties of 3AH circuit breakers:
No relubrication
Nonwearing material pairs at the bearingpoints and nonaging greases make relubri-cation superfluous on 3AH circuit breakersup to 10,000 operating cycles, even afterlong periods of standstill.
High availability
Continuous tests have proven that the3AHs are maintenancefree up to 10,000operating cycles: accelerated temperature/humidity change cycles between –25 and+60 °C prove that the 3AH functions relia-bly without maintenance.
Assured quality
Exemplary quality control with some hun-dred switching cycles per circuit breaker,certified to DIN/ISO 9001.
No readjustment
Narrow tolerances in the production ofthe 3AH permanently prevent impermissi-ble play: even after frequent switchingthe 3AH circuit breaker does not need tobe readjusted up to 10,000 operatingcycles.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/69
Fig. 112: Vacuum circuit breakers type 3AH
Fig. 113: Front view of vacuum circuit breaker 3AH1 with 160-mm pole center distance. Available up to 17.5 kV
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AH
Advantages of thevacuum switching principle
The most important advantages of theprinciple of arc extinction in a vacuum havemade the circuit breakers a technically su-perior product and the principle on whichthey work the most economical extinctionmethod available: Constant dielectric:
In a vacuum there are no decompositionproducts and because the vacuum inter-rupter is hermetically sealed there areno environmental influences on it.
Constant contact resistance:The absence of oxidization in a vacuumkeeps the metal contact surface clean.For this reason, contact resistance canbe guaranteed to remain low over thewhole life of the equipment.
Large total current:Because there is little burning of con-tacts, the rated normal current can beinterrupted up to 30,000 times, theshort-circuit breaking current an averageof 50 times
Small chopping current:The chopping current in the Siemensvacuum interrupter is only 4 to 5 A dueto the use of a special contact material.
High reliability:The vacuum interrupters need no seal-ings as conventional circuit breakers.This and the small number of movingparts inside makes it extremely reliable.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/70
Fig. 114a: Dimensions of typical vacuum circuit breakers type 3AH (Examples)
604532
210 210
520
190
105
437 473
60
604538
210 210
565
109
437583
105
190550
275 275662708 565
190
105
437535
60
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
20 kA, up to 1250 A25 kA, up to 1250 A
3AH1,12 kV
16 kA, up to 1250 A,20 kA, up to 1250 A,25 kA, up to 1250 A
3AH1,24 kV
31.5 kA, 2500 A,40 kA, 2500 A
3AH1, 3AH2,12 kV
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AH
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/71
708 595670
275275190
105
437
109
610
648
211 483
564 733
750275 275
25 kA, 2500 A
63 kA, 4000 A
3AH3,12 kV
31.5 kA, 2500 A,40 kA, 2500 A
3AH1, 3AH2,24 kV
3AH3, 3AH4,36 kV
776
820350 350
853
526211
612
564 1000791
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AH
Fig. 114b: Dimensions of typical vacuum circuit breakers type 3AH (Examples)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/72
Outdoor vacuum circuitbreakers type 3AF and 3AG
The Siemens outdoor vacuum circuitbreakers are structure-mounted, easy-to-install vacuum circuit breakers for use insystems up to 36 kV. The pole construc-tion is a porcelain-clad construction similarto conventional outdoor high-voltageswitchgear. The triple-pole circuit breakeris fitted with reliable and well proven vacu-um interrupters. Adequate phase spacingand height have been provided to meetstandards and safety requirements.It is suitable for direct connection to over-head lines.The type design incorporates a minimumof moving parts and a simplicity of assem-bly assuring a long mechanical and electri-cal life. All the fundamental advantages ofusing vacuum interrupters like low operat-ing energy, lightweight construction, vir-tually shockfree performance leading toease of erection and reduction in founda-tion requirements, etc. have been retained.The Siemens outdoor vacuum circuitbreakers are designed and tested to meetthe requirements of IEC 56/IS 13118.
Advantages at a glance
High reliability Negligible maintenance Suitable for rapid autoreclosing duty Long electrical and mechanical life Completely environmental-friendly
Fig. 115: Outdoor vacuum circuit breakertype 3AF for 36 kV
Fig. 117: Dimensions of outdoor circuit breaker type 3AF for 36 kV
Fig. 116: Ratings for outdoor vacuum circuit breakers
12Rated voltage
Rated frequency
Rated lightning-impulse withstand voltage
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage (dry and wet)
Rated short-circuitbreaking current
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Rated current
75
28
25
63
1600
50/60
36
170
70
25
Type 3AG
Technical data
Type 3AFVacuum circuit-breaker type
50/60
63
1600
[kV]
[Hz]
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
1830
1217
725 725190
19301730
650450
31052510
3710 3748
285 285
Front view Side view
Dimensions in mm
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AF/3AG
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/73
Modular assembly sets withindoor vacuum circuit breakers
The modular assembly sets are especiallysuitable for retrofit applications and for theuse by original equipment manufacturers(OEM).The withdrawable assembly sets consist ofparts of type-tested, metal-clad, air-insulat-ed medium-voltage primary distributionswitchgear. The circuit-breaker compart-ment can be integrated in the completebay as individually required.The centerpiece of the set is a medium-voltage vacuum circuit breaker, incorporat-ing all benefits of vacuum switchgeartechnology: High reliability Negligible maintenance Long electrical and mechanical life Completely environment-friendly Suitable for all switching dutiesUse of these parts allows the OEM to uti-lize Siemens know-how in the constructionof air-insulated switchgear, with all the con-sequent advantages, such as: Components type-tested to IEC, devel-
oped and manufactured to DIN/ISO 9001 Maximum flexibility in the manufacturing
process Wide product range
Ratingsfor withdrawable truck shown in Fig. 118
7.2 kV to 15 kV rated voltage1250 A to 3150 A rated current25 kA to 44 kA rated short-circuit
breaking current
Fig. 118: Withdrawable truck with vacuum circuit breaker (Example)
Medium-Voltage DevicesModular Assembly Sets
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/74
Indoor vacuum switchestype 3CG
The 3CG vacuum switches are multipur-pose switches conforming to IEC 265-1and DIN VDE 0670 Part 301.With these, all loads can be switched with-out any restriction and with a high degreeof reliability. The electrical and mechanicaldata are greater than for conventionalswitches. A rated current of 800 A, forexample, can be interrupted 10,000 timeswithout maintenance.The operating mechanism needs to belubricated only every 10 years.The vacuum switch is therefore extremelyeconomical.Vacuum switches are suitable for thefollowing switching duties: Overhead lines Cables Transformers Motors Capacitors Switching under ground-fault conditions
3CG switches can be combined with allSiemens fuses (250 A) and comply withthe specifications of IEC 420 andDIN VDE 0670 Part 303.
Fig. 119: Ratings for vacuum switches type 3CG
Fig. 120: Vacuum switch type 3CG for 24 kV, 800 A
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3CG
Rated voltage U
Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage Ul,
Rated short-circuit makingcurrent I ma
Rated short-time current I m (3s)
Rated normal current I n
Rated ring-main breakingcurrent I c 1
Rated transformer breaking current
Rated capacitor breaking current
Rated cable-chargingbreaking current I c
Rated breaking current forstalled motors I d
Inductive switching capacity(cos ϕ ≤ 0.15)
Switching capacity underground fault conditions:– Rated ground fault breaking current I e– Rated cable-charging breaking current– Rated cable charging breaking current with superimposed load current
Number of switching cycles with I n
[kV]
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A][A]
[A]
Technical data
12
75
50
20
800
800
10
800
63
1600
1600
63063
63+800
10,000
15
95
50
20
800
800
10
800
63
1250
1250
63063
63+800
10,000
24
125
40
16
800
800
10
800
63
–
1250
63063
63+800
10,000
7.2
60
50
20
800
800
10
800
63
2500
2500
63063
63+800
10,000
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/75
Fig. 121: Dimensions of vacuum switch type 3CG (Examples)
7.2 and 12 kV switch
24 kV switch
630
275 275
379
684
708
537
435
43170
597
530
264
210 210
568
592
435
43170
492
482
Dimensions in mm
Dimensions in mm
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3CG
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/76
280 mm
325 mm
340 mm
Fig. 122: Vacuum contactor type 3TL6 for fixedmounting
Vacuum contactorsType 3TL
The three-pole vacuum contactors type3TL are for medium-voltage systems be-tween 3.6 kV and 12 kV and incorporate asolenoid-operated mechanism for highswitching frequency and unlimited closingduration.They are suitable for the opera-tional switching of AC devices in indoorsystems and can perform, for example, thefollowing switching duties: Switching of three-phase motors in
AC-3 and AC-4 operation Switching of transformers Switching of capacitors Switching of ohmic loads
(e.g. arc furnaces)
3TL vacuum contactors have the followingfeatures: Small dimensions Long electrical life
(up to 106 operating cycles) Maintenancefree Vertical or horizontal mounting
The vacuum contactors comply with thestandards for high-voltage AC contactorsbetween 1 kV and 12 kV according to IECPublication 470-1970 and DIN VDE 0660Part 103.3TL contactors also comply with ULStandard 347.
The vacuum contactors are available indifferent designs: Type 3TL6 with compact dimensions
and an electrical lifetime of 1x106 operat-ing cycles
Type 3TL8 with slender design and anelectrical lifetime of 0.25x106 operatingcycles
In the withdrawable unit, the 3TL6 vacuumcontactor can be grouped together andelectrically connected with fuse carriers forHV HRC fuse links according to DIN/BSand also with overvoltage limiters.
Fig. 123: Vacuum contactor type 3TL6 mounted onwithdrawable unit
Fig. 124: Ratings for vacuum contactors type 3TL
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3TL
Fig. 125: Vacuum contactor type 3TL8 for fixedmounting
780 mm
1200 mm
605 mm
390 mm
375 mm
220 mm
Rated voltage Ue
Rated frequency
Rated normal current I e
Switching capacity according toutilization category AC-4 (cos ϕ = 0.35)Rated making currentRated breaking current
Mechanical life of the contactorswitching cycles
Mechanical life of the vacuuminterrupter – switching cycles
Electrical life of the vacuum interrupter(switching cycles with rated current)
Vacuum contactor type
[kV]
[Hz]
[A]
[A]
Technical data
12
3TL 65
7.2
3TL 61
3.6
50/60
45003600
3TL 60
7.2
50/60
40003200
3TL 81
450 400
1 x 106
1 x 106
1 x 106
3 x 106
2 x 106
1 x 106
3 x 106
2 x 106
1 x 106
1 x 106
0.25 x 106
0.25 x 106
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/77
Medium-Voltage DevicesType VS
Vacuum interrupters
Vacuum interrupters for the medium-volt-age range are available from Siemens forall applications on the international marketfrom 1 kV up to 40.5 kV.
Applications
Vacuum circuit breakers Vacuum switches Vacuum contactors Transformer tap switches Circuit breakers for railway applications Autoreclosers Special applications, e.g. in nuclear
fusion
Compact design
Vacuum interrupters providea very high switching capacity within verycompact dimensions: e.g. vacuum inter-rupters for 15 kV/40 kA with housingdimensions of 125 mm diameter by168 mm length or for 12 kV/12.5 kA with68 mm diameter by 124 mm length.
Consistant quality assurance
Complete quality assurance (TQM andDIN/ISO 9001), rigorous material checkingof every delivery and 100% tests of theinterrupters for vacuum sealing guaranteereliable operation and the long life ofSiemens vacuum interrupters.
Environmental protection
In the manufacture of our vacuum inter-rupters we only use environmentally com-patible materials, such as copper, ceramicsand high-grade steel.The manufacturing processes do not dam-age the environment. For example, noCFCs are used in production (fulfilling theMontreal agreement), the components arecleaned in a ultrasonic cleaning plant.During operation vacuum interrupters donot affect the environment and are them-selves not affected by the environment.
Know-how for special applications
If necessary, Siemens is prepared to sup-plement our wide standard program byway of tailored, customized concepts.
Fig. 126: Vacuum interrupters from 1 kV to 40.5 kV
Fig. 127: Range of ratings for vacuum interrupters
Interrupters for vacuum circuit breakers
Un
In
Isc
7.2 kV – 40.5 kV
800 A – 4000 A
12.5 kA – 72 kA
Interrupters for vacuum contactors
Un
In
1 kV – 12 kV
450 A
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/78
Technical data
7.2
20
50
630
Rated voltage
Rated short-timecurrent
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Rated normal current
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
12
20
50
630
15
16
40
630
24
16
40
630
Switch disconnectorstype 3CJ1
Indoor switch disconnectors type 3CJ1 aremultipurpose types and meet all the rele-vant standards both as the basic versionand in combination with (make-proof)grounding switches.The 3CJ1 indoor switch-disconnectorshave the following features: A modular system with all important
modules such as fuses, (make-proof)grounding switches, motor operatingmechanism, shunt releases and auxiliaryswitches
Good dielectric properties even underdifficult climatic conditions because ofthe exclusive use of standard post insu-lators for insulation against ground
No insulating partitions even with smallphase spacings
Simple maintenance and inspection
Fig. 128: Switch disconnector type 3CJ1
Fig. 129: Ratings for switch disconnectors type 3CJ1
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3CJ1
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/79
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3D
Technical data
12
16 to 63
40 to 160
400 to 2500
Rated voltage
Rated short-timecurrent
Rated short-circuitmaking current
Rated normal current
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
[A]
24
16 to 31.5
40 to 80
630 to 2500
36
20 to 31.5
50 to 80
630 to 2500
Fig. 130: Disconnecting switch type 3DC
Disconnecting and groundingswitches type 3D
Disconnecting and grounding switchestype 3D are suitable for indoor installationsfrom 12 kV up to 36 kV.Disconnectors are mainly used to protectpersonnel working on equipment and musttherefore be very reliable and safe.This is assured even under difficult climaticconditions.Disconnecting and grounding switchestype 3D are supplied with a manual ormotor drive operating mechanism.
Fig. 131: Ratings for disconnectors type 3DC
Fig. 132: Ratings for grounding switches type 3DE
Technical data
12
20 to 63
50 to 160
Rated voltage
Rated short-timecurrent
Rated peakwithstand current
[kV]
[kA]
[kA]
24
20 to 31.5
50 to 80
36
20 to 31.5
50 to 80
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/80
HV HRC fusestype 3GD
HV HRC (high-voltage high-rupturing-capac-ity) fuses are used as a short-circuit protec-tion in high-voltage switchgear. They pro-tect switchgear and components, such astransformers, motors, capacitors, voltagetransformers and cable feeders, from thedynamic and thermal effects of high short-circuit currents by breaking them as theyoccur.The HV HRC fuse links can only be usedto a limited degree as overload protectionbecause they only operate with certaintywhen their minimum breaking current hasalready been exceeded. Up to this currentthe integrated thermal striker prevents athermal overload on the fuse when used incircuit breaker/fuse combinations.Siemens HV HRC fuse links have the fol-lowing features: Use in indoor and outdoor installations Nonaging because the fuse element
is made of pure silver Thermal tripping Absolutely watertight Low power lossWith our 30 years of experience in themanufacture of HV HRC fuse links andwith production and quality assurancethat complies with DIN/ISO 9001,Siemens HV HRC fuse links meet thetoughest demands for safety and reliability.
Fuse-bases type 3GH
3GH fuse bases are used to accomodateHV HRC fuse links in switchgear.These fuse bases are suitable for: Indoor installations High air humidity Occasional condensation3GH HV HRC fuse bases are available assingle-phase and three-phase versions.On request, a switching state indicatorwith an auxiliary switch can be installed.
Fig. 134: Ratings for HV HRC fuse links type 3GD
Fig. 133: HV HRC fuse type 3GD
Fig. 135: Fuse bases type 3GH with HV HRC fuse links
Fig. 136: Ratings for fuse bases type 3GH
Technical data
7.2
63 to 80
6.3 to 250
Rated voltage
Rated short-circuitbreaking current
Rated normal current
[kV]
[kA]
[A]
12
40 to 63
6.3 to 160
24
31.5 to 40
6.3 to 100
36
31.5
6.3 to 40
Technical data
3.6/7.2
44
400
Rated voltage
Peak withstandcurrent
Rated current
[kV]
[kA]
[A]
12
44
400
24
44
400
36
44
400
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3GD/3GH
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 2/81
Fig. 140: The principle of capacitive voltage indication with the 3FA4 divider post insulator
Medium-Voltage DevicesInsulators and Bushings
Insulators:Post insulators type 3FAand bushings type 3FH/3FM
Insulators (post insulators and bushings)are used to insulate live parts from one an-other and also fulfill mechanical carryingand supporting functions.The materials for insulators are variouscast resins and porcelains. The use ofthese materials, which have proved them-selves over many years of exposure to theroughest operating and ambient conditionsand the high quality standard to DIN/ISO9001, assure the high degree of reliabilityof the insulators.Special ribbed forms ensure high electricalstrength even when materials are deposit-ed on the surface and occasional conden-sation is formed.Post insulators and bushings are manufac-tured in various designs for indoor and out-door use depending on the application.Innovative solutions, such as the 3FA4divider post insulator with an integratedexpulsion-type arrester, provide optimumutility for the customer.Special designs are possible if requestedby the customer.
Fig. 137: Draw-lead bushing type 3FH5/6
Fig. 138: Post insulators type 3FA1/2
C1
V C2
M
A
L
U
U1
U2
LUU1
U2
ConductorOperating voltagePartial voltageacross C1Partial voltage acrossC2 and indicator
C1C2
VAM
Coupling capacitanceUndercapacitance
ArresterIndicatorMeasuring socket
12
65 to90
35 to50
3.75 to25
3.6
60 to65
27 to40
3.75 to16
24
100 to145
55 to75
3.75 to25
36
145 to190
75 to105
3.75 to16
Technical data
Normal voltage
Lightning-impulsewithstand voltage
Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage
Minimum failing load
[kV]
[kV]
[kV]
[kN]
Fig. 139: Ratings for post insulators type 3FA1/2
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution2/82
Technical data
12
10 to2500
80
Rated voltage
Primary ratedcurrent
Max. thermal ratedshort time current
Sec. thermallimit current
Current transformers Voltage transformers
[kV]
[A]
[kA]
[A]
24
10 to2500
80
36
10 to2500
80
12
5 to 10
24
5 to 13
36
8 to 17
Current and voltagetransformers type 4M
Measuring transformers are electricaldevices that transform primary electricalquantities (currents and voltages) to pro-portional and in-phase quantities which aresafe for connected equipment and operat-ing personnel.The indoor post insulator current and volt-age transformers of the block type haveDIN-conformant dimensions and are usedin air-insulated switchgear. A maximum ofoperational safety is assured even underdifficult climatic conditions by the use ofcycloalyphatic resin systems and provencast-resin technology.Special customized versions (e.g. up to3 cores for current transformers, switcha-ble windings, capacitance layer for voltageindication) can be supplied on request.The program also includes cast-resin insu-lated-bushing current transformers andoutdoor current and voltage transformers.
Fig. 143: Ratings for current and voltage transformers
Fig. 141: Block current transformer type 4MA
Fig. 142: Outdoor voltage transformer type 4MS4
Medium-Voltage DevicesType 4M
Low-Voltage SwitchboardsSIVACON
Contents Page
Introduction 3/2
Advantages 3/2
Technical data 3/3
Cubicle design 3/4
Busbar system 3/5
Installation designs 3/6
Circuit-breaker design 3/6
Withdrawable-unit design 3/7–3/12
Contents Page
Fixed-mounted design 3/13–3/14
Frame and enclosure 3/15
Forms of internal separation 3/16
Installation details 3/17–3/18
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/2
General
The SIVACON low-voltage switchboardis an economical, practical and type-testedswitchgear and controlgear assembly(Fig. 3), used for example in power engi-neering, in the chemical, oil and capitalgoods industries and in public and privatebuilding systems.It is notable for its good availability andhigh degree of personnel and systemsafety. It can be used on all power levelsup to 6300 A: As main switchboard (power control
center or main distribution board) As motor control centre As subdistribution board.With the many combinations that theSIVACON modular design allows, a widerange of demands can be met both infixed-mounted and in withdrawable-unitdesign.All modules used are type-tested (TTA), i.ethey comply with the following standards: IEC 439-1 EN 60439-1 DIN VDE 0660 Part 500also DIN VDE 0106 Part 100
Certification DIN EN ISO 9001
Advantages of a SIVACONswitchboard
Type-tested standard modules Space-saving base areas from
400 x 400 mm2
Solid wall design for safe cubicle-to-cubicle separation
High packing density withup to 40 feeders per cubicle
Standard operator interface for allwithdrawable units
Test and disconnected positionwith door closed
Visible isolating gaps and pointsof contact
Alternative busbar positioningat top or rear
Cable/bar connection from aboveor below
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Introduction
Low-voltage switchboards form the linkbetween equipment for generation, trans-mission (cables, overhead lines) andtransformation of electrical energy on theone hand, and the loads, such as motors,solenoid valves, actuators and devicesfor heating, lighting and air conditioningon the other.As the majority of applications are suppliedwith low voltage, the low-voltage switch-board is of special significance in bothpublic supply systems and industrial plants.
Fig. 1: Typical low-voltage network in an industrial plant
Reliable power supplies are conditionalon good availability, flexibility for process-related modifications and high operatingsafety on the part of the switchboard.Power distribution in a system usuallycomes via a main switchboard (powercontrol center or main distribution board)and a number of subdistribution boardsor motor control centers (Fig. 1).
M M M M M M M M
LTETFT
Cable or busbar systemup to 4 MVAup to 690 V
up to 6300 A
3-50 Hz
up to 5000 A
Incoming circuit-breaker
Main switchboard
Circuit-breakers asfeeders to the sub-distribution boards
Connecting cables
Subdistributionboard e. g. services(Lighting, heating,air conditioning,etc.)
up to 100 A
Control
Motor control center 2in withdrawable-unitdesign for production/manufacturing
up to630 A
up to630 A
ET FT
LT
= Circuit-breaker design= Withdrawable-unit design= Fixed-mounted design
Motor control center 1in withdrawable-unitdesign for production/manufacturing
up to630 A
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/3
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 3: SIVACON low-voltage switchboard
Technical data at a glance
Rated currentRated impulse withstand current (Ipk)Rated short-time withstand current (Icw)
Busbar currents (3- and 4-pole):
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
Rated operational voltage (Ue)
1000 V
690 V
Horizontal main busbars
Vertical busbars
for circuit-breakers
for fixed-mounted design
for withdrawable-unit design
See horizontal busbars
up toup toup to
6300 A220 kA100 kA
Rated currentRated impulse withstand current (Ipk)Rated short-time withstand current (Icw)
Rated currentRated impulse withstand current (Ipk)Rated short-time withstand current (Icw)
Device rated
Circuit-breakersCable feedersMotor feeders
Power loss per cubicle with combinationof various cubicles (Pv)Degree of protection to DIN VDE 40050, IEC 529
* Mean value at simultaneity factor of all feeders of 0.6
up toup toup to
up toup toup to
2000 A
110 kA
50 kA
1000 A
110 kA
50 kA
up toup toup to
6300 A
800 kA
630 kA
IP 20 up to IP 54
approx. 600 W*
up to
Fig. 2
1 2 3
Circuit-breaker-design cubiclewith withdrawable circuit-breaker3WN, 1600 A
Withdrawable-unit-design cubiclewith 40 feeders ≤ 15 kW
Withdrawable-unit-design cubiclewith miniature and normalwithdrawable units up to 250 kW
1
2
3
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/4
Dimensions in mm
Cable/busbar connection compartment
Cross-wiring compartment
Busbar compartmentDevice compartment
400 600
600 400 400 400 400
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Cubicle design
The cubicle is structured in modular gridbased on one modular spacing (1 M)corresponding to 175 mm. The effectivedevice installation space with a height of1750 mm therefore represents a heightof 10 M. The top and bottom space eachhas a height of 1 x 1M + 50 mm,i.e. 225 mm (Fig. 5).A cubicle is subdivided into four functioncompartments: Busbar compartment Device compartment Cable/busbar connection compartment Cross-wiring compartmentIn 400 mm deep cubicles, the busbar com-partment is at the top; in 600 mm deepcubicles it is at the rear. In double-frontsystems (1000 mm depth) and in a powercontrol center (1200 mm depth), the bus-bar compartment is located centrally.The switching device compartmentaccommodates switchgear and auxiliaryequipment.The cable/busbar connection compartmentis located on the right-hand side of the cu-bicle. With circuit-breaker design, however,it is below the switching device compart-ment (Fig. 4).The cross-wiring compartment is locatedat the top front and is provided for leadingcontrol and loop lines from cubicle tocubicle.
Fig. 4: Cubicle design
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/5
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Busbar system
Together with the PEN or PE busbars,and if applicable the N busbars, the phaseconductor busbars L1, L2 and L3 formthe busbar system of a switchboard.One or more distribution busesand/or incoming and outgoing feederscan be connected to a horizontal mainbusbar. Depending on requirements,this main busbar passes through severalcubicles and can be linked with anothermain busbar via a coupling.A vertical distribution busbar is connectedwith the main busbar and suppliesoutgoing feeders within a cubicle.In a 400 mm deep cubicle (Fig. 5a) thephase conductors of the main busbar arealways at the top; the PEN or PE and Nconductors are always at the bottom.The maximum rated current at 35 °C is1965 A (non-ventilated), and 2250 A (venti-lated); the maximum short-circuit strengthis Ipk = 110 kA or Icw = 50 kA, respectively.In single-front systems with 600 mmcubicle depth (Fig. 5b), the main busbarsare behind the switching device compart-ment. In double-front systems of 1000 mmdepth (Fig. 5c), they are between the twoswitching device compartments (central).The phase conductors can be arranged atthe top or bottom; PEN, PE and N conduc-tors are always at the bottom. The maxi-mum rated current is at 35 °C 3250 A(non-ventilated) or 3500 A (ventilated);Ipk = 220 kA or Icw = 100 kA, respectively.In 1200 mm deep systems (power controlcenter) (Fig. 5d) the conductors arearranged as for double-front systems, butin duplicate; the phase conductors arealways at the top. The maximum ratedcurrent at 35 °C is 4850 A (non-ventilated)or 6000 A (ventilated); Ipk = 220 kA,Icw = 100 kA.
Fig. 5: Modular grid and location of main busbars
400
175
400 50
50
175
400
Top space Switching device compartment
Bottom space
50
400 50
175
2200
175
50
10 x175
200
175
50
2200 10 x175
2200
a) b)
d)c)
175
50
10 x175
175
175
50
10 x175
200 400 400400
Dimensions in mm
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/6
Installation designs
The following designs are availablefor the duties specified: Circuit-breaker design Withdrawable-unit design Fixed-mounted design
Circuit-breaker design
Distribution boards for substantial energyrequirements are generally followed bya number of subdistribution boards andloads. Particular demands are thereforemade in terms of long-term reliability andsafety. That is to say, ”supply“, ”coupling“and ”feeder“ functions must be reliablyavailable over long periods of time. Mainte-nance and testing must not involve longstandstill times. The circuit-breaker designcomponents meet these requirements.The circuit-breaker cubicles have separatefunction spaces for a switching devicecompartment, auxiliary equipment com-partment and cable/busbar connectioncompartment (Fig. 7).The auxiliary equipment compartment isabove the switching device compartment.The cable or busbar connection compart-ment is located below. With supply fromabove, the arrangement is a like a mirrorimage. The cubicle width is determined bythe breaker rated current.
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 7: Circuit-breaker cubicle with withdrawable circuit-breaker 3WN, 1600 A rated current
Circuit-breaker design 3WN
The 3WN circuit-breakers in withdrawable-unit or fixed-mounted design are usedfor incoming supply, outgoing feeders andcouplings (longitudinal and transverse).The operational current can be shown onan LCD display in the control panel; thereis consequently no need for an ammeteror current transformer.
400600800
1000
Cubicle width
[mm]
IN to 1600IN to 2500IN to 3200IN to 6300
Breaker ratedcurrent[A]
Fig. 6
The high short-time current-carrying capaci-ty for time-graded short-circuit protection(up to 500 ms) assures reliable operationof sections of the switchboard not affectedby a short circuit.With the aid of short-time grading controlfor very brief delay times (50 ms), thestresses and damage suffered by a switch-board in the event of a short-circuit can besubstantially minimized, regardless of thepreset delay time of the switching deviceconcerned.The withdrawable circuit-breaker hasthree positions between which it can bemoved with the aid of a crank or spindlemechanism. In the connected position themain and auxiliary contacts are closed.
In the test position the auxiliary contactsare closed. In the disconnected positionboth main and auxiliary contacts are open.Mechanical interlocks ensure that, in theprocess of moving from one position toanother, the circuit-breaker always reachesthe OPEN state or that closing is notpossible when the breaker is betweentwo positions.The circuit-breaker is always moved withthe door closed. The actual position inwhich it is can be telecommunicated viaa signaling switch.A kit, switch or withdrawable unit canbe used for grounding and short-circuiting.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/7
Withdrawable-unit design
A major feature of withdrawable-unitdesign is removability and ease of replace-ment of equipment combinations underoperating conditions, i.e. a switchboardcan be adapted to process-related modifi-cations without having to be shut down.Withdrawable-unit design is used thereforemainly for switching and control of motors(Fig. 8).
Withdrawable units
The equipment of the main circuit of anoutgoing feeder and the relevant auxiliaryequipment are integrated as a function unitin a withdrawable unit, which can be easilyaccommodated in a cubicle.In basic state, all equipment and movableparts are within the withdrawable unit con-tours and thereby protected from damage.The facility for equipping the withdrawableunits from the rear allows plenty of spacefor auxiliary devices. Measuring instru-ments, indicator lights, pushbuttons, etc.are located on a hinged instrument panel,such that settings (e.g. on the overloadrelay) can be easily performed duringoperation.
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 8: High packing density with up to 40 feeders percubicle
Fig. 9: Size 1 withdrawable unit, 18.5 kW with contactor-type star-delta starter
A distinction is made between miniature(sizes 1/4 and 1/2) and normal withdraw-able units (sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4) (Fig. 9).The normal withdrawable unit of size 1has a height of one modular spacing(175 mm) and can, with the use of a mini-ature withdrawable unit adapter, be re-placed by 4 withdrawable units of size 1/4or 2 units of size 1/2. The withdrawableunits of sizes 2, 3 and 4 have a height of2, 3 and 4 modular spacings, respectively.The maximum complement of a cubicle is,for example, 10 full-size withdrawableunits of size 1 or 40 miniature withdrawa-ble units of size 1/4 .
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/8
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 10: Withdrawable-unit principle
Moving isolating contact system
For main and auxiliary circuits the with-drawable units are equipped with a movingisolating contact system. It has contactson both the incoming and outgoing side;they can be moved by handcrank such thatthey come laterally out of the withdrawa-ble unit and engage with the fixed contactsin the cubicle. On miniature withdrawableunits the isolating contact system movesupwards into the miniature withdrawableunit adapter.A distinction is made between connected,disconnected and test position (Fig. 10)In the connected position both main andauxiliary contacts are closed; in the discon-nected position they are open. The testposition allows testing of the withdrawableunit for proper function in no-load (cold)state, in which the main contacts are open,but the auxiliary contacts are closed for theincoming control voltage.In all three positions the doors are closedand the withdrawable unit mechanicallyconnected with the switchboard.This assures optimal safety for personneland the degree of protection is upheld.Movement from the connected into thetest position and vice-versa always passesthrough the disconnected position; thisassures that all contactors drop out.
Operating error protection
Integrated maloperation protection ineach withdrawable unit reliably preventsmoving of the isolating contacts with themain circuit-breaker ”CLOSED“ (handcrankcannot be attached) (Fig. 11).
Fig. 11: Operating error protection prevents travel of the isolating contacts when the master switch is “ON”
Connected position
Disconnected position
Test position
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/9
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Indicating and signaling
The current position of a withdrawableunit is clearly indicated on the instrumentpanel. Such signals as ”feeder not avail-able“ (AZNV), ”test“ and ”AZNV and test“can be given by additional alarm switches.The alarm switch in the compartment(S21) is a limit switch of NC design; thatin the withdrawable unit (S20) is of NOdesign. Both are actuated by the mainisolating contacts of the withdrawable unit(Fig. 12).
Fig. 12: Circuitry and position of main and auxiliary contacts
COM
AZNV
Test
X19 = Auxiliary isolating contactS20 = Alarm switch in withdrawable unit*S21 = Alarm switch in compartment*WU = Withdrawable unitCompt. = Compartment
*actuated by main isolating contact
Test
- X19
- S21
AZNV
- X19
- Q1 - S21
Compt.WU
AZNV/Test
- X19
- Q1 - S21- S20
Compt.WU Compt.WU
*No signal, as auxiliary isolating contact open
*
Main isolatingcontact
Aux. isolatingcontact
In with-drawable unit- S 201 S
In compartment
- S 211 Ö
Connected
Disconnected
Test
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/10
Fig. 13: Arcing fault-protected plug-on bar systemembedded in the left of the cubicle
Vertical distribution bus(plug-on bus)
The vertical plug-on bus with the phaseconductors L1, L2 and L3 is located on theleft-hand side of the cubicle and featuressafe-to-touch tap openings (Fig. 13).The vertical PE, PEN and N busbars areon the right-hand side of the cubicle ina separate, 400 mm wide cable connectioncompartment, equipped with variable cablebrackets.
Rated currents – fused and withdraw-able unit sizes of cable feeders
Rated currents – non-fused and with-
drawable unit sizes of cable feeders
( ):Figures in brackets short-circuit-proof up to 100 kA*3VU13 with limiter short-circuit-proof up to 50 kA
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 14
I
D3063KL503KL523KL533KL553KL573KL61
3563
125160250400630
1/4 / 1/2112223
Device Ratedcurrent
With-drawableunitsize
Type [A]
Device
3VU13*3VU163VU133VU163VF13VF33VF43VF53VF6
2532 (25)25 (6)63 (32)63 (32)160250400630
1/4 / 1/21/21111224
Ratedcurrent
With-drawableunitsize
Type [A]
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/11
Power ratings – fused and withdraw-able unit sizes of cable feeders
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 15
FVNR FVR Star-delta starters
400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersNormal-duty start [kW]
Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersHeavy-duty start [kW]
Full-voltagereversing (FVR)motor startersReversing circuit [kW]
Star-delta starters[kW]
Withdrawableunit size
–224590
160–
400500
1518.53775
160250
––
15224590
200355
1/41/212343+34+4
22223790
160500
–5.5
157590
160––
–7.5
2290
132200
–113790
132375
1118.53045
110250
––
11223755
132315
11223755
160375
–18.53755
132–
250355
–223055
160–
355–
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/12
I
FVNR Star-delta startersFVR
II
690 V
Withdrawableunit size
11113075
160250
33
3790
200315
––––––
–2.24
37160
–
––5.5
45200
–
––––––
111118.575
160250
33
2290
200315
––––––
400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
––––––
1/41/21234
–111555
110200
–1.1
3775
132250
400 V 500 V 690 V
Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersNormal-duty start [kW]
Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersHeavy-duty start [kW]
Full-voltagereversing (FVR)motor startersReversing circuit [kW]
Star-delta starters[kW]
Withdrawableunit size
––––––
111118.575
160250
33
1590
200315
1/41/21234
–2.24
37160
–
––––––
41118.555
160250
1.13
1575
200315
––––––
–111555
110200
–1.1
1575
132250
–––––
––5.5
45200
400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V
Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersNormal-duty start [kW]
Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersHeavy-duty start [kW]
Full-voltagereversing (FVR)motor startersReversing circuit [kW]
Star-delta starters[kW]
––––––
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Power ratings – non-fused withoverload relay and withdrawable unit
Coordination type 1
Coordination type 2
Fig. 16
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/13
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fixed-mounted design
In certain applications, e.g. in buildinginstallation systems, either there is noneed to replace components underoperating conditions or short standstilltimes do not result in exceptional costs.In such cases the fixed-mounted design(Fig. 17) offers excellent economy, highreliability and flexibility by virtue of: Any combination of modular function
units Easy replacement of function units after
deenergizing the switchboard Brief modification or standstill times
by virtue of lateral vertical cubiclebusbars
Add-on components for subdivision andeven compartmentalization in accord-ance with requirements.
Modular function units
The modular function units enable versatileand efficient installation, above all when-ever operationally required changes or ad-aptations to new load data are necessary(Fig. 18). The subracks can be equipped asrequired with switching devices or combi-nations thereof; the function units can becombined as required within one cubicle.When the function modules are fitted inthe cubicle they are first attached in theopenings provided and then bolted to thecubicle. This securing system enablesuncomplicated ”one-man assembly“.
Vertical distribution bus (cubicle busbar)
The vertical cubicle busbar with the phaseconductors L1, L2 and L3 is fastened tothe left-hand side wall of the cubicle andoffers many connection facilities (withoutthe need for drilling or perforation) forcables and bars. It can be subdivided atthe top or bottom once per cubicle (forgroup circuits or couplings). The connec-tions are easily accessible and thereforeequally easy to check. A transparentshock-hazard protection allows visualinspection and assures a very high degreeof personnel safety.The vertical PE, PEN and N busbars are onthe right-hand side of the cubicle in a sepa-rate, up to 400 mm wide cable connectioncompartment, equipped with variable cablebrackets.
Fig. 17: Variable fixed-mounted design
Fig. 18: Fused modular function unit with direct protection, 45 kW
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/14
Low-Voltage Switchboards
In-line-type switching devices
In-line-type switching devices allow space-saving installation of cable feeders ina cubicle and are particularly notable fortheir compact design (Fig. 19).
The in-line-type switching devices featureplug-in contacts on the incoming side.They are alternatively available for cablefeeders up to 630 A as: Fuse module Fuse-switch disconnectors
(single-break) Fuse-switch disconnectors
(double-break)with or without solid-state fuse monitoring Switch disconnectorsThe single- or double-break in-line-typeswitching devices allow fuse changingin dead state.The main switch is actuated by pullinga vertical handle to the side.The modular design allows quick reequip-ping and easy replacement of in-line-typeswitching devices under operating condi-tions.The in-line-type switching devices havea height of 50 mm, 100 mm or 200 mm.A cubicle can consequently be equippedwith up to 35 in-line-type switchingdevices.
Vertical distribution bus (plug-on bus)
The vertical plug-on bus with the phaseconductors L1, L2 and L3 is located at theback in the cubicle and can be additionallyfitted with a shock-hazard protection.The vertical PE, PEN and N busbars areon the right-hand side of the cubicle ina separate, 400 mm wide cable connectioncompartment, equipped with variable cablebrackets.
Fig. 19: Cubicle with in-line-type switching devices
Fig. 20: Rated currents and installation data of in-line-type switching devices
Device Ratedcurrent
In-line-type size
Type [A]
3NJ6110
3NJ6120
3NJ6140
3NJ6160
160
250
400
630
50
100
200
200
Height [mm]
Fuse-switch disconnector(single break)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/15
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Fig. 23: Cubicle dimensions and average weights
Fig. 22: Frame for rear busbarFig. 21: Frame for top busbar
Frame and enclosure
The galvanized SIVACON cubicle framesare of solid wall design and ensure reliablecubicle-to-cubicle separation.The enclosure is made of powder-coatedsteel sheets (Fig. 21 and 22).A cubicle front features one or more doors,depending on requirements and cubicletype. These doors are of 2 mm thick, pow-der-coated sheet steel and are hingedon the right or left (attached to the frame).Spring-loaded door locks prevent the doorsfrom flying open unintentionally, and alsoensure safe pressure equalization in theevent of an arcing fault.
Degree of protection (against foreignbodies/water, and personnel safety)
A distinction is made between ventilatedand non-ventilated cubicles.Ventilated cubicles are provided with slitsin the base space door and in the top plateand attain degree of protection in relationto the operating area of IP 20/21 orIP 40/41, respectively.Non-ventilated cubicles attain degreeof protection IP 54.In relation to the cable compartment,degree of protection IP 00 or IP 40, isgenerally attained.
Cubicle dimensions andaverage weights
2200 400500600800400500600800
10001000
400
600
1200
up to 1600up to 1600up to 1600up to 2000up to 1600up to 1600up to 2500up to 3150up to 4000up to 6300
300310320440315335440540700
1200
2200 1000 400600
1000
400450600
2200 1000 400600
1000
330380550
Height[mm]
Width[mm]
Depth[mm]
Rated current[A]
Withdrawable-unit design
Fixed-mounted design
Circuit-breaker design
Approx. weight[kg]
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/16
4b4a3b3a2b2a1
– – – – –
–
–––––
– – –
Circuit-breakerdesign
Form
With-drawable-unitdesign
Fixed-mounteddesign– modular– in-line
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Form of internal separation
in accordance to DIN VDE 0660 Part 500,7.7 (Fig. 25)Depending on requirements, the functioncompartments can be subdivided as perthe following table:
Fig. 25: Forms of internal separation to DIN VDE 0660 Part 500/EN 60 439-1/IEC 439-1
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
Form 4b
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
Form 4a
Form 3a
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
Form 3b
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
Form 2b
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
Form 2a
Form 1
4
4
4
1
4
4
2 2
3 4 4
1234
Functional unit
Terminal for external conductorsMain busbarBusbarIncoming circuitOutgoing circuit
Fig. 24
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 3/17
400
900
600
1050
1000
1460
1200
1660
Cubicledepth
Transportbase depth
[mm]
[mm]
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Installation details
Transport units
For transport purposes, individual cubiclesof a switchboard are combined to forma transport unit, up to a maximum lengthof 2400 mm.The transport base is 200 mm longer thanthe transport unit and is 190 mm high. Thetransport base depth is:
Floor penetrations
The cubicles feature floor penetrationsfor leading in cables for connection, or foran incoming supply from below (Fig. 28).
Fig. 28: Floor penetrations
Cubicle width - 110
Cubicle depth 1000 mm, 1200 mm
Cubicle depth 400 mm
75
75
Cubicle depth 600 mm
Cubicle width - 110
215 400
75
Diameter 14.175
323
38.5
Cubicle width
Cubicle width - 110
523
250 600
75
Diameter 14.1
323
38.5
Cubicle width
Fastening forfloor mounting
Fastening forwall mounting
250
75
Diameter 14.1
38.5
Cubicle width
250
75
1000or1200
Cubicledepth - 77
Free space for cables andbar penetrations
Fig. 27
If the busbar is at the top, the main bus-bars between two transport units are con-nected via lugs which are bolted to thebusbar system.If the busbar is at the rear, the individualbars can be bolted together via connectionelements, as the conductors of theright-hand transport unit are offset to theleft and protrude beyond the cubicle edge.
Mounting
Cubicle depths 400 mm and 600 mm: Wall- or Floor-mountingCubicle depths 1000 mm and 1200 mm: Floor-mountingThe following minimum clearancesbetween the switchboard and anyobstacles must be observed:
There must be a minimum clearance of400 mm between the top and sides of thecubicle and any obstacles.
Clearences
Switchboard
75 mm100 mm 100 mm
Fig. 26
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution3/18
Low-Voltage Switchboards
Operating and maintenance gangways
All doors of a SIVACON switchboard canbe fitted such that they close in the direc-tion of an escape route or emergency exit.If they are fitted differently, care must betaken that when doors are open, there isa minimum gangway of 500 mm (Fig. 29).In general, the door width must be takeninto account, i.e. a door must open throughat least 90°. (In circuit-breaker and fixed-mounted designs the maximum door widthis 1000 mm.)Installation gangways behind closed rearwalls call for a minimum width of 500 mm.If a lifting truck is used to install a circuit-breaker, the gangway widths must suit thedimensions of the lifting truck.
Fig. 29: Reduced gangways in area of open doors
Fig. 30
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49 - 341- 447 0400
Min. gangway widthEscape route 600 or 700 mm
Free min. width500 mm1)
2)
20001)
600
7007002) 7002)
600
700
1) Minimum gangway height under covers or enclosures2) For installation gangways behind closed rear walls,
a width of 500 mm is acceptable
1) Where switchboard fronts face each other, narrowing of the gangwayas a result of open doors (i.e. doors that do not close in the directionof the escape route) is reckoned with only on one side
2) Note door widths, i.e. it must be possible to open the doorthrough at least 90°
Dimensions in mm
HeightWidthDepth
HeightWidthDepth
Dimensions of lifting truck [mm]
Minimum gangway width [mm]
Approx. 1500
2000680920
Transformers
Contents Page
Technical DataDistribution Transformers 4/13–4/17
Technical DataPower Transformers 4/18–4/23
On-load Tap Changers 4/24
Cast-resin Dry-typeTransformers, GEAFOL 4/25–4/28
Technical DataGEAFOL Cast-resinDry-type Transformers 4/29–4/32
Special Transformersand Reactors 4/33–4/34
Contents Page
Introduction 4/2
Product Range 4/3
Electrical Design 4/4–4/5
Transformer Loss Evaluation 4/6–4/7
Mechanical Design 4/8
Connection Systems 4/9– 4/10
Accessories andProtective Devices 4/11– 4/12
4/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Introduction
In addition, there are various special-purpose transformers such as convertertransformers, which can be both in therange of power transformers and in therange of distribution transformers as faras rated power and rated voltage are con-cerned.As special elements for network stabili-zation, arc-suppression coils and com-pensating reactors are available. Arc-sup-pression coils compensate the capacitivecurrent flowing through a ground fault andthus guarantee uninterrupted energy sup-ply. Compensating reactors compensatethe capacitive power of the cable networksand reduce overvoltages in case of loadrejection; the economic efficiency andstablility of the power transmission are im-proved.The general overview of our manufactur-ing/delivery program is shown in thetable ”Product Range“.
Standards and specifications, general
The transformers comply with the relevantVDE specifications, i.e. DIN VDE 0532”Transformers and reactors“ and the”Technical conditions of supply for three-phase transformers“ issued by VDEWand ZVEI.Therefore they also satisfy the require-ments of IEC Publication 76, Parts 1 to 5together with the standards and specifi-cations (HD and EN) of the EuropeanUnion (EU).Enquiries should be directed to the manu-facturer where other standards and spe-cifications are concerned. Only the US(ANSI/NEMA) and Canadian (CSA) stand-ards differ from IEC by any substantial de-gree, however, a design according to thesestandards is also possible.
Important additional standards
DIN 42 500, HD 428: oil-immersedthree-phase distribution transformers50–2500 kVA
DIN 42 504: oil-immersed three-phasetransformers 2–10 MVA
DIN 42 508: oil-immersed three-phasetransformers 12.5–80 MVA
DIN 42 523, HD 538: three-phasedry-type transformers 100–2500 kVA
DIN 45 635 T30: noise level IEC 289: reactance coils and neutral
grounding transformers IEC 551: measurement of noise level IEC 726: dry-type transformers RAL: coating/varnish
Transformers are one of the primarycomponents for the transmission anddistribution of electrical energy.Their design results mainly from the rangeof application, the construction, the ratedpower and the voltage level.The scope of transformer types starts withgenerator transformers and ends with dis-tribution transformers.Transformers which are directly connectedto the generator of the power station arecalled generator transformers. Their powerrange goes up to far above 1000 MVA.Their voltage range extends to approx.1500 kV.The connection between the different high-voltage system levels is made via networktransformers (network interconnectingtransformers). Their power range exceeds1000 MVA. The voltage range exceeds1500 kV.Distribution transformers are within therange from 50 to 2500 kVA and max.36 kV. In the last step, they distributethe electrical energy to the consumersby feeding from the high-voltage into thelow-voltage distribution network. Theseare designed either as liquid-filled or asdry-type transformers.Transformers with a rated power up to2.5 MVA and a voltage up to 36 kV arereferred to as distribution transformers;all transformers of higher ratings areclassified as power transformers.
0.05–2.5
2.5–3000
0.10–20
≤ 36
36-1500
≤ 36
Ratedpower
Max.operatingvoltage
[MVA] [kV]
Oildistributiontransformers
GEAFOL-cast-resintransformers
Powertransformers
4/13–4/17
4/18–4/23
4/29–4/32
Figs.onpage
Fig. 1: Transformer types
4/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Product Range
100 kVA to more than 20 MVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV,of three- or single-phase designGEAFOL®-SL substations
Cast-resin distributionand power transformersGEAFOL
Above 2.5 MVA up to more than 1000 MVA, above 30 kV up to 1500 kV(system and system interconnecting transformers, with separate windings orauto-connected), with on-load tap changers or off-circuit tap changers,of three- or single-phase design
Generator and powertransformers
Furnace and converter transformersTraction transformers mounted on rolling stock and appropriate on-load tap-changersSubstation transformers for traction systemsTransformers for train heating and point heatingTransformers for: Electrostatic precipitators, high-frequency generating plants,electrophoresis and graphite producing plantsTransformers for HVDC transmission systemsStarting transformersTransformers for audio frequencies in power supply systemsThree-phase neutral electromagnetic couplers and grounding transformersTransformers for potentially explosive atmospheresIgnition transformers
Special transformersfor industry, tractionand HVDC transmissionsystems
50 to 2 500 kVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV,with copper or aluminum windings, hermetically sealed (TUMETIC®) orwith conservator (TUNORMA®) of three- or single-phase design
Oil-immerseddistribution transformers,TUMETIC, TUNORMA
Liquid-immersed shunt and current-limiting reactors up tothe highest rated powersReactors for HVDC transmission systemsStarting reactors, arc-suppression coils
Reactors
Buchholz relays, oil testing equipment,oil flow indicators and other monitoring devicesFan control cabinets, control cabinets for parallel operation andautomatic voltage controlSensors (PTC, Pt 100)
Accessories
Advisory services for transformer specificationsOrganization, coordination and supervision of transportationSupervision of assembly and commissioningService/inspection troubleshooting servicesTraining of customer personnelInvestigation and assessment of oil problems
Service
Fig. 2
4/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Dy1
iii
Dy5
Dy11
Yd1
Yd5
Yd11
ii
i
III II
I1
iiiii
iIII II
I
5
iiiii
i
III II
I11
iii
iii
III II
I11
iiiii
iIII II
I
5
iii
ii
i
III II
I1
Electrical Design
Power ratings and type of cooling
All power ratings in this guide are the pro-duct of rated voltage (times phase-factorfor three-phase transformers) and ratedcurrent of the line side winding (at centertap, if several taps are provided), expres-sed in kVA or MVA, as defined in IEC 76-1.If only one power rating and no coolingmethod are shown, natural oil-air cooling(ONAN or OA) is implied for oil-immersedtransformers. If two ratings are shown,forced-air cooling (ONAF or FA) in one ortwo steps is applicable.For cast resin transformers, natural aircooling (AN) is standard. Forced air cooling(AF) is also applicable.
Temperature rise
In accordance with IEC-76 the standardtemperature rise for oil-immersed powerand distribution transformers is: 65 K average winding temperature
(measured by the resistance method) 60 K top oil temperature
(measured by thermometer)The standard temperature rise for Siemenscast-resin transformers is 100 K (insulation class F) at HV and
LV winding.Whereby the standard ambient tempera-tures are defined as follows: 40 °C maximum temperature, 30 °C average on any one day, 20 °C average in any one year, –25 °C lowest temperature outdoors, –5 °C lowest temperature indoors.Higher ambient temperatures require acorresponding reduction in temperaturerise, and thus affect price or rated poweras follows: 1.5% surcharge for each 1 K above
standard temperature conditions, or 1.0% reduction of rated power for each
1 K above standard temperature condi-tions.
These adjustment factors are applicableup to 15 K above standard temperatureconditions.
Altitude of installation
The transformers are suitable for operationat altitudes up to 1000 meters above sealevel. Site altitudes above 1000 m necessi-tate the use of special designs and an in-crease/or a reduction of the transformerratings as follows (approximate values):
The primary winding (HV) is normallyconnected in delta, the secondary winding(LV) in wye. The electrical offset of thewindings in respect to each other is either30, 150 or 330 degrees standard (Dy1,Dy5, Dy11). Other vector groups aswell as single-phase transformers andautotransformers on request (Fig. 3).
Power transformers
Generator transformers and large powertransformers are usually connected in Yd.For HV windings higher than 110 kV, theneutral has a reduced insulation level.For star/star-connected transformers andautotransformers normally a tertiary wind-ing in delta, whose rating is a third of thatof the transformer, has to be added. Thisstabilizes the phase-to phase voltages inthe case of an unbalanced load and pre-vents the displacement of the neutralpoint.Single-phase transformers and autotrans-formers are used when the transportationpossibilities are limited. They will be con-nected at site to three-phase transformerbanks.
2% increase for every 500 m altitude (orpart there of) in excess of 1000 m, or
2% reduction of rated power for each500 m altitude (or part there of) in ex-cess of 1000 m.
Transformer losses and efficiencies
Losses and efficiencies stated in this guideare average values for guidance only. Theyare applicable if no loss evaluation figure isstated in the inquiry (see following chapter)and they are subject to the tolerances stat-ed in IEC 76-1, namely +10% of the totallosses, or +15% of each component loss,provided that the tolerance for the totallosses is not exceeded.If optimized and/or guaranteed losses with-out tolerances are required, this must bestated in the inquiry.
Connections and vector groups
Distribution transformers
The transformers listed in this guide areall three-phase transformers with one setof windings connected in star (wye) andthe other one in delta, whereby the neutralof the star-connected winding is fully ratedand brought to the outside.
Fig. 3: Most commonly used vector groups
4/5Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Electrical Design
≤ 1.1
3.6
7.2
12.0
17.5
24.0
36.0
52.0
72.5
123.0
145.0
170.0
245.0
Highestvoltagefor equip-ment Um(r. m. s.)
[kV]
Ratedshort-durationpower-frequencywithstandvoltage(r. m. s.)
[kV]
Rated lightning-impulse with-stand voltage(peak)
List 1[kV]
List 2[kV]
3
10
20
28
38
50
70
95
140
185
230
275
325
360
395
–
20
40
60
75
95
145
–
40
60
75
95
125
170
250
325
450
550
650
750
850
950
Higher test voltage withstand requirements must bestated in the inquiry and may result in a higher price.
Fig. 4: Insulation level
Insulation level
Power-frequency withstand voltages andlightning-impulse withstand voltages are inaccordance with IEC 76-3, Para. 5, Table II,as follows:
Conversion to 60 Hz – possibilities
All ratings in the selection tables of thisguide are based on 50 Hz operation.For 60 Hz operation, the following optionsapply: 1. Rated power and impedance voltage
are increased by 10%, all other parame-ters remain identical.
2. Rated power increases by 20%, butno-load losses increase by 30% andnoise level increases by 3 dB, all otherparameters remain identical (this lay-out is not possible for cast-resin trans-formers).
3. All technical data remain identical,price is reduced by 5%.
4. Temperature rise is reduced by 10 K,load losses are reduced by 15%, allother parameters remain identical.
Overloading
Overloading of Siemens transformers isguided by the relevant IEC-354 ”Loadingguide for oil-immersed transformers“and the (similar) ANSI C57.92 ”Guide forloading mineral-oil-immersed power trans-formers“.Overloading of GEAFOL cast-resin trans-formers on request.
Routine and special tests
All transformers are subjected to thefollowing routine tests in the factory: Measurement of winding resistance Measurement of voltage ratio and check
of polarity or vector group Measurement of impedance voltage Measurement of load loss Measurement of no-load loss and
no-load current Induced overvoltage withstand test Seperate-source voltage withstand test Partial discharge test (only GEAFOL
cast-resin transformers).The following special tests are optional andmust be specified in the inquiry: Lightning-impulse voltage test (LI test),
full-wave and chopped-wave (specify) Partial discharge test Heat-run test at natural or forced cooling
(specify) Noise level test Short-circuit test.Test certificates are issued for all theabove tests on request.
Transformer cell (indoor installation)
The transformer cell must have the neces-sary electrical clearances when an open airconnection is used. The ventilation systemmust be large enough to fulfill the recom-mendations for the maximum tempera-tures according to IEC.For larger power transformers either anoil/water cooling system has to be used orthe oil/air cooler (radiator bank) has to beinstalled outside the transformer cell.In these cases a ventilation system hasto be installed also to remove the heatcaused by the convection of the transform-er tank.
4/6 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
A. Capital cost
B. Cost of no-load loss
C. Cost of load loss
D. Cost resulting from demands charges
Cc =Cp · r
100
= purchase price
= depreciation factor
= interest factor
= interest rate in % p.a.= depreciation period in years
Cp
q = p100
r = p · qn
qn – 1
pn
CP0 = Ce · 8760 h/year · P0
= energy charges
= no-load loss [kW]
Ce
P0
amountkWh
CPk = Ce · 8760 h/year · α2 · Pk
amountyear
amountyear
amountyear
α
Pk
=
= copper loss [kW]
constant operation loadrated load
CD =amount
yearCd (P0 + Pk)
Cd = demand charges amountkW · year
Transformer Loss Evaluation
The sharply increased cost of electricalenergy has made it almost mandatory forbuyers of electrical machinery to carefullyevaluate the inherent losses of theseitems. In case of distribution and powertransformers, which operate continuouslyand most frequently in loaded condition,this is especially important. As an example,the added cost of loss-optimized trans-formers can in most cases be recoveredvia savings in energy use in less than threeyears.Low-loss transformers use more andbetter materials for their construction andthus initially cost more. By stipulating lossevaluation figures in the transformer in-quiry, the manufacturer receives the nec-essary incentive to provide a loss-opti-mized transformer rather than the low-cost model.Detailed loss evaluation methods fortransformers have been developed andare described accurately in the literature,taking the project-specific evaluation fac-tors of a given customer into account.The following simplified method for a quickevaluation of different quoted transformerlosses is given, making the following as-sumptions: The transformers are operated con-
tinuously The transformers operate at partial load,
but this partial load is constant Additional cost and inflation factors are
not considered Demand charges are based on 100%
load.The total cost of owning and operating atransformer for one year is thus defined asfollows: A. Capital cost Cc
taking into account the purchase priceCp, the interest rate p, and the depre-ciation period n
B. Cost of no-load loss CP0,based on the no-load loss P0, andenergy cost Ce
C. Cost of load loss Cpk,based on the copper loss Pk, the equi-valent annual load factor a, and energycost Ce
D. Demand charges Cd,based in the amount set by the utility,and the total kW of connected load.
These individual costs are calculated asfollows:
Fig. 5
4/7Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Transformer Loss Evaluation
To demonstrate the usefulness of suchcalculations, the following arbitrary exam-ples are shown, using factors that canbe considered typical in Germany, andneglecting the effects of inflation on therate assumed:
A. Low-cost transformer B. Loss-optimized transformer
Depreciation periodInterest rateEnergy charge
Demand charge
Equivalent annual load factor
npCe
Cd
α
= 20 years= 12% p. a.= 0.25 DM/kWh
= 350
= 0.8
DMkW · yr
P0 = 2.6 kWPk = 20 kWCp = DM 25 000
P0 = 1.7 kWPk = 17 kWCp = DM 28 000
no-load lossload losspurchase price
no-load lossload losspurchase price
Cc25000 · 13.39
100
DM 3348/year
CP0 0.25 · 8760 · 2.6
DM 5694/year=
=
=
=
CPk 0.25 · 8760 · 0.64 · 20
DM 28 032/year=
=
CD 350 · (2.6 + 20)
DM 7910/year=
=
Total cost of owning and operating thistransformer is thus:
DM 44984.–/year
Cc28000 · 13.39
100
DM 3 749/year
CP0 0.25 · 8760 · 1.7
DM 3 723/year=
=
=
=
CPk 0.25 · 8760 · 0.64 · 17
DM 23 827/year=
=
CD 350 · (1.7 + 17)
DM 6 545/year=
=
Total cost of owning and operating thistransformer is thus:
DM 37 844.–/year
The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of DM 7140 per yearpays for the increased purchase price in less than one year.
Example: 1600 kVA distribution transformer
Depreciation factorr = 13.39
Fig. 6
4/8 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Mechanical Design
Fig. 9: Practically maintenancefree: transformer withthe TUPROTECT air-sealing system built into the con-servator
General mechanical designfor oil-immersed transformers:
Iron core made of grain-orientedelectrical sheet steel insulated on bothsides, core-type.
Windings consisting of copper sectionwire or copper strip. The insulationhas a high disruptive strength and istemperature-resistant, thus guaranteeinga long service life.
Designed to withstand short circuit forat least 2 seconds (IEC).
Oil-filled tank designed as tank withstrong corrugated walls or as radiatortank.
Transformer base with plain or flangedwheels (skid base available).
Cooling/insulation liquid: Mineral oilaccording to VDE 0370/IEC 296. Siliconeoil or synthetic liquids are available.
Standard coating for indoor installation.Coatings for outdoor installation andfor special applications (e.g. aggressiveatmosphere) are available.
Tank design andoil preservation system
Sealed-tank distribution transformers,TUMETIC®
In ratings up to 2500 kVA and 170 kV LIthis is the standard sealed-tank distributiontransformer without conservator and gascushion. The TUMETIC transformer isalways completely filled with oil; oil expan-sion is taken up by the flexible corrugatedsteel tank (variable volume tank design),whereby the maximum operating pressureremains at only a fraction of the usual.These transformers are always shippedcompletely filled with oil and sealed fortheir lifetime. Bushings can be exchangedfrom the outside without draining the oilbelow the top of the active part.The hermetically sealed system preventsoxygen, nitrogen, or humidity from contactwith the insulating oil. This improves theaging properties of the oil to the extentthat no maintenance is required on thesetransformers for their lifetime. Generallythe TUMETIC transformer is lower thanthe TUNORMA transformer. This designhas been in successful service since 1973.A special TUMETIC-Protection device hasbeen developed for this transformer.
Distribution transformers withconservator, TUNORMA®
This is the standard distribution transform-er design in all ratings. The oil level in thetank and the top-mounted bushings is keptconstant by a conservator vessel or expan-sion tank mounted at the highest point ofthe transformer. Oil-level changes due tothermal cycling affect the conservator only.The ambient air is prevented from directcontact with the insulating oil through oil-traps and dehydrating breathers.Tanks from 50 to approximately 4000 kVAare preferably of the corrugated steel de-sign, whereby the sidewalls are formed onautomatic machines into integral coolingpockets. Suitable spot welds and bracesrender the required mechanical stability.Tank bottom and cover are fabricated fromrolled and welded steel plate.Conventional radiators are available.
Power transformers
Power transformers of all ratings areequipped with conservators. Both the openand closed system are available.With the closed system ”TUPROTECT®“the oil does not come into contact with thesurrounding air. The oil expansion is com-pensated with an air bag. (This design isalso available for greater distribution trans-formers on request).The sealing bag consists of strong nylonbraid with a special double lining of ozonand oil-resistant nitrile rubber. The interiorof this bag is in contact with the ambientair through a dehydrating breather;the outside of this bag is in direct contactwith the oil.All tanks, radiators and conservators(incl. conservator with airbag) are designedfor vacuum filling of the oil.For transformers with on-load tap changersa seperate smaller conservator is neces-sary for the diverter switch compartment.This seperate conservator (without air bag)is normally an integrated part of the mainconservator with its own magnetic oil levelindicator.Power transformers up to 10 MVA arefitted with weld-on radiators and areshipped extensively assembled; shippingconditions permitting.Ratings above 10 MVA require detachableradiators with individual butterfly valves,and partial dismantling of components forshipment.All the usual fittings and accessories for oiltreatment, shipping and installation ofthese transformers are provided as stand-ard. For monitoring and protective devices,see the listing on page 4/11.
Fig. 8: 630 kVA, three-phase, TUNORMA20 kV ± 2.5 %/0.4 kV distribution transformer
Fig. 7: Cross section of a TUMETIC three-phasedistribution transformer
4/9Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Connection Systems
Distribution transformers
All Siemens transformers have top-mount-ed HV and LV bushings according to DIN intheir standard version. Besides the openbushing arrangement for direct connectionof bare or insulated wires, three basic insu-lated termination systems are available:
Fully enclosed terminal box for cables(Fig. 11)
Available for either HV and LV side, or forboth. Horizontally split design in degreeof protection IP 44 or IP 54 (Totally en-closed and fully protected against contactwith live parts, plus protection against drip,splash, or spray water).Cable installation through split cable glandsand removable plates facing diagonallydownwards. Optional conduit hubs. Suit-able for single-core or three-phase cableswith solid dielectric insulation, with orwithout stress cones. Multiple cables perphase are terminated on auxiliary busstructures attached to the bushings. Re-moval of transformer by simply bendingback the cables.
Insulated plug connectors (Fig. 12)
For substation installations, suitableHV can be attached via insulatedelbow connectors in LI ratings up to170 kV.
Flange connection (Fig. 13)
Air-insulated bus ducts, insulated busbars,or throat-connected switchgear cubiclesare connected via standardized flanges onsteel terminal enclosures. These can ac-commodate either HV, LV, or both bush-ings. Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy partitionsare available between HV and LV bushingsif flange/flange arrangements are chosen.The following combinations of connectionsystems are possible besides open bush-ing arrangements:
Cable box
Cable box
Flange
Flange
Elbow connector
Elbow connector
HV
Cable box
Flange/throat
Cable box
Flange/throat
Cable box
Flange/throat
LV
Fig 13: Flange connection for switchgear andbus ducts
Fig. 10: Combination of connection systems
Fig. 11: Fully enclosed cable connection box
Fig. 12: Grounded metal-elbow plug connectors
4/10 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Connection Systems
Power transformers
The most frequently used type of connec-tion for transformers is the outdoor bush-ing.Depending on voltage, current, systemconditions and transport requirements, thetransformers will be supplied with bush-ings arranged vertically, horizontally or in-clined. Up to about 110 kV it is usual touse oil-filled bushings according to DIN;condenser bushings are normally used forhigher voltages.Limited space or other design considera-tions often make it necessary to connectcables directly to the transformer. For volt-ages up to 30 kV air-filled cable boxes areused. For higher voltages the boxes areoil-filled. They may be attached to the tankcover or to its walls (Fig. 14).The space-saving design of SF6-insulatedswitchgear is one of its major advantages.The substation transformer is connecteddirectly to the SF6 switchgear. This elimi-nates the need for an intermediate link(cable, overhead line) between transform-er and system (Fig. 15).
Fig. 14: Transformers with oil-filled HV cable boxes
Fig. 15: Direct SF6-connection of the transformer to the switchgear
4/11Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories and Protective DevicesAccessories not listed completely.Deviations are possible.
Fig. 16: Double-float Buchholz relay
Fig. 17: Dial-type contact thermometer
Double-float Buchholz relay (Fig. 16)
For sudden pressure rise and gas detec-tion in oil-immersed transformer tanks withconservator. Installed in the connectingpipe between tank and conservator andresponding to internal arcing faults andslow decomposition of insulating materials.Additionally, backup function of oil alarm.The relay is actuated either by pressurewaves or gas accumulation, or by loss ofoil below the relay level. Seperate contactsare installed for alarm and tripping.In case of a gas accumulation alarm, gassamples can be drawn directly at the relaywith a small chemical testing kit. Discolor-ing of two liquids indicates either arcing byproducts or insulation decomposition prod-ucts in the oil. No change in color indicatesan air bubble.
Dial-type contact thermometer (Fig. 17)
Indicates actual top-oil temperature viacapillary tube. Sensor mounted in well intank cover. Up to four seperately adjust-able alarm contacts and one maximumpointer are available. Installed to be read-able from the ground.With the addition of a CT-fed thermal re-plica circuit, the simulated hot-spot wind-ing temperature of one or more phasescan be indicated on identical thermo-meters. These instruments can also beused to control forced cooling equipment.
Magnetic oil-level indicator (Fig. 18)
The float position inside of the conservatoris transmitted magnetically through thetank wall to the indicator to preserve thetank sealing standard device without con-tacts; devices supplied with limit (position)switches for high- and low-level alarm areavailable. Readable from the ground.
Fig. 18: Magnetic oil-level indicator
4/12 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories and Protective Devices
Protective device (Fig. 19) for hermeti-cally sealed transformers (TUMETIC)
For use on hermetically sealed TUMETICdistribution transformers. Gives alarmupon loss of oil and gas accumulation.Mounted directly at the (permanentlysealed) filler pipe of these transformers.
Pressure relief device (Fig. 20)
Relieves abnormally high internal pressureshock waves. Easily visible operationpointer and alarm contact. Reseals posi-tively after operation and continues tofunction without operator action.
Dehydrating breather (Fig. 21, 22)
A dehydrating breather removes most ofthe moisture from the air which is drawninto the conservator as the transformercools down. The absence of moisture inthe air largely eliminates any reduction inthe breakdown strength of the insulationand prevents any buildup of condensationin the conservator. Therefore, the dehy-drating breather contributes to safe andreliable operation of the transformer.
Bushing current transformer
Up to three ring-type current transformersper phase can be installed in power trans-formers on the upper and lower voltageside. These multiratio CTs are supplied inall common accuracy and burden ratingsfor metering and protection. Their second-ary terminals are brought out to short-circuiting-type terminal blocks in watertightterminal boxes.
Additional accessories
Besides the standard accessories and pro-tective devices there are additional itemsavailable, especially for large power trans-formers. They will be offered and installedon request.Examples are: Fiber-optic temperature measurements Permanent gas-in-oil analysis Permanent water-content measurement Sudden pressure rise relay,etc.
Fig. 20: Pressure relief device with alarm contact andautomatic resetting
Fig. 19: Protective device for hermetically sealedtransformers (TUMETIC)
Fig. 21: Dehydrating breather A DIN 42 567up to 5 MVA
Fig. 22: Dehydrating breather L DIN 42 562over 5 MVA
4/13Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
8
2W2V2U2N
1W2U1U
Oil drain plugThermometer pocketAdjustment for off-load tap changerRating plate (relocatable)Grounding terminals
23678
Towing eye, 30 mm dia.Lashing lugFiller pipeMounting facility forprotective device
9101112
2
H1
11
9
7
10 3 8
6
B1
12
E E A1
Technical Data Distribution TransformersTUNORMA and TUMETIC
Oil-immersed TUMETICand TUNORMA three-phasedistribution transformers
Standard: DIN 42500 Rated power: 50–2500 kVA Rated frequency: 50 Hz HV rating: up to 36 kV Taps on ± 2.5 % or ± 2 x 2.5 %
HV side: LV rating: 400–720 V
(special designs for upto 12 kV can be built)
Connection: HV winding: deltaLV winding: star(up to 100 kVA: zigzag)
Impedance 4 % (only up to HVvoltage at rated rating 24 kV andcurrent: ≤ 630 kVA) or
6 % (with rated power≥ 630 kVA or withHV rating > 24 kV)
Cooling: ONAN Protection class: IP00 Final coating: RAL 7033 (other
colours are available)
LIAC
Lightning-impulse test voltagePower-frequency test voltage
Um LI AC
1.1
12
24
36
[kV] [kV] [kV]
–
75
125
170
3
28
50
70
Fig. 23: Insulation level (IP00)The combinations B-A’ (normal losses)and A-C’ (reduced losses) are approxi-mately in line with previous standards.In addition there is the C-C’ combination.Transformers of this kind with additionallyreduced losses are especially economicalwith energy (maximum efficiency > 99%).The higher costs of these transformers arecounteracted by the energy savings whichthey make.Standard HD 428.3.S1 (= DIN 42500-3)specifies the losses for oil distributiontransformers up to Um = 36 kV. For loadlosses the listings D and E, for no-loadlosses the listings D’ and E’ were speci-fied. In order to find the most efficienttransformer, please see part ”Transformerloss evaluation“.
Losses
The standard HD 428.1.S1 (= DIN 42500Part 1) applies to three-phase oil-immerseddistribution transformers 50 Hz, from 50kVA to 2500 kVA, Um to 24 kV.For load losses (Pk), three different listings(A, B and C) were specified. There werealso three listings (A’, B’ and C’) for no-loadlosses (P0) and corresponding sound lev-els.Due to the different requirements, pairsof values were proposed which, in thenational standard, permit one or severalcombinations of losses.DIN 42500 specifies the combinationsA-C’, C-C’ and B-A’ as being most suitable.
2W2V2U2N
1W2U1U
Notes: Tank with strong corrugated walls shown in illustration is the preferred design. With HV ratings up to 24 kVand rated power up to 250 kVA (and with HV ratings > 24-36 kV and rated power up to 800 kVA), the conservator is fittedon the long side just above the LV bushings.
E82
H1
A1
4
E
9
7
10
1
3 8
6
B1
Oil level indicatorOil drain plugThermometer pocketBuchholz relay (optional extra)Dehydrating breather (optional extra)
12345
Adjustment for off-load tap changerRating plate (relocatable)Grounding terminalsTowing eye, 30 mm dia.Lashing lug
6789
10
5
Fig. 24: TUMETIC distribution transformer (sealed tank)
Fig. 25: TUNORMA distribution transformer (with conservator)
4/14 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
50
160
(200)
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Dist.betweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
LengthA1
WidthB1
HeightH1
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
Dimensions
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C
42
34
34
42
34
33
x
45
35
35
45
35
35
x
47
37
38
47
37
37
x
48
38
38
48
38
38
x
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
..4744-3LB
..4744-3RB
..4744-3TB
..4767-3LB
..4767-3RB
..4767-3TB
..4780-3CB
..5044-3LB
..5044-3RB
..5044-3TB
..5067-3LB
..5067-3RB
..5067-3TB
..5080-3CB
..5244 -3LA
..5244-3RA
..5244-3TA
..5267-3LA
..5267-3RA
..5267-3TA
..5280-3CA
..5344-3LA
..5344-3RA
..5344-3TA
..5367-3LA
..5367-3RA
..5367-3TA
..5380-3CA
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-D´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-D´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-D´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-D´
190
125
125
190
125
125
230
320
210
210
320
210
210
380
460
300
300
460
300
300
520
550
360
360
550
360
360
600
55
47
47
55
47
47
52
59
49
49
59
49
49
56
62
52
52
62
52
52
59
63
53
53
63
53
53
61
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
340
400
420
370
430
480
500
500
570
600
520
600
640
660
620
700
760
660
730
800
900
720
840
900
800
890
950
1000
350
430
440
380
460
510
x
500
570
620
530
610
680
x
610
690
780
640
730
820
x
710
830
920
780
910
980
x
860
825
835
760
860
880
1000
1090
980
1030
1020
1030
960
1050
1140
1130
985
1150
1030
1120
1120
1190
1070
1130
1290
1110
1080
1250
980
1045
985
860
860
1100
x
1020
980
930
1140
1030
1060
x
1140
1010
1085
1150
930
1120
x
1190
1120
1130
1290
1230
1180
x
660
660
660
660
660
685
710
660
660
660
685
690
695
780
710
660
660
695
695
710
800
680
660
660
820
755
705
800
1210
1210
1220
1315
1300
1385
1530
1275
1315
1320
1360
1400
1425
1600
1350
1390
1380
1440
1540
1475
1700
1450
1470
1450
1595
1630
1595
1700
1085
1085
1095
1235
1220
1265
x
1110
1145
1150
1245
1280
1305
x
1185
1220
1215
1320
1420
1355
x
1285
1300
1285
1425
1460
1430
x
100
1350
1100
875
1350
1100
875
1450
2150
1750
1475
2150
1750
1475
2350
3100
2350
2000
3100
2350
2000
3350
3600
2760
2350
3600
2760
2350
3800
660
660
660
660
660
660
x
660
660
660
660
660
660
x
710
660
660
660
660
660
x
680
660
680
800
680
690
x
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Max.ratedvolt.HVside
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type Combi-nation oflossesacc.CENELEC
No-loadlosses
P0[W]
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…
x: on requestDimensions and weights are approximate values. Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
Technical Data Distribution TransformersTUNORMA and TUMETIC
Fig. 26: Selection table: oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
4/15Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Dist.betweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
LengthA1
WidthB1
HeightH1
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
Dimensions
250
400
(500)
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Max.ratedvolt.HVside
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type Combi-nation oflossesacc.CENELEC
No-loadlosses
P0[W]
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…
x: on requestDimensions and weights are approximate values. Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
..5444-3LA
..5444-3RA
..5444-3TA
..5467-3LA
..5467-3RA
..5467-3TA
..5480-3CA
..5544-3LA
..5544-3RA
..5544-3TA
..5567-3LA
..5567-3RA
..5567-3TA
..5580-3CA
..5644-3LA
..5644-3RA
..5644-3TA
..5667-3LA
..5667-3RA
..5667-3TA
..5580-3CA
..5744-3LA
..5744-3RA
..5744-3TA
..5767-3LA
..5767-3RA
..5767-3TA
..5780-3CA
50
40
40
49
39
40
x
50
40
40
50
40
40
x
52
42
42
52
42
42
x
53
42
43
53
42
43
x
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
650
425
425
650
425
425
650
780
510
510
780
510
510
760
930
610
610
930
610
610
930
1100
720
720
1100
720
720
1050
65
55
55
65
55
55
62
66
56
56
66
56
56
64
68
58
58
68
58
58
65
69
59
59
69
59
59
66
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
830
940
1050
920
1010
1120
1100
980
1120
1240
1050
1170
1250
1220
1180
1320
1470
1240
1370
1490
1480
1410
1650
1700
1460
1650
1860
1680
820
920
1070
900
1010
1140
x
960
1100
1260
1030
1150
1280
x
1160
1310
1470
1220
1350
1520
x
1380
1620
1710
1440
1620
1910
x
1300
1260
1220
1340
1140
1220
1350
1440
1400
1380
1450
1410
1395
1420
1470
1400
1410
1570
1475
1440
1470
1500
1560
1500
1470
1495
1535
1510
1300
1260
1220
1340
1190
1340
x
1330
1250
1260
1350
1270
1290
x
1390
1360
1390
1570
1400
1400
x
1430
1550
1470
1530
1420
1500
x
810
670
690
800
760
715
800
820
820
820
840
820
820
960
930
820
820
940
820
820
990
840
890
820
835
835
820
1030
1450
1480
1530
1620
1675
1640
1680
1655
1690
1665
1655
1755
1675
1700
1700
1700
1695
1655
1760
1765
1830
1710
1745
1745
1755
1815
1860
1900
1285
1415
1310
1450
1510
1475
x
1385
1415
1390
1510
1610
1540
x
1425
1430
1420
1510
1615
1540
x
1440
1470
1470
1610
1665
1645
x
(315)
4200
3250
2750
4200
3250
2750
4250
5000
3850
3250
5000
3850
3250
5400
6000
4600
3850
6000
4600
3850
6200
7100
5450
4550
7100
5450
4550
7800
810
820
700
760
680
710
x
820
820
820
840
820
820
x
930
820
820
940
820
820
x
840
890
820
850
820
820
x
Technical Data Distribution TransformersTUNORMA and TUMETIC
Fig. 27: Selection table: oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
4/16 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Technical Data Distribution TransformersTUNORMA and TUMETIC
Fig. 28: Selection table: oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Dist.betweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
LengthA1
WidthB1
HeightH1
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
Dimensions
630
1000
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Max.ratedvolt.HVside
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type Combi-nation oflossesacc.CENELEC
No-loadlosses
P0[W]
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…
x: on requestDimensions and weights are approximate values. Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
53
43
43
53
43
43
53
43
43
53
43
43
x
55
45
44
55
45
44
x
55
45
45
55
45
45
x
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
4
4
4
6
6
6
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
..5844-3LA
..5844-3RA
..5844-3TA
..5844-3PA
..5844-3SA
..5844-3UA
..5867-3LA
..5867-3RA
..5867-3TA
..5867-3PA
..5867-3SA
..5867-3UA
..5880-3CA
..5944-3PA
..5944-3SA
..5944-3UA
..5967-3PA
..5967-3SA
..5967-3UA
..45980-
3CA
..6044-3PA
..6044-3SA
..6044-3UA
..6067-3PA
..6067-3SA
..6067-3UA
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
1300
860
860
1200
800
800
1300
860
860
1200
800
800
1300
1450
950
950
1450
950
950
1520
1700
1100
1100
1700
1100
1100
1700
70
60
60
70
60
60
70
60
60
70
60
60
67
72
62
62
72
62
62
68
73
63
63
73
63
63
68
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
1660
1850
2000
1750
1950
2160
1690
1940
2100
1730
1970
2240
1950
1990
2210
2520
2000
2390
2590
2400
2450
2660
2800
2530
2750
2830
2850
1660
1810
1990
1760
1920
2130
1650
1920
2130
1720
1960
2210
x
1960
2290
2490
1950
2340
2550
x
2640
2610
2750
2720
2690
2810
x
1680
1495
1535
1720
1665
1670
1665
1685
1600
1780
1645
1740
1740
1780
1720
1760
1720
1760
1770
1800
1790
1830
1830
1830
1790
1725
2120
1480
1420
1380
1560
1600
1560
1640
1680
1490
1580
1640
1670
x
1540
1830
1710
1710
1710
1700
x
1630
1830
1830
1670
1740
1770
x
880
835
820
890
870
830
860
870
820
880
830
880
1080
1000
900
920
1000
960
930
1100
1000
1040
1040
1090
1050
990
1160
1755
1785
1860
1920
1740
1840
1810
1910
1940
1760
1810
1840
1940
1905
1935
1975
1885
1945
1985
2030
2095
2025
2105
2095
2055
2065
2220
1585
1510
1520
1685
1400
1500
1595
1695
1725
1610
1595
1625
x
1660
1630
1730
1670
1730
1780
x
2070
1770
1840
2120
1840
1850
x
(800)
8400
6500
5400
8700
6750
5600
8400
6500
5400
8700
6750
5600
8800
10700
8500
7400
10700
8500
7400
11000
13000
10500
9500
13000
10500
9500
13000
880
820
820
890
870
830
860
870
820
880
830
880
x
1000
960
920
1000
960
930
x
1000
1040
1040
1010
1050
990
x
4/17Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Technical Data Distribution TransformersTUNORMA and TUMETIC
Fig. 29: Selection table: oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Dist.betweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
LengthA1
WidthB1
HeightH1
[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
TUM
ETIC
TUN
ORM
A
Dimensions
(1250)
(2000)
2500
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Max.ratedvolt.HVside
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type Combi-nation oflossesacc.CENELEC
No-loadlosses
P0[W]
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…
x: on requestDimensions and weights are approximate values. Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
..6144-3PA
..6144-3SA
..6144-3UA
..6167-3PA
..6167-3SA
..6167-3UA
..6180-3CA
..6244-3PA
..6244-3SA
..6244-3UA
..6267-3PA
..6267-3SA
..6267-3UA
..6280-3CA
..6344-3PA
..6344-3SA
..6344-3UA
..6367-3PA
..6367-3SA
..6367-3UA
..63780-
3CA
..6444-3PA
..6444-3SA
..6444-3UA
..6467-3PA
..6467-3SA
..6467-3UA
56
46
46
56
46
46
x
57
47
47
57
47
47
x
58
49
49
58
49
49
x
61
51
51
61
51
51
x
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
B-A'
A-C'
C-C'
E-E´
2100
1300
1300
2100
1300
1300
2150
2600
1700
1700
2600
1700
1700
2600
2900
2050
2050
2900
2050
2050
3200
3500
2500
2500
3500
2500
2500
3800
74
64
64
74
64
64
70
76
66
66
76
66
66
71
78
68
68
78
68
68
75
81
71
71
81
71
71
76
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
2900
3100
3340
2950
3190
3390
3360
3450
3640
3930
3470
3670
4010
3930
4390
4270
4730
4480
4290
4910
5100
5200
5150
5790
5420
5260
5640
5900
3080
3040
3040
3200
3120
3330
x
3590
3590
3880
3690
3850
3950
x
4450
4430
4710
4500
4490
4840
x
5090
5110
5660
5220
5220
5470
x
1930
1810
1755
2020
1840
1810
2150
1970
2030
2020
2070
2030
2000
2170
2100
2080
2020
2020
2190
2110
2260
2115
2195
2190
2115
2195
2160
2320
1850
1780
1720
1780
1810
1780
x
1870
1760
1900
1830
2000
1850
x
1890
1840
1730
1860
2030
1980
x
2030
1950
2190
2030
2030
2080
x
1260
990
1015
1260
1060
1015
1250
1220
1080
1110
1280
1230
1030
1340
1330
1330
1330
1330
1330
1330
1380
1345
1345
1330
1335
1335
1330
1390
2110
2145
2235
2110
2115
2245
2350
2315
2315
2395
2335
2265
2305
2480
2555
2455
2495
2655
2425
2475
2560
2685
2535
2565
2785
2585
2605
2790
2070
1880
1970
2220
1900
2030
x
2095
2010
2070
2320
2120
2010
x
2540
2250
2170
2660
2280
2180
x
2550
2450
2240
2675
2580
2305
x
1600
16000
13200
11400
16000
13200
11400
16400
20000
17000
14000
20000
17000
14000
19200
25300
21200
17500
25300
21200
17500
22000
29000
26500
22000
29000
26500
22000
29400
1100
990
1000
1100
1060
990
x
1140
1090
1100
1120
1070
1030
x
1330
1330
1330
1330
1330
1330
x
1330
1330
1330
1330
1335
1330
x
4/18 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Transformers – General
Rated power HV range Type oftap changer
Figure/page
[kV]
25 to 123
25 to 123
up to 36
up to 36
72.5 to 145
Fig. 31, page 4/19
Fig. 33, page 4/20
Fig. 35, page 4/21
Fig. 38, page 4/22
Fig. 41, page 4/23
off-load
on-load
off-load
on-load
on-load
[MVA]
3.15 to 10
3.15 to 10
10/16 to 20/31.5
10/16 to 20/31.5
10/16 to 63/100
Note: Off-load tap changers are designed to be operated de-energized only.
Fig. 30: Types of power transformers
Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformers with off-and on-load tap changers
Cooling methods
Transformers up to 10 MVA are designedfor ONAN cooling.By adding fans to these transformers, therating can be increased by 25%.However, in general it is more economicalto select higher ONAN ratings rather thanto add fans.Transformers larger than 10 MVA are de-signed with ONAN/ONAF cooling.Explanation of cooling methods: ONAN: Oil-natural, air-natural cooling ONAF: Oil-natural, air-forced cooling (in
one or two steps)The arrangement with the attached radia-tors, as shown in the illustrations, is thepreferred design. However, other arrange-ments of the cooling equipment are alsopossible.Depending on transportation possibilitiesthe bushings, radiators and expansion tankhave be removed. If necessary, the oil hasto be drained and shipped separately.
4/19Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Transformers – Selection TablesTechnical Data, Dimensions and Weights
E
H
EW
L
Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformers withoff-load tap changer3 150–10000 kVA,HV rating: up to 123 kV
Taps onHV side: ± 2 x 2.5 %
Rated frequency: 50 Hz Impedance 6-10 %
voltage: Connection: HV winding: star-
delta connectionalternatively availableup to 24 kVLV winding:star or delta
3150
4000
LV rating No-loadloss
DimensionsL/W/H
Rated power HV rating Load lossat 75 °C
Totalweight
Oilweight
E
5000
6300
8000
10000
[kW]
28
33
35
38
41
46
45
48
53
54
56
62
63
65
72
2800/1850/2870
3200/2170/2940
3100/2300/3630
2550/2510/3020
3150/2490/3730
4560/2200/4540
2550/2840/3200
3200/2690/3080
4780/2600/4540
2580/2770/3530
3250/2850/4000
4880/2630/4590
2670/2900/3720
4060/2750/4170
4970/2900/4810
1600
1900
3100
2300
3300
6300
2500
3700
6600
3300
4200
7300
3900
4700
8600
[mm]
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
[kVA]ONAN
[kV] [kV] [kW] [kg] [kg] [mm]
6.1–36
7.8–36
50–72.5
9.5–36
50–72.5
90–123
12.2–36
50–72.5
90–123
12.2–36
50–72.5
90–123
15.2–36
50–72.5
90–123
3–24
3–24
3–24
4–24
4–24
5–36
5–24
5–24
5–36
5–24
5–24
5–36
6–24
6–24
5–36
4.6
5.5
6.8
6.5
8.0
9.8
7.7
9.3
11.0
9.4
11.0
12.5
11.0
12.5
14.0
7200
8400
10800
9800
12200
17500
11700
13600
18900
14000
15900
21500
16600
18200
25000
Fig. 32
Fig. 31
4/20 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Transformers – Selection TablesTechnical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformerswith on-load tap changer3 150–10 000 kVA,HV rating: up to 123 kV
Taps on ± 16% in ± 8 stepsHV side: of 2%
Rated frequency: 50 Hz Impedance 6–10 %
voltage: Connection: HV winding: star
LV winding:star or delta
Fig. 33
10.9–36
9.2–36
50–72.5
11.5–36
50–72.5
90–123
14.4–36
50–72.5
90–123
18.3–36
50–72.5
90–123
22.9–36
50–72.5
90–123
kW
29
35
37
40
43
49
47
50
56
57
59
65
66
68
76
3400/2300/2900
3500/2700/3000
4150/2350/3600
3600/2400/3200
4200/2700/3700
5300/2700/4650
3700/2700/3300
4300/2900/3850
5600/2900/4650
3850/2500/3500
4600/2800/4050
5650/2950/4650
4400/2600/3650
5200/2850/4100
5750/2950/4700
2300
2600
4100
3100
4500
8000
3600
5000
8500
4500
6000
9000
5200
6500
10250
[mm]
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
1505
[kVA]ONAN
[kV] [kV] [kW] [kg] [kg] [mm]
3–24
3–24
4–24
4–24
5–24
5–36
5–24
5–24
5–36
5–24
5–24
5–36
6–24
6–24
5–36
4.8
5.8
7.1
6.8
8.4
9.8
8.1
9.8
11.5
9.9
11.5
13.1
11.5
13.1
14.7
9100
10300
13700
12300
15200
21800
14000
17000
23000
17000
19700
25500
20000
22500
29500
3150
4000
5000
6300
8000
10000
Rated power LV rating No-loadloss
HV rating Load lossat 75 °C
DimensionsL/W/H
Totalweight
Oilweight
E
Fig. 34
E
H
EW
L
4/21Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Transformers – Selection TablesTechnical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformerswith off-load tap changer10/16 to 20/31.5 MVAHV rating: up to 36 kV
Rated frequency: 50 Hz, tapping range± 2 x 2.5%
Connection of starHV winding:
Connection of star or deltaLV winding:
Cooling method: ONAN/ONAF LV range: 6 kV to 36 kV
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
Fig. 37
E
H
EW
LLs
Ws
Hs
[kW]
No-loadloss
12
14
16
19
Load loss atONAN
[kW] [kW]
ONAF
31
37
45
52
80
95
110
130
Impedance voltage ofONAN ONAF
[%] [%]
6.3
6.3
6.4
6.4
10
10
10
10
[MVA]
Rated power atONAN
[MVA]
10
12.5
16
20
16
20
25
31.5
ONAF
L x W x HShippingweightincl. oil
[MVA]
Rated power atONAN
[MVA]
ONAF
10
12.5
16
20
16
20
25
31.5
[kg][mm]
Totalweight
Dimensions
3700
3800
3900
4200
22
25
30
35
[mm] [kg]
2350
2350
2400
2450
3900
4000
4100
4600
[kg]
Oilweight
4200
4500
5000
5700
22000
23000
27000
31500
3600
3700
3800
3900
1550
1600
1600
1650
2650
2800
2800
3000
ShippingdimensionsLs x Ws x Hs
4/22 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Transformers – Selection TablesTechnical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformerwith on-load tap changer10/16 to 20/31.5 MVA,HV rating: up to 36 kV
Rated frequency: 50 Hz, tapping range± 16% in ± 9 steps
Connection of starHV winding:
Connection of star or deltaLV winding:
Cooling method: ONAN/ONAF LV range: 6 kV to 36 kV
Fig. 38
Fig. 39
Fig. 40
Ls
H
Ws
WL
Hs
10
12.5
16
20
16
20
25
31.5
12
14
16
19
31
37
45
52
80
95
111
130
6.3
6.3
6.4
6.4
10
10
10
10
[kW]
No-loadloss
Load loss atONAN
[kW] [kW]
ONAFImpedance voltage ofONAN ONAF
[%] [%][MVA]
Rated power atONAN
[MVA]
ONAF
4800
4900
5050
5300
27000
30000
34000
41000
2450
2500
2500
2550
3900
4000
4100
4600
6200
6700
7000
9000
24000
27000
31000
37000
4400
4500
4650
5000
1550
1600
1650
1700
2600
2650
2650
3000
L x W x HShippingweightincl. oil
[MVA]
Rated power atONAN
[MVA]
ONAF
[kg][mm]
Totalweight
Dimensions
[mm] [kg][kg]
Oilweight
ShippingdimensionsLs x Ws x Hs
10
12.5
16
20
16
20
25
31.5
4/23Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Transformers – Selection TablesTechnical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformers withon-load tap changer10/16 to 63/100 MVA,HV rating: from 72.5 to 145 kV
Rated frequency: 50 Hz, tapping range± 16% in ± 9 steps
Connection of starHV winding:
Connection star or deltaof LV winding:
Cooling method: ONAN/ONAF
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
[kW][MVA]
Rated power atONAN
No-loadloss
[MVA]
ONAF
10
12.5
16
20
25
31.5
40
50
63
31.5
13
15
17
20
24
28
35
41
49
Load loss atONAN
[kW] [kW]
ONAF
42
45
51
56
63
71
86
91
113
108
115
125
140
160
180
214
232
285
Impedance voltage ofONAN ONAF
[%] [%]
9.6
9.4
9.6
9.6
9.5
9.5
9.8
10.0
10.5
15.4
15.0
15.0
15.1
15.2
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.7
16
20
25
40
50
63
80
100
L x W x HShippingweightincl. oil
[kg][MVA] [mm]
Rated power atONAN ONAF
Totalweight
Dimensions
10
12.5
16
20
25
31.5
40
50
63
6600
6700
6750
6800
6900
7050
7100
7400
7800
39000
43000
48000
54000
61000
70000
82000
97000
118000
Ls x Ws x Hs
[mm] [kg]
2650
2700
2750
2800
2900
2950
3000
3100
3250
4700
4800
5300
5400
5400
5500
5700
5800
6100
[kg]
Oilweight
12000
12500
13500
14000
14500
17000
18000
20500
25500
35000
39000
43000
49000
56000
65000
75000
90000
109000
5200
5300
5400
5500
5700
5850
6100
6250
6800
1900
1950
2000
2000
2100
2150
2200
2300
2450
3000
3100
3000
3100
3150
3350
3450
3700
4000
Shipping dimensions
31.5
16
20
25
40
50
63
80
100
[MVA]
4/24 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
On-load Tap Changers
The on-load tap changers installed inSiemens power transformers are manufac-tured by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen (MR).MR is a supplier of technically advancedon-load tap changers for oil-immersedpower transformers covering an applicationrange from 100 A to 4,500 A and up to420 kV. About 90,000 MR high-speed re-sistor-type tap changers are succesfully inservice worldwide.The great variety of tap changer models isbased on a modular system which is capa-ble of meeting the individual customers’specifications for the respective operatingconditions of the transformer. Dependingon the required application range selector,switches or diverter switches with tap se-lectors can be used, both available for neu-tral, delta or single-pole connection. Up to107 operating positions can be achieved bythe use of a multiple course tap selector.In addition to the well-known on-load tap-changer for installation in oil-immersedtransformers, MR offers also a standard-ized gas-insulated tap changer for indoorinstallation which will be mounted on dry-type transformers up to approx. 30 MVAand 36 kV, or SF6-type transformers up to40 MVA and 123 kV.The main characteristics of MRproducts are: Compact design Optimum adaption and economic
solutions offered by the great numberof variants
High reliability Long life Reduced maintenance Service friendlinessThe tap changers are mechanicallydriven – via the drive shafts and the bevelgear – by a motor drive attached to thetransformer tank. It is controlled accordingto the step-by-step principle. Electrical andmechanical safety devices prevent over-running of the end positions. Further safe-ty measures, such as the automatic restartfunction, a safety circuit to prevent falsephase sequence and running through posi-tions, ensure the reliable operation of mo-tor drives.
For operation under extremely onerousconditions an oil filter unit is availablefor filtering or filtering and drying of theswitching oil. Voltage monitoring is effect-ed by microprocessor-controlled operationcontrol systems or voltage regulatorswhich include a great variety of data inputand output facilities.In combination with a parallel control unit,several transformers connected in parallelcan be automatically controlled and moni-tored.Furthermore, Maschinenfabrik Reinhausenoffers a worldwide technical service tomaintain their high quality standard.Inspections at regular intervals with onlysmall maintenance requirements guaranteethe reliable operation expected with MRproducts.
Fig. 43: MR motor drive unit MA 7 Fig. 44: Gas-insulated on-load tap changer
Fig. 45: Selection of on-load tap changers from the MR product range
Type VT
Type V Type H Type M Type G
4/25Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Cast-resin Dry-type Transformers, GEAFOL
Standards and regulations
GEAFOL® cast-resin dry-type transformerscomply with IEC recommendationNo. 726, CENELEC HD 464, HD 538and DIN 42 523.
Advantages and applications
GEAFOL distribution and power trans-formers in ratings from 100 to more than20 000 kVA and LI values up to 170 kVare full substitutes for oil-immersed trans-formers with comparable electrical andmechanical data.GEAFOL transformers are designed forindoor installation close to their point ofuse at the center of the major consumers.
They only make use of flame-retardentinorganic insulating materials which freethese transformers from all restrictionsthat apply to oil-filled electrical equipment,such as oil-collecting pits, fire walls, fire-extinguishing equipment, etc.GEAFOL transformers are installed wher-ever oil-filled units cannot be used: insidebuildings, in tunnels, on ships, cranes andoffshore platforms, in ground-water catch-ment areas, in food processing plants, etc.Often they are combined with their prima-ry and secondary switchgear and distribu-tion boards into compact substations thatare installed directly at their point of use.As thyristor-converter transformers forvariable speed drives they can be installedtogether with the converters at the drive
location. This reduces civil works, cablecosts, transmission losses, and installationcosts.GEAFOL transformers are fully LI-rated.They have similar noise levels as compara-ble oil-filled transformers. Taking the aboveindirect cost reductions into account, theyare also frequently cost-competitive.By virtue of their design, GEAFOL trans-formers are completely maintenancefreefor their lifetime.GEAFOL transformers have been insuccessful service since 1965. A lot oflicenses have been granted to majormanufactures throughout the world since.
Fig. 46: GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformer
* on-load tap changers on request.
HV windingConsisting of vacuum-potted single foil-type
aluminum coils.See enlarged detail
in Fig. 47
HV terminalsVariable arrangements,for optimal station design.HV tapping links on low-voltage side for adjust-ment to system con-ditions, reconnectablein deenergized state
Resilient spacersTo insulate core and
windings from mechani-cal vibrations, resultingin low noise emissions
LV windingMade of aluminum strip.
Turns firmly gluedtogether by means of
insulating sheet wrappermaterial
Cross-flow fansPermitting a 50% in-crease in the rated power
Temperature monitoringBy PTC thermistor detec-tors in the LV winding
Paint finish onsteel partsMultiple coating,RAL 5009. On request:Two-component varnishor hot-dip galvanizing(for particularly aggressiveenvironments)
Clamping frame and truckRollers can be swung
around for lengthways orsideways travel
Insulation:Mixture of epoxy resin
and quartz powderMakes the transformer
maintenance-free, moist-ure-proof, tropicalized,
flame-resistant and self-extinguishing
LV terminalsNormal arrangement:Top, rearSpecial version: Bottom,available on request atextra charge
Ambient class E2Climatic category C2(If the transformer is in-stalled outdoors, degreeof protection IP 23 mustbe assured)
Three-leg coreMade of grain-oriented,
low-loss electrolami-nations insulated on
both sides
Fire class F1
4/26 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Cast-resin Dry-type Transformers, GEAFOL
1
8
8
223344
5 6
6
7
7U
U
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Round-wirewinding
Stripwinding
HV winding
The high-voltage windings are woundfrom aluminum foil, interleaved with high-grade polypropylene insulating foil. Theassembled and connected individual coilsare placed in a heated mold, and are pot-ted in a vaccum furnace with a mixtureof pure silica (quartz sand) and speciallyblended epoxy resins. The only connec-tions to the outside are copper bushings,which are internally bonded to the alumi-num winding connections.The external star or delta connectionsare made of insulated copper connectorsto guarantee an optimal installation design.The resulting high-voltage windings arefire-resistant, moistureproof, corrosion-proof, and show excellent aging propertiesunder all indoor operating conditions.(For outdoor use, specially designed sheet-metal enclosures are available).The foil windings combine a simple wind-ing technique with a high degree of elec-trical safety. The insulation is subjectedto less electrical stress than in othertypes of windings. In a conven-tional round-wire winding,the interturn voltagecan add up to twice theinterlayer voltage, whilein a foil winding it never exeeds the simplevoltage per turn because a layer consistsof only one winding turn. Result: a highAC voltage and impulse-voltage withstandcapacity.Why aluminum? The thermal expansioncoefficients of aluminum and cast resin areso similar that thermal stresses resultingfrom load changes are kept to a minimum(see Fig. 47).
LV winding
The standard low-voltage winding with itsconsiderably reduced dielectric stresses iswound from single aluminum sheets withinterleaved cast-resin impregnated fiber-glass fabric.The assembled coils are then oven-curedto form uniformly bonded solid cylindersthat are impervious to moisture. Throughthe single-sheet winding design, excellentdynamic stability under short-circuit con-ditions is achieved. Connections are sub-merged-arc-welded to the aluminumsheets and are extended either as alu-minum or copper busbars to the secondaryterminals.
Fig. 47: High-voltage encapsulated winding design of GEAFOL cast-resin transformer and voltage stress of aconventional round-wire winding (above) and the foil winding (below)
4/27Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Cast-resin Dry-type Transformers, GEAFOL
Fire safety
GEAFOL transformers use only flame-retardent and self-extinguishing materialsin their construction. No additional sub-stances, such as aluminum oxide trihy-drate, which could negatively influencethe mechanical stability of the cast-resinmolding material, is used. Internal arcingfrom electrical faults and externally appliedflames do not cause the transformers toburst or burn. After the source of ignitionis removed, the transformer is self-extin-guishing. This design has been approvedby fire officials in many countries for instal-lation in populated buildings and otherstructures.The environmental safety of the combus-tion residues has been proven in manytests.
Categorization of cast-resintransformers
Dry-type transformers have to be cate-gorized under the sections listed below: Environmental category Climatic category Fire categoryThese categories have to be shown on therating plate of each dry-type transformer.
The properties laid down in the standardsfor ratings within the approximate categoryrelating to environment (humidity), climateand fire behavior have to be demonstratedby means of tests.These tests are described for the environ-mental category (code number E0, E1 andE2) and for the climatic category (codenumber C1, C2) in DIN VDE 0532 Part 6(corresponding to HD 464). According tothis standard, they are to be carried out oncomplete transformers.The tests of fire behavior (fire categorycode numbers F0 and F1) are limited totests on a duplication of a complete trans-former. It consists of a core leg, a low-volt-age winding and a high-voltage winding.The specifications for fire category F2 aredetermined by agreement between themanufacturer and the customer.Siemens have carried out a lot of tests.The results for our GEAFOL transformersare something to be proud of: Environmental category E2 Climatic category C2 Fire category F1This good behavior is solely due to theGEAFOL cast-resin mix which has beenused successfully for decades.
Insulation class and temperature rise
The high-voltage winding and the low-voltage winding utilize class F insulatingmaterials with a mean temperature riseof 100 K (standard design).
Overload capability
GEAFOL transformers can be overloadedpermanently up to 50% (with a corre-sponding increase in impedance voltage)if additional radial cooling fans are installed.(Dimensions increase by approximately200 mm in length and width.) Short-timeoverloads are uncritical as long as themaximum winding temperatures are notexceeded for extended periods of time.
Temperature monitoring
Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted withthree temperature sensors installed inthe LV winding, and a solid-state trippingdevice with relay output. The PTC thermis-tors used for sensing are selected for theapplicable maximum hot-spot winding tem-perature. Additional sets of sensors withlower temperature points can be installedfor them and for fan control purposes. Ad-ditional dial-type thermometers and Pt100are available, too. For operating voltagesof the LV winding of 3.6 kV and higher,special temperature measuring equipmentcan be provided.Auxiliary wiring is run in protective conduitand terminated in a central LV terminalbox (optional). Each wire and terminal isidentified, and a wiring diagram is perma-nently attached to the inside cover of thisterminal box.
Installation and enclosures
Indoor installation in electrical operatingrooms or in various sheet-metal enclosuresis the preferred method of installation.The transformers need only be protectedagainst access to the terminals or thewinding surfaces, against direct sunlight,and against water. Sufficient ventilationmust be provided by the installation loca-tion or the enclosure. Otherwise forced-aircooling must be specified or provided byothers.
Fig. 48: Flammability test of cast-resin transformer
4/28 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Cast-resin Dry-type Transformers, GEAFOL
Instead of the standard open terminals,insulated plug-type elbow connectors canbe supplied for the high-voltage side withLI ratings up to 170 kV. Primary cables areusually fed to the transformer from trench-es below, but can also be connected fromabove.Secondary connections can be made bymultiple insulated cables, or by busbars,from either below or above. Secondaryterminals are either aluminum or copperbusbar stubs, drilled to specification.A variety of indoor and outdoor enclosuresin different protection classes are availablefor the transformers alone, or for indoorcompact substations in conjunction withhigh- and low-voltage switchgear cubicles.
Recycling of GEAFOL transformers
Of all the GEAFOL transformers manufac-tured since 1965, even the oldest units arenot about to reach the end of their servicelife expectancy. In spite of this, a lot ofexperiences have been made over theyears with the recycling of coils that havebecome unusable due to faulty manufac-ture or damage. These experiences showthat all the metallic components, i.e. ap-prox. 90% of all materials, can be fully re-covered economically. The recycling meth-od used by Siemens does not pollute theenvironment. In view of the value of thesecondary raw materials, the procedurecan be economical even considering thecurrently small amounts.
Fig. 50: Radial cooling fans on GEAFOL transformer for AF cooling
Fig. 49: GEAFOL transformer with plug-type cable connections
Fig. 51: GEAFOL transformer in protective housing to IP 20/40
4/29Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
GEAFOL Cast-resin Selection Tables,Technical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Um LJ AC
1.1
12
24
36
[kV] [kV] [kV]
–
75
95**
145**
3
28
50
70
E
H1
2U 2V 2W
A1EB1
2N
Standard: DIN 42523 Rated power: 100–20000 kVA* Rated frequency: 50 Hz HV rating: up to 36 kV LV rating: up to 780 V;
special designsfor up to 12 kV arepossible
Tappings on ± 2.5% or ± 2 x 2.5%HV side:
Connection: HV winding: deltaLV winding: star
Impedance 4–8%voltage at ratedcurrent:
Insulation class: HV/LV = F/F Temperature HV/LV = 100/100 K
rise: Color of metal RAL 5009 (other
parts: colors are available)
Fig. 53: GEAFOL cast-resin transformer
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Distancebetweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
Length Width Height
GGES[kg]
A1[mm]
B1[mm]
H1[mm]
Dimensions
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C** In case of short-circuits at 120 °C
45
37
45
37
45
37
45
37
47
39
47
39
47
39
47
39
12
24
12
24
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
.5044-3CA
.5044-3GA
.5044-3DA
.5044-3HA
.5064-3CA
.5064-3GA
.5064-3DA
.5064-3HA
.5244-3CA
.5244-3GA
.5244-3DA
.5244-3HA
.5264-3CA
.5264-3GA
.5264-3DA
.5264-3HA
440
320
360
300
600
400
420
330
610
440
500
400
800
580
600
480
59
51
59
51
59
51
59
51
62
54
62
54
62
54
62
54
without wheels
without wheels
without wheels
without wheels
without wheels
without wheels
without wheels
without wheels
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
630
760
590
660
750
830
660
770
770
920
750
850
910
940
820
900
1210
1230
1190
1230
1310
1300
1250
1300
1220
1290
1270
1300
1330
1310
1310
1350
705
710
705
710
755
755
750
755
710
720
720
725
725
720
725
765
835
890
860
855
935
940
915
930
1040
1050
990
985
1090
1095
1075
1060
1600
1600
2000
2000
1500
1500
1800
1800
2300
2300
2300
2300
2200
2200
2500
2500
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Ratedvoltage
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type No-loadlosses
P0[W]
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4GB…
Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
1900
1900
2300
2300
1750
1750
2050
2050
2600
2600
2700
2700
2500
2500
2900
2900
Loadlosses
Pk 120**[W]
100
160
Dimensions and weights are approximate values and valid for 400 V on the secondary side, vector-group can be Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
Fig. 52: Insulation level
* power rating > 2.5 MVA uopn request** other levels upon request
Fig. 54: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
4/30 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
GEAFOL Cast-resin Selection Tables,Technical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Fig. 55: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
(315)
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Distancebetweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
Length Width Height
GGES[kg]
A1[mm]
B1[mm]
H1[mm]
Dimensions
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C** In case of short-circuits at 120 °C
50
42
50
42
50
41
50
41
50
52
43
51
43
51
43
51
43
51
52
44
52
44
52
44
52
44
52
53
45
53
45
53
44
53
45
53
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
.5444-3CA
.5444-3GA
.5444-3DA
.5444-3HA
.5464-3CA
.5464-3GA
.5464-3DA
.5464-3HA
.5475-3CA
.5544-3CA
.5544-3GA
.5544-3DA
.5544-3HA
.5564-3CA
.5564-3GA
.5564-3DA
.5564-3HA
.5575-3CA
.5644-3CA
.5644-3GA
.5644-3DA
.5644-3HA
.5664-3CA
.5664-3GA
.5664-3DA
.5664-3HA
.5675-3CA
.5744-3CA
.5744-3GA
.5744-3DA
.5744-3HA
.5764-3CA
.5764-3GA
.5764-3DA
.5764-3HA
.5775-3CA
820
600
700
570
1050
800
880
650
1300
980
720
850
680
1250
930
1000
780
1450
1150
880
1000
820
1450
1100
1200
940
1700
1350
1000
1200
980
1700
1270
1400
1100
1900
65
57
65
57
65
57
65
57
65
67
59
67
59
67
59
67
59
67
68
60
68
60
68
60
68
60
68
69
61
69
61
69
61
69
61
69
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
520
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
1040
1170
990
1120
1190
1230
990
1180
1700
1160
1320
1150
1290
1250
1400
1190
1300
1900
1310
1430
1250
1350
1410
1570
1350
1460
2100
1520
1740
1470
1620
1620
1830
1580
1720
2600
1330
1330
1350
1390
1390
1400
1360
1430
1900
1370
1380
1380
1410
1410
1440
1410
1460
1950
1380
1380
1410
1430
1440
1460
1480
1480
2000
1410
1450
1460
1490
1500
1540
1540
1560
2050
730
730
740
745
735
735
735
745
900
820
820
830
830
820
825
825
830
920
820
820
825
830
825
830
835
835
920
830
835
845
845
835
840
850
850
940
1110
1135
1065
1090
1120
1150
1140
1160
1350
1125
1195
1140
1165
1195
1205
1185
1195
1400
1265
1290
1195
1195
1280
1280
1275
1280
1440
1320
1345
1275
1290
1330
1350
1305
1320
1500
250 3000
3000
2900
2900
2900
2900
3100
3100
3800
3300
3300
3400
3400
3400
3400
3600
3600
4500
4300
4300
4300
4300
3900
3900
4100
4100
5100
4900
4900
5600
5600
4800
4800
5000
5000
6000
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Ratedvoltage
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type No-loadlosses
P0[W]
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4GB…
Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
3500
3400
3300
3300
3300
3300
3600
3600
4370
3800
3800
3900
3900
3900
3900
4100
4100
5170
4900
4900
4900
4900
4500
4500
4700
4700
5860
5600
5600
6400
6400
5500
5500
5700
5700
6900
Loadlosses
Pk 120**[W]
Dimensions and weights are approximate values and valid for 400 V on the secondary side, vector-group can be Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
400
(500)
4/31Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
GEAFOL Cast-resin Selection Tables,Technical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Distancebetweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
Length Width Height
GGES[kg]
A1[mm]
B1[mm]
H1[mm]
Dimensions
(800)
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C** In case of short-circuits at 120 °C
54
45
54
45
53
45
53
45
53
55
47
55
47
55
47
55
47
55
55
47
56
47
55
47
55
47
55
57
49
57
49
57
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
4
4
6
6
4
4
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
.5844-3CA
.5844-3GA
.5844-3DA
.5844-3HA
.5864-3CA
.5864-3GA
.5864-3DA
.5864-3HA
.5875-3CA
.5944-3CA
.5944-3GA
.5944-3DA
.5944-3HA
.5964-3CA
.5964-3GA
.5964-3DA
.5964-3HA
.5975-3CA
.6044-3CA
.6044-3GA
.6044-3DA
.6044-3HA
.6064-3CA
..6064-3GA
.6064-3DA
.6064-3HA
.6075-3CA
.6144-3DA
.6144-3HA
.6164-3DA
.6164-3HA
.6175-3CA
1500
1150
1370
1150
1950
1500
1650
1250
2200
1850
1450
1700
1350
2100
1600
1900
1450
2600
2200
1650
2000
1500
2400
1850
2300
1750
3000
2400
1850
2700
2100
3500
70
62
70
62
70
62
70
62
70
72
64
72
64
72
64
71
64
72
73
65
73
65
73
65
73
65
73
75
67
75
67
75
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
670
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
820
520
1830
2070
1770
1990
1860
2100
1810
2050
2900
2080
2430
2060
2330
2150
2550
2110
2390
3300
2480
2850
2420
2750
2570
3060
2510
2910
3900
2900
3370
3020
3490
4500
1510
1470
1550
1590
1550
1600
1580
1620
2070
1570
1590
1560
1600
1610
1650
1610
1630
2140
1590
1620
1620
1660
1660
1680
1680
1730
2200
1780
1790
1820
1850
2300
840
835
860
865
845
850
855
860
940
850
855
865
870
845
855
860
865
950
990
990
990
990
990
990
990
990
1050
990
990
990
990
1060
1345
1505
1295
1310
1380
1400
1345
1370
1650
1560
1640
1490
1530
1580
1620
1590
1595
1850
1775
1795
1560
1560
1730
1815
1620
1645
1900
1605
1705
1635
1675
2000
630 6400
6400
6400
6400
6000
6000
6400
6400
7000
7800
7800
7600
7600
7500
7500
7900
7900
8200
8900
8900
8500
8500
8700
8700
9200
9600
9500
9600
10500
10000
10500
11000
7300
7300
7400
7400
6900
6900
7300
7300
8000
9000
9000
8700
8700
8600
8600
9100
9100
9400
10200
10200
9700
9700
10000
10000
10500
11000
10900
11000
12000
11500
12000
12600
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Ratedvoltage
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type No-loadlosses
P0[W]
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4GB…
Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
Loadlosses
Pk 120**[W]
Dimensions and weights are approximate values and valid for 400 V on the secondary side, vector-group can be Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
(1250)
1000
Fig. 56: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
4/32 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
GEAFOL Cast-resin Selection Tables,Technical Data, Dimensions and Weights
Soundpowerlevel
LWA[dB]
Distancebetweenwheelcenters
E[mm]
Totalweight
Length Width Height
GGES[kg]
A1[mm]
B1[mm]
H1[mm]
Dimensions
(2000)
2500
* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C** In case of short-circuits at 120 °CRated power >2500 kVA to 20 MVA on request.
58
50
58
49
58
59
51
59
51
59
62
51
61
51
61
12
24
36
12
24
36
12
24
36
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
.6244-3DA
.6244-3HA
.6264-3DA
.6264-3HA
.6275-3CA
.6344-3DA
.6344-3HA
.6364-3DA
.6364-3HA
.6375-3CA
.6444-3DA
.6444-3HA
.6464-3DA
.6464-3HA
.6475-3CA
2800
2100
3100
2400
4300
3600
2650
4000
3000
5100
4300
3000
5000
3600
6400
76
68
76
68
76
78
70
78
70
78
81
71
81
71
81
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
1070
3550
4170
3640
4080
5600
4380
5140
4410
4920
6300
5130
6230
5280
6220
7900
1840
1880
1880
1900
2500
1950
1990
2020
2040
2500
2110
2170
2170
2220
2700
995
1005
995
1005
1100
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
1280
2025
2065
2035
2035
2400
2150
2205
2160
2180
2400
2150
2205
2160
2180
2400
1600 11000
11400
11800
12300
12700
14000
14500
14500
14900
15400
17600
18400
17600
18000
18700
12500
13000
13500
14000
14600
16000
16500
16500
17000
17700
20000
21000
20000
20500
21500
Ratedpower
Sn[kVA]
Ratedvoltage
Um[kV]
Impe-dancevoltage
U2[%]
Type No-loadlosses
P0[W]
LPA[dB]
Loadlosses
Pk 75*[W]4GB…
Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.
Loadlosses
Pk 120**[W]
Dimensions and weights are approximate values and valid for 400 V on the secondary side, vector-group can be Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.
Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB
Fig. 57: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers 50 to 2500 kVA
4/33Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Special Transformers and Reactors
Rectifier transformer for electrostaticprecipitators
DC voltages up to 148 kV are used toremove solid pollutants from smokestackemissions in industrial and power generat-ing plants. Siemens has developed specialtransformers with built-in silicon rectifierdiodes, so-called rectiformers, for thispurpose.These units are constructed based on theTUMETIC hermetically sealed transformerprinciple. In addition to the transformerwindings, the following components arecontained in this variable-volume sealedoil tank: LV current-attenuating reactor HV rectifier bridge HV measuring resistor HF reactorThe DC voltage is fed through the tanktop by means of a single bushing. Theseparate LV terminal 60x, mounted on thetransformer side, contains the LV terminal,HV flashover detection with amplifierfor kV measurement, shunt for precipitatorcurrent measurement, 2 surge-voltageprotectors.To adjust the DC output voltage, the LVwindings of the transformer are suppliedvia a thyristor AC power controller.This controller is mounted inside a sepa-rate weatherproof control cabinet.For technical data please inquire.
Flameproof transformers for coal mines
In deep-shaft coal mines the release ofmethane must be taken into account inthe design of electrical systems. Siemenshas developed flameproof distributiontransformers that comply with the relevantGerman mine safety codes, which apply invarious other countries as well.The flameproof units are dry-type three-phase distribution transformers inside cor-rugated steel enclosures with integral high-and low-voltage terminal boxes. The enclo-sures are designed to withstand internalexplosions of combustible gas withoutigniting the surrounding explosive atmos-phere.The transformers are supplied for primaryvoltages of up to 10 kV, secondary volt-ages of 525 and 1050 V at 50/60 Hz, andpower ratings up to 1000 kVA.
Fig. 59: Flameproof distribution transformer 630 kVA for coal mines
Fig. 58: Rectifier-transformer for electrostatic precipitator
4/34 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Special Transformers and Reactors
Transformers for thyristor converters
These are special oil-immersed or cast-resin power transformers that are de-signed for the special demands of thyristorconverter or diode rectifier operation.The effects of such conversion equipmenton transformers and additional construc-tion requirements are as follows: Increased load by harmonic currents Continuous short-circuit-like stresses
by current communication and commu-nication faults
Balancing of phase currents in multiplewinding systems(e.g. 12-pulse systems)
Overload factor up to 2.5 Types for 12-pulse systems, if required.Siemens supplies oil-filled converter trans-formers of all ratings and configurationsknown today, and dry-type cast-resinconverter transformers up to more than20 MVA and 200 kV LI.To define and quote for such transformers,it is necessary to know considerable de-tails on the converter to be supplied andon the line feeding it. These transformersare almost exclusively inquired togetherwith the respective drive or rectifier sys-tem and are always custom-engineered forthe given application.
Arc-suppression coils fordistribution networks
(Neutral reactors or Petersen coils)Arc-suppression coils or Petersen coilsare used in distribution networks up to150 kV to neutralize the prospective capa-citive ground-fault current by inserting acorresponding reactance into the starpoint-to-ground connection of the network.Through this method, damages due toarcing ground faults can be limited oravoided entirely. System operation canoften be maintained under ground-faultconditions until corrective switching ac-tions have been taken; temporary groundfaults require no action at all.Since the prospective capacitive ground-fault current depends on the varying sys-tem condition, the neutralizing reactormust be adjustable – either in steps, orcontinuously.Siemens builds Petersen coils with fixedand variable reactance in sizes from 50 kVAto 30 MVA, and line-to-neutral voltages of5 to 150 kV. Adjustment in steps is realizedwith off-load tapping switches, resulting inan adjustment ratio of about 1:2.5. Contin-uous adjustment results in tuning ratiosof better than 1:10 and is done via electricmotor or electrohydraulically operatedmoving-core mechanisms.Current transformers for measuring andrecording purposes, as well as ground-faultlocating devices are optionally available.
Fig. 61: Arc-suppression coil with electrically controlled reactance adjustmentFig. 60: Dry-type converter transformer GEAFOL for rolling mill
Neutral grounding transformers
When a neutral grounding reactor orground-fault neutralizer is required in athree-phase system and no suitable neutralis available, a neutral must be providedby using a neutral grounding transformer.Neutral grounding transformers are avail-able for continuous operation or short-timeoperation.The zero impedance is normally low.The standard vector groups are zigzag orwye/delta. Some other vector groups arealso possible.Neutral grounding transformers can bebuilt by Siemens in all common powerratings.Normally, the neutral grounding transform-ers are built in oil-immersed design, how-ever, they can also be built in cast-resindesign.
For further information please contact:
Distribution transformers:Fax: ++ 49-7021- 5085 48Power transformers:Fax: ++ 49 -911-4 342147
Power Cables
Contents Page
Power Cables – General 5/2–5/6
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV 5/7–5/12
Accessories for Low-and Medium-Voltage Cables 5/13–5/20
High-Voltage Cablesup to 290/500 kV 5/21–5/22
Accessories for High-Voltage Cablesup to 290/500 kV 5/23–5/24
5/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Cables – General
Application
Cables intended for the transmission anddistribution of electrical energy are mainlyused in power plants, in distribution sys-tems and substations of power supply utili-ties, and in industry.They are preferably used where overheadlines are not suitable, e.g. in densely built-up areas, in cities (pedestrian zones), in-dustrial installations and buildings.For power supply cables there are twomain fields of application with differentstresses (Fig. 1):
Stresses and requirements
These cables, especially the insulation(electrical strength) of buried cables, mustbe reliable and have a long service life. Inorder to fulfil this requirement for Siemenscables, the cable construction as well asthe materials and manufacturing processesare permanently improved with a lot of de-velopment work.The different stresses determined by thefunction form the basis for the definition ofthe cable requirements (Fig. 2).
In view of the possible external stressesfor power cables, cables are be dividedinto two standard cable types, i. e. one forlaying in the ground (distribution cables)and one for installation in air (installationcables) (Fig. 3).High-voltage cables are often designedaccording to the specific stresses of eachspecial case of application.The Siemens instructions AR 320-220 andAR 320-1-220 contain detailed informationon the application of cables, e. g. permis-sible pulling forces, limit temperatures,bending radii, cable fixing, storage andtransport, etc.
Voltages
Rated voltage– Power cables are classified according
to the rated voltages U0 /U and Um.– U0 is the rms value between con-
ductor and ground or groundedmetallic covering (concentric conduc-tor, screen, armor, metal sheath).
– U is the rms value between phaseconductors.
– Um is the maximum rms valuebetween phase conductors.
In an a. c. system, the rated voltageUm must be at least equal to the highestvoltage of the system Ub max for whichit is intended.
U0 = U/ 3– For application in three-phase and
single-phase systems the main stan-dard rated voltages (rounded values)in compliance with IEC 183 are givenin Fig. 4.
The maximum continuous operating-volt-age at normal operation for low voltagecables with rated voltage of 0.6/1kV(Um = 1.2 kV) is
– 1.8 kV in d.c. systems– 3.6 kV in a.c. systems
for PVC-insulated cables having aconcentric conductor or armor andconductor cross-sectional areas from240 mm2 and above.
Directlyin theground
Laying in the ground
Outdoors
Installation in air
In ducts
In concrete
In water
Indoors
In channels
Fig. 1: Fields of application
Stresses determined by the function:
Current
Voltage
Thermalstress
Electricalstress
Thermal/mechanicalstress
Thermalstress
Electricalstress
Normaloperation
Short-circuit
Ground fault
Transientwaves
Operationunderfault con-ditions
Fig. 2: Stresses determined by the function
5/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Mechanical
Chemicals(permanent influence),oil, acids
Moisture (water)Temperature
Fire propagation
Chemical
Climatic
Fire behavior
Tensile strength (laying)Impact strength (civil works)AbrasionTermites, rodents, etc.
Chemicals(short-term influence)Ozone
Moisture (rain, humidity)UV radiationTemperature (cold, heat)
Fire propagationCorrosive combustion gasesSmoke densityCircuit integrity of cable installation
Tensile strength (laying)Pressure force (cleats)Vibrations
Laying in the ground Installation in air
Power Cables – General
Fig. 3: Stresses determined by the installation method
Fig. 4
Current ratings
For safe project planning of cable installa-tions, the cross-sectional area of conductorshall be determined such that the require-mentcurrent-carrying capacity Iz ≥ loading Ib
is fulfilled for all operating conditions whichcan occur. A distinction is made betweenthe current-carrying capacity for normal operation and for short-circuit
(operation under fault conditions)Especially in low-voltage systems, thecross-sectional area of the conductor mustbe additionally determined in respect ofthe permitted voltage drop ∆U. In order toavoid thermal overloading of the cable asuitable protective device also has to beselected. Besides that, the relevant instal-lation rules shall be observed.With regard to these criteria, brief in-structions for project planning are givenin Part 2 of the book “Power Cables andtheir Application”. They are sufficient formost cases when using the values listedin this book. The procedure is shown byexamples.More comprehensive calculation meth-ods with detailed project planning data canbe taken from Part 1 of the book “PowerCables and their Application”.Order-Nr.: Part 1: A19100-L531-F159-X-7600Part 2: A19100-L531-F506-X-7600.For high-voltage cables, the current-carry-ing capacity is to be examined for eachspecial case of application. It depends ona lot of special laying and installation con-ditions so that it is not possible to givestandard values.
Standards
To ensure the operational properties andthe high quality of all types of Siemenscables, short-term and long-term tests arecarried out. They are based on nationaland international standards such as VDEand IEC. A perfect quality system accord-ing to ISO 9001 ensures a maximum ofreliability of Siemens cables.
0.6
3.6
6
12
18
64
76
87
127
160
290
1.2
7.2
12
24
36
123
145
170
245
300
525
1.4
8.3
14
28
42
142
168
196
284
346
606
0.7
4.1
7
14
21
71
84
98
142
173
303
Uo Um in three-phasesystems
Um in single-phase a.c. systems
Both phaseconductorsinsulated
One phaseconductorgrounded
[kV] [kV][kV] [kV]
5/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
To protect the insulation of PROTODUR orPROTOTHEN X cables against permanent,intensive ingress of fuels, oils or solvents,a lead sheath can be provided under thePVC sheath.For high-voltage cables a lead sheath isnormally used for low-pressure oil-filledcables, but it is also available for cableswith XLPE insulation. For these high-volt-age PROTOTHEN X cables, however,normally a screen of round copper wireswith a cross-sectional area of 35 mm2 or50 mm2 is used together with an alumi-num laminated PE sheath.For all types of insulation used for high-voltage cables, a metal sheath of alumi-num is available as well. The advantageof such a cable design with a corrugatedaluminum sheath is the very high mechani-cal protection and, under fault conditions,the very high ground-fault current-carryingcapacity.
Outer coverings
For low-voltage PROTODUR cables withPVC insulation and PROTOTHEN X cableswith XLPE insulation, a PVC sheath is nor-mally applied.Medium-voltage XLPE-insulated cables nor-mally have a sheath of polyethylene whichis more resistant with respect to the me-chanical properties. PVC sheaths can alsobe provided, especially for undergroundmining or indoor installation (flame retar-dance according to IEC 332-2).As already mentioned, high-voltage cableshaving a screen of round copper wiresare provided with an aluminum laminatedPE sheath consisting of an aluminum tapecoated with PE copolymer on the outer
Power Cables – General
Constructional elementsof cables
Conductors
The conductors comply with IEC 228.The type and construction of conductor –whether circular solid (RE) or circularstranded (RM), sector-shaped solid (SE)or sector-shaped stranded (SM) – can betaken from the relevant tables in the book“Power Cables and their Application”,Part 2. The smallest permissible nominalcross-sectional areas for circular and sec-tor-shaped conductors are specified in therelevant standard.Especially for high-voltage low-pressureoil-filled cables, circular stranded hollowconductors (RM...H) are used. For cross-sectional areas of 1000 mm2 and above,special segmental conductors, also knownas Milliken conductors, are used in orderto reduce current losses occurring due toskin and proximity effects.
Insulation
In the field of cables with extruded insula-tion, there are two dominating insulationmaterials which have proved to be reliable.One of these two materials is XLPE whichis used for Siemens PROTOTHEN X ca-bles. These cables have a high-grade insu-lating compound of high-molecular purepolyethylene with a cross-linked structurewhich is distinguished by excellent proper-ties. Cables up to 500 kV are designedwith this insulation material because ofthe very low and almost constant dielectricloss factor at all operating temperatures.The permittivity is also relatively low andunaffected by fluctuations in temperatureso that total dielectric losses of SiemensPROTOTHEN X cables are extremely low.The conductor screen and insulationscreen of these cables are extruded to-gether with the insulation (triple extrusion)in special manufacturing processes. So theinsulation screen is generally solidly bond-ed to the insulation. To remove this insula-tion screen during installation of accesso-ries, a special peeling tool is required.Designs with easy-strip semiconductivelayers are also available for medium-volt-age cables.The second dominating material for ex-truded insulations is PVC, but it is mainlyused for cables designed for voltages from1 kV up to and including 6 kV. SiemensPROTODUR cables have an insulationbased on that material. Compared to XLPE,these cables have a significantly higherpermittivity.
Oil-impregnated paper, a classic insulationmaterial, is still used especially for extra-high-voltage low-pressure oil-filled cables.Two advantages of this type of insulationare the vast experience that stands be-hind it and the high degree of reliability soimpressively demonstrated by the fault-free service of these cables decade afterdecade.
Identification of cores forlow-voltage cables
Cables with more than 5 cores (controlcables) have black cores with white im-printed numbers. The green-yellow core isto be used solely as a PE (protective earth)or PEN (protective earth and neutral) con-ductor. The blue core is provided for useas a neutral conductor.The blue core may be used as a phaseconductor if the cable has a concentricconductor or if a neutral conductor isnot required.
Concentric conductors, screens,armor and metal sheaths
Low-voltage cables are provided withconcentric conductors as protection fromcontact if there is a possibility of the ca-bles being exposed to mechanical damage.Concentric conductors are made of copper.The data on the cross-sectional area in thetype designation code always refer to thematerial of the phase conductors.For cables with concentric conductors indistribution systems, the wires of the con-centric conductors are laid in waveform(CEANDER conductor) on the inner cover-ing. These conductors facilitate the instal-lation of the branch joints because theconcentric conductor can easily be liftedup and bundled at one side. It also en-sures that there is sufficient space forconnecting branches to the underlyingphase conductors without having to cutthe CEANDER conductor.Screens are compulsory for all cable typesabove 0.6/1 kV. Screens shall consist ofcopper. In case of single-core cables multi-core cables may have individual screenedcores or a common screen. In multi-corecables a steel wire armor may also beused as a common screen. The screenswhich are always grounded ensure protec-tion from contact and carry the leakageand ground-fault currents. According toDIN VDE 0276-620 the nominal cross-sectional area of the screens (geometricalcross-sectional area) may not fall belowthe values in the following table (Fig. 5).
25 to 120
150 to 300
400, 500
16
25
35
Nominal cross-sectional area ofphase conductor
Nominal cross-sectional of thescreen*
mm2 mm2
* A nominal cross-sectional area of the screen of 16 mm2
is permissible for multi-core cables laid in the ground andsingle-core cables with a phase conductor cross-sectionalarea of up to 185 mm2 and 240 mm2 respectively, provid-ed that these values are compatible with ground-fault ordouble ground-fault currents.
Fig. 5
5/5Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Cables – General
side and bonded to a black PE sheath. Allother high-voltage cable types are usuallyalso combined with a PE sheath becauseof its high mechanical stability.Only if there are requirements for flameretardance according to IEC 332-2 shoulda PVC sheath be applied instead of or inaddition to the commonly used PE sheath.
Products
Low- and medium-voltage cables
Information on low-voltage and medium-voltage cables with voltages or construc-tions not listed in this Engineering Guide,for example paper-insulated cables, canbe obtained from Dept. EV SK2.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49-9131-73 2455
SIENOPYR cables have the followingexcellent characteristics: Reduced fire propagation performance:
Even in the case of large grouping andvertical installation of cables, the spreadof fire by cables is prevented (tests ac-cording to IEC 332-3).
Corrosivity:No subsequential fire damage becausethe materials of these cables are halo-gen-free and the gas emission is non-corrosive (tests according to IEC 754-2).
Low smoke density:Fire-fighting and rescue operations aredecisively facilitated (tests according toIEC 1034).
Flexible cables which are used for instal-lations in high-rise and industrial high-risebuildings, for connecting mobile equipmentas well as for internal wiring of equipmentcan be obtained from Dept. EV SK 3.For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-9131-7310 92
High- and Extra-High-Voltage Cablesup to 290/500 kV and Accessories
Information on high-voltage cables andaccessories is available from SiemensDept. EV SK1 V.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-9131-73 4744
High-voltage cables are laid and installedby Siemens on a contractual basis. Thiscovers all tasks from route planning up tothe final voltage test to be carried out. Thisis due to the very special requirementseach customer has for a high-voltage cablecircuit and the specific solutions Siemenscan offer to fulfil these requirements.
Application
The cables and accessories shown on thefollowing pages are designed for all kindsof high-voltage transmission of electricalenergy. The main requirements for theseapplications are as follows: Low loss factor tan delta:
This is for low dielectric losses to mini-mize heating.
Thermal stability of insulation:This is for a uniform loss factor at allload fluctuations and overvoltagesoccurring in operation.
Electrical stability of insulation:This is for freedom from partial dis-charge through effective preventionof ionization in voids.
All these main requirements are fulfilledby XLPE-insulated PROTOTHEN X cablesand low-pressure oil-filled cables, togetherwith Siemens accessories for high-voltagecables shown in Fig. 37 to 44 by examplesto demonstrate their typical constructionalelements.
Fig. 6: Installation of low- and medium-voltage cablesin an industrial area
Fig. 7: Laying of a 20 kV single-corePROTOTHEN X Cable
Fig. 9: 110 kV single-core PROTOTHEN X cables withoutdoor sealing ends
Fig. 8: Low-pressure oil-filled cables to switchgear byGIS-type sealing ends
5/6 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Cables – General
Product Overview –Selection Guide
Overview of main cable types and a guidefor the selection of cable according to volt-age, insulation and metallic coverings.
Oil-impregnatedpaper insulation
Page 7
Page 7
Page 8
Page 11
Page 9
Page 9
Page 10
Page 10
Page 11
Page 12
Page 12
Page 8
Page 21
Page 21
Page 22
Page 22
High-voltagecable
64/110 kV Single-core XLPEinsulation
Screen Lamina-ted PE-sheath
Lead sheath
Corrugatedaluminum-sheath
Low-andmedium-voltagePowercables
0.6/1 kV Multi-core PVCinsulation
PVCsheath
Steel armor
No screen
Concentricconductor
160/275 kV
290/500 kV
XLPEinsulation
3.6/6 kV
6/10 kV
12/20 kV
6/10 kV12/20 kV18/30 kV
Three-core
Single-core
PVCinsulation
ScreenXLPEinsulation
PE-sheath
Steel armor
Steel armor
Controlcables
0.6/1 kV Multi-core PVCinsulation
No screen
Screen
No screen
PVCsheath
Lead +PVC
NYY
NYCWY
2XFY
N2XH
NYFGY
N2XSEY
2XSEYFY
N2XSY
N2XS2Y
NYY
NYCY
YKYRY
2XS(FL)2Y
2XK2Y
2XKLDE2Y
NÖKLDE2Y
Screen
No screen EVA-sheath
PVCsheath
Fig. 10: Overview of main cable types
5/7Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Multi-Core PROTODUR Power Cables 0.6/1 kV
NYY
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-603, HD 603, IEC 502
Design
Power cables with copper conductor, PVC insulation and PVC sheath.
Application
Mainly for power stations, industrialplants and substations. Usually laid in-doors, in ducts and outdoors. May also belaid in the ground where damage (e. g.from pickaxes) is unlikely.
Current-Carrying Capacity
acc. to DIN VDE 0276-603,based on IEC 287Permissible operating temp. 70 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 160 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A58-X-7600Four-core PROTODUR cables,type NYY for 0.6/1 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 226, 227
Application
Mainly for distribution systems. Also forpower stations, industrial plants and sub-stations.
Current-Carrying capacity
acc. to DIN VDE 0276-603, HD 603,based on IEC 287Permissible operating temp. 70 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 160 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A28-X-7600PROTODUR cables, type NYCY/NYCWYfor 0.6/1 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 232, 233
Multi-Core PROTODUR Power Cables 0.6/1 kVwith concentric waveform conductor
NYCWY
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-603, HD 603, IEC 502
Design
Power cables with copper conductor, PVC insulation, concentric copper conductor
laid in waveform and PVC sheath.
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV
Fig. 11
Fig. 12
5/8 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV
Application
For very severe operating, laying andinstallation conditions. The armor with-stands tensile stresses such as thoseoccurring on step gradients and in miningsubsidence areas. Suitable as river andsubmarine cables.
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short circuit durations up to 5 s)
Multi-Core PROTODUR Control Cables 0.6/1 kVwith round steel wire armor
YKYRY
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. to IEC 502
Design
Control cable with copper conductor, PVC insulation, with lead sheath, round wire armoring and PVC sheath.
Application
For filling stations, refineries and other in-stallations where the effects of oil, sol-vents, etc. are to be expected. The leadsheath protects the installation from sucheffects.
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 70 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 160 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Multi-Core PROTOTHEN X Power Cables 0.6/1 kVwith flat steel wire armor
Fig. 13
2XFY
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. to IEC 502
Design
Power cable with copper conductor, XLPE insulation, with flat steel-wire armor and PVC sheath.
Fig. 14
5/9Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
N2XSEY
U0/U = 6/10 kV (Um = 12 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-620, HD 620, IEC 502
Design
Power cables with copper conductor, extruded firmly bonded semi-
conductive layers under and overthe XLPE insulation, with
individually screened cores and PVC sheath.
NYFGY
U0/U = 3.6/6 kV (Um = 7.2 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0271, IEC 502
Design
Power cable with copper conductor, PVC insulation, flat steel-wire armor and PVC sheath.
3-Core PROTODUR Cables 3.6/6 kVwith flat steel wire armor
Application
Mainly in power stations, industrial plantsand substation stations.For laying outdoors, in ducts and indoors,resistant to tensile stress, suitable as riverand submarine cables.
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 70 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 160 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A50-X-76003-core PROTODUR cables,type NYFGY for 3.6/6 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 248, 249
Fig. 16
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV
Fig. 15
Application
Mainly in power stations, industrial plantsand substations and in distribution systemswhere high thermal stresses occur. For lay-ing outdoors, in ducts and indoors.
Current-Carrying Capacity
acc. to DIN VDE 0276-620, HD 620,based on IEC 287Permissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A1-X-76003-core PROTOTHEN X cables,type N2XSEY for 6/10 kV
3-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 6/10 kVwith copper wire screen on each core
5/10 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
2XSEYFY
U0/U = 12/20 kV (Um = 24 kV)
acc. to IEC 502Design
Power cable with copper conductor, extruded firmly bonded semi-
conductive layers under and over theXLPE insulation, with
individually screened cores,PVC separation sheath with
flat steel wire armor and PVC sheath.
N2XSY
U0/U = 6/10 kV (Um = 12 kV)U0/U = 12/20 kV (Um = 24 kV)U0/U = 18/30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-620, HD 620, IEC 502
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV
Single-Core PROTOTHEN X Cableswith copper wire screen
Application
Mainly in power stations, industrialplants and substations. For laying out-doors, in ducts and indoors.
Current-Carrying Capacity
acc. to DIN VDE 0276-620, HD 620,based on IEC 287Permissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A2-X-76001-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 6/10 kVOrder No. E50001-U511-A48-X-76001-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 12/20 kVOrder No. I115/111I8-101-021-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 18/30 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 258–265
Fig. 18
Application
Mainly in industrial plants, power stationsand public distribution systems, wherehigh thermal and mechanical stressesoccur.Note: This type is available on request forthe full range af cable types incorporatingaluminum conductors, screens of coppertapes, armor of galvanized round steelwires or steel tapes, outer sheath of PEor any combination of these.
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A43-X-76003-core PROTOTHEN X cables with wirescreen and galvanized flat steel-wirearmor, type 2XSEYFY for 12/20 kV
3-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 12/20 kVwith copper wire screen and flat steel wire armoring
Fig. 17
Design
Power cable with copper conductor, extruded firmly bonded semi-
conductive layers under and overthe XLPE insulation,
copper wire screen and PVC sheath.
5/11Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
N2XH
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0266 Part 2 (HD 604.5G)
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV
Application
SIENOPYR cables with improved charac-teristics in the case of fire are mainly usedin buildings and installations with increasedsafety risks and high concentration ofpeople or valuable contents.The application of these cables shouldbe regarded as a measure for preventivefire protection in: Hospitals Hotels Underground and local rapid transit
rail systems SchoolsSIENOPYR cables are intended for instal-lation indoors and outdoors.
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A56SIENOPYR Cables N2XH for 0.6/1 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 271–277
Fig. 20
SIENOPYR Power CablesHalogen-Free Cables with Improved Characteristicsin Case of Fire
Application
Mainly for industrial and distributionsystems, for laying in the ground. Whenthese cables are laid indoors or in ducts, itmust be noted that polyethylene-sheathedcables are not flame-retardant accordingto DIN VDE 0472, Part 804, Test method B
Current-Carrying Capacity
To DIN VDE 0276-620, HD 620,based on IEC 287Permissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A65-X-76001-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 6/10 kVOrder No. A19100-I11-A41-X-76001-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 12/20 kVOrder No. A19100-I11-A42-V1-76001-Core PROTOTHEN X Cables 18/30 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 258–265
Single-Core PROTOTHEN X Cableswith copper wire screen
N2XS2Y
U0/U = 6/10 kV (Um = 12 kV)U0/U = 12/20 kV (Um = 24 kV)U0/U = 18/30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-620, HD 620, IEC 502
Fig. 19
Design
Power cables with copper conductor, XLPE insulation, inner covering and EVA sheath.
Design
Power cables with copper conductor, extruded firmly bonded semiconduc-
tive layers under and over the XLPEinsulation, with
copper wire screen and PE sheath.
5/12 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Multi-Core PROTODUR Control Cables 0.6/1 kV
NYY
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-627, HD 627, IEC 502
NYCY
U0/U = 0.6/1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV)
acc. toDIN VDE 0276-627, HD 627, IEC 502
Design
Control cable with copper conductor, PVC insulation (numbered cores) and PVC sheath.
Medium- and Low-Voltage Cablesup to 45 kV
Application
Transmission of control pulses, measuredvalues, etc. in power stations, industrialplants, installation indoors, etc., in ducts inthe ground and outdoors. The printed num-bers on the cores simplify identificationand speed up installation, as ringing out isnot necessary. When long runs are laid inthe ground, inductive effects are to betaken into account.
Current-Carrying Capacity
acc. to DIN VDE 0276-627, HD 627,based on IEC 287Permissible operating temp. 70 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 160 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A63-X-7600PROTODUR control cables,type NYY for 0.6/1 kV2. Cable book:Power Cables and their Application,Part 2, pp. 246, 247
Fig. 21a
Design
Control cable with copper conductor, PVC insulation (numbered cores), concentric copper conductor and PVC sheath.
Fig. 21b
5/13Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
The service reliability of a cable installationdepends, among other things, on the appli-cation of suitable accessories and the care-ful installation of accessories. Due to ourextensive manufacturing program, suitableaccessories can be supplied for each cableand each application.
General
Voltage classes:
Low voltage up to 1.2 kV; Medium voltage > 1.2 kV up to 36 kV
Cable joints ...
... connect lengths of cable in long trans-mission routes as straight joints for con-nection and branch joints for connectingservice cable and must fulfill the followingfunctions: Connection of the conductors Insulation of the conductors and,
especially in medium-voltage cables,re-establishment of the elementsof the cable
Protection against all ambient conditionsof the ground
Establishment of branch points forservice cables in low-voltage networks
Terminations ...
... form the termination points of cable andserve as a connection to electric apparatusor machines or switchgear. Depending onthe system rated voltage and the cableconstruction, the following objectives mustbe met:
Connection of the conductors. Sealing of the cable against ambient
influences. Protection of core insulation
(e.g. against UV radiation). Controlled reduction of the electric field
strength on medium-voltage cable. Insulation from grounding parts.
Conductor Connection:
Hexagonal compression crimping is re-commended. Other kinds of compressioncrimping are possible.
Outer conductive layer ...
... will be removed in an approved mannerwith a suitable stripping tool.
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
Powercable
Branch joint
Controlcables
PA, PAKGNKA2
Fig. 23Fig. 23
Page 5/14Page 5/14
Voltage-proof end joint SKEM Fig. 24 Page 5/14
Straight joint SKSM, SKSM-C, GNKVPV
Fig. 25Fig. 27
Page 5/15Page 5/16
Termination SKSA, SKSE, GNKI Fig. 26 Page 5/15
Straight joint PV Fig. 27 Page 5/16
Termination GHKI/GHKF 7.2 Fig. 28 Page 5/16
Straight joint WP 10/20/30 Fig. 29 Page 5/17
Termination GHKI/GHKF 12/24IAES
Fig. 28Fig. 32
Page 5/16Page 5/18
Straight joint WP 10/20/30WPS 10/20/30GHSV 12/24/36
Fig. 29Fig. 30Fig. 31
Page 5/17Page 5/17Page 5/18
Termination GHKI/GHKF 12/24/36IAES 10/20/30FAE 10/20
Fig. 33Fig. 34Fig. 35
Page 5/19Page 5/19Page 5/20
Boots FHKG/FHKW Fig. 36 Page 5/20
Straight joint SKSM-STPV
Fig. 25Fig. 27
Page 5/15Page 5/16
Multi-core
3-core
Single-core
Multi-core
0.6/1 kVNYYNYCWY2XFY
3.6/6 kVNYFGY
6/10 kVN2XSEY12/20 kV2XSEYFY
6/10 kV12/20 kV18/30 kVN2XSYN2XS2Y
0.6/1 kVNYYNYGYYKYRY
Fig. 22: Overview of Acessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cable
5/14 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Voltage-Proof End Joint for multi-core cable 0.6/1 kV
PA/PAK + GNKA 2
Design
PROTOLIN cast-resin-filledplastic mold.
PA joint: using single clamps. PAK joint: Cores connected by compact
locking collar without removing theinsulation.
Application
In ground, ducts and in air.
Installation
Without special tools.
Design
GNKA 2 consists of sealant mats placedaround the compact locking collar. A fiber-reinforced sleeve with coating of sealantis used as outer protection.Cores connected by compact lockingcollar without removing the insulation.
Application
In ground, ducts and in air.
Installation
With gas torch or hot air blower.
Design
Heatshrinkable cross-linked polyolefinend caps inside coated with a hot meltadhesive.
Application
To sealing cables ends, where the cableis connected to voltage.
In ground, ducts and in air.
Installation
With gas torch or hot air blower.
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
Branch Joint for multi-core cable 0.6/1 kV
Fig. 23
SKEM
Fig. 24
5/15Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
Straight Joint for multi-core cable 0.6/1 kV
SKSM/SKSM-C/SKSM-ST/GNKV
SKSA, SKSE, GNKI
Design
Heatshrinkable cross-linked polyolefintubes coated with a special hot meltadhesive on the inside.The number of inner tubes depends on thenumber of cable cores.
Application
In ground, ducts and in air. SKSM for multi-core power cables, SKSM-C for power cables with
concentric neutral, SKSM-ST for control cables.
Installation
With gas torch or hot air blower.
Fig. 26
Design
SKSA: breakout consist of heat shrink-able cross-linked polyolefin hot meltcoated and serves to protect the cablespreader area against moisture.
SKSE and GNKI: additional with heat-shrinkable tubes for protection and seal-ing the cable cores. In case of metalshielded cables, the connection materialare included in the kit.
Application
Outdoor and indoor.
Installation
With gas torch or hot air blower.
Termination for multi-core cable 0.6/1 kV
Fig. 25
5/16 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
PV
GHKI/GHKF 7.2/12/24
Termination for 3-core polymeric cable 3.6/6 up to 18/30 kV
Fig. 28
Design
PROTOLIN cast-resin-filled plastic.The size of joint depends on the numberof cable cores.
Application
All areas.
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
Fig. 27
Straight Joint for 3-core and multi-core cable 0.6/1 up to 3.6/6 kV
Design
Heatshrinkable, track-resistant, cross-linkedpolyolefin tubes and breakout, coated withsealing adhesive.
Application
GHKI-Indoor and GHKF-Outdoor termina-tions can be used in all applications.
Installation
With gas torch or hot air blower.
5/17Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
WP 10/20/30
WPS 10/20/30
Design
Shielded joint wrapping which is mechani-cally protected by a plastic tube filled withPROTOLIN cast resin.
Application
In ground, ducts and in air.
Design
Shielded joint wrapping which is mechani-cally protected by a thick-walled heat-shrinkable tube.
Application
In ground, ducts and in air.
Installation
Without special tools.
Straight Joint for 1- and 3-core polymeric cable 10/12 – 18/30 kV
Fig. 29
Straight Joint for 1-core polymeric cable 10/12 up to 18/30 kV
Fig. 30
5/18 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
GHSV 12/24/36
IAES 10
Design
Track-resistant, silicon rubber insulatorwith an integrated control deflector forcontrolling the electrical field.
Application
IAES indoor terminations can be usedin switchgear and transformer stations.
Installation
Without special tools.
Design
Heatshrinkable insulation tubes combinedwith stress control components and seal-ing tapes or coatings protected by a thick-walled heatshrinkable tube.
Application
In ground, ducts and in air.
Straight Joint for 1- and 3-core polymeric cable 10/12 – 18/30 kV
Fig. 31
Termination
Fig. 32
5/19Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
Terminations
GHKI/GHKF 12/24/36
IAES 10/20/30
Design
Track-resistant, silicon rubber insulator withan integrated control deflector for control-ling the electrical field.
Application
IAES indoor terminations can be used inswitchgear and transformer boxes.
Installation
Without special tools.
Design
Heatshrinkable, track-resistant, cross-linkedpolyolefin tubes and breakout, coated withsealing adhesive.
Application
GHKI-Indoor, GHKF-Outdoor used inswitchgear and transformer stations.
Installation
Gas torch or hot air blower.
Fig. 33
Termination
Fig. 34
5/20 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Accessories for Low- and Medium-Voltage Cables
Termination
FAE 10/20
Design
Track-resistant, silicon rubber insulator withan integrated control deflector for control-ling the electrical field.
Application
FAE outdoor terminations can be used inswitchgear and transformer stations.
Installation
Without special tools.
Seperable connectors Design
Heatshrinkable, track-resistant, insulationmolded parts sealed with track-resistantadhesive.
Application
The boots can protect the connectionbushings into transformer and motor con-nection boxes.
All the accessories are listed in theRXS catalogOrder No.: A 45050-W2165-D7-X-7600
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49-2331- 357118
Fig. 35
Fig. 36
FHKG, FHKW
5/21Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Fig. 37
2XS(FL)2Y
64/110 kV (Um = 123 kV)
according to IEC 840
Single-core XLPE-insulated cable 64/110 kVwith laminated sheath
Design
Cable with Conductor Conductor screen XLPE insulation Insulation screen Semiconductive nonwoven
swelling tape Screen of copper wires Copper contact helix PE-coated Al tape and PE sheath
(laminated sheath)
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A5-X-7600Cables and Accessories for High- andExtra-High-Voltages
Design
Cable with Conductor Conductor screen XLPE insulation Insulation screen Semiconductive nonwoven
swelling tape Lead sheath Compound PE sheath
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short-circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A5-X-7600Cables and Accessories for High- andExtra-High-Voltages
Single-core XLPE-insulated cable 160/275 kVwith lead sheath
2XK2Y
160/275 kV (Um = 300 kV)
based on IEC 840
Fig. 38
High-Voltage Cables up to 290/500 kV
5/22 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
NÖKLDE2Y
290/500 kV (Um = 525 kV)
according to IEC 141
Fig. 40
Design
Cable with Hollow conductor Carbon black paper Paper insulation Carbon black paper and metallized black
paper Fabric tape with interwoven copper
wires Corrugated aluminum sheath Plastic tape in compound and PE sheath
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 85 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 160 °C(for short circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A5-X-7600Cables and Accessories for High- andExtra-High-Voltages
Fig. 39
2XKLDE2Y
290/500 kV (Um = 525 kV)
based on IEC 840
Single-core XLPE-insulated cable 290/500kVwith Milliken conductor and corrugated aluminum sheath
Design
Cable with Milliken conductor Conductor screen XLPE insulation Insulation screen Semiconductive bedding layer Fabric tape with
interwoven copper wires Corrugated aluminum sheath Plastic tape in compound and
PE sheath
Current-Carrying Capacity
on requestPermissible operating temp. 90 °CPermissible short-circuit temp. 250 °C(for short circuit durations up to 5 s)
Publications:
1. Leaflets:Order No. E50001-U511-A5-X-7600Cables and Accessories for High- andExtra-High-Voltages
High-Voltage Cables up to 290/500 kV
Single-core low pressure oil filled cable 290/500 kVwith corrugated aluminum sheath
5/23Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Connectingtube
Corona shield
Filling compound
Slip-on stress cone
Insulator
Copper entrance bell
Mechanical protection
Outlet screwor valve connection
Aluminum-baseplate
Insulatingring
Arcinghorn
Slip-onstress cone
Fillingcompound
Copperentrance bell
Mechanicalprotection
Porcelaininsulator
Coronashield
Connectorstalk
Supportbase
Outlet screwor valveconnection
Accessories for High-Voltage Cablesup to 290/500 kV
Typical design of outdoor-type sealing end Typical design of transformer-type sealing end
Fig. 42Fig. 41
5/24 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Outlet screwor valve connection
Mechanicalprotection
Connection interfaceaccording to IEC 859
Cast-resin insulator
Filling compound
Slip-onstress cone
Copperentrance bell
Housing
Insulation
Conductor shieldCoaxial cable for cross-bonding
Deflector Deflector
Accessories for High-Voltage Cablesup to 290/500 kV
Fig. 43
Single-core sectionalized joint
Typical design of GIS-type sealing end
Fig. 44
All the accessories are listed in theRXS catalogOrder No.: A 45050-W2165-D7-X-7600
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49- 2331- 357118
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/2
by means of SCADA-like operation controland high-performance, uniformly operablePC tools
Rationalisation of operation
by means of integrationof many functionsinto one unit and compact equipment design
Savings in terms of space and costs
by means of uniform design, coordinatedinterfaces and universally identical EMC
Simple planning and operational reliability
High levels of reliability and availability
Efficient parameterization and operation by means of PC tools with uniform operatorinterface
by means of type-tested system technology,complete self-monitoring and the use ofpoven technology– 20 years of practical experience with
digital protection, 50,000 devicesin operation (1996)
– 10 years of practical LSA678 experience,400 substations in operation (1996)
Protection and Substation Control
Fig. 2a: Protection and control in HV GIS switchgear Fig. 2b: Protection and control in bay dedicatedkiosks of an EHV-switchyard
General overview
Three trends have emerged in the sphereof substation secondary equipment: intelli-gent electronic devices (IEDs), open com-munication and operation with a PC.Numerical relays and cumputerized substa-tion control are now state-of-the-art.The multitude of conventional, individualdevices prevalent in the past as well ascomprehensive parallel wiring are beingreplaced by a small number of multifunc-tional devices with serial connections.
One design for all applications
In this respect, Siemens offers a uniform,universal technology for the entire func-tional scope of secondary equipment, bothin the construction and connection of thedevices and in their operation and commu-nication. This results in uniformity of de-sign, coordinated interfaces and the sameoperating concept being establishedthroughout, whether in power system andgenerator protection, in measurement andrecording systems, in substation controland protection or in telecontrol.All devices are highly compact and im-mune to interference, and are thereforealso suitable for direct installation inswitchgear cells. Furthermore, all devicesand systems are largely self-monitoring,which means that previously costly mainte-nance can be reduced considerably.
“Complete technology from onepartner“
The Substation Secondary Equipment Divi-sion of the Siemens Power Transmissionand Distribution Group supplies devicesand systems for: Power System Protection Substation Control Remote Control (RTUs) Measurement and RecordingThis covers all of the measurement, con-trol and protection functions for substa-tions*.Furthermore, our activities cover: Consulting Planning Design Commissioning and ServiceThis uniform technology ”all from onesource“ saves the user time and money inthe planning, assembly and operation ofhis substations.
Fig. 1: The digital substation control system SINAUT LSA implements all of the control, measurement and auto-mation functions of a substation. Protection relays are connected serially
Fig. 3: For the user, “complete technology from one source” has many advantages
Substation
*An exception is revenue-metering. Meters are separate products of our Energy Metering Division.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/3
Protection and Substation Control
System Protection
Siemens offers a complete spectrum ofmultifunctional, numerical relays for allapplications in the field of network andmachine protection.Uniform design and electromagnetic-inter-ferencefree construction in metal housingswith conventional connection terminals inaccordance with public utility requirementsguarantee simple system design and us-age just as with conventional relays.Numerical measurement techniques en-sure precise operation and necessitate lessmaintenance thanks to their continuousself-monitoring capability.
The integration of additional protectionand other functions, such as real-timeoperational measurements, event and faultrecording, all in one unit economizes onspace, design and wiring costs.Setting and programming of the devicescan be through the integral, plaintext,menu-guided operator display or by usingthe comfortable PC program DIGSI forWindows*.Open serial interfaces, IEC 870-5-103 com-pliant allow free communication with high-er level control systems, including thosefrom other manufacturers.
Thus the on-line measurements and faultdata registered in the protective relayscan be used for local and remote controlor can be transmitted via telephone mo-dem connections to the workplace of theservice engineer.Siemens supplies individual devices aswell as complete protection systems infactory finished cubicles. For complex ap-plications, for example, in the field of extra-high-voltage transmission, type and designtest facilities are available together with anextensive and comprehensive networkmodel using the most modern simulationand evaluation techniques.
Line protectionUnit protection (PW and OF)7SD5
SIMEASMeasuring transducers7KG60
Local and remote controlSINAUT LSA/SINAUT RTU
Measurement andrecording
Protection7**5
SINAUT LSALocal andremote control,centralized version6MB551
SINAUT LSALocal andremote control,decentralized version6MB51/52
Central units6MB51*
SINAUT LSACompact unit6MB552Minicompact unit6MB553
Bay units6MB52*
Remote terminal units
SINAUT RTU6MD2010
Feeder protectionovercurrent/overload relays7SJ5
Line protectiondistance relays7SA5
Busbar protection7SS5 and 7VH8
Generator/motor protection7UM5
Transformer protection7UT5
Protection and substation control
Fault recorders(Oscillostores)P5**
Switchgear interlocking8TK
Fig. 4: Siemens Protection and Substation Control comprises these systems and product ranges
* Windows is a registered product of Microsoft
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/4
Protection and Substation Control
Substation control
The digital substation control systems6MB51/52 (decentralized version) and6MB551 (centralized version) provide allcontrol, measurement and automationfunctions (e.g. transformer tap changing)required by a switching station. They oper-ate with distributed intelligence. Commu-nication between feeder-located devicesand central unit is made via interference-free fiber optic connections.Devices are extremely compact and can bebuilt directly into medium- and high-voltageswitchgear.To input data, set and program the system,the unique PC program LSA-TOOLS isavailable. Parameters and values are inputat the central unit and downloaded to thefield devices, thus ensuring error-free andconsistent data transfer.The operator interface is menu-guided,with SCADA comparable functions, that is,with a level of comfort which was previ-ously only available in a network controlcenter. Optional telecontrol functions canbe added to allow coupling of the systemto one or more network control centers.In contrast to conventional controls, digitaltechnology saves enormously on spaceand wiring. LSA systems are subjected tofull factory tests and are delivered in fullyfunctional condition.
Remote control
Siemens remote control equipment6MB55* and 6MD2010 fulfills all the clas-sic functions of remote measurement andcontrol. Furthermore, because of the pow-erful microprocessors with 32-bit technolo-gy, they provide comprehensive data pre-processing, automation functions and bulkstorage of operational and fault informa-tion.In the classic case, connections to theswitchgear are made through coupling re-lays and transducers. This method allowsan economically favorable solution whenmodernizing or renewing the secondarysystems in older installations. Alternatively,especially for new installations, direct con-nection is also possible. Digital protectiondevices can be connected by serial linksthrough fiber-optic conductors.In addition, the functions ”operating andmonitoring“ can be provided by the con-nection of a PC, thus raising the telecontrolunit to the level of a central station controlsystem. Using the facility of nodal func-tions, it is also possible to build regionalcontrol points so that several substationscan be controlled from one location.
Switchgear interlocking
The digital interlocking system 8TK is usedfor important substations in particular withmultiple busbar arrangements. It preventsfalse switching and provides an additionallocal bay control function which allows fail-safe switching, even when the substationcontrol system is not available. Thereforethe safety of operating personnel andequipment is considerabely enhanced.The 8TK system can be used as a stand-alone interlocked control, or as back-upsystem together with the digital 6MB sub-station control.
Measurement and recording
This segment of our business divisionoffers equipment for the superversion ofpower supply quality (harmonic content,distortion factor, peak loads, power factor,etc.), fault recorders (Oscillostore), datalogging printers and measurement trans-ducers.Stored data can be transmitted manually orautomatically to PC evaluation systemswhere it can be analysed by intelligent pro-grams. Expert systems are also appliedhere. This leads to rapid fault analysis andvaluable indicators for the improvement ofnetwork reliability.For local bulk data storage and transmis-sion, the central processor DAKON canbe installed at substation level. Data trans-mission circuits for analog telephone ordigital ISDN networks are incorporated asstandard. Connection to local- or wide-areanetworks (LAN, WAN) is equally possible.To complete the spectrum, we have theSIMEAS series of compact and powerfulmeasurement transducers with analog anddigital outputs.
Advantages for the user
The concept of ”Complete technologyfrom one partner“ offers the user manyadvantages: High-level security for his systems
and operational rationalization possibili-ties– through powerful system solutions
with the most modern technology Space and cost savings
– through integration of many functionsinto one unit and compact equipmentpackaging
Simple planning and secure operation– through unified design, matched inter-
faces and EMI security throughout
Rationalized programming and handling– through menu-guided PC Tools and
unified keypads and displays High-level operational security and avail-
ability– through continuous self-monitoring
and proven technology:– 20 years digital relay experience (ap-
proximately 50,000 units in operation)– 10 years of SINAUT LSA substation
control (400 systems in operation) Rapid problem solving
– through comprehensive advice andfast response from local sales andworkshop facilities worldwide.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/5
Protection and Substation Control
Application hints
All named devices and systems for pro-tection, metering and control are designedto be used in the harsh environment ofelectrical substations, power plants andthe various industrial application areas.When the devices were developed, specialemphasis was placed on EMI. The devicesare in accordance with IEC255 standards.Detailed information is contained in thedevice manuals.Reliable operation of the devices is notaffected by the usual interference fromthe switchgear, even when the device ismounted directly in a low-voltage compart-ment of a medium-voltage cubicle.It must, however, be ensured that the coilsof auxiliary relays located on the samepanel, or in the same cubicle, are fittedwith suitable spike quenching elements(e.g. free-wheeling diodes).When used in conjunction with switchgearfor 100 kV or above, all external connectioncables should be fitted with a screengrounded at both ends and capable of car-rying currents. That means that the crosssection of the screen should be at least4 mm2 for a single cable and 2.5 mm2 formultiple cables in one cable duct.All equipment proposed in this guideis built-up either in closed housings(type 7XP20) or cubicles with protectiondegree IP51 according to IEC 529: Protected against access to dangerous
parts with a wire Sealed against dust Protected against dripping water
Climatic conditions:
Permissible temperature duringservice–5 °C to +55 °Cpermissible temperature during storage–25 °C to +55 °Cpermissible temperature during transport–25 °C to +70 °CStorage and transport with standardworks packaging!
Permissible humidityMean value per year ≤ 75% relative hu-midity; on 30 days per year 95% relativehumidity; Condensation not permissible!
We recommend that units be installedsuch that they are not subjected to directsunlight, nor to large temperature fluctua-tions which may give rise to condensation.
Mechanical stress
Vibration and shock during operation
Standards:IEC 255-21 and IEC 68-2
Vibration– sinusoidalIEC 255-21-1, class 1– 10 Hz to 60 Hz:
± 0.035 mm amplitude;IEC 68-2-6– 60 Hz to 150 Hz:
0.5 g accelerationsweep rate 10 octaves/min20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and shock during transport
Standards:IEC 255-21and IEC 68-2
Vibration– sinusoidalIEC 255-21-1, class 2– 5 Hz to 8 Hz:
± 7.5 mm amplitude;IEC 68-2-6– 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
sweep rate 1 octave/min20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
ShockIEC 255 -21-2, class 1IEC 68 -2-27
Insulation tests
Standards:IEC 255-5– High-voltage test (routine test)
2 kV (rms), 50 Hz– Impulse voltage test (type test)
all circuits, class III5 kV (peak); 1,2/50 µs; 0,5 J; 3 positiveand 3 negative shots at intervals of 5 s
Fig. 5: Installation of the numerical protection in thedoor of the low-voltage section of medium-voltage cells
Electromagnetic compatibility
EC Conformity declaration (CE mark):
All Siemens protection and control prod-ucts, recommended in this guide, complywith the EMC Directive 99/336/EEC of theCouncil of the European Community andfurther relevant IEC 255 standards on elec-tromagnetic compatibility.All products carry the CE mark.
EMC tests; immunity (type tests)
Standards:IEC 255-22 (product standard)EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
High frequencyIEC 255-22-1 class III– 2.5 kV (peak);
1 MHz; γ = 15 µs;400 shots/s;duration 2 s
Electrostatic dischargeIEC 255-22-2 class IIIand EN 61000-4-2 class III– 4 kV contact discharge;
8 kV air discharge;both polarities;150 pF; Ri = 330 Ohm
Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,nonmodulated;IEC 255-22-3 (report) class III– 10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,amplitude-modulated;ENV 50140, class III– 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz, 80%;
1 kHz; AM Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,
pulse-modulated;ENV 50140/ENV 50204, class III– 10 V/m; 900 MHz;
repetition frequency 200 Hz;duty cycle 50%
Fast transientsIEC 255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4, class III– 2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
burst length 15 ms; repetition rate300 ms; both polarities;Ri = 50 Ohm; duration 1 min
Conducted disturbances induced byradio-frequency fields HF,amplitude-modulatedENV 50141, class III– 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
80%; 1kHz; AM Power-frequency magnetic field
EN 61000-4-8, class IV– 30 A/m continuous;
300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/6
C.t. designaccording to ANSI/IEEE C 57.13
Class C of this standard defines the c.t. byits secondary terminal voltage at 20 timesnominal current, for which the ratio errorshall not exceed 10%. Standard classesare C100, C200, C400 and C800 for 5 Anominal secondary current.This terminal voltage can be approximatelycalculated from the IEC data as follows:
Protection and Substation Control
EMC tests; emission (type tests)
Standard:EN 50081-2 (generic standard)
Interference field strength CISPR 11,EN 55011, class A– 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
Conducted interference voltage,aux voltage CISPR 22, EN 55022,class B– 150 kHz to 30 MHz
Instrument transformers
Instrument transformers must complywith the applicable IEC recommendationsIEC 185 (c.t.) and 186 (p.t.), ANSI/IEEEC57.13 or other comparable standards.
Potential transformers
Potential transformers (p.t.) in single- ordouble-pole design for all primary voltageshave single or dual secondary windings of100, 110 or 120 V/ 3, with output ratingsbetween 10 and 300 VA, and accuraciesof 0.2, 0.5 or 1% to suit the particularapplication. Primary BIL values are select-ed to match those of the associatedswitchgear.
Current transformers
Current transformers (c.t.) are usually ofthe single-ratio type with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.Single, dual or triple secondary windings of1 or 5 A are standard.1 A rating however should be preferred,particularly in HV and EHV stations, to re-duce the burden of the connecting leads.Output power (rated burden in VA), accura-cy, and saturation characteristics (accuracylimiting factor) of the cores and secondarywindings must meet the particular applica-tion.The c.t. classification code of IEC is usedin the following:
Measuring cores
They are normally specified with 0.5% or1.0% accuracy (class 0.5 M or 1.0 M), andan accuracy limiting factor of 5 or 10.The required output power (rated burden)must be higher than the actually connect-ed burden. Typical values are 5, 10, 15 VA.Higher values are normally not necessarywhen only electronic meters and recordersare connected.A typical specification could be: 0.5 M 10,15 VA.
The required c.t. accuracy-limiting factorKALF can be determined by calculation,as shown in Fig. 6.The overdimensioning factor KOF dependson the type of relay and the primary d.c.time constant. For the normal case, withshort-circuit time constants lower than100 ms, the necessary value for K*ALF canbe taken from the table in Fig. 9.The recommended values are based onextensive type tests.
C.t. design according to BS 3938
In this case the c.t. is defined by the knee-point voltage UKN and the internal second-ary resistance Ri.The design values according to IEC 185can be approximately transferred into theBS standard definition by the followingformula:
Fig. 6: C.t. dimensioning formulas
Cores for revenue metering
In this case, class 0.2 M is normallyrequired.
Protection cores:
The size of the protection core dependsmainly on the maximum short-circuit cur-rent and the total burden (internal c.t. bur-den, plus burden of connecting leads, plusrelay burden).Further, an overdimensioning factor has tobe considered to cover the influence of thed.c. component in the short-circuit current.In general, an accuracy of 1% (class 5 P) isspecified. The accuracy limiting factor KALFshould normally be designed so thatat least the maximum short-circuit currentcan be transmitted without saturation.(d.c. component not considered).This results, as a rule, in rated accuracylimiting factors of 10 or 20 dependent onthe rated burden of the c.t. in relation tothe connected burden. A typical specifica-tion for protection cores for distributionfeeders is 5P10, 15 VA or 5P20, 10 VA.The requirements for protective currenttransformers for transient performance arespecified in IEC 44-6. The recommendedcalculation procedure for saturationfreedesign, however, leads to very high c.t.dimensions.In many practical cases, the c.t.s cannotbe designed to avoid saturation under allcircumstances because of cost and spacereasons, particularly with metal-enclosedswitchgear.The Siemens relays are therefore designedto tolerate c.t. saturation to a large extent.The numerical relays, proposed in thisguide, are particularly stable in this casedue to their integral saturation detectionfunction.
KALF : Rated c.t. accuracy limiting factorK*ALF : Effective c.t. accuracy
limiting factorRBN : Rated burden resistanceRBC : Connected burdenRi : Internal c.t. burden (resistance
of the c.t. secondary winding)
Iscc.max. = Maximum short-circuit currentIN = Rated primary c.t. currentKOF = Overdimensioning factor
RBC + Ri
RBN + Ri
KALF> K*ALF
I scc.max.K*ALF>
IN
KOF
with:
Fig. 7: BS c.t. definition
Fig. 8: ANSI c.t. definition
Example:IEC 185 : 600/1, 15 VA, 5P10, Ri = 4 Ohm
(RNC + Ri) • I 2N • KALFUKN =1.3
BS : UKN = (15 + 4) • 1 • 10 = 146 V1.3
Ri = 4 Ohm
I2N = Nominal secondary current
Example:IEC 185 : 600/5, 25 VA, 5P20,
20Vs.t. max = 20 x 5 A x RBN •
KALF
with:
RBN = PBN
INsec
2and I
Nsec = 5 A, we get
Vs.t. max = PBN • KALF
5
Vs.t. max = 25 • 20 =5
ANSI C57.13:
= 100, i.e. class C100
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/7
Relay burden
The c.t. burdens of the numerical relays ofSiemens are below 0.1 VA and can there-fore be neglected for a practical estimation.Exceptions are the busbar protection 7SS5(1.5 VA) and the pilot wire relays 7SD502(4 VA) and 7SD503 (3 VA + 9 VA per 100 Ohmpilot wire resistance).Intermediate c.t.s are normally no moreapplicable as the ratio adaption for busbarand transformer protection is numericallyperformed in the relay.Analog static relays in gereral also haveburdens below about 1 VA.Mechanical relays, however, have a muchhigher burden, up to the order of 10 VA.This has to be considered when older re-lays are connected to the same c.t. circuit.In any case, the relevant relay manualsshould always be consulted for the actualburden values.
Protection and Substation Control
Fig. 9: Required effective accuracy limiting factor K*ALF
Relay type Minimum K*ALF
o/c protection7SJ511, 512, 551,7SJ60
, at least 20IHigh set point
IN
Transformerdifferential protection7UT512/513
Line differential(fiber-optic) protection7SD511/12
a = 2 for TN ≤ 50 msa = 4 for TN ≤ 100 ms
I scc. max. (close-in fault)
IN
aDistance protection7SA511, 7SA513
I scc. max. (line-end fault)
IN
10
I scc. max. (outflowing current for ext. fault)
IN
Numerical busbarprotection (low impe-dance type) 7SS5
Line differential(pilot wire) protection7SD502/503
=
=
=
=
andI scc. max. (internal fault)
IN
= 4 .[K*ALF
. UN . IN](High voltage)
[K*ALF . UN
. IN](Low voltage)
1
2
1
2<2
andI scc. max. (internal fault)
IN
[K*ALF . IN](line-end 1)1
4<4= 4 .
andI scc. max. (internal fault)
IN
K*ALF (line-end 1)
K*ALF (line-end 2)
4
5<= 4 . 5
4
<
<
<
[K*ALF . IN](line-end 2)
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
Burden of the connection leads
The resistance of the current loop fromthe c.t. to the relay has to be considered:
Example: Stability-verification of thenumerical busbar protection 7SS5
1 A2RBN =
15 VA= 15 Ohm;
1 A2RRelay =
1.5 VA= 1.5 Ohm
15 + 4KALF >
1.8 + 425 = 7.6
600/15 P 10,15 VA,Ri = 4 Ohm
50=I scc.max.
IN
30,000
600=
7SS5
I scc.max. = 30 kA
l = 50 mA = 6 mm2
Result:
The rated KALF-factor (10) is higherthan the calculated value (7.6).Therefore, the stability criterium isfulfilled.
Rl6
=2 0.0179 50
0.3 Ohm=
RBC = Rl + RRelay =
= 0.3 + 1.5 = 1.8 Ohm
Given case:
2K*ALF >
150 = 25
According to Fig. 9:
ARl =
2 ρ l Ohm
l = single conductor lengthfrom the c.t. to the relay in m.
Specific resistance:
ρ = 0.0179 (copper wires)
A = conductor cross sectionin mm2
Ohm m2
m
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/8
Introduction
Siemens is one of the world’s leading sup-pliers of protective equipment for powersystems.Thousands of our relays ensure first-classperformance in transmission and distribu-tion networks of all voltage levels, all overthe world, in countries of tropical heat orarctic frost.For many years, Siemens has also signifi-cantly influenced the development of pro-tection technology. In 1976, the first minicomputer (process
computer) based protection system wascommissioned: A total of 10 systemsfor 110/20 kV substations were suppliedand are still operating satisfactorily today.
Since 1985 we have been the first tomanufacture a range of fully numericalrelays with standardized communicationinterfaces.Today, Siemens offers a complete pro-gram of protective relays for all applica-tions including numerical busbar protec-tion.To date (1996), more than 50,000 numer-ical protection relays from Siemens areproviding successful service, as stand-alone devices in traditional systems oras components of coordinated protec-tion and substation control.Meanwhile, a second-generation inno-vative series has been launched, incor-porating the many years of operationalexperience with thousands of relays,together with users’ requirements,(power authority reommendations).
State of the art
Mechanical and solid-state (static) relayshave been almost completely phased outof our production because numerical relaysare now preferred by the users due totheir decisive advantages: Compact design and lower cost due to
integration of many functions into onerelay
High availability even with less mainte-nance due to integral self-monitoring
No drift (aging) of measuring characteris-tics due to fully numerical processing
High measuring accuracy due to digitalfiltering and optimized measuring algo-rithms
Many integrated add-on functions,for example, for load-monitoring andevent/fault recording
Easy and secure read-out of informationvia serial interfaces with a PC, locally orremotely
Possibility to communicate with higher-level control systems
Fig. 12: Numerical relay range of Siemens
Power System Protection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/9
Modern protection management
All the functions, for example, of a line pro-tection scheme can be incorporated in oneunit: Distance protection with associated
add-on and monitoring functions Universal teleprotection interface Autoreclose and synchronism check
Protection-related information, can becalled up on-line or off-line such as: Distance to fault Fault currents and voltages Relay operation data (fault detector pick-
up, operating times etc.) Set values Line load data (kV, A, MW, kVAr)To fulfill vital protection redundancy require-ments, only those functions which are in-terdependent and directly associated witheach other are integrated in the same unit.For back-up protection, one or more addi-tional units have to be provided.
Supervisory control
2167NFL792585SMERFRBM
Distance protectionDirectional ground-fault protectionDistance-to-fault locatorAutoreclosureSynchro-checkCarrier interface (teleprotection)Self-monitoringEvent recordingFault recordingBreaker monitor
Breaker monitor
Relay monitor
Fault record
01.10.93
Fault report
BM
Serial link to station – or personal computer
SM ER FR2579FL67N21
to remote line end kA,kV,Hz,MW,MVAr,MVA,
85
Load monitor
All relays can stand fully alone. Thus thetraditional protection concept of separatemain and alternate protection as well asthe external connection to the switchyardremain unchanged.
”One feeder, one relay“ concept
Analog protection schemes have been en-gineered and assembled from individualrelays. Interwiring between these relaysand scheme testing has been carried outmanually in the workshop.Data sharing now allows for the integrationof several protection and protection relatedtasks into one single numerical relay. Onlya few external devices may be required forcompletion of the total scheme. This hassignificantly lowered the costs of engineer-ing, assembly, panel wiring, testing andcommissioning. Scheme failure probabilityhas also been lowered.Engineering has moved from schematicdiagrams towards a parameter definitionprocedure. The documentation is providedby the relay itself. Free allocation of LEDoperation indicators and output contactsprovides more application design flexibility.
Metering included
For many applications, the protective-cur-rent transformer accuracy is sufficient foroperational metering. The additional meter-ing c.t. was more for protection of metersunder system fault conditions. Due to thelow thermal withstand ability of the me-ters, they could not be connected to theprotection c.t.. Consequently, additionalmetering c.t.s and meters are now onlynecessary where high accuracy is required,e.g. for revenue metering.
Fig. 13: Numerical relays, increased information availability
Power System Protection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/10
On-line remote data exchange
A powerful serial data link provides forinterrogation of digitized measured valuesand other information, stored in the pro-tection units, for printout and furtherprocessing at the substation or systemcontrol level.In the opposite direction, settings may bealtered or test routines initiated from a re-mote control center.For greater distances, especially in outdoorswitchyards, fiber-optic cables are prefera-bly used. This technique has the advantagethat it is totally unaffected by electromag-netic interference.
Off-line dialog with numerical relays
A simple built-in operator panel whichrequires no special software knowledge orcodeword tables is used for parameterinput and readout.This allows operator dialog with the protec-tion relay. Answers appear largely in plain-text on the display of the operator panel.Dialog is divided into three main phases: Input, alternation and readout of settings Testing the functions of the protection
device and Readout of relay operation data for the
three last system faults and the autore-close counter.
Modern system protectionmanagement
A more versatile notebook computer maybe used for upgraded protection manage-ment.The relays may be set in 2 steps. First, allrelay settings are prepared in the officewith the aid of a PC and stored on a floppyor the hard disk. At site, the settings canthen be transferred from a portable PC intothe relay. The relay confirms the settingsand thus provides an unquestionablerecord.Vice versa, after a system fault, the relaymemory can be uploaded to a PC andcomprehensive fault analysis can then takeplace in the engineer’s office.
Protection Laptop
RecordingPersonal computer
Assigning
Recording andconfirmation
System level to remote control
Substationlevel
Modem(option)
Bay level
Dataconcentrator
ERTU
Control
Coordinatedprotection & control
RTU
Relay
Fig. 14: PC-aided setting procedure
Fig. 15: Communication options
Power System Protection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/11
Parameter
Line data
O/C Phase settings
O/C Earth settings
Fault Recording
Breaker Fall
1000
1100
1200
1500
2800
3900
DParameter
Line data
O/C Phase settings
O/C Earth settings
Fault Recording
Breaker Fall
1000
1100
1200
1500
2800
3900
CParameter
Line data
O/C Phase settings
O/C Earth settings
Fault Recording
Breaker Fall
1000
1100
1200
1500
2800
3900
BParameter
Line data
O/C Phase settings
O/C Ground settings
Fault recording
Breaker fail
1000
1100
1200
1500
2800
3900
A
Relay data management
Analog-distribution-type relays have some20–30 setpoints. If we consider a powersystem with about 500 relays, then thenumber adds up to 10,000 settings. Thisrequired considerable expenditure in set-ting the relays and filing retrieval setpoints.A personal computer-aided man-machinedialog and archiving program assists therelay engineer in data filing and retrieval.The program files all settings systemati-cally in substation-feeder-relay order.
Corrective rather than preventivemaintenance
Numerical relays monitor their own hard-ware and software. Exhaustive self-moni-toring and failure diagnostic routines arenot restricted to the protective relay inself,but are methodically carried through fromcurrent transformer circuits to tripping re-lay coils.Equipment failures and faults in the c.t. cir-cuits are immediately reported and the pro-tective relay blocked.Thus the service personnel is now able tocorrect the failure upon occurrence, result-ing in a significantly upgraded availability ofthe protection system.
Adaptive relaying
Numerical relays now offer secure, con-venient and comprehensive matching tochanging conditions. Matching may be initi-ated either by the relay’s own intelligenceor from the outside world via contacts orserial telegrams. Modern numerical relayscontain a number of parameter sets thatcan be pretested during commissioning ofthe scheme (Fig. 17). One set is normallyoperative. Transfer to the other sets can becontrolled via binary inputs or serial datalink. There are a number of applications forwhich multiple setting groups can upgradethe scheme performance, e.g.a) for use as a voltage-dependent control
of o/c relay pick-up values to overcomealternator fault current decrement to be-low normal load current when the AVRis not in automatic operation.
b) for maintaining short operation timeswith lower fault currents, e.g. automaticchange of settings if one supply trans-former is taken out of service.
c) for “switch-onto-fault” protection to pro-vide shorter time settings when energiz-ing a circuit after maintenance.The normal settings can be restoredautomatically after a time delay.
Fig. 16: System-wide setting and relay operation library
Fig. 17: Alternate parameter groups
10 000setpoints
systemca. 500relays
200setpoints
sub
bay
20setpoints
bay
4flags
OH-Line
1200flagsp. a.
system
Relay operationsSetpoints
1
1
1
300 faults p. a.ca. 6,000 km OHL(fault rate:5 p. a. and 100 km)
d) for autoreclose programs, i.e. instanta-neous operation for first trip and delayedoperation after unsuccessful reclosure.
e) for cold load pick-up problems wherehigh starting currents may cause relayoperation.
f) for ”ring open“ or ”ring closed“ oper-ation.
Power System Protection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/12
Mode of operation
Numerical protection relays operate on thebasis of numerical measuring principles.The analog measured values of current andvoltage are decoupled galvanically from theplant secondary circuits via input transduc-ers (Fig. 18). After analog filtering, thesampling and the analog-to-digital conver-sion take place. The sampling rate is, de-pending on the different protection princi-ples, between 12 and 20 samples perperiod. With certain devices (e.g. generatorprotection) a continuous adjustment of thesampling rate takes place depending onthe actual system frequency.The protection principle is based on a cy-clic calculation algorithm, utilizing the sam-pled current and voltage analog measuredvalues. The fault detections determined bythis process must be established in severalsequential calculations before protectionreactions can follow.A trip command is transferred to the com-mand relay by the processor, utilizing adual channel control.The numerical protection concept offers avariety of advantages, especially with re-gard to higher security, reliability and userfriendliness, such as:
Meas. inputs
Current inputs(100 x /N, 1 s)
Voltage inputs(140 Vcontinuous)
A/Dconverter
Processorsystem
Input filter V24Serialinterface
PC interfaceLSA interface
Memory:RAMEEPROMEPROM
Input/outputports
Input/outputunits
Binaryinputs
Alarmrelay
Commandrelay
LEDdisplays0001
01010011
Amplifier
Input/output contactsdigital10 Vanalog
100 V/1 A, 5 Aanalog
O. F.
High measurement accuracy:The high ultilization of adaptive algo-rithms produce accurate results evenduring, problematic conditions
Good long-term stability:Due to the digital mode of operation,drift phenomena at components due toageing do not lead to changes in accura-cy of measurement or time delays
Security against over- and underfunctionWith this concept the danger of an unde-tected error in the device causing protec-tion failure in the case of a network faultis clearly reduced when compared to con-ventional protection technology. Cyclicaland preventive maintenance services havetherefore become largely obsolete.The integrated self-monitoring system(Fig. 19) encompasses the following areas:– Analog inputs– Microprocessor system– Command relays.
Setting of protection relays
Numerical protection devices are able tohandle a number of additional protectionrelated functions, for which additional de-vices were required in the past.
A compact numerical protection device canreplace a number of complicated conven-tional single devices.Protection functions, configurations andmarshalling data are selected by parametersetting. Functions can be activated or de-activated by configuration.By marshalling internal logic alarms (whichare produced by certain device functionson the software side) to light-emittingdiodes or to alarm relays, an allocationbetween these can be made (Fig. 20).The same also applies to the input con-tacts.A flexible application according to thespecific requirements of the plant configu-ration is possible thanks to the extensivemarshalling and configuration options.All set values are stored in E2PROMS.In this way the settings cannot be lost asa result of supply failure.The setting values are accessed via 4-digitaddresses.Each parameter can be accessed and al-tered via the integrated operator panel oran externally connected operator terminal.
Fig. 18: Block diagram of numerical protection
Power System Protection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/13
The display appears on an alphanumericLCD display with 2 lines with 16 charactersper line. A code word prevents uninten-tional changes of setting values.Some relays allow for the storage of4 different sets of protection settings. Viabinary inputs or via the operator panel aparticular set of setting values can be acti-vated (switching of settings groups).
Fault analysis
The evaluation of faults is simplified by nu-merical protection technology. In the eventof a fault in the network, all events as wellas the analog traces of the measured volt-ages and currents are recorded.The following types of memory are avail-able: 1 operational event memory
Alarms that are not directly assigned toa fault in the network (e.g. monitoringalarms, alternation of a set value, block-ing of the automatic reclose function).
3 fault-event historiesAlarms that occurred during the last3 faults on the network (e.g. type offault detection, trip commands, fault lo-cation, autoreclose commands). A re-close cycle with one or more reclosuresis treated as one fault history. Each newfault in the network overrides the oldestfault history.
A memory for the fault recordings forvoltage and current. Up to 8 fault record-ings are stored. The fault recordingmemory is organized as a ring buffer, i.e.a new fault entry overrides the oldestfault record.
1 earth-fault event memory (optional forisolated or resonant grounded networks)Event record of the sensitive earth faultdetector (e.g. faulted phase, real compo-nent of residual current).
The time tag attached to the fault-recordevents is a relative time from fault detec-tion with a resolution of 1 ms. In the caseof devices with integrated, battery back-upclock the operational events as well as thefault detection are assigned the internalclock time and date stamp.The memory for operational events andfault record events is protected against fail-ure of auxiliary supply with battery back-upsupply.The integrated operator interface or a PCsupported by the programming tool DIGSIis used to retrieve fault reports as well asfor the input of settings and marshalling.
Plausibility check of input quantitiese.g. iL1 + iL2 + iL3 = iE
uL1 + uL2 + uL3 = uE
Check of analog-to-digital conversionby comparison withconverted reference quantities
A
D
Hardware and software monitoring ofthe microprocessor system incl. memory,e.g. by watchdog and
cyclic memory checks
Micro-processorsystem
Monitoring of the tripping relaysoperated via dual channels
Relay
Tripping check or test reclosure by localor remote operation (not automatic)
Logical signal
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
LED6
LED7
. . .LED No.
Start L1
Start L2
Start L3
Start E
Trip
Autoreclosure
.
.
.
Power System Protection
Fig. 20: Marshalling matrix, LED control as an example
Fig. 19: Self-monitoring system
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/14
A further source of information is the indi-cation via LEDs and alarm relays, as wasthe case with traditional relays. The LEDscan be selected on an individual basis toprovide the indication stored or unstored,depending on what information they repre-sent. In the case of devices with internalbattery back-up, the LED indications arerestored following an auxiliary power sup-ply failure. The alarm relays in these de-vices provide N0-type contacts, some ofthem changeover contacts.
Operation of numerical protectiondevices
The DIGSI operation software enables con-venient and transparent operation of thenumerical protection devices using a PC.The new DIGSI V3 version operates underWINDOWS and can therefore make useof all advantages of this internationally ac-cepted user interface.DIGSI V3 uses protocol-secured data ex-change between PC and protection device.This data exchange also meets the stand-ard recommendations for the interface be-tween protection equipment and stationcontrol equipment (IEC 870-5-103).
Application
DIGSI V3 is a WINDOWS PC program,with which numeric protection relays canbe conveniently operated under menuguidance using the serial interface of a PC(see Fig. 21). The PC can thus be directlyconnected with the protection device via aV24 (RS232) interface cable. The isolatedconnection version using optoelectricalconverter and fiber-optic cable is recom-mended, particularly if the protection de-vice is in operation in the substation.
Hardware and software platform
PC 386 SX or above, with at least4 Mbytes RAM
DIGSI V3 requires about 10 Mbytesharddisk space
Additional hard-disk space per installedprotection device 2 to 3 Mbytes
One free serial interface to the protec-tion device (COM 1 to COM 4)
One floppy disk drive 3.5", high densitywith 1.44 Mbytes (required for installa-tion)
MS DOS 5.0 or higher WINDOWS version 3.1 or higher
Power System Protection
Fig. 21: Operation of the protection relays using PC and DIGSI V3 software program
Fig. 22: Parameterization using DIGSI V3
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/15
Power System Protection
Operation features
The DIGSI V3 user interface is structuredin accordance with the SAA/CUA standardused for WINDOWS programs (see Fig. 22).The selection of a system, a feeder and aprotection device is implemented in DIGSIV3, using system, bay and protection unitaddresses. Consistent use of this principle,which will be supported in future both inprotection devices and DIGSI file manage-ment, prevents incorrect allocation of pro-tection units within a system.DIGSI V3 supports the complete parame-terization and marshalling functionality ofthe numeric Siemens protection relays.Parameterization and routing of a protec-tion device can be done in file mode.All advanced storage media for manage-ment and archiving of this data (e.g. mem-ory cards, exchangeable hard disks, opto-disks, etc.) are provided. Device files of aprotection unit created in the office can betransferred subsequently with protocol-security into the protection unit. Data con-sistency is ensured, for example, by auto-matic comparison of data stored on a fileand in the device.DIGSI V3 permits the readout of operation-al and fault events from a protection de-vice which are stored with a 1 millisecondrealtime resolution. This enables effectiveand rapid fault analysis, which contributesto optimization of protection in networkoperation. Archiving and printout are con-veniently supported. The polling procedureis defined as a standard.Likewise, measured load values of a pro-tection device can be read out on-line andrecorded. Integration of extensive testfunctions facilitate the PC-guided commis-sioning and testing of a protection device.
Printer, plotter, networks
DIGSI V3 uses the full WINDOWS inter-face functionality. All common printers andplotters for which WINDOWS drivers areavailable can be used with DIGSI V3. Theuser is therefore not faced with any restric-tions when purchasing printers or plottersas long as WINDOWS drivers are available.Even transmission of information via faxfrom DIGSI V3 can be implemented.Linking into the PC network and remoteaccess to DIGSI V3 via communication net-works (e.g. ISDN) are part of the frame-work as supported by the WINDOWS op-erating system.
Evaluation of the fault recording
Readout of the fault record from the pro-tection device by DIGSI V3 is done byfault-proof scanning procedures in accord-ance with the standard recommendationfor transmission of fault records.A fault record can also be read out repeat-edly. In addition to analog values, such asvoltage and current, binary tracks can alsobe transferred and presented.DIGSI V3 is supplied together with theDIGRA (Digsi Graphic) program, whichprovides the customer with full graphicaloperating and evaluation functionality likethat of the digital fault recorders (Oscil-lostores) from Siemens (see Fig. 23).Real-time presentation of analog distur-bance records, overlaying and zooming ofcurves, visualization of binary tracks (e.g.trip command, reclose command, etc.) arealso part of the extensive graphical func-tionality as are setting of measurementcursors, spectrum analysis and R/X deriva-tion.
Fig. 23: Display and evaluation of a fault record using DIGSI V3
Data security, data interfaces
DIGSI V3 is a closed system as far as pro-tection parameter security is concerned.The security of the stored data of the oper-ating PC is ensured by checksums. Thismeans that it is only possible to changedata with DIGSI V3, which subsequentlycalculates a checksum for the changeddata and stores it with the data. Changesin the data and thus in safety-related pro-tection data are thus reliably detected.DIGSI V3 is, however, also an open sys-tem. The data export function supports ex-port of parameterization and marshallingdata in standard ASCII format. This permitssimple access to these data by other pro-grams, such as test programs without en-dangering the security of data within theDIGSI program system.With the import and export of fault recordsin IEEE standard format COMTRADE(ANSI) a high performance data interfaceis produced which supports import andexport of fault records into the DIGSI V3partner program DIGRA.This enables the export of fault recordsfrom Siemens protection units to custom-er-specific programs via the COMTRADEformat.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/16
Power System Protection
Remote relay interrogation
The numerical relay range 7**5 of Siemenscan also be operated from a remotely lo-cated PC via modem-telephone connec-tion.Up to 254 relays can be addressed viaone modem connection if the star coupler7XV53 is used as a communication node(Fig. 24).The relays are connected to the star cou-pler via optical fiber links.Every protection device which belongs toa DIGSI V3 substation structure has aunique address.The attached relays are always listening,but only the addressed one answers to theoperator command which comes from thecentral PC.If the relay which is located in a stationis to be operated from a remote office,then a device file is opened in DIGSI (V3.2or higher) and protection dialog is chosenvia modem. After password input, DIGSIestablishes a connection to the protectiondevice after receiving a call-back from thesystem.In this way secure and timesaving remotesetting and readout of data are possible.Diagnostics and control of test routines arealso possible without the need for visitingthe substation.
Housing and terminal system
The protection devices and the corre-sponding supplementary devices are avail-able mainly in 7XP20 housings (Fig. 26).The dimension drawings are to be foundon 6/24 and following pages. Installing ofthe modules in a cubicle without the hous-ing is not permissible.The width of the housing conforms to the19" system with the divisions 1/6, 1/3, 1/2or 1/1 of a 19" rack. The termination mod-ule is located at the rear of devices forpanel flush mounting or cubicle mounting(Fig. 26 left). Each termination may bemade via a screw terminal or crimp con-tact. The termination modules used eachcontain: 4 termination points for measured volt-
ages, binary inputs or relay outputs(max. 1.5 mm2) or
2 termination points for measured cur-rents (screw termination max. 4 mm,crimp contact max. 2.5 mm2) or
2 FSMA plugs for fiber-optic termination.For mounting of devices into cubicles, the8MC cubicle system is recommended. It isdescribed in Siemens Catalog NV21.
7XV53
7**57**5
7SJ60 7SJ60 7SJ60
RS485 Bus
opt.
RS485
DIGSI V3
DIGSI V3PC, remotely located
Modem
Office
Substation
AnalogISDN
Modem,optionally withcall-back function
Star coupler
Signal converter
PC,centrally locatedin the substation(option)
Fig. 24: Remote relay communication
The standard cubicle has the followingdimensions:2200 mm x 900 mm x 600 mm (HxWxD).These cubicles are provided with a 44 Uhigh mounting rack (standard height unitU = 44.45 mm). It can swivel as much as180° in a swing frame.The rack provides for a mounting width of19", allowing, for example, 2 devices witha width of 1/2 x 19" to be mounted. Thedevices in the 7XP20 housing are securedto rails by screws. Module racks are notrequired.To withdraw crimp contact terminations,the following tool is recommended:extraction tool No. 135900 (from Messrs.Weidmüller, Paderbornstrasse 157,D-32760 Detmold).In the housing version for surface mount-ing, the terminations are wired up on ter-minal strips on the top and bottom side ofthe device (max. terminated wire crosssection 7 mm2). For this purpose two-tierterminal blocks are used to attain the re-quired number of terminals (Fig. 26 right).
According to IEC 529 the degree of protec-tion is indicated by the identifying IP, fol-lowed by a number for the degree of pro-tection. The first digit indicates theprotection against accidental contact andingress of solid foreign bodies, the seconddigit indicates the protection against water.7XP20 housings are protected against ac-cess to dangerous parts with a wire, dustand dripping water (IP 51).
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/17
Power System Protection
Fig. 25: Numerical protection relays in 7XP20 standard housings
Fig. 26 left: Connection method for panel flash mounting including fiber-optic interfaces; right: Connection method for panel surface mounting
1/6 1/3 1/2 1/1 of 19" width
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/18
ANSINo.*
14
21
21N
24
25
27
27/59/81
32
32F
32R
37
40
46
47
48
49
49R
49S
50
50N
51G
Aut
orec
lose
+Sy
nchr
oche
ckSy
nchr
oniz
ing
Bre
aker
failu
re
Volta
ge, F
requ
ency
7VE5
1
7SV5
12
* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers
7RW
600
7SJ6
07S
J511
7SJ5
127S
J55
7SJ5
31
7SJ5
517S
J60
Ove
rcur
rent
Mot
or p
rote
ctio
n
Diff
eren
tial
7VH
807U
T512
7UT5
137S
S50/
517V
H83
7UM
511
7UM
512
7UM
515
7UM
516
7VK5
12
Gen
erat
or p
rote
ctio
n
7SA
511
7SA
513
7SD
247S
D50
27S
D50
37S
D51
17S
D51
2Fi
ber-
optic
cur
rent
com
pari
son
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Protection functions
Zero speed and underspeed dev.
Distance protection, phase
Distance protection, ground
Overfluxing
Synchronism check
Synchronizing
Undervoltage
U/f protection
Directional power
Forward power
Reverse power
Undercurrent or underpower
Field failure
Load unbalance, negative phasesequence overcurrent
Phase sequence voltage
Incomplete sequence, lockedrotor, failure to accelerate
Thermal overload
Rotor thermal protection
Stator thermal protection
Instantaneous overcurrent
Instantaneous ground faultovercurrent
Ground overcurrent relay
Pilo
t wir
e di
ffere
ntia
l
Dis
tanc
e
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–– – – – – – – – – –––– – – – – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Type
Relay Selection Guide
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Power System Protection
Fig. 27a
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/19
Power System Protection
Fig. 27b
Aut
orec
lose
+Sy
nchr
oche
ckSy
nchr
oniz
ing
Bre
aker
failu
re
Volta
ge, F
requ
ency
7VE5
1
7SV5
12
* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers
7RW
600
7SJ6
07S
J511
7SJ5
127S
J55
7SJ5
31
7SJ5
517S
J60
Ove
rcur
rent
Mot
or p
rote
ctio
n
Diff
eren
tial
7VH
807U
T512
7UT5
137S
S50/
517V
H83
7UM
511
7UM
512
7UM
515
7UM
516
7VK5
12
Gen
erat
or p
rote
ctio
n
7SA
511
7SA
513
7SD
247S
D50
27S
D50
37S
D51
17S
D51
2Fi
ber-
optic
cur
rent
com
pari
son
ANSINo.*
Pilo
t wir
e di
ffere
ntia
l
Dis
tanc
e
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Stator ground-fault overcurrent
Overcurrent with time delay
Ground-fault overcurrentwith time delay
Overvoltage
Residual voltage ground-faultprotection
Rotor ground fault
Directional overcurrent
Directional ground-faultovercurrent
Stator ground-fault, directionalovercurrent
Out-of-step protection
Autoreclose
Frequency relay
Carrier interface
Lockout relay, start inhibit
Differential protection, generator
Differential protection, transf.
Differential protection, bus-bar
Differential protection, motor
Differential protection, line
Restricted earth-fault protection
Voltage and power directional rel.
Breaker failure
51GN
51
51N59
59N
64R
67
67N
67G
68/78
79
81
85
86
87G
87T
87B
87M
87L
87N
92
BF
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Protection functions
Type
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/20
21
21N
67N
79
25
85
68
78
49
50 50N
51N51
49
46
50 50N
51N51
BF
67
67N
79
51N
48
79
*
**
* only with 7SJ512
47
Power System Protection
Protection relays
Siemens manufactures a complete seriesof numerical relays for all kinds of protec-tion application.The series is briefly portrayed on the fol-lowing pages.
7SJ60
Universal overcurrentand overload protection
Phase-segregated measurement andindication (Input 3 ph, IE calculated)
All instantaneous, i.d.m.t. and d.t.characteristics can be set individuallyfor phase and ground faults
Selectable setting groups Integral autoreclose function (option) Thermal overload, unbalanced load
and locked rotor protection Suitable for busbar protection with
reverse interlocking With load monitoring, event and fault
memory
7SJ511
Universal overcurrent protection
Phase-segregated measurement andindication (3 ph and E)
I.d.m.t and d.t. characteristics can be setindividually for phase and ground faults
Suitable for busbar protection withreverse interlocking
With integral breaker failureprotection
With load monitoring, event and faultmemory
7SJ512
Digital overcurrent-time protectionwith additional functions
the same features as 7SJ511, plus: Autoreclose Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
tion for isolated, resonant or high-resist-ance grounded networks
Directional module when used asdirectional overcurrent relay (optional)
Selectable setting groups Inrush stabilization
7SA511
Subtransmission line protectionwith distance-to-fault locator
Universal distance relay for all networks,with many additional functions, amongstothers Universal carrier interface (permissive
and blocking procedures programmable) Power swing blocking or tripping Selectable setting groups Sensitive directional ground-fault deter-
mination for isolated and compensatednetworks
Ground-fault protection for earthed net-works
Single and three-pole autoreclose Synchrocheck Free marshalling of optocoupler inputs
and relay outputs Line load monitoring, event and fault
recording Thermal overload protection
Fig. 28: 7SJ60 Fig. 29: 7SJ511/512
Fig. 30: 7SA511
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/21
21 25
5921N
67N
85
87L
49
6051
BF 79
79BF
68
87L
49
5051
BF
78
Power System Protection
7SA513
Transmission line protectionwith distance-to-fault locator
Fast distance protection, with operatingtimes less than one cycle (20 ms at50 Hz), with a package of extra functionswhich cover all the demands of extra-high-voltage applications
Universal carrier interface (permissiveand blocking procedures programmable)
Power swing blocking or tripping Parallel line compensation Load compensation that ensures high
accuracy even for high-resistance faultsand double-end infeed
High-resistance ground-fault protection Back-up ground-fault protection Overvoltage protection Single- and three-pole autoreclose Synchrocheck option Breaker failure protection Free marshalling of a comprehensive
range of optocoupler inputs and relayoutputs
Selectable setting groups Line load monitoring, event and fault
recording High-performance measurement using
digital signal processors Flash EPROM memories
7SD511
Current-comparison protectionfor overhead lines and cables
With phase-segregated measurement For serial data transmission
(19.2 kbits/sec)– with integrated optical transmitter/
receiver for direct fiber-optic link upto approx. 15 km distance
– or with the additional digital signaltransmission device 7VR5012 up to150 km fiber-optic length
– or through a 64 kbit/s channel of avail-able multipurpose PCM devices, viafiber-optic or microwave link
Integral overload and breaker failureprotection
Emergency operation as overcurrentback-up protection on failure of data link
Automatic measurement and correctionof signal transmission time, i.e. channel-swapping is permissible
Line load monitoring, event and faultrecording
Fig. 31: 7SA513
Fig. 32: 7SD511 Fig. 33: 7SD512
7SD512
Current-comparison protectionfor overhead lines and cables
with functions as 7SD511, but additionallywith autoreclose function for single- andthree-pole fast and delayed autoreclosure.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/22
87 T 49 50/51
87BB BF
87T
49
87REF50G
50/51
**
* 87REF or 50G
Power System Protection
7UT512
Differential protection for machinesand power transformers
with additional functions, such as: Numerical matching to transformer ratio
and connection group (no matchingtransformers necessary)
Thermal overload protection Back-up overcurrent protection Measured-value indication for com-
missioning (no separate instrumentsnecessary)
Load monitor, event and fault recording
7UT513
Differential protectionfor three-winding transformers
with the same functions as 7UT512, plus: Sensitive restricted ground-fault
protection Sensitive d.t. or i.d.m.t. ground-fault –
o/c-protection
7SS5
Numerical busbar protection
With absolutely secure 2-out-of-2 meas-urement and additional check zone, eachprocessed on separate microprocessorhardware
With fast operating time (< 15 ms) Extreme stability against c.t. saturation Completely self-monitoring, including c.t.
circuits, isolator positions and run time With integrated circuit-breaker failure
protection With commissioning-friendly aids (indica-
tion of all feeder, operating and stabiliz-ing currents)
With event and fault recording Designed for single and multiple bus-
bars, up to 8 busbar sections and 32 bays
7UM511/12/15/16
Multifunctional devicesfor machine protection
With 10 protection functions on average,with flexible combination to completeprotection systems from the smallest tothe largest motor generator units
With improved measurement methodsbased on Fourier filters and the evalua-tion of symmetrical components (fullynumeric, frequency compensated)
With load monitoring, event and faultrecording
Fig. 34: 7UT512 Fig. 35: 7UT513
Fig. 36: 7SS5
Fig. 37: Protection operation with the PC operatorprogram DIGSI
See separate reference list for machineprotection.Order No. E50001-U321-A39-X-7600
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/23
51
64
67N
87L
49
27
37
46
49R
50
46
51N
BF
49LR
37
51N
59
50G 86
48
49
51
51G
50
51
27
50 7950N 49 59
Power System Protection
7VE51
Paralleling device
for synchronization of generators andnetworks Absolutely secure against faulty switch-
ing due to duplicate measurement withdifferent procedures
With numerical measurand filtering thatensures exact synchronization even innetworks suffering transients
With synchrocheck option Available in two versions: 7VE511 with-
out, 7VE512 with voltage and frequencybalancing
Combined bay protection and controlunit 7SJ531
Line protection
Non directional time overcurrent Directional time overcurrent IEC/ANSI and user definable TOC curves Overload protection Sensitive directional ground fault Negative sequence overcurrent Under/Overvoltage Breaker failure Autoreclosure Fault locator
Motor protection
Thermal overload Locked rotor Start inhibit Undercurrent
Control functions
Measured-value acquisition Signal and command indications P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation Measured-value recording Event logging Switching statistics Feeder control diagram with load indica-
tion Switchgear interlocking
7SJ551
Universal motor protectionand overcurrent relay
Thermal overload protection– separate thermal replica for stator
and rotor based on true RMS currentmeasurement
– up to 2 heating time constants for thestator thermal replica
– separate cooling time constants forstator and rotor thermal replica
– ambient temperature biasing of ther-mal replica
Connection of up to 8 RTD sensors Multi-curve overcurrent and ground-fault
protection:– four selectable i.d.m.t. and d.t. curves
for phase faults, two for ground-faults– customized curves instead of standard
curves can be programmed to offeroptimal flexibility for both phase andground elements
Real-Time Clock: last 3 events are storedwith real-time stamps of alarm and tripdata
7SD502
Pilot-wire differential protection forlines and cables (2 pilot wires)
Up to about 25 km telephone-type pilotlength
With integrated overcurrent back-upand overload protection
Also applicable to 3-terminal lines(2 devices at each end)
Fig. 38: 7SJ531 Fig. 39: 7SJ551
Fig. 40: 7SD502/503
7SD503
Pilot-wire differential protection for linesand cables (3 pilot wires)
Up to about 15 km pilot length With integrated overcurrent back-up
and overload protection Also applicable to 3-terminal lines
(2 devices at each end)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/24
Front view
Case 7XP2030-2 for relays 7SD511, 7SJ511/12, 7SJ531, 7UT512, 7VE51
145
150
17230 29.5
266244
231.5
1.5
10
Opticalfibreinterface
131.57.310513.2 5.4
ø 5or
M4 255.8
146
245
ø 6
Side view Panel cutout
225
220 17230 29.5
266
1,5
231.5
10
Optical fiber interface180
ø 5or
M4
206.513.67.3
245 255.8
221
ø 6
5.4
Front view
Case 7XP2040-2 for relays 7SA511, 7UT513, 7SD512, 7UM5**, 7VE512, 7SD502/503
Side view Panel cutout
56.5±0.370
75
Back view
244266
Side view
Case 7XP20 for relays 7SJ600, 7RW600
37 172 29.5
245 +1 255 ±0.3
71+2
ø 5or
M4
7.3
ø 6
Panel cutout
Fig. 41
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
Power System Protection
All dimensions in mm.
Cutout and drilling dimensions
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/25
7XR9672 Core-balance current transformer (zero sequence c.t.)
14
K
102
200
120
2
55
120
14.5 x 6.5 K
L
k l96 104
M6
7XR9600 Core-balance current transformer (zero sequence c.t.)
170
143
81
94
8012
Diam.6.4
54
Diam.149
Fig. 44
Fig. 45
Power System Protection
Fig. 46
70172 29.530
26624
75
Case 7XP2020-2
3056.3
13.27.3
ø 5or
M4
5.4
71
ø 6
255.8245
Front view Side view Back view Panel cutout
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/26
Case for relay 7SJ551
105 17230
266
29.5
115
244 255.9
86.4100
Front view Side view Back view
Case 7XP2060-2 for relay 7SA513
266
445
450
13.2
7.3
245
405
431.5
5.4
255.8
446
ø 6
ø 5 or M4
2661.5
10
30 172 29.5
Front view
Optical fiberinterface
Side view
Panel cutout
Power System Protection
Fig. 47
Fig. 48
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/27
Typical protection schemes
Power System Protection
Fig. 49
from both ends6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
11
13
12
17
16
15
14
20
19
18
Circuitnumber
Radial feeder circuit
Ring main circuit
Distribution feeder with reclosers
Parallel feeder circuit
Cable or short overhead line with infeedfrom both ends
Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed
Cables andoverhead lines
Applicationgroup
Circuit equipmentprotected
Transformers Small transformer infeed
Large or important transformer infeed
Dual infeed with single transformer
Parallel incoming transformer feeder
Parallel incoming transformer feeder with bus tie
Motors Small- and medium-sized motors
Large HV motors
Generators Smallest generator < 500 kW
Small generator, around 1 MW
Large generator > 1 MW
Generator-transformer unit
Busbars Busbar protection by o/c relays withreverse interlocking
High-impedance differential busbar protection
Low-impedance differential busbar protection
6/28
6/28
6/29
6/29
6/30
6/30
Page
6/31
6/31
6/32
6/32
6/33
6/33
6/34
6/34
6/35
6/35
6/36
6/37
6/38
6/38
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/28
Power System Protection
1. Radial feeder circuit
Notes:
1) Autoreclosure 79 only with O.H. lines.2) Negative sequence o/c protection 46 as
sensitive back-up protection against un-symmetrical faults.
General hints:
– The relay at the far end (D) gets theshortest operating time.Relays further upstream have to betime-graded against the next down-stream relay in steps of about 0.3 sec-onds.
– Inverse-time curves can be selected ac-cording to the following criteria:
– Definite time:source impedance large compared tothe line impedance, i.e. small currentvariation between near and far endfaults
– Inverse time:Longer lines, where the fault current ismuch less at the end of the line than atthe local end.
– Very or extremely inverse time:Lines, where the line impedance is largecompared to the source impedance(high difference for close-in and remotefaults), or lines, where coordination withfuses or reclosers is necessary.Steeper characteristics provide alsohigher stability on service restoration(cold load pick-up and transformer inrush currents)
2. Ring main circuit
General hints:
– Operating time of overcurrent relays tobe coordinated with downstream fusesof load transformers.(Preferably very inverse time characteris-tic with about 0.2 s grading-time delay
– Thermal overload protection for thecables (option)
– Negative sequence o/c protection 46 assensitive protection against unsymmetri-cal faults (option)
51N51 46 79
51N51 46
51N51 46
Infeed
Furtherfeeders
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ARC
2) 1)
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
A
B
C
Load
Load Load
D I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
7SJ60
7SJ60
7SJ60
Transformerprotection,see Fig. 56
51N51 46 49
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t52
5252
51N51 46 49
I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ϑ>52
Infeed
7SJ60
Transformerprotection,see Fig. 56
7SJ60
ϑ>
Fig. 50
Fig. 51
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/29
Power System Protection
3. Distribution feeder withreclosers
General hints:
– The feeder relay operating characteris-tics, delay times and autoreclosurecycles must be carefully coordinatedwith downstream reclosers, sectionaliz-ers and fuses.The instantaneous zone 50/50N is nor-mally set to reach out to the first mainfeeder sectionalizing point. It shall en-sure fast clearing of close-in faults andprevent blowing of fuses in this area(“fuse saving”). Fast autoreclosure isiniciated in this case.Further time delayed tripping and reclo-sure steps (normally 2 or 3) have to begraded against the recloser.
– The o/c relay should automaticallyswitch over to less sensitive characteris-tics after longer breaker interruptiontimes to enable overriding of subse-quent cold load pick-up and transformerinrush currents.
52
50/51
50N/51N
46
79
52
7SJ60
Infeed
I>>,I>, t
IE>>,IE>, t
I2>, t
Auto-reclose
Recloser
Sectionalizers
Fuses
Furtherfeeders
52
51N51 49 46 7SJ60
7SJ51267N67 51 51N
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
Infeed
Protectionsame asline or cable 1
I>, t IE>, t I2>, tϑ>
Load
O.H. line orcable 1
O.H. line orcable 2
Load
Fig. 52
Fig. 53
4. Parallel feeder circuit
General hints:
– This circuit is preferably used for theinterruptionfree supply of important con-sumers without significant back-feed.
– The directional o/c protection 67/67Ntrips instantaneously for faults on theprotected line. This allows the savingof one time-grading interval for the o/c-relays at the infeed.
– The o/c relay functions 51/51N haveeach to be time-graded against theupstream located relays.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/30
5. Cables or short overhead lines withinfeed from both sides
Notes:
1) Autoreclosure only with overhead lines2) Overload protection only with cables3) Differential protection options:
– Type 7SD511/12 with direct fiber-opticconnection up to about 20 km or via a64 kbit/s channel of a general purposePCM connection (optical fiber, micro-wave)
– Type 7SD502 with 2-wire pilot cablesup to about 20 km
– Type 7SD503 with 3-wire pilot cablesup to about 10 km.
2)
3)
2)
3)
1)
7SA511
52
52
52
85 79
52
52
52
52
52 52 52 52
21/21N
79
67N
67N21/21N
85
7SA511
Load
Infeed
Sameprotectionfor parallel line,if applicable
Line orcable
Backfeed
7SD5**
5252
52
51N/51N 87L
79
49
1)
2)
52
51N/51N
87L
79
49
1)
2)7SD5**
3)
52
52
52
52 52 52 52
Load
Infeed
Sameprotectionfor parallel line,if applicable
Line orcable
Backfeed
7SJ60
7SJ60
Power System Protection
Fig. 54
Fig. 55
6. Overhead lines or longer cables withinfeed from both sides
Notes:
1) Teleprotection logic 85 for transfer tripor blocking schemes. Signal transmis-sion via pilot wire, power-line carrier,microwave or optical fiber (to be pro-vided seperately). The teleprotectionsupplement is only necessary if fastfault clearance on 100% line length isrequired, i.e. second zone tripping(about 0.3 s delay) cannot be acceptedfor far end faults.
2) Directional ground-fault protection 67Nwith inverse-time delay against high-resistance faults
3) Single- or multishot autoreclosure 79only with overhead lines.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/31
7. Small transformer infeed
General hints:
– Ground-faults on the secondary side aredetected by current relay 51G which,however, has to be time graded againstdownstream feeder protection relays.The restricted ground-fault relay 87N canoptionally be provided to achieve fastclearance of ground-faults in the trans-former secondary winding.Relay 7VH80 is high-impedance typeand requires class X c.t.s with equaltransformation ratio.
– Primary breaker and relay may be re-placed by fuses.
5150 51N 49 46 7SJ60
52
52
7UT513
51G 7SJ60
87N
51N51
87T
52
52
63
I>> I>, t IE> ϑ> I2>, t
Load
HV infeed High voltage, e.g. 115 kV
2)
1)
I>, t IE>, t
7SJ60
Load
Load bus, e.g. 13.8 kV
Power System Protection
Fig. 56
Fig. 57
8. Large or important transformerinfeed
Notes:
1) Three winding transformer relaytype 7UT513 may be replaced by two-winding type 7UT512 plus high-imped-ance-type restricted ground-fault relay7VH80. However, class X c.t. coreswould additionally be necessary in thiscase. (See small transformer protection)
2) 51G may additionally be provided,in particular for the protection of theneutral resistance, if provided.
3) Relays 7UT512/513 provide numericalratio and vector group adaption.Matching transformers as used withtraditional relays are therefore no moreapplicable.
5150 50N 49
7SJ60
52
52
46
63
87N
51G
7SJ60
RN
52
HV infeed
I>> I>, t IE> ϑ>
Load
Optional resistor orreactor
I2>, t
I>>
IE>7VH80
o/c-relay
Distribution bus
Fuse
Load
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/32
9. Dual-infeed with single transformer
Notes:
1) Line c.t.s are to be connected to sepa-rate stabilizing inputs of the differentialrelay 87T in order to guarantee stabilityin case of line through-fault currents.
2) Relay 7UT513 provides numerical ratioand vector group adaption. Matchingtransformers, as used with traditionalrelays, are therefore no longer applica-ble.
52 52
46
51 51N50
49
63
7SJ60
7SJ60
52
52 52 52
7UT51387T87N
Protection line 1same as line 2
Load
I>> IE>
Protection line 221/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
I>> I>, t IE>, t
ϑ>I2>
7SJ60
Loadbus
51G
51N51
Power System Protection
Fig. 58
Fig. 59
10. Parallel incoming transformerfeeders
Note:
1) The directional functions 67 and 67Ndo not apply for cases where the trans-formers are equipped with transformerdifferential relays 87T.
5150 51N 49 46
52
52
51G
52
52
52 52
63
51N51
52
67 67N
I>, t IE>, t IE>
7SJ512
I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t
Load
HV infeed 1
7SJ60
Load
HV infeed 27SJ60
Protection
same asinfeed 1
I>
1)
Load
Loadbus
IE>, t
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/33
49CR
52
4951N50 7SJ60
49CR
52
50 7SJ531 or7SJ551
51G 67G
M
M
Lockedrotor
I>> Lockedrotor
IE> ϑ>
46
I>>
IE>
ϑ> I2>
4649
I<
37
2)7XR961)60/1A
I2>
11. Parallel incoming transformerfeeders with bus tie
Note:
1) Overcurrent relays 51, 51N each con-nected as a partial differential scheme.This provides a simple and fast busbarprotection and saves one time-gradingstep.
5150 51N 49 46
52
52
51G
51 51N
52
52
5151N
52
I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t
Load
Infeed 1
7SJ60
Load
I>, t IE>, t I>, tIE>, t
7SJ60 7SJ60
Infeed 27SJ60
Protectionsame asinfeed 1
Power System Protection
Fig. 60
Fig. 61b
Fig. 61a
12. Small- and medium-sized motors< about 1 MW
a) With effective or low-resistancegrounded infeed (IE ≥ I N Motor)
General hint:
– Applicable to low-voltage motors andhigh-voltage motors with low-resistancegrounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor).
b) With high-resistance grounded infeed(IE ≤ IN Motor)
Notes:
1) Window-type zero sequence c.t.2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
tion 67N only applicable with infeedfrom isolated or Peterson-coil groundednetwork.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/34
13. Large HV motors > about 1 MW
Notes:
1) Window-type zero sequence c.t.2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
tion 67N only applicable with infeedfrom isolated or Peterson-coil groundednetwork.
3) This function is only needed for motorswhere the run-up time is longer than thesafe stall time tE.
According to IEC 79-7, the tE-time is thetime needed to heat up a.c. windings,when carrying the starting current IA,from the temperature reached in ratedservice and at maximum ambient tem-perature to the limiting temperature.A separate speed switch is used tosupervise actual starting of the motor.The motor breaker is tripped if the motordoes not reach speed in the preset time.The speed switch is part of the motordelivery itself.
4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni1205) 49T only available with relay type 75J551
49CR
52
50
7UT512
51G 67G
7SJ531 or7SJ551
49T
Speedswitch M
87M
37
Lockedrotor
I>>
IE>
ϑ> I2>
4649
U<
27
2)7XR961)60/1A
Start-upsuper-visior
I< Optional
RTD's 4)optional
3)
3)
Power System Protection
7SJ60G
46 495151N
I>, IE>, t
LV
I2> ϑ>
G146 4951
51N7SJ60
RN =VN
√3 • (0.5 to 1) • Irated
I>, IE>, t I2> ϑ>
MV
Generator 2
Fig. 62
Fig. 63b: With resistance grounded neutral
14. Smallest generators < 500 kW
Fig. 63a: With solidly grounded neutral
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/35
52
7UM511
G
51
51G
64R
PI>, t
IE>, t
I2>
4632
L.O.F
40
1)
Field
15. Small generator, typically 1 MW
Note:
1) Two c.t.s in V-connection also sufficient.
Power System Protection
52
7UM511
G
51G
64R
P
87
87G
51
27
81
59
51 32 46 40 49
7SJ60
MV
I
RE Field<
I>, t
2)
IG
O/Cv.c.
I2> L.O.F. ϑ>
1)
1)
U<
U>
f>
IE>, t
Field
3)
Fig. 64
Fig. 65
16. Large generator > 1 MW
Notes:
1) Functions 81 und 59 only requiredwhere prime mover can assume excessspeed and voltage regulator may permitrise of output voltage above upper limit.
2) Differential relaying options:– 7UT512: Low-impedance differential
protection 87– 7UT513: Low-impedance differen-
tial 87 with integral restricted ground-fault protection 87G
– 7VH83: High-impedance differentialprotection 87 (requires class X c.t.s)
3) 7SJ60 used as voltage-controlled o/cprotection.Function 27 of 7UM511 is used toswitch over to a second, more sensitivesetting group.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/36
87U
87TU
Unittrans.
63
71 Oil low
Transf. fault press
51TN
Transf. neut. OC
Unit diff.51
Unit aux.back-up
78
40
32
59Over volt
Loss ofsync.
Loss offield
Over freq.
Volt/Hz
51TN
Unitaux.
Trans.diff.
87T
Trans.neut.OC
81N
24
49S
87G
StatorO.L.
Gen.diff.
G
2146
Neg.seq.
Sys.back-up
59GN
Gen.neut. OV
51GN
64R64R2
E
Fieldgrd.
Fieldgrd.
63
71Transf.fault press
Oil low
Reversepower
2)
1)
52
A
Power System Protection
17. Generator-transformer unit
Notes:
1) 100% stator ground-fault protectionbased on 20 Hz voltage injection
2) Sensitive field ground-fault protectionbased on 1 Hz voltage injection
3) Only used functions shown, furtherintegrated functions available in each re-lay type (see ”Relay Selection Guide“,Fig. 27).
Fig. 66
46 59 81N 49 64R40
32 21 7859GN
51GN
64R2
241) 2)
87G and optionally
87U
5151N
87T2
optionally3
87TU
7UM511
7UM516
7UM515
7UT512
7UT513
7SJ60
Relaytype
Functions 3) Numberof relaysrequired
1
1
1
1
3
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/37
Power System Protection
18. Busbar protection by O/C relayswith reverse interlocking
General hint:
Applicable to distribution busbars withoutsubstantial (< 0.25 x IN) backfeed from theoutgoing feeders
Fig. 67
52
52
5050N
5151N
52
5050N
5151N
5050N
5151N
52
5050N
5151N
7SJ60
7SJ60
7SJ60 7SJ60
t0 = 50 ms
I> I>, t I> I>, t
I>, t0 I>, t
I> I>, t
Infeed
reverse interlocking
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/38
Power System Protection
19. High impedance busbarprotection
General hints:
– Normally used with single busbarand 1 1/2 breaker schemes
– Requires separate class X current trans-former cores. All c.t.s must have thesame transformation ratio
Fig. 68
87BB
87S.V.
5151N
Transformerprotection
7VH83
52 52
G
Feederprotection
Feederprotection
52
G
Feederprotection
86Alarm
Load
Fig. 69
20. Low-impedance busbar protection
General hints:
– Preferably used for multiple busbarschemes where an isolator replica isnecessary
– The numerical busbar protection 7SS5provides additional breaker failure pro-tection
– C.t. transformation ratios can be differ-ent, e.g. 600/1 A in the feeders and2000/1 at the bus tie
– The protection system and the isolatorreplica is continuously self-monitored bythe 7SS5
– Feeder protection can be connected tothe same c.t. core.
5050N
Back-feed
7SS5
52
Infeed
Transformer protecton
52 52
Feederprotection
52
Bus tieprotection
BF
86
87BB
Load
Feederprotection
Isolatorreplica
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/39
Nominal power[MVA]
Time constant[s]
0.5 . . . 1.0
0.16 . . . 0.2
1.0 . . . 10
0.2 . . . 1.2
>10
1.2 . . . 720
Rated transformer power [MVA]
Time constant of inrush current
12.0
11.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
102 100 400
Peak value of inrush current
IRush^
IN^
Power System Protection
Protection coordination
Relay operating characteristics and theirsetting must be carefully coordinated inorder to achieve selectivity. The aim is ba-sically to switch-off only the faulted com-ponent and to leave the rest of the powersystem in service in order to minimize sup-ply interruptions and to guarantee stability.
Sensivity
Protection should be as sensitive as possi-ble to detect faults at the lowest possiblecurrent level.At the same time, however, it shouldremain stable under all permissible load,overload and through-fault conditions.
Phase-fault relays
The pick-up values of phase o/c relays arenormally set 30% above the maximumload current, provided that sufficient short-circuit current is available.This practice is recommmended in particu-lar for mechanical relays with reset ratiosof 0.8 to 0.85.Numerical relays have high reset ratiosnear 0.95 and allow therefore about 10%lower setting.Feeders with high transformer and/ormotor load require special consideration.
Transformer feeders
The energizing of transformers causesinrush currents that may last for seconds,depending on their size (Fig. 70).Selection of the pick-up current and as-signed time delay have to be coordinatedso that the rush current decreases belowthe relay o/c reset value before the setoperating time has elapsed.The rush current typically contains onlyabout 50% fundamental frequency compo-nent.Numerical relays that filter out harmonicsand the DC component of the rush currentcan therefore be set more sensitive. Theinrush-current peak values of Fig. 70 willbe nearly reduced to one half in this case.
Ground-fault relays
Residual-current relays enable a muchmore sensitive setting, as load currents donot have to be considered (except 4-wirecircuits with single-phase load). In solidlyand low-resistance grounded systems asetting of 10 to 20% rated load current isgenerally applied.
High-resistance grounding requires muchmore sensitive setting in the order ofsome amperes primary.The ground-fault current of motors andgenerators, for example, should be limitedto values below 10 A in order to avoid ironburning.Residual-current relays in the star pointconnection of c.t.s can in this case not beused, in particular with rated c.t. primarycurrents higher than 200 A. The pick-upvalue of the zero-sequence relay wouldin this case be in the order of the errorcurrents of the c.t.s.A special zero-sequence c.t. is thereforeused in this case as earth current sensor.The window type current transformer7XR96 is designed for a ratio of 60/1 A.The detection of 6 A primary would thenrequire a relay pick-up setting of 0.1 Asecondary.
An even more sensitive setting is appliedin isolated or Peterson-coil grounded net-works where very low earth currents occurwith single-phase-to-ground faults.Settings of 20 mA and less may then berequired depending on the minimumground-fault current.Sensitive directional ground-fault relays(integrated in the relays 7SJ512, 7SJ55and 7SA511) allow settings as low a 5 mA.
Fig. 70: Transformer inrush currents, typical data
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/40
Power System Protection
Differential relays (87)
Transformer differential relays are normallyset to pick-up values between 20 and 30%rated current. The higher value has to bechosen when the transformer is fitted witha tap changer.Restricted ground-fault relays and high-re-sistance motor/generator differential relaysare, as a rule, set to about 10% ratedcurrent.
Instantaneous o/c protection (50)
This is typically applied on the final supplyload or on any protective device with suffi-cient circuit impedance between itself andthe next downstream protective device.The setting at transformers, for example,must be chosen about 20 to 30% higherthan the maximum through-fault current.
Motor feeders
The energizing of motors causes a startingcurrent of initially 5 to 6 times rated cur-rent (locked rotor current).A typical time-current curve for an induc-tion motor is shown in Fig. 71.In the first 100 ms, a fast decaying assy-metrical inrush current appears additionally.With conventional relays it was currentpractice to set the instantaneous o/c stepfor short circuit protection 20 to 30%above the locked-rotor current with a shorttime delay of 50 to 100 ms to override theasymetrical inrush periode.Numerical relays are able to filter out theasymmetrical current component very fastso that the setting of an additional timedelay is no longer applicable.The overload protection characteristicshould follow the thermal motor character-istic as closely as possible. The adaption isto be made by setting of the pick-up valueand the thermal time constant, using thedata supplied by the motor manufacturer.Further, the locked-rotor protection timerhas to be set according to the characteris-tic motor value.
Time grading of o/c relays (51)
The selectivity of overcurrent protectionis based on time grading of the relay oper-ating characteristics. The relay closer tothe infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayedagainst the relay further away from the in-feed (downstream relay).This is shown in Fig. 73 by the example ofdefinite time o/c relays.The overshoot times takes into accountthe fact that the measuring relay continuesto operate due to its inertia, even whenthe fault current is interrupted. This may
Fig. 71: Typical motor current-time characteristics
be is high for mechanical relays (about0.1 s) and neglectable for numerical relays(20 ms).
Inverse time relays (51)
For the time grading of inverse-time relays,the same rules apply in principle as for thedefinite time relays. The time grading isfirst calculated for the maximum fault leveland then checked for lower current levels(Fig. 72).
If the same characteristic is used for allrelays, or when the upstream relay hasa steeper characteristic (e.g. very overnormal inverse), then selectivity is auto-matically fulfilled at lower currents.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time in seconds
10
High set instantaneous o/c step
Motor thermal limit curve
Permissible locked rotor time
Motor starting current
Locked rotor current
Overload protection characteristic
10000
1000
100
10
1
.1
.01
.001
Current in multplies of full-load amps
Time
0.2–0.4 seconds
51
5151
Maximum feeder fault levelCurrent
Main
Feeder
Fig. 72: Coordination of inverse-time relays
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/41
Power System Protection
* also called overtravel orcoasting time
Example 1
tTG = 0.10 + 0.15 + 0.15 = 0.40 s
Example 2
Mechanical relays: tOS = 0.15 sOil circuit breaker t52F = 0.10 sSafety margin for measuring errors,etc.: tM = 0.15
Numerical relays: tOS = 0.02 sVacuum breaker: t52F = 0.08 sSafety margin: tM = 0.10 s
tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
t51M– t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
Time grading tTG
52M
52F 52F
Operating time
0.2–0.4Time grading
51
5151
M
FF
Interruption offault current
Faultdetection
Faultinception
Circuit-breaker
Set time delay Interruption time
Overshoot*
Margin tM
t51M
t51F t52FI>
I>tOS
Fig. 73: Time grading of overcurrent-time relays
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/42
Calculation example
The feeder configuration of Fig. 74 and theassigned load and short-circuit currents aregiven.Numerical o/c relays 7SJ60 with normalinverse-time characteristic are applied.The relay operating times dependent oncurrent can be taken from the diagram orderived from the formula given in Fig. 75.The IP /IN settings shown in Fig. 74 havebeen chosen to get pick-up values safelyabove maximum load current.This current setting shall be lowest forthe relay farthest downstream. The relaysfurther upstream shall each have equal orhigher current setting.The time multiplier settings can now becalculated as follows:
Station C:
For coordination with the fuses, weconsider the fault in location F1.The short-circuit current related to13.8 kV is 523 A.This results in 7.47 for I /IP at the o/crelay in location C.
With this value and TP = 0.05we derive from Fig. 75an operating time of tA = 0.17 s
This setting was selected for the o/c relayto get a safe grading time over the fuse onthe transformer low-voltage side.The setting values for the relay at station Care therefore: Current tap: IP /IN = 0.7 Time multipler: TP = 0.05
Station B:
The relay in B has a back-up function forthe relay in C.The maximum through-fault current of1.395 A becomes effective for a fault inlocation F2.For the relay in C, we obtain an operatingtime of 0.11 s (I /IP = 19.9).We assume that no special requirementsfor short operating times exist and cantherefore choose an average time gradinginterval of 0.3 s. The operating time of therelay in B can then be calculated: tB = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s Value of IP /IN = 1395 A = 6.34
(see Fig. 74). 220 A With the operating time 0.41 s
and IP/IN = 6.34,we can now derive TP = 0.11from Fig. 75.
Power System Protection
Fig. 74
The setting values for the relay at station Bare herewith Current tap: IP /IN = 1.1 Time multiplier TP = 0.11Given these settings, we can also checkthe operating time of the relay in B for aclose-in fault in F3:The short-circuit current increases in thiscase to 2690 A (see Fig. 74). The corre-sponding I/IP value is 12.23. With this value and the set value of
TP = 0.11we obtain again derive from Fig. 75an operating time of 0.3 s.
Station A:
We add the time grading interval of0.3 s and find the desired operating timetA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s.
Following the same procedure as for therelay in station B we obtain the followingvalues for the relay in station A: Current tap: IP /IN = 1.0 Time multiplier: TP = 0.17 For the close-in fault at location F4 we
obtain an operating time of 0.48 s.
Fig. 75: Normal inverse time characteristic ofrelay 7SJ60
Example: Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
– – – – –
*) Iscc.max. = Maximum short-circuit current** Ip/IN = Relay current multiplier setting*** Iprim = Primary setting current corresponding to Ip/IN
A
B
C
D
Station
300
170
50
Max. Load[A]
I scc. max.*[A]
4500
2690
1395
523
400/5
200/5
100/5
I p/I N **CT ratio I prim***[A]
1.0
1.1
0.7
400
220
70
11.25
12.23
19.93
Fuse:160 A
515151
A F4 F3 F2
13.8 kVLoad
L.V.
7SJ607SJ607SJ60
I /I p =I scc. max.
I prim
F1
Load
Load
B C D13.8 kV/0.4 kV
1.0 MVA5.0%
I/Ip [A]
Tp [s]
Normal inverse
.
3.2
1.6
0.8
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.05
t [s]
1
2
345
10
20
304050
100
0.14
(I/Ip)0.02 – 1Tp [s]t =
82 10 20640.05
0.1
0.2
0.30.40.50
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/43
Power System Protection
I A>,t
I C>,t
I B>,t
t [s
]
t [m
in]
210 5
2
5
.01
.001
2
5
.1
2
5
1
2
5
10
2
5
100
2100 5 21000 5
I max
= 4
500
A
I scc
= 2
690
A
I scc
= 1
395
A
I –
0.4
kVm
ax=
16.
000
kA
fuse 13.8/0.4 KV1.0 MVA5.0%
VDE 160
Bus-C
Bus-B
7SJ600
7SJ600
7SJ600
Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xInTp = 0.05 – 3.2 sI>>= 0.1 – 25. xIn
Ip = 1.0 xInTp = 0.17 sI>>= ∞
Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xInTp = 0.05 – 3.2 sI>>= 0.1 – 25. xIn
Ip = 1.1 xInTp = 0.11 sI>>= ∞
Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xInTp = 0.05 – 3.2 sI>>= 0.1 – 25. xIn
Ip = 0.7 xInTp = 0.05 sI>>= ∞
IN
400/5 A
200/5 A
100/5 A
A
TR
fuse
I [A]
10 4
2 51000 10 4 10 52 5 2
13.80 kV 0.40 kV
1
HRC fuse 160 A
Setting range Setting
I>>I>, t
I>>I>, t
I>>I>, t
52
52
52
The normal way
To prove the selectivity over the wholerange of possible short-circuit currents, it isnormal practice to draw the set operatingcurves in a common diagram with doublelog scales. These diagrams can be manual-ly calculated and drawn point by point orconstructed by using templates.Today computer programs are also availa-ble for this purpose. Fig. 76 shows the re-lay coordination diagram for the exampleselected, as calculated by the Siemensprogram CUSS (computer-aided protectivegrading).
Fig. 76: O/c time grading diagram
Note:
To simplify calculations, only inverse-timecharacteristics have been used for this ex-ample. About 0.1 s shorter operating timescould have been reached for high-currentfaults by additionally applying the instanta-neous zones I>> of the 7SJ60 relays.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/44
Power System Protection
Coordination of o/c relays with fusesand low-voltage trip devices
The procedure is similar to the above de-scribed grading of o/c relays. Usually atime interval between 0.1 and 0.2 secondsis sufficient for a safe time coordination.Very and extremely inverse characteristicsare often more suitable than normal in-verse curves in this case. Fig. 77 showstypical examples.Simple consumer-utility interrupts use apower fuse on the primary side of the sup-ply transformers (Fig. 77a).In this case, the operating characteristic ofthe o/c relay at the infeed has to be coordi-nated with the fuse curve.Very inverse characteristics may be usedwith expulsion-type fuses (fuse cutouts)while extremly inverse versions adapt bet-ter to current limiting fuses.In any case, the final decision should bemade by plotting the curves in the log-logcoordination diagram.Electronic trip devices of LV breakers havelong-delay, short-delay and instantaneouszones.Numerical o/c relays with one inverse timeand two definite-time zones can be closelyadapted (Fig. 77b).
Fig. 77: Coordination of an o/c relay with an MV fuse and a low-voltage breaker trip device
Time
Current
Time
Current
0.2 seconds
Maximum fault level at MV bus
Secondarybreaker
o/c relay
0.2 seconds
Maximum fault available at HV bus
Fuse
Inverse relay
I>>
I2>, t2
I1>, t1
a)
b)
LV bus
MV
an
51
Fuse
MV bus
an
5051
LV bus
otherconsumers
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/45
XPrimary Minimum =
= XRelay Min xVTratio
CTratio
[Ohm]
Imin =XPrim.Min
X’Line [Ohm/km]
[Ohm][km]
Power System Protection
Coordination of distance relays
The reach setting of distance times musttake into account the limited relay accuracyincluding transient overreach (5% accord-ing to IEC 255-6), the c.t. error (1% forclass 5P and 3% for class 10P) and a secu-rity margin of about 5%. Further, the lineparameters are normally only calculated,not measured. This is a further source oferrors.A setting of 80–85% is therefore commonpractice: being 80% used for mechanicalrelays while 85% can be used for themore accurate numerical relays.
Fig. 78: Grading of distance zones
Fig. 79: Operating characteristic of Siemens distance relays 7SA511 and 7SA513
Where measured line or cable impedancesare available, the reach setting may also beextended to 90%. The second and thirdzones have to keep a safety margin ofabout 15 to 20% to the correspondingzones of the following lines. The shortestfollowing line has always to be considered(Fig. 78).As a general rule, the second zone shouldat least reach 20% over the next station toensure back-up for busbar faults, and thethird zone should cover the largest follow-ing line as back-up for the line protection.
Grading of zone times
The first zone normally operates unde-layed. For the grading of the time intervalsof the second and third zones, the samerules as for o/c relays apply (see Fig. 73).For the quadrilateral characteristics (relays7SA511 and 7SA513) only the reactancevalues ( X values) have to be consideredfor the reach setting. The setting of theR values should cover the line resistanceand possible arc or fault resistances. Thearc resistance can be roughly estimatedas follows:
X1A
X2A
X3A
R3AR2AR1A
X
RA
B
C
D
Typical settings of the ratio R/X are:– Short lines and cables (≤ 10 km):
R/X = 2 to 10– Medium line lengths < 25 km: R/X = 2– Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R/X = 1
Shortest feeder protectable bydistance relays
The shortest feeder that can be protectedby underreach distance zones without theneed for signaling links depends on theshortest settable relay reactance.
IArc = arc length in mIscc Min = minimum short-circuit current
Iscc Min
RArc =IArc x 2kV/m
Fig. 80
Fig. 81
B
t1
ZLA-B~
t2
t3Z3A
A C DZLB-C ZLC-D
Z2A
Z1A
Z2B
Z1B Z1C
Load LoadLoad
Z1A = 0.85 • ZLA-B
Z2A = 0.85 • (ZLA-B+Z1B)
Z3A = 0.85 • (ZLA-B+Z2B)
Operatingtime
The shortest setting of the numericalSiemens relays is 0.05 ohms for 1 Arelays, corresponding to 0.01 ohms for5 A relays.This allows distance protection of distribu-tion cables down to the range of some500 meters.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/46
Local and Remote Control
Introduction
State-of-the-art
Modern protection and substation controluses microprocessor technology and serialcommunication to upgrade substation op-eration, to enhance reliability and to reduceoverall life cycle cost.The traditional conglomeration of often to-tally different devices such as relays, me-ters, switchboards and RTUs are replacedby a few multifunctional, intelligent devicesof uniform design. And, instead of exten-sive parallel wiring, only a few serial linksare used (Fig. 82 and 83).Control of the substation takes place withmenu-guided procedures at a central VDUwork place.
Fig. 82
F F
Traditional protection and substation control
Remote terminal unit
To network control center
Alarm annunciationand local control
Marshalling rack
Approx. 20 to40 cores per bay
Mimic displayPushbuttonsPosition indicatorsInterposing relaysLocal/remote switch
Control
Indication lampsMeasuring instrumentsTransducersTerminal blocksMiniature circuit breakers
Monitoring
e.g.Overcurrent relaysGround-fault relaysReclosing relaysAuxiliary relays
Protection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/47
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 83
* The compact central control unit can be located in a separate cubicle ordirectly in the low-voltage compartment of the switchgear
** Protection relays are serially connected to the control I/O units
Coordinated protection and substation control system LSA 678
Keyboard
Printer (option)
VDU
System control center
Compact centralcontrol unitincluding RTU functions
shown withopen door
**
Protectionrelay
ControlI/O unit
Low-voltage compartmentof the medium-voltageswitchgear
2 fiber-optic coresper feeder
Protectionrelay
ControlI/O unit
*
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/48
Local and Remote Control
Technical proceedings
The first coordinated protection and sub-station control system LSA 678 was com-missioned in 1986 and continuously furtherdeveloped in the following years. It nowfeatures the following main characteristics: Coordinated system structure Optical communication network
(star configuration) High processing power
(32-bit MP technology) Standardized serial interfaces and com-
munication protocols Uniform design of all components Complete range of protection and con-
trol functions Comprehensive user-software support
packages.Currently (1996) over 400 systems are insuccessful operation at all voltage levelsup to 400 kV.
System structureand scope of functions
The LSA system performs supervisorylocal control, switchgear interlocking, bayand station protection, synchronizing,transformer tap-changer control, switchingsequence programs, event and fault re-cording, telecontrol, etc.It consists of the independent subsystems(Fig. 84): Supervisory control 6MB51/52 Protection 7S**5Normally, switchgear interlocking is inte-grated as software program in the supervi-sory control system. Local bay control isimplemented in the bay-dedicated I/O con-trol units.For complex substations with multiplebusbars, however, these functions areoften provided as an independent back-upsystem: Interlocking and local control 8TKCommunication and data exchange be-tween components is performed via serialdata links. Optical-fiber connections arepreferred to ensure EMI compatibility.The cummunication structure of the con-trol system is designed as a hierarchicalstar configuration. It operates in the pollingprocedure with a fixed assignment of themaster function to the central unit. Thedata transmission mode is asynchronous,half-duplex, protected with a hammingdistance d = 4, and complies with theIEC Standard 870-5.Each subsystem can operate fully in stand-alone mode even in the event of loss ofcommunication.
Fig. 84: Distributed structure of coordinated protection and control LSA
Data sharing between protection and con-trol via the so-called informative interfaceaccording to IEC 870-5-103 is restricted tononcritical measuring or event recordingfunctions. The protection units, for exam-ple, deliver RMS values of currents, voltag-es, power, instantaneous values for oscillo-graphic fault recording and time-taggedoperating events for fault reporting.Besides the high data transmission securi-ty, the system also provides self-monitor-ing of individual components.The distributed structure also makes theLSA system attractive for refurbishmentprograms or extensions, where conven-tional secondary equipment has to be inte-grated.It is general practice to provide protectionof HV and EHV substations as separate,self-contained relays that can communi-cate with the control system, but functionotherwise completely independently.At lower voltage levels, however, higherintegrated solutions are accepted for costreasons.For distribution-type substations combinedprotection and control feeder units (e.g.7SJ531) are available which integrate allnecessary functions of one feeder, includ-ing: local feeder control, overcurrent andoverload protection, breaker-failure protec-tion and metering.
Supervisory control
The substation is monitored and controlledfrom the operator‘s desk (Fig. 84). TheVDU shows overview diagrams and com-plete details of the switchgear on a colordisplay. Current/actual measurands can becalled up on request. All event and alarmannunciations are selectable in form oflists. The control procedure is menu-guidedand uses either a mouse, or an easy tohandle keyboard with a minimum numberof function and cursor keys. The operationis therefore extremely user-friendly anddoes not require special training of the op-erating staff.
Automatic functions
Apart from the provided switchgear inter-locking, a series of automatic functionsensure an effective and secure systemoperation.Automatic switching sequences, such aschanging of busbars, can be user-pro-grammed and started locally or remotely.Furthermore, two important automationfunctions have been integrated into thesystem software and are available asoptions: synchronizing and transformertap-changer control.
VDU
System control center
Supervisory control system 6 MB
”Master unit“Stationlevel
Time signal
Interlockingsystem 8TK
Protection 7SSupervisory controlsystem 6 MB
”Bay unit“ ”Bay protection“”I/O unit“
Switchyard
Baylevel
8TKmasterunit
1…
ParallelSerial
…n
LSAPROCESSOperator’s
desk
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/49
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 85: Digital substation control, operator desk. Control of a 400 kV substation (double control unit)
Both functions run on the relevant baylevel units, controlled by the central masterunit. The performance of these functionscorresponds to modern digital stand-aloneunits. The advantages of the integratedsolution, however, are: External auxiliary relay circuits for the
selection of measurands are no longerapplicable.
Adaptive parameter setting becomespossible from local or remote controllevels.
High processing powerThe processing power of the central con-trol unit has been enormously increasedby the introduction of the 32-bit MP tech-nology. This permits, on the one hand, amore compact design and provides, on theother hand, sufficient processing reservefor the future introduction of additionalfunctions.
Static memoriesA decisive step in direction of user friend-liness has been made with the implemen-tation of large nonvolatile Flash EPROMmemories. The system parameters can beloaded via a serial port at the front panel ofthe central unit. Bay level parameters areautomatically downloaded.A change of EPROM hardware is no longernecessary when parameters have to bechanged or added for the implementationof new functions or the extension of sub-stations.
Analog value processingThe further processing of raw measureddata, such as the calculation of maximum,minimum or effective values, with as-signed real time is contained as standardfunction.A Flash EPROM mass storage canoptionally be provided to record measuredvalues, fault events or fault oscillograms.The stored information can be read outlocally or remotely by a telephone modemconnection. Further data evaluation(harmonic analysis, etc.) is then possibleby means of a special PC program (LSAPROCESS).
Compact designA real reduction in space and cost hasbeen achieved by the creation of compactI/O and central units. The processing hard-ware is enclosed in metallic cases withEMI-proof terminals and optical serial inter-faces. All units are type tested accordingto the latest IEC standards.In this way, the complete control and pro-tection equipment can be directly integrat-ed into the MV or HV switchgear(Fig. 86, 87).
Switchgear interlockingand local control
In simple distribution stations, the inter-locking can be part of the control software.For larger stations with a multiple busbarlayout, in particular on the EVH level,an independent, digital interlocking system(8TK) with integrated local control ele-ments is applied in many cases.It ensures fail-safe switching and person-nel safety down to the lowest control lev-el, i.e. directly at the switch panel, evenwhen supervisory control is not available.The interlocking system consists of distrib-uted, feeder-dedicated MP units and onecentral unit which is normally assigned tothe bus-coupler bay. The information ex-change is performed via serial links in theswitchyard.The front panel of each unit contains con-trol elements with switch position indica-tors for local (site) control. This system hasalso been frequently applied as a stand-alone function in substations up to 800 kV.
Fig. 86: Switchgear-integrated control and protection Fig. 87: View of a low-voltage compartment
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/50
Local and Remote Control
Numerical protection
A complete range of fully digital (numeri-cal) relays is available (see chapter PowerSystem Protection 6/8 and following pag-es).They all have a uniform design compatiblewith the control units (Fig. 88). This appliesto the hardware as well as to the softwarestructure and the operating procedures.Metallic standard cases, IEC 255-tested,with EMI-secure terminals, ensure an un-complicated application comparable to me-chanical relays. The LCD display and set-ting keypad are integrated. Additionally aRS232 port is provided on the front panelfor the connection of a PC as an MMI.The rear terminal block contains an optical-fiber interface for the data communicationwith the LSA control system.The relays are normally linked directly tothe relevant I/O control unit at the baylevel. Connection to the central controlsystem unit is, however, also possible.The numerical relays are multifunctionaland contain, for example, all the necessaryprotection functions for a line feeder ortransformer. At higher voltage levels, addi-tional, main or back-up relays are applied.The new relay generation has extendedmemory capacity for fault recording (5 sec-onds, 1 ms resolution) and nonvolatilememory for important fault informations.The serial link between protection and con-trol uses standard protocols in accordancewith IEC 870-5-103.In this way, supplier compatibility andinterchangeability of protection devices isachieved.
Communication with control centres
The LSA system uses protocols that com-ply with IEC Standard 870-5. In many cas-es an adaption to existing proprietary pro-tocols is necessary, when the systemcontrol center has been supplied by anoth-er manufacturer.For this purpose, a larger number of proto-col converters have been developed andan extensive protocol library now exists.Further protocol converters can be provid-ed on demand.By adding software that runs on the com-munication processor of the ERTU, thedifferent protocol converters can be imple-mented.
Fig. 89: Enhanced remote terminal unit 6MB55, application options
Fig. 88: Numerical protection, standard design
Enhanced remote terminal units
For substations with existing remoteterminal units, an enhancement towardsthe LSA performance level is feasible.The telecontrol system 6MB55, basedupon LSA components, replaces outdatedremote terminal units (Fig. 89).Conventional RTUs are connected to theswitchgear via interposing relays andmeasuring transducers with a marshallingrack as a common interface.The centralized version of the LSA controlsystem (SINAUT-LSA) can be directly con-nected to this interface. The total parallelwiring can be left in its original state.In this manner, it is possible to enhancethe RTU function and to include substationmonitoring and control with the same per-formance level as the decentralized LSAsystem.Upgrading of existing substations can thusbe achieved with a minimum of cost andeffort.
VFModem
Telephone networkRemote control
VF Modem
Marshalling rackPrinter Operator
terminal
Interposing relays,transducers
Existingswitchgear Extended switchgear
ERTU
Systemcontrolcenter
Substationlevel
Bay level
Managementterminal
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/51
Local and Remote Control
Engineering system LSATOOLS
In parallel with the upgrading of the centralunit hardware, a novel parameterizing anddocumentation system LSATOOLS hasbeen developed. It uses modern graphicalpresentation management methods,including pull-down menus and multiwin-dowing.LSATOOLS enables the complete configu-ration, parameterization and documentationof the system to be carried out on AT-com-patible PC workstations. It ensures that aconsistent database for the project is main-tained from design to commissioning(Fig. 90).The system parameters, generated byLSATOOLS, can be serially loaded intothe Flash EPROM memory of the centralcontrol unit and will then be automaticallydownloaded to the bay level devices(Fig. 91).Care has been taken to ensure that chang-es and expansions are possible withoutrequiring a complete retest of the system.Supplier independent system modificationsand extensions are therefore possible.
Fig. 90: Engineering system LSATOOLS
Fig. 91: PC-aided parameterization of LSA 678 with LSATOOLS and downloading of parameters
Parameterizing Documentation
Single-linediagram
Circuitdiagram
Deviceconfiguration
Parameters Function,processingdiagram
PC input
Engineering system
CAD systemSIGRAPH-ET
Downloading of parametersduring startup
LSATOOLSparameterization station
Documentation
Loading ofparameters
Network control center
Master unit
PC inputs
Input/output units
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/52
Substation control system6MB51/52
In the 6MB51/52 substation control sys-tem the functions are distributed betweenstation and bay control levels.The input/output devices have thefollowing tasks on the bay control level: Signal acquisition Acquisition of measured and count
values Monitoring the execution of master
control unit commands, e.g. for– Control of switchgear– Transformer step changing– Setting of Peterson coilsData processing, such as– Limit monitoring of measured values,
including initiation of responses tolimit violations
– Calculation of derived operationalmeasured values (e.g. P, Q, cos ϕ )and/or operational parameters(for example r.m.s. values, slave point-er) from the logged instantaneous val-ues for current and voltage
– Deciding how much information totransmit to the control master unit ineach polling cycle
– Generation of group signals andderiving of signals internally,e.g. from self-monitoring
Switchgear-related automation tasks– Switching sequences in response to
switching commands or to processevents
– Transformer control– Synchronization
Transmission of data from numerical pro-tection relays to the control master unit
Local display of status and measuredvalues.
Bay control units
A complete range of devices is available tomeet the particular demands concerningprocess signal/capacity and functionality(see Fig. 98). All units are built-up in mod-ern 7XP20 housings and can be directlyinstalled in the low-voltage compartmentsof the switchgear or in separate cubicles.The smallest device 6MB525 is designedas a low-cost version and contains onlycontrol functions. It is provided with anRS485-wired serial interface and is normal-ly used for simple distribution-typesubstations together with overcurrent/over-load relays 7SJ60 and digital measuringtransducers 7KG60. (see application exam-ple, Fig. 118).
Fig. 92: LSA 678 protection and substation control system with the 6MB substation control system
Local and Remote Control
All further bay control devices contain anoptic serial interface for connection to thecentral control unit, and an RS232 serialinterface on the front side for connectionof an operating PC. Further, integral dis-plays for measuring values and LEDs forstatus indication are provided.
Minicompact device 6MB525
It contains signal inputs and command out-puts for substation control. Analog measur-ing inputs, where needed, have to be pro-vided by additional measuring transducers,type 7KG60. Alternatively, the measuringfunctions of the numerical protection re-lays can be used. These can also providelocal indication of measuring values.The local bay control is intended to beperformed by the existing, switchgear inte-grated mechanical control.
Compact devices 6MB522/523
They provide a higher number of signalinputs and outputs, and contain additionalmeasuring functions. One measuring valueor other preprocessed information can bedisplayed on the 2-row, 16-character alpha-numeric display.For local bay control an additional smallmimic board with control elements (device6MB531) can be added, or, where applica-ble, the integrated bay control panel of the8TK interlocking system can be used.
Master control unit 6MB51
Switchgear interlockmaster unit 8TK2
Station protection7SS5
Stationlevel
Serial interface
Station control centerHigher-levelcontrol system
Central evaluationstation (PC)
Telecontrol channel
Normal time
Telephone channel
1 n
Baylevel
Switchgear interlockbay unit 8TK1
1 n
Bay control unit6MB52
Protection relays7S/7U
Substation
Parallel interface
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/53
Fig. 93: MinicompactI/O device 6MB525
Fig. 98: Standardized input/output devices with serial interfaces
Local and Remote Control
Compact devices with bay control 6MB524
This bay control device can be delivered infour versions dependent on the peripheralrequirements.It provides all control and measuring func-tions needed for switchgear bays up to theEHV level.Switching status, measuring values andalarms are indicated on a large alpha-numeric display. Measuring instrumentscan therefore be widely dispensed with.Bay control is, in this case, performed bythe additionally integrated keypad.
Combined protectionand control device 7SJ531
This fully integrated device provides all pro-tection, control and measuring functionsfor simple line/cable, motor or transformerfeeders. Protection is limited to overcur-rent, autoreclosure, overload, ground-faultand breaker-failure protection.Only one unit is needed per feeder. Space,assembly and wiring costs can thereforebe considerably reduced.Measured value display and local bay con-trol is performed in the same way as withthe bay control unit 6MB524 with a largedisplay and a keypad.
Compact*
***
Minicompact* 6MB525 2 – 6 – – – Double commands and alarmsalso as ”single“ configurable
Type Components
6MB523
6MB522-06MB522-16MB522-2
Design CommandsDouble Single
Signal inputsDouble Single
Analog inputsDirectconnectionto transformer
Connection tomeasuretransducer
1
366
–
122
3
366
5
51010
1 x I
2 x U, 1 x I3 x U, 3 x I4 x U, 2 x I
–
2–2
for simple switchgear cubicleswith one switching device
with P, Q calculation
6MB5240-0-1-2-3
468
20
1125
8121640
––––
2 x U, 1 x I3 x U, 3 x I3 x U, 3 x I9 x U, 6 x I
1225
Double commands and alarmsalso usable as ”single“
Compact withlocal (bay) controland large display
7SJ531 1 – – – 3 x U, 3 x I Double commands and alarmsalso usable as ”single“
Combined controland protectiondevice withlocal (bay) control
* Local (bay) control has to be provided separately (device 6MB531). In distribution-type substations, mechanical local control of the switchchgear is normally sufficient.
Fig. 95: Compact I/O device 6MB522Fig. 94: CompactI/O device 6MB523
Fig. 96: Compact I/O unit withlocal (bay) control 6MB5240-0
Fig. 97: Combined protection andcontrol device 7SJ531
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/54
The 6MB51 control master unit
This unit lies at the heart of the 6MB sub-station control system and, with its 32-bit80486 processor, satisfies the most de-manding requirements.It is a compact unit inside the standardhousing used in Siemens substation sec-ondary equipment.The 6MB51 control master unit managesthe input/output devices, controls the inter-action between the control centers in thesubstation and the higher control levels,processes information for the entire stationand archives data in accordance with theparameterized requirements of the user.Specifically, the control master unit coordi-nates communication to the higher network control levels to the substation control center to an analysis center located either in
the station or connected remotely viaa telephone line using a modem
to the input/output devices and/or thenumerical protection units (bay controlunits)
to lower-level stations.This is for the purpose of controlling andmonitoring activities at the substation andnetwork control levels as well as providingdata for use by engineers.Other tasks of the control master unit are Event logging with a time resolution of
1 or 10 ms Archiving of events, variations in meas-
ured values and fault records on massstorage units
Time synchronization using radio clock(GPS, DCF77 or Rugby) or using a signalfrom a higher-level control station
Automation tasks affecting more thanone bay:– Parallel control of transformers– Synchronizing
(measured value selection)– Switching sequences– Busbar voltage simulation– Switchgear interlocking
Parameter management to meet therelevant requirements specification
Self-monitoring and system monitoring.
System monitoring primarily involves eval-uating the self-monitoring results of thedevices and serial interfaces which arecoordinated by the control master unit.In particular, important EHV substations,some users require redundancy of the con-trol master unit. In these cases, two con-trol master units are connected to eachother via a serial interface. System moni-toring then consists of mutual error recog-nition and, if necessary, automatic transferof control of the process to the redundantcontrol master unit.
The SINAUT LSA station control center
The standard equipment of the station con-trol centre includes The function keyboard with eight func-
tion keys and four cursor control keys or(alternatively) a full PC keyboard option-ally with a mouse
The PC with color monitor andLSACONTROL software package fordisplaying– A station overview– Detailed plant displays– Event and alarm lists– Alarm information
A printer for the output of reports.Various operating options are clearly dis-played in the eight menu fields on thecolor monitor. These correspond to theeight function keys.
Fig. 100: SINAUT LSA PC station control center withfunction keyboard
Local and Remote Control
The operator can access the required in-formation or initiate the desired operationquickly and safely with just a few keystrokes.The station control center can take theform of A standard PC with selectable monitor
size An industry-standard PC (e.g. built into
a switchgear cubicle top unit) or as A laptop (also portable).It can be operated at a distance from thestation.Two station control centers can be in-stalled if required by the user.
Fig. 99: Compact control master unit 6MB513 for amaximum of 32 serial interfaces to bay control units.Extended version 6MB514 for 64 serial interfaces tobay control units (double width) additionally avail-able
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/55
Local control functions
Tasks of local control
The Siemens 6MB station control systemperforms at first all tasks for conventionallocal control: Local control of and checkback indica-
tions from the switching devices Acquisition, display and registration of
analog values Acquisition, display and registration of
alarms and fault indications in real time Metered-value acquisition and pro-
cessing Fault recording Transformer open-loop and closed-loop
control Synchronizing/parallelingUnlike the previous conventional technolo-gy with completely centralized processingof these tasks and complicated parallelwiring and marshalling of process data, thenew microprocessor-controlled technologybenefits from the distribution of tasks tothe central control master unit and the dis-tributed input/output units and of the serialdata exchange in telegrams between theseunits.
Tasks of the input/output unit
The input/output unit performs the follow-ing bay-related tasks: Fast distributed acquisition of process
data such as indications, analog valuesand switching device positions and theirpreprocessing and buffering
Command output and monitoring Assignment of the time for each event
(time tag) Isolation from the switchyard via heavy-
duty relay contacts Run-time monitoring Limit value supervision Paralleling.Analog values can be input to the bay con-trol unit both via analog value transducersand by direct connection to c.t.s and v.t.s.The required r.m.s. values for current andvoltage are digitized and calculated as wellas active and reactive power. The advan-tage is that separate measuring cores andanalog value transducers for operationalmeasurement are eliminated.
Control master unit
The process data acquired in the input/out-put unit are scanned cyclically by the con-trol master unit. The control master unitperforms further information processingof all data called from the feeders for sta-tion tasks ”local control and telecontrol“with the associated event logging and faultrecording and therefore replaces the com-plicated conventional marshalling distribu-tor racks. Marshalling is implemented un-der microprocessor control in the controlmaster unit.
Serial protection interface
All protection indications and fault record-ing data acquired for fault analysis in pro-tection relays are called by the controlmaster unit via the serial interface.These include instantaneous values forfault current and voltage of all phases andearth, sampled with a resolution of 1 ms,as well as distance-to-fault location.
Serial data exchange
The serial data exchange between the baycomponents and the control master unithas important economic advantages. Thisis especially true when one considers thepreparation and forwarding of the informa-tion via serial data link to the control centercommunication module which is a compo-nent of the control master unit. This mod-ule is a single, system-compatible micro-processor module on which both thetelecontrol tasks and telegram adaptationto telegram structures of existing remotetransmission systems are implemented.This makes the station control independentof the telecontrol technology and the asso-ciated telegram structure used in the net-work control center at a higher level of thehierarchy.
Station control center
The peripheral devices for operating andvisualization (station control center) arealso connected to the control master unit.The following devices are part of the sta-tion control center: A color VDU with a function keyboard
or mouse for display, control, event andalarm indication,
A printer for on-line logging (event list), A mass storage.
VDU with function keyboard
The display is output via the VDU. To sim-plify operation, a function keyboard is nor-mally used instead of an alphanumeric key-board with only eight function keys andfive keys for cursor positioning. Alternative-ly, operation with the mouse can be sup-plied. Handling is simplified as ”user guid-ance“ is used. Note fields in the lowerportion of the screen are assigned to eightfunction keys. These contain a text indicat-ing what is executed or selected with thekey. In this way, various detailed diagramsand lists can be selected. The contents ofthe diagrams and lists can be parameter-ized, i.e. they can be altered subsequently.
Fig. 101: Fiber-optic connectionson the control master unit
Local and Remote Control
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/56
Switchyard overview diagram
A switchyard single-line diagram can beconfigured to show an overview of thesubstation. This diagram is used to givethe operator a quick overview of the entireswitchyard status and shows, for example,which feeders are connected or discon-nected. Current and other analog valuescan also be displayed.Information about raised or cleared opera-tional and alarm indications are also dis-played along the top edge of the screen.It is not possible to perform control actionsfrom the switchyard overview. If the opera-tor wants to switch a device, he has toselect a detailed diagram, say ”110 kVdetailed diagram“. If the appropriate func-tion key is pressed, the 110 kV detaileddiagram (Fig. 103) appears. This displayshows the switching state of all switchingdevices of the feeders.
Function field control
In the menu of the function fields, it is pos-sible, for example, to select between con-trol switching devices and tap changing.By pressing key “Control“, the yellow sig-nal of the cursor control jumps to the firstswitching device in the top left-hand cor-ner of the screen. At the same time, newfunctions are assigned to the fields alongthe bottom edge of the screen, e.g. ON orOFF. The cursor is now positioned on theswitching device to be switched.When the function key for the requiredposition of a switchig device is pressed,e.g. OFF, the switching device blinks in theswitch position to which it is to move (con-trol acknowledgement switch principle). Atthis point it is still possible to check wheth-er the selected switching command is real-ly to be executed. The actual command isoutput using another key, the ”commandoutput“ key. If the command is found tobe safe after a check has been made forviolations of interlock conditions, theswitching device in question is operated.In the case where a mouse is available,the appropriate device is selected by theusual mouse operation.Once the switching command has beenexecuted and a checkback signal has beenreceived, the blinking symbol changes tothe new actual state on the VDU.In this way, switching operations can beperformed very simply and absolutely with-out error. If commands violate the interlockconditions or if the switch position is notadopted by a switching device, for exam-ple, because of a drive fault, the relevantfault indications or notes are displayed onthe screen.
Event list
All events are logged in chronological or-der. The event list can be displayed on theVDU whenever called or printed out ona printer or stored on a mass-storage me-dium. Fig. 104 shows a section of thisevent list as it appears on the VDU.
Example event list (Fig. 104)
The date can be seen in the left-hand areaand the events are shown in order of prior-ity. Switching commands and fault indi-cations are displayed with a precision of upto 1 ms and events with high priority andprotection indications after a fault-detec-tion are shown with millisecond resolution.A command that is accepted by the controlsystem is also displayed. This can be seenby the index ”+“ of the command (OP),otherwise ”OP–“ would appear.If the switchgear device itself does notexecute the command, ”FB–“ (checkbacknegative) indicates this. ”FB+“ resultsafter successful command execution. Thetexts chosen are suggestions and can beparameterized differently.The event list shows that a protectionfault-detection (general start GS) has oc-curred with all the associated details. Thereal time is shown in the left-hand columnand the relative time with millisecond pre-cision in the right-hand column, permittingclear and fast fault analysis. The fault loca-tion, 17 km in this case, is also displayed.The lower section of the event list showsexamples of raised (RAI) and cleared (CLE)alarm indications, such as ”voltage trans-former miniature-circuit-breaker tripped“.This fault has been remedied as can beseen from the corresponding cleared indi-cation. The letter S in the top line, calledthe indication bar, indicates that a fault indi-cation has been received that is stored ina separate ”warning list“.
Example alarm list (Fig. 105)
When the alarm list is selected, it is dis-played on the VDU. In this danger alarmconcept a distinction is made betweencleared and raised and between acknowl-edged and unacknowledged indications.Raised indications are shown in red,cleared indications are green (similar tothe fast/slow blinking lamp principle).The letter Q is placed in front of an indica-tion that has not yet been acknowledged.Indications that are raised and cleared andacknowledged are displayed in white inthe list.This system with representation in thealarm list therefore supersedes dangeralarm equipment with two-frequency blink-ing lamps traditionally used with conven-tional equipment.As stated above, all events can also becontinuously logged in chronological orderon the associated printer, too. The appear-ance of this event list is identical to that onthe VDU.
Mass storage
It is also possible to store historic faultdata, i.e. fault recording data and events onmass-storage medium.It can accept data from the control masterunits and stores it on Flash EPROMs. Thisstatic memory is completely maintenance-free when compared to floppy or hard discsystems. 8Mbyte of recorded data can bestored. The locally or remotely readablememory permits evaluation of the data us-ing a PC. This personal computer can beset up separately from the control equip-ment, e.g. in an office. Communicationthen takes place via a telephone-modemconnection.In addition to fault recording data, opera-tional data, such as load-monitoring values(current, voltage, power, etc.) and eventscan be stored.
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 102: Compact I/O unit with local (bay) control, extended version 6MB5240-3
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/57
Fig. 103: 6MB substation control, example: detailed diagram of a110 kV switchgear on the VDU
Fig. 104: 6MB substation control, example: event list on the VDU
Fig. 105: 6MB substation control, example: alarm list on the VDU Fig. 106: 6MB substation control system, example: fault recording
Local and Remote Control
Example fault recording (Fig. 106)
After a fault, the millisecond-precision val-ues for the phase currents and voltagesand the ground current and ground voltageare buffered in the feeder protection.These values are called from the numericalfeeder protection by the control masterunit and can be output as curves with theprogram OSCGRA (Fig. 106).The time marking 0 indicates the time offault detection, i.e. the relay general start(GS). Approx. 5 ms before the generalstart, a three-phase fault to ground oc-curred, which can be seen by the rise inphase currents and the ground current.12 ms after the general start, the circuitbreaker was tripped (OFF) and after further80 ms, the fault was cleared.
After approx. 120 ms the protection reset.Voltage recovery after disconnection wasrecorded up to 600 ms after the generalstart.This format permits quick and clear analy-sis of a fault. The correct operation of theprotection and the circuit breaker can beseen in the fault recording (Fig. 106).The high-voltage feeder protection present-ly includes a time range of at least 5 sec-onds for the fault recording.The important point is that this fault re-cording is possible in all feeders that areequipped with the microprocessor-control-led protection having a serial interfaceaccording to IEC 870-5-103.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/58
Switchgear interlocking system
Switchgear interlocking bay unit
The Siemens 8TK switchgear interlockingis used in multiple busbar switchyards withpower-operated switching devices.For each switching bay, the switchgear in-terlocking bay unit performs a combinationof local control and bay-internal interlock-ing. Fig. 108 shows the bay control unitwith integrated local control mimic pad andcontrol keys.
Switchgear interlocking central unit
A switchgear interlocking central unit isavailable for cross-bay switchyard interlock-ing. It is usually assigned to the bus tie ofthe multiple busbar system. The switch-gear interlocking central unit communicateswith the feeder units via separate shieldedfour-wire serial data lines separate fromother control components.
Serial connection of the switchgearinterlocking units
The switchgear interlocking feeder unitsare connected to the switchgear interlock-ing central unit in a star configuration viathe serial connections. The advantages ofthis star configuration are: Considerably reduced wiring for switch-
yard interlocking Higher availability Monitoring of the serial data exchange Simple expansion Self-monitoring of the switchgear inter-
locking units, the switchyard connectionand the interlock conditions.
Fig. 109 shows the equipment of a switch-yard with a switchgear interlocking centralunit and the associated switchgear inter-locking bay units.
Fig. 107: Function overview of the 8TK switchgear interlocking system
Fig. 108: Switchgear interlocking bay unit with local (bay) control and indication
Local and Remote Control
SCC bay unit SCC bay unitSCC bay unit
Interlockingmaster unit
Interlockingbay unit
Furtherbayunits
Furtherbayunits
Substation control (SSC)
Parallel wiring Serial connection
Interlockingbay unit
OF OF
Shielded cables Shielded cables
OF
Optical fibers
Switchgear
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/59
Use and application
The switchgear interlocking system can beused both as an autonomous system andas a component of the overall coordinatedprotection and substation control system.It can therefore replace the traditional hard-wired switchgear interlocking devices usedso far with decisive added advantages.In both applications, the switchgear inter-locking system is always the back-up con-trol system in the lowest control level, i.e.in the immediate vicinity of the switchyard.This means that safe operation of theswitchyard is ensured in the event of fail-ure of a higher-level control system takingboth the bay-internal interlocking and theoverall switchgear interlocking into ac-count.Moreover, even in the event of faults inone bay, the rest of the switchyard canalso be operated subject to the switchyardinterlocking conditions and the last switch-ing device positions of the defective bay.This ensures that the device where thefault was detected does not perform mal-functions or maloperations.The defective bay can in an emergency stillbe operated authorized personnel using akeyswitch. This is even possible if thepower supply module has failed in a bay.In accordance with DIN VDE 101, Section4.4 (safe local operation) and DIN 31005(”The interlock acts by blocking or releas-ing in the event of element initiation oncondition that it is only possible to changebetween blocking and releasing if all otherelements are in their defined initial posi-tions.“), the switchgear interlocking hasbeen consistently matched to the require-ments of the switchgear. The interlocks donot have a gap anywhere and deserve thedesignation ”switchgear interlocking“.The switchgear interlocking was the firstsupplied subsystem of coordinated substa-tion control and protection. Extensive testshave been run with the switchgear inter-locking equipment both in the laboratoryand in high-voltage and extra-high-voltageswitchyards including the NEMP* test.These tests for dielectric strength andespecially for electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) have shown that the new micro-processor-controlled technology can evenbe used in the immediate vicinity of extra-high-voltage switchgears.
Fig. 109: 8TK switchgear interlocking system in a high-voltage switchyard with triple busbar system
Local and Remote Control
*Nuclear Electrical Magnetic Pulse
Q 15,25, 35
Q 10,20, 30
Q 11,21, 31
Q 1,2, 3
Q51
Q0 Q52
Q75Q7
Q 1,2, 3
Q0
Q6
Q 1,2, 3
Q0
Q9
Q7
Central unit for a maximumof 14 switching devicesfor a bus tie/bus coupler
Large bay unit for amaximum of 14 switchingdevices
Station Powersupply
Small bay unitfor a maximum of6 switching devices
Small bay unitfor a maximum of6 switching devices
Serial data-transmission line
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/60
Application examples
The flexible use of the components of theCoordinated Protection and SubstationControl System LSA 678 is demonstratedin the following for some typical applica-tion examples.
Application in high-voltage substationswith relay kiosks
Fig. 110 shows the arrangement of thelocal components. Each two bays (line ortransformer) are assigned to one kiosk.Each bay has at least one input/output unitfor control (bay control unit) and one pro-tection unit. In extra-high-voltage, the pro-tection is normally doubled (main- andback-up protection).For important substations an independentswitchgear interlocking system is addition-ally recommended. It also provides inte-grated local (bay) control functions withcontrol switches and a small mimic padthat displays isolator and circuit breakerpositions.In this way, safe interlocked switching iseven possible when the main control sys-tem has failed.The protection relays are serially connect-ed to the bay control unit by optical-fiberlinks.
SIL(B)FPRIOU
FPRIOU
FPRIOU
FPRIOU
CSM withCCC and MS
VDU
Key:
CSMCCCMSVDU
FPRSIL(B)SIL(M)IOU
SIL(B) SIL(B) SIL(M)
Modem
Bay 1 2 n Bus coupler
Relaykiosks
To the networkcontrol center
To the operationsand maintenanceoffice
Controlbuilding
Parallel
Serial
Control system master unitControl center couplingMass storageVisual display unit
Feeder protection relaysSwitchgear interlocking bay unitSwitchgear interlocking master unitControl input/output unit
Fig. 110: Application example of outdoor HV or EHV substations with relay kiosks
Local and Remote Control
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/61
Fig. 111: System concept with double central control
Local and Remote Control
• • • • • • • • • • • •
Control systemmaster unit 1with massstorage 1
Network control center
Control systemmaster unit 2with massstorage 2
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • • • • •
Serial
Switchover andmonitoring*
Localcontrollevel
Printer
Control/annunciation
Controlcentercoupling
Control/annunciation
Controlcentercoupling
Baycontrol level
Protec-tion relay
Controlinput/outputunit
Switch-gearinter-locking
Protec-tion relay
Controlinput/outputunit
Switch-gearinter-locking
SwitchgearFeeder 1 Feeder n
Parallel
Printer
*only principle shown
In extremely important substations, mainlyextra-high-voltage, there exists a doublingphilosophy. In these substations, the feed-er protection, the DC supply, the operatingcoils and the telecontrol interface are dou-bled. In such cases, the station control sys-tem with its serial connections, and themaster unit with the control center cou-pling can also be doubled.Both master units are brought up-to-datein signal direction. The operation manage-ment can be switched over between thetwo master units (Fig. 111).
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/62
Application in indoor high-voltagesubstations
The following example (Fig. 112) shows anindoor high-voltage switchgear. All decen-tralized control system components, suchas input/output unit, feeder protection andswitchgear interlocking system are alsogrouped per bay and installed close to theswitchgear. They are connected to the con-trol system master unit in the same wayas described in the outdoor version viafiber-optic cables.
Application in medium voltagesubstations
The same basic arrangement is also appli-cable to medium-voltage (distribution-type)substations (Fig. 113 and 114).The feeder protection and the compact in-put/output units are, however, preferablyinstalled in the low-voltage compartmentof the feeders (Fig. 113) to save costs.There is now a trend to apply combinedcontrol and protection units. The relay7SJ531, for example, provides protection,metering (current display) and has an inte-grated bay control with mimic and LCDpad. Thus, only one device is needed percable, motor or O.H. line feeder.
Fig. 112: Application example of indoor substations with switchgear interlocking system
Fig. 113: Protection and substation control system LSA 678 for a distribution-type substation
Key:
CSM
VDUFPR
SIL(B)SIL(M)IOU
VDU
SIL(M)FPRIOUCSM
Modem
To the net-work controlcenter
To the office
Parallel Serial
Control system master with controlcenter coupling and mass storageMonitorFeeder protection relays
Switchgear interlocking bay unitSwitchgear interlocking master unitControl input/output unit
Control room Switchgear room
SIL(B)
FPR
IOU
FPR
IOU
Controlandpro-tectioncubicles
Switchgear Buscoupler
SIL(B)
bay 1 bay 2 …
Network controlcenter
Operation place
Feeder protection unit(e.g. 7UT51 transformer protection)
Feeder I/O contol unit (e.g. 6MB524)
Combined control andprotection feeder unit 7SJ531
Miniature I/O unit 6MB525
Feeder protection(e.g. 7SD5 line differential protection)
1
2
3
45
Control systemmaster unit withoptical-fiber link
VDU with keyboard Printer
1 2 3 4 5
Protection and substation control LSA 678 with input/output units and numerical protectioninstalled in low-voltage compartments of the switchgear
Local and Remote Control
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/63
Fig. 114: Application example of medium-voltage switchgear
Fig. 115: Principle wiring diagram of the medium-voltage feeder components
To the office
Parallel Serial
Key:
VDU
To the network control center
Buscoupler
IOU FPR IOU FPR CSM IOU FPR
Control system masterwith mass storage andcontrol center couplingMonitor
Feeder protectionrelayInput/output unit
For o/c feeder ormotor protection alsoas one combinedunit (7SJ531) available
Control room Switchgear room
Switchgear
CSM
VDU
FPR
IOU
Modem
Fig. 115 shows an example for the mostsimple wiring of the feeder units.The voltages between the input/output unitand the protection can be paralleled at theinput/output unit because the plug-in mod-ules have a double connection facility.The current is connected in series be-tween the devices. The current input atthe input/output unit is dimensioned for100xIN, 1 s (protection dimensioning).The plug-in modules have a short-circuitingfacility to avoid opening of c.t. circuits.The accuracy of the operational measure-ments depends on the protection charac-teristics. Normally, it is approx. 2% of IN.If more exact values are required, a sepa-rate measuring core must be provided.The serial interface of the protection isconnected to the input/output unit.The protection data is transferred to thecontrol master unit via the connection be-tween the input/output unit and the masterunit. Thus, only one serial connection to themaster unit is required per feeder.
Local and Remote Control
Control I/0 unit 1) Numerical 1)
For o/c feeder protection or motor protectionalso as combined controland protection unit 7SJ531 available
Switching status
6MB52 ProtectionPlug-in module
c.b. ON/OFF 2)
Short-circuitingfacility
Protectioncore
U
I
2)closeoropen
2)closeortrip
1)
2) Only one circuit shown
Serial data connection
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/64
System configuration
The system arrangement depends on thetype of substation, the number of feedersand the required control and protectionfunctions. The basic equipment can bechosen according to the following criteria:
Central control master unithas to be chosen according to thenumber of bay control units to be seriallyconnected: 6MB513 for a maximum of 32 serial
interfaces 6MB514 for a maximum of 64 serial
interfacesAt the most 9 more serial interfaces areavailable for connection of data channels toload despach centers, local substation con-trol PCs, printers, etc.
Substation control centerIt normally consists of a PC with a specialcontrol keyboard or normal keyboard witha mouse, color monitor, LSA CONTROLsoftware and a printer for the output ofreports.For exact time synchronization of 1 milli-second accuracy, a GPS or DCF77 receiverwith antenna may be used.
Bay control unitsNormally, a separate bay control unit is as-signed to every substation bay. The typehas to be selected according to the follow-ing requirements: Number of command outputs
that means the sum of circuit breakers,isolators and other equipment to be cen-trally or remotely controlled. The stateddouble commands are normally providedfor double-pole (”+“ and ”–“) control oftrip or closing coils.Each double-pole command can be sep-arated into two single-pole commandswhere stated (Fig. 98, page 6/53).
Number of digital signal inputsas the sum of alarms, breaker and iso-lator positions, tap changer positions,binary coded meter values, etc, to beacquired, processed or monitored.Position monitoring requires doublesignal inputs while single inputs aresufficient for normal alarms.
Number of analog inputsdepends on the number of voltages,currents and other analog values(e.g. temperatures) to be monitored.Currents (rated 1 A or 5 A ) or voltages(normally rated 100 to 110 V) can bedirectly connected to the bay controlunits. No transducers are required.Numerical protection relays also acquireand process currents and voltages.
Fig. 116: Typical distribution-type substation
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 117: Typical I/O signal requirements for a trans-former bay
Control
Isolator HV sideCircuit breaker HV sideIsolator MV sideCircuit breaker MV sideTap changer, higher, lower
Data acqusition
1 x DSI1 x DSI1 x DSI1 x DSI8 x DSI
1 x SSI1 x SSI3 x V, 3 x J, 8 xϑ
Isolator HV sideCircuit breaker HV sideIsolator MV sideCircuit breaker MV sideTransformertap-changer positionsAlarm Buchholz 1Alarm Buchholz 2Measuring values
SSIDSIDCOSCO
Single signal inputDouble signal inputDouble commandSingle command
2 x DCO2 x DCO2 x DCO2 x DCO2 x SCO1 x SCO
M
I
V
50/51
87T
M
M
HV
RTD's
6MB5240-2 7SJ511 7UT512
To the centralcontrol unitOF
OFOF
M
MV
63
Incoming transformer bays
5 feeders
Typical distribution-type substation
115 kV
13.8 kV
115 kV
13.8 kV
5 feeders
They can also be used for load monitor-ing and indication (accuracy about 2% ofrated value). In this way, the number ofanalog inputs of the bay control unitscan be reduced. This is often practisedin distribution-type substations.
The device selection is discussed at thefollowing example.
Example:Substation control configuration
Fig. 116 shows the arrangement of atypical distribution-type substation withtwo incoming transformers, 10 outgoingfeeders and a bus tie.The required inputs and outputs at baylevel are listed in Fig. 117 for the incomingtransformer feeders and in Fig. 118 for theoutgoing line feeders, the bus tie and thev.t. bay.Each bay control unit is connected to thecentral control unit via fiber-optic cables(graded index fibers).The o/c relays 7SJ60, the mini-compactI/O units 6MB5250 and the measuringtransducers 7KG60 each have RS 485communication interfaces and are connect-ed to a bus of a twisted pair of wires.A converter RS485 to fiber-optic is there-fore additionally provided to adapt the seri-al wire link to the fiber-optic inputs of thecentral unit.Recommendations for the selection ofthe protection relays are given in the sec-tion System Protection (6/8 and followingpages).The selection of the combined control/pro-tection units 7SJ531 is recommendedwhen local control at bay level is to be pro-vided by the bay control unit. The low-costsolution 7SJ60 + 6MB5250 should beselected where switchgear integratedmechanical local control is acceptable.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/65
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 118: Typical I/O signal requirements for feeders of a distribution-type substation
51
M
51
M
51
M
51
M
51
To load dispatchcenter
Centralcontrolunit
To transformerfeeders
7KG60 6MB5250
7SJ60 6MB5250
6MB5250
7SJ60 7SJ531 7SJ531
6MB513
RS485/O F
RS485
1 x DSI
1 x DSI
1 x DSI
5 x SSI
Isolator
Grounding switch
Circuit breaker
5 alarms
Load currents are taken from the protection relays
Bus tie
1 x DSI
9 x SSI
Circuit breaker
9 alarms
Control
2 x DCO Circuit breaker
Per feeder
1 x DSI
1 x DSI
1 x DSI
5 x SSI
Isolator
Grounding switch
Circuit breaker
5 alarms
Measuring values(3 x V, 3 x I) from protection
2 x DCO Circuit breaker 2 x DCO Circuit breaker
OFOF
OF
Per feederVoltage tronsformer-bay
1 x 7KG60
GPS
VDU Printer(option)
Massstorage
7SJ60
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/66
Enhanced remoteterminal units 6MB551
The 6MB55 telecontrol system is based onthe same hardware and software modulesas the 6MB51/52 substation control sys-tem. The functions of the inupt/output de-vices have been taken away from the baysand relocated to the central unit at stationcontrol level. The result is the 6MB551 en-hanced remote terminal unit (ERTU).Special plug-in modules for control andacquisition of process signals are usedinstead of the bay dedicated input/outputdevices: Digital input (32 DI) Analog input (32 AI grouped,
16 AI isolated) Command output (32 CO) and Command enablingThese modules communicate with thecentral 6MB modules in the same framevia the internal standard LSA bus. The buscan be extended to further frames by par-allel interfaces.The 6MB551 station control unit thereforehas the basic structure of a remote termi-nal unit but offers all the functions of the6MB51/52 substation control system suchas: Operating and monitoring from station
control level Serial connection of numerical protection
equipment Archiving of process results and events Implementation of automation tasks.
The following options are possible: Radio clock Serial interfaces to system control
centers (up to 3) with separate commu-nication protocols each, as applicable
Up to 64 serial fiber-optic interfaces todistributed bay control units
Expanded measured-value processing Logic and automatic programs Mass storage Up to 5 expansion framesConfiguration including signal I/O modulescan be parameterized as desired.Up to 121 signal I/O modules can be used(21 per frame minus one in the baseframefor each expansion frame, i.e. totally6 x 21 – 5 = 121).The 6MB551 station control unit cantherefore be expanded from having simpletelecontrol data processing functions toassuming the complex functionality of asubstation control system.
Local and Remote Control
The same applies to the process signalcapacity. In one unit, more than 4 000 datapoints can be addressed and, by means ofserial interfacing of subsystems, this figurecan be increased even further.The 6MB551 station control unit simplifiesthe incorporation of extensions to the sub-station by using the decentralized 6MB52*input/output devices for the additional sub-station bays.These distributed input/output devicescan then be connected via serial interfaceto the telecontrol equipment. Additionalparameterization takes care of their actualintegration in the operational hierarchy.The 6MB551 RTU system is also availableas standard cubicle version SINAUT LSACOMPACT 6MB5540. The modules andthe bus system have been kept, the rackdesign and the connection technology,however, have been cost-optimized (fixedrack only and plug connectors).This version is limited to a baseframeplus one extension frame with altogether33 I/O modules.
Fig. 120: 6MB551 enhanced remote terminal unit, in-stalled in an 8MC standard cubicle with baseframeand expansion frame
Fig. 119: Protection and substation control with the enhanced terminal unit 6MB551
Switchgear interlockbay unit 8TK1
Enhanced terminal unit 6MB551
Switchgear interlockmaster unit 8TK2
Station protection7SS5
… …
Input/output device6MB52*
Extension to substation
Stationcontrollevel
Serial interface
Station control center (option)Systemcontrol center
Central evaluationstation (PC)
Remote controlchannel
Radio time(option)
Telephone channel
1 n
Baycontrollevel
Protection relay7S/7U
Substation
Parallel interface
Marshalling rackTransducers andrelays interposing
(option) (option)
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/67
MinicompactRTU*
Compact RTU
* Further 3 minicompact RTUs can be serially connected in cascadefor extension (maximum distance 100 m)With switching-current checkPotential free
6MB552-0A6MB552-0B6MB552-0C6MB552-0D
Type Serial portsto controlcentres
6MB5530-0A6MB5530-0B6MB5530-0C
Design Singlecommands
Alarminputs
Analoginputs
888
Remote ter-minal unit withcable shieldcommunication(RTC)
TelecontrolsystemSINAUT RTU
Serial portsto bay units
6MB5531-0A6MB5531-0C
6MD2010
88
331)/8331)/8331)/8
8
up to 2000 data points,
configurable
82432
832
7240
104136
–8–
––
–
32162)
––
1
1
1additionalgateway
2
7
–
–
–
2)
1)
Local and Remote Control
Remote terminal units (RTUs)
The following range of intelligent RTUs aredesigned for high-performance data acqui-sition, data processing and remote controlof substations. The compact versions6MB552/553 of SINAUT LSA are intendedto be used in smaller substations, whilethe version 6MD2010 of SINAUT RTU hasthe full functionality for control of largesubstations with up to 2000 data points.
Fig. 121: 6MB552 compact RTU for medium processsignal capacity
Fig. 122: 6MB5530-0 minicompact RTU for smallprocess signal capacity
Fig. 123: 6MB5530-1 remote terminal unit (RTC) withcable-shield communication
Fig. 124: 6MD2010 telecontrol system for largeprocess signal capacity
Fig. 125: Remote terminal units, process signal volumes
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/68
Local and Remote Control
RTU-interfaces
The descripted RTUs are connectedto the switchgear via interposing relaysand measuring transducers (± 2.5 to± 20 mA DC) (Fig. 126). Serial connectionof numerical protection relays and controlI/O units is possible with the compact RTUtype 6MB552.The communication protocols for the serialconnection to system control centers canbe IEC standard 870-5-101 or the Siemensproprietary protocols 8FW.For the communication with protectionrelays, the IEC standard 870-5-103 is im-plemented.
Automation Functions
The SINAUT RTU telecontrol system isbased on SIMATIC S7-400, which providesnumerous communication options and auniversal automation system. Forthe user, it opens up the possibility to in-troduce project-specific functions for localautomation tasks. They can be configuredwith minimum engineering effort, com-bined with the features offered by theuser-programmable SIMATIC S7-400 auto-mation system.A typical task is the central monitoring orcontrol and automation of geographicallywidespread processes, such as networksfor electricity, gas, water, sewage, districtheating, oil, pollution control, traffic andindustry.
Fig. 126: RTU interfaces
Fig. 127: VF coupler with ferrite core 35 mm
Modem
Telecontrol channel
Modem
Interposing relays, transducers
Systemcontrolcenter
Substationlevel
Bay level
RTU
Existing switchgear
Marshalling rack
Extended switchgear
* * *
Optical fiber
Protectionrelays andI/O units
* Only for compact RTU 6MB552
Cable-shield communication
The minicompact RTU can be deliveredin a special version for communication viacable shield (Type 6MB5530-1).It does not need a separate signaling link.The coded voice frequency (9.4 and9.9 kHz) is coupled to the cable shield witha special ferrite core (35 mm window di-ameter) as shown in Fig. 127. The specialmodem for cable-shield communication isintegrated in the RTU.Fig. 128 shows as an example the struc-ture of a remote control network formonitoring and control of a local supplynetwork.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/69
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 128: Remote control network based on remote terminal units with cable-shield communication
Higher telecontrol level
Distribution station
ModemChannel 1 Channel 2
Mini RTU6MB5530-1 (RTC)
Substation
ModemChannel 1 Channel 2
Mini RTU6MB5530-1 (RTC)
Power cable (typically 5 km)
Signalloop
Signalloop
VF couplers VF couplers VF couplers
VF couplers VF couplersVF couplers
Power cable (typically 5 km)
Modem(optional)
Multiplexer(optional)Modem
Channel 1 Channel 2
Communicationcontrol unit
6MB5530-1 (CCU)
1st station of branch 8
1st station of branch 1
VF couplers
ModemChannel 1 Channel 2
Distribution station
Mini RTU6MB5530-1 (RTC)
16th station of branch 1
Substation
ModemChannel 1 Channel 2
Mini RTU6MB5530-1 (RTC)
16th station of branch 8
VF couplers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
…
…
…… Branch 2
Branch 1
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/70
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 130: Compact central control unit 6MB514
Fig. 129: Compact central control unit 6MB513
6MB5130
Side view Rear view Panel cutout
17229.5
266
37 39
277.5
244
2257.313.2 220 13.2
7.3
5.4
ø 6
ø 5 or M4
255.8
206.5
180
221
245
All dimensions in mm.
Panel cutoutand drilling dimensions
6MB5140
Side view Rear view Panel cutout
7.3
5.4
ø 6
ø 5
255.8
431.5405
446
245
13.2
266
17229.5 37 39
277.5
4507.313.2 445
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/71
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 131: Compact input/output device 6MB522
Fig. 132: Compact input/output device 6MB523
Fig.133: Compact I/O unit with local (bay) control 6MB524-0, 1, 2
6MBB522 Side view Rear view Panel cutout
FSMA-optical-fiberconnector
7.3
5.4
ø 6
ø 5 or M4
255.8
180
245
206.5
221
220
225
244
30 29.5
231.5277
266
4
All dimensions in mm.
6MB524-0, 1, 2 Side view Rear view Panel cutout
255.8±0.3
Terminalblocks
7.35.4
ø 6
ø 5 or M4
206.5±0.3
180±0.5
221+2
245+1
13.2225220
F E CD B A
1234
5678
Optical-fibersocketsAll dimensions in mm.
3017229.5
266
9
244
Terminalblocks
6MB523 Front view Side view Panel cutout
244
231.5
30 29.5145
160
7.3
5.4
ø 6ø 5
255.8
105
245
131.5
146All dimensions in mm.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/72
6MB5240-3
17229.5
266
30 7.3
5.4
ø 6ø 5
Side view Rear view Panel cutout
431±0.3
405±0.5
446+2
244 245+1
13.2450
445
F E CD B A
1234
5678
255.8±0.3H GK JML
Optical-fiber socketsTerminalblock
All dimensions in mm.
9
Terminalblock
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 134: Compact I/O unit with local (bay) control, extended version 6MB5240-3
Fig. 135: Minicompact I/O device 6MB525
17229.5
266
37
244
Terminalblock
7570 7.3
ø 6
ø 5or
M4
71+2
56.5±0.3
245+1 255.8±0.3
6MB525
Side view Panel cutoutRear view
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/73
Local and Remote Control
Fig. 137: Minicompact RTU 6MB5530
All dimensions in mm.
6MB5530-0 and -1
Front view Side view Rear view
300
22515
400
1.5
35
45
Cable bushing
200
20
20 18
20
20 10
25
A
A
8
8.2
Section A-A
Wall mount
Fig. 136: Compact RTU 6MB552 in 7XP20 housing
6MB552
17229.5
266
39
225
244
7.3
5.4
ø 6
ø 5 or M4
Side view Rear view Panel cutout
220
8
1) 2)
13.2206.5 ±0.3
180 ±0.5
255.8 ±0.3
221+2
245+1
Bus cover
BNC socket forantenna
Optical-fiber socketFSMA for connectionof bay units
All dimensions in mm.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/74
Introduction
Measurement and recording technologyfor electrical networks: a field with a longtradition at Siemens. More than 3,500Siemens systems, installed in 65 countriesaround the world, record, meter, conditionand transmit electrical signals – tasks theyperform with a proficiency that’s particular-ly effective when faults occur. Measure-ment and recording equipment for powersystems: a field where our innovation po-tential and know-how define the range ofproducts available on the market – fromanalog transducers (AFM) systems tointelligent recording systems such asthe OSCILLOSTORE® P351, productsequipped with analytical software basedon expert systems.
OSCILLOSTORE P:Systematic troubleshooting
The ability to minimize plant faults anddowntime while optimizing machine andresource utilization: that’s the secret ofsuccess of the OSCILLOSTORE P531.In production, faults which would normallylead to process errors and stoppages aredetected while still in their early stages.The P531 keeps self-extinguishing, tran-sient, semitransient and permanent faultsunder tight control in all major power sup-ply operations.The OSCILLOSTORE systems are alsowidely used in computer centers to moni-tor the quality of the power supply andrecord the history of faults.Clear fault detection, precise documenta-tion, reliable evaluation – all the hallmarksof the OSCILLOSTORE P system.
Also active in monitoring and analyzingthe quality of the mains supply
An optimum solution for every task:this is the founding principle on which theOSCILLOSTORE P product range wasbased. Another member of the family isthe QUALIMETRE®/OSCILLOSTORE P512,developed in cooperation with the EDF(Electricité de France), for recording thequality of mains supplies.And the OSCILLOSTORE P513, a portableunit with integrated analytical software,completes the lineup.
The real-time specialists:OSCILLOSTORE Esequence-of-events recorders
OSCILLOSTORE E systems are idealfor a wide range of tasks in the real-timeacquisition of digital signals. Siemensprovides both stand-alone equipmentand intelligent integrated solutions forthe SIMATIC range of programmablecontrollers.Customized applications in power plants,switchgear and industrial production pro-cesses are just some of the strengths ofOSCILLOSTORE E systems. And, with thetrend towards increased levels of automa-tion, real-time acquisition with a resolutionof 1 ms is a capability that makes thesesystems highly popular.
OSCOP:The trendsetter in application software
One thing is clear: the better the software,the more the user benefits. And this iswhere OSCOP stands out from the field.The OSCOP software is based on the MSWindows user interface, a fact that alreadyspeaks for itself. Remote calibration, datatransmission and PC-based evaluation havelong been standard concepts in power uti-lity recording technology. The OSCOP sys-tem software forms the actual core of therecording data networks and combinesautomatic operation with the high function-ality required by field specialists.
SIMEAS TThe modular transducer system:An ideal state-of-the-art solution
Digitization does not herald the demiseof analog transducing. Quite the opposite,in fact: power generation and distributioncontinues to rely on the ideally refinedmodular solution of the 7KG61 series.That shouldn’t come as a surprise consid-ering the wide range of user-friendly ana-log measurement transducers availabletoday.An increasingly significant role is, however,being played by the programmable numeri-cal transducers 7KG60. They allow meas-urement of all measurands with just oneinstrument. The advantages for users areclear: enhanced cost efficiency of stocks,simplified menu-guided PC operation anda reduction in the number of differentproduct types. The serial interface furtherallows the integration of 7KG60 transduc-ers directly into microprocessor-based con-trol and automation systems.
Measurement and Recording
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/75
Fault recording
OSCILLOSTORE P531 and OSCOP P –The digital fault recorder with diagnosisand evaluation software
OSCILLOSTORE systems like the P531have been standing watch in renownedutility companies for years, looking out forself-rectifying, transient, semitransient,and permanent faults.In computer centers and in industrialplants, they monitor the quality of the pow-er supply and document the fault history.What is well recorded can be better evalu-ated – one of the more pleasing aspects ofaccurately recording electrical signals.Thanks to this source of information, onecan now optimize operating resources –and simultaneously minimize down-timeand avoid defects of equipment.The fault diagnosis in electrical power sup-ply is efficiently automated, thus facilitatingthe expert’s work.Fault recorders must be capable ofprocessing a wide variety of signals. TheOSCILLOSTORE P531 has the right solu-tion for this: Up to 31 data acquisition units (Fig. 141)
can be connected to the central unit –even when they are remotely installed atdistances up to two kilometers from theprocess
The modules are ideally equipped forsignal matching and digital preprocess-ing – even if the application requires a1 MWord of storage capacity
Still more important is that:The OSCILLOSTORE P531only records what you really need!Whoever needs to evaluate data, needsdata reduction (which the system memoryalso employs to reduce its load).
The OSCILLOSTORE P531embodies this principle:
It records only the anomalies, thanks tothe built-in start selectors! This includesthe fault history (the troublefree periodpreceding the fault), the fault itself, andthe fault’s sequel (the period after the faultoccurred). High-functionality start selectorsare available for each channel, and aresoftware-controlled.The system recognizes the fault character-istics itself, which means that the record-ing time is automatically adapted to eachrecording.
And what’s more: even prolonged distur-bances don‘t cause any problems. Therecording time is always adjusted to thesignal characteristics. Automatically, ofcourse. Channel-related inhibit functionseffective-ly prevent memory overflow, e.g. in caseof intermittent faults on one (or more)phase(s).Before the recorded data is stored in theacquisition module, the FDAU and PDAUmodules calculate any necessary quantities– for example, active power, reactive pow-er, and power factor. Because measurandtransducers are an integral part of themodules, external transdurcers are not re-quired. User-programmable gradient crite-ria allow to select the optimum momentfor recording – which again is a contribu-tion to data reduction.
Five data acquisition units capture andprocess all kind of measuring signals: ADAU (Analog Data Acquisition Unit)
– replaces the traditional fault recorderwith 4 channels for the real-time record-ing of currents and voltages, scanningrate 1 to 5 kHz adjustable per channel;storage capacity 50 to 250 sec.
BDAU (Binary Data Acquistion Unit)– replaces the sequence-of-eventsrecorderwith 32 channels for recording digitalstatus changes; scanning rate 1 kHz;storage capacity 900 status changes
DDAU (DC Data Acquisition Unit)– replaces the process recorderwith 4 channels for recording processvariables (e.g. 0 to 20 mA or 0 to10 Volt); scanning rate 0.2 Hz to 5 kHzadjustable; storage capacity 50 sec to14 days.
FDAU (Frequency Data Acquisition Unit)– replaces the frequency recorderwith 4 channels for recording the powersupply frequency; resolution 1 mHz;storage capacity 50 sec to 14 days.
PDAU (Power Data Acquisition Module)– replaces the power and frequencyrecorderwith one channel for recording the ac-tive power, reactive power, power factor,and optionally, the power supply fre-quency or rms voltage; storage capacity50 sec to 14 days.
Measurement and Recording
Fig. 140: Fault record
Fig. 138: OSCILLOSTORE sys-tems are used in power plants…
Fig. 139: … and to monitor transmission lines.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/76
Fig. 141: Distributed fault recording system
Fig. 142: OSCILLOSTORE P531, rear view Fig. 143: OSCILLOSTORE P531, front view
Data concentratorDAKONwith software forautomatic data collection,archiving and diagnosis
Control +communication unit
RS485-Bus
Central unitOSCILLOSTORE P531
1 2 3 30 31Analog or binary dataacquisition modules
Distributed fault recording system
Remote TransmissionTelephone network, X.25, ISDN; LAN; WAN
”Local Printer“
Evaluation station withsystem software OSCOP P
Further OSCILLOSTOREunits
Further OSCILLOSTOREunits
The DAU (Data Acquisition Units) allowsdecentralized as well as centralized intelli-gent data acquisition and processing. Therecorders can be linked to a central unitand can communicate with PC/AT compati-ble evaluation systems via modem – or viaa ”dedicated line“ if no modem is availa-ble. Depending on the application, front-end data concentrators with mass memory(DAKONs) can also be integrated usingstandard software. And the same standardsoftware allows a data network of faultrecorder systems to be set up.High-quality acquisition deserves high-quality evaluation. And that’s what onegets with the OSCOP P system program.This system is designed for all kinds ofperformance demands – thus tailored to fitwith any user requirements. It is availablein all major languages. And, of course, it issupported by an around-the-clock hotlineservice and our software maintenanceservice.In addition, the Siemens experts offer theircompetence for the analysis of the datarecorded and provide assistance in findingthe optimum solution based on the net-work topology.
Measurement and Recording
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/77
OSCOP P is also open for other systems
In particular when monitoring the operatingresources, it is important that the informa-tion stored in these resources is also avail-able. Via an additional function of OSCOP Por directly on the DAKON, it is thus possi-ble to read the records and operating mes-sages of numerical protective relays.For data in the IEEE (Comtrade) standardformat, import and export functions areprovided.This functionality allows to compare the”subjective“ data of the operatingresource with the ”objective“ data of theOSCILLOSTORE P531.
Fig. 144: OSCOP P operating surface
Measurement and Recording
OSCOP PThe user software withautomatic diagnosis
There are no communication problems be-tween OSCOP P and the OSCILLOSTOREP531 central units. Up to 100 of them(each with up to 31 acquisition modules)can communicate with the software viathe public telephone network. All parame-ters can be set up remotely.OSCOP P has a built-in database whichreceives the measured values and theirrelated parameters. It can be used as acentral archive. The filter functions alloweasy retrieval of the archived data evenafter years.The MS Windows operating system is par-ticularly suited because of its ease-of-useand the efficient time-sharing characteris-tics (that means, the recorded data can beevaluated in foreground, while the data isbeing transferred and an automatic diagno-sis performed in the background).We make the plant management’s lifeeasier with time-controlled automaticoperation and automatic screen display.This includes the option of a fault printoutwith analysis so that one can store andanalyze results without pressing a button.And the diagnostic system provides forperfect automatic analysis.If the OSCILLOSTORE P531 is used tomonitor high-voltage supplies and cables.The diagnostic system is a powerful ”faultlocator“. No longer will line and cablefaults go undiscovered, they are pinpointedwith a high degree of accuracy.
DAKON with OSCOP P for decentralizedautomatic diagnosis
All these automatic functions (diagnosis,r.m.s. values, fault locator ...) can also beperformed on the local DAKON, e.g. in theswitchyard. This solution allows you to stillreduce data for the remote transfer sothat only the relevant information and, ifrequired, the “r.m.s. values window“ aretransferred. Data archiving in the DAKONdatabase can efficiently relieve the centralevaluation station.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/78
Power quality assessment
QUALIMETRE*/OSCILLOSTORE P512
All functions of a completeequipment family in one unit
Previously a multitude of instruments wasrequired for recording variables – nowQUALIMETRE does it all alone. It replacesvoltmeters and ammeters, active- and re-active-power recorders, harmonics analyz-ers, RMS value recorders and much more.Of particular advantage for the user is theparallel recording of all significant networkdata. QUALIMETRE monitors all the elec-trical characteristics of a network. This isa real benefit, because faults of a widelydiffering nature may occur: Voltage variations
– Changes in amplitude (differencebetween maximum and minimumvoltage)
– Surge voltage (sudden amplitudechange)
– Voltage fluctuation (number of chang-es in amplitude within a specific time)
Long-time interruptions (such as com-plete power failure for more than 1 min)
Short-time interruptions (such as com-plete power failure between 10 ms and1 s or 1 s and 1 min)
Voltage drop(changes in amplitude over a longperiod)
Asymmetry (differing voltage amplitudesand/or phase angles)
Harmonic components of the fundamen-tal wave
QUALIMETRE can be used both for exam-ining and monitoring supply networks.
Immune to transient overvoltages
QUALIMETRE can be easily installed nearswitchgear and industrial supply circuits.To cope with this environment, measuringinstruments must have special propertiesin oder to operate reliably despite transientovervoltages. QUALIMETRE has thereforebeen designed in accordance with IEC 255protection standards with interference im-munity in mind.Spurious peaks of 2.5 kV, 1 MHz do notimpair the measurement result – an insula-tion voltage of 2 kV is included, naturally.
Measurement and Recording
Fig. 145: QUALIMETRE*/OSCILLOSTORE P512
* QUALIMETRE is a joint development of Siemens andEDF (Electricité de France). EDF, a world leader in qual-ity assurance of supply networks, was responsible forthe functionality of QUALIMETRE, and Siemens pro-vided the know-how for OSCILLOSTORE, the provenfault monitor.
Designed for installation
QUALIMETRE includes the necessary sig-nal conditioner for current and voltage andis therefore particularly suitable for perma-nent installation.For stationary operation a 19" rack-mount-ed model of compact design is offered.
QUALIMETRE saves paper
It is fairly obvious that large amounts ofdata come up in continuous network re-cording. In conventional instruments thisquickly leads to a flood of paper.Not so with QUALIMETRE: The datameasured is stored electronically. Remoteparameter input, data transmission andevaluation are thus also possible – theproven OSCOP evaluation programs takecare of this. Transmission of data via thepublic telephone network is also optimizedthanks to an integrated modem.The modern design concept permits easyexpansion with portable data carriers andtransient detection and flicker meter func-tions.All in all, there are many advantages withQUALIMETRE, making it the ideal solutionfor monitoring and analysis in electricalsupply networks.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/79
OSCILLOSTORE P513For measurement, recording,and evaluation:
OSCILLOSTORE P513 is a new portableinstrument for continuous analysis anddocumentation of the quality of powersystems at any location.
Ideal for power companycustomer service technicians
The generation and distribution of electricalpower in the desired quality and quantityare taken for granted today.Nevertheless, customers sometimes re-port that their supply is not as it should be,and disturbances fed back into the systemcan lead to a loss of quality in the utility’sproduct-electrical energy.In such cases, the customer service tech-nician is called upon to measure and ana-lyze the quality of the electrical powerdelivered to the customer – whether theproblem appears at a privat residence, asmall business, a medium-sized operation,or a large corporation.The OSCILLOSTORE P513 is just the in-strument you need to obtain fast, accurate,reliable and meaningful information on thespot.That means one can analyze and recordmeasurement data in the field applyingconsistent evaluation criteria to data ob-tained simultaneously, without having toconnect several different instruments.Additionally, results can be read out on thespot, making it even easier to get systemproblems under control.It is further possible to check the perform-ance of uninterruptable power supplies,and also to record the signal shape at con-verters and inverters.The OSCILLOSTORE P513 determinesall relevant system parameters: voltage,current, frequency, and harmonic contents,as well as active and reactive power.Even on the low voltage level, the OSCIL-LOSTORE P513 ensures high-precisionmeasurements, so that it can even beused at the ”wall socket“ level.Of course, all of the P513’s functions, in-cluding the 12 measurement functions,are housed in a single unit, which even in-cludes a built-in floppy drive and printerand, as a special feature, an integratedevaluation program.
The P513 is an intelligent, portable measur-ing instrument that monitors all of the char-acteristic electrical parameters on a powersystem: 8 measurement channels for continuous
recording of:– Voltage– Current (both with r.m.s. value calcu-
lation over one period)– Transient voltages with 2.6 kV peaks
at a 2 MHz sampling rate Continuous calculation of:
– Frequency– Phase angle in tan phi/cos phi– 1- to 3-phase active and reactive
power (all connection types possible)– Harmonics up to the 50th order.
Averaging times and recording times in therange from one period to 9999 hours canbe selected for all measurement types
See what’s going on right now –without losing the big picture
All measurement results can be displayeddirectly on the built-in screen, either nu-merically or graphically as an XT diagramor a bar graph.Vertical and horizontal zoom functions areprovided so that one can examine relevantsignal patterns in detail using the cursor.When one selects the histogram display,one can see at a glance the complete re-cord of voltage and current levels and theirstatistical distribution during the monitoringperiod.
FIg. 146: OSCILLOSTORE P5 13
Measurement and Recording
A backlit LCD display is also provided tomake it easy to read all the information onthe screen clearly – without depending onthe local lighting conditions.The information can be printed out on anyscreen as a hard copy at any time.
Transient voltage measurement section
One of the many features of the OSCIL-LOSTORE P513 is the separate measure-ment section with integrated transient volt-age recording unit. It is isolated from therest of the electronics using fiber optics.Thus, a complete electrical isolation is ob-tained. It means that one can measuremore confidently than ever before, withoutworrying about feedback. Complementingthis design is the P513’s ability to recordtransient peaks up to 2.6 kV at a scanningrate of 2 MHz.
Memory for morethan half a million readings
The built-in memory of 1.4 Mbyte makesit possible to store up to 500,000 readings.And the OSCILLOSTORE P513 is just asimpressive when it comes to convenience: Because of the P513’s large memory
capacity, it is ideally suited to long-termmonitoring. Depending on the parametersettings used, up to over 1 year of datacan be recorded!
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/80
Measurement and Recording
Fig. 147: Measuring transducer 7KG60, block diagram
Fig. 148: Measuring transducer 7KG60
Fig. 149: Measuring transducer 7KG60, dimensions
Digital output
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
Analog output 3
Serial interface
UH
IL1
IL2
IL3
UL2
UL3
UL1
N
Block diagram
RS 232RS 485
AC
75
90
Front view
Side view
Connection terminals
All dimensions in mm
90105
SIMEAS T –Universal transducers for electricalquantities in power systems
Areas of application
With the SIMEAS T universal transducer(Order designation 7KG60) all measurandsin any desired power grid can be measuredwith just one instrument.The instrument is equipped with 3 electri-cally isolated analog outputs, a digital out-put, and a serial interface.Each analog output can be assigned an in-dividual measurand (current, voltage, activepower, reactive power, etc.) and any de-sired measurement range.The measurement is a real/r.m.s. measure-ment, which can also measure distoredwaveforms and waveforms with a largeharmonic content.The output signals (e.g. 0 to 10 mA, 4 to20 mA, 0 to 10 V, etc.) can also be user-programmed for each output.The digital output can be used as a triggeroutput for recording the results, or as alimit signal.Any desired input current or input voltageup to maximum of 10 A or 600 V, can beconnected at frequencies between 45 and65 Hz (16 2/3 Hz). Depending on the mea-surement task, the unused input terminalsremain free.The transducer can be ordered either pre-configured in accordance with plaintextspecifications, or programmable with thecapability for a custom setup.Setup data and a specific connection dia-gram are delivered with factory set instru-ments. Programmable instruments canprint out this data as required.A PC connecting cable and a disk contain-ing Windows software, with which onecan easily set up the transducer oneself,can be ordered optionally.During operation you can reprogram thetransducer, or display the measured valueson-line on a graphics instrument (containedin the software), either on a PC or on-siteusing a laptop.The instrument requires an auxiliary powersupply. Variants are supplied for the AC/DCranges from 24 to 60 V, and from 100 to230 V.Inputs, outputs, and the auxiliary powersupply are electrically isolated from oneanother.
Serial interfaces
The RS232/RS405 interface of the 7KG60can be used to communicate with a PC forsetting and readout of data or to integratethe transducers as measuring-data acquisi-tion units into substation control systems.In the latter case, an IEC 870-5-103-com-patible protocol is used.
Design
The housed version of the transducer is ahardwired, certified functional unit. It hassnaptype catches for attachment to 35 mmtop hat rails (DIN EN 50022). Terminalscrews allow inputs and outputs to besecurely connected.The measurands and ranges of measure-ment can be configured as desired.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 6/81
Measurement and Recording
Fig. 150: Window for configuration of the output values Fig. 151: Calibration
Fig. 152: Display of 3 selected measurement values and measuring ranges
SIMEAS PAR
The software SIMEAS PAR consists of thethree following subprograms: 1. Configuration 2. Calibration 3. Data ExportSIMEAS PAR was designed for theMS DOS platform of common PCs or lap-tops. The program is operated via thegraphical user interface MS WINDOWSV3.1 by mouse and keyboard. Communica-tion with the transducer occurs via thestandard serial interface of a PC or laptopand an optional connection cable.
Description
1. Configuration (Fig. 150)
The “Configuration“ function allows set-ting of the variables, measuring ranges,output signals, etc. for the transducer. Itprovides the user with straightforward set-ting of the parameters in just a few steps.
Entering the data in the respective win-dows is simple and clear.This procedure is supported by additionaldialog guidance.If required, the following data can be print-ed on the local PC printer: Parameters entered The connection diagram of the specific
measuring task A self-adhesive configuration label with
the settings of the transducer
2. Calibration (Fig. 151)
Since the transducer does not include anypotentiometers or other hardware settingfacilities. Balancing the transducer is madevia the software with the ”Calibration“function.Generally, the transducers are deliveredwith factory-made calibration and setting.Recalibration is necessary only after repairwork or for rebalancing.The screens and graphical characteristiccurves of the ”Calibration“ subprogram arealso easy to operate.
A description of the test configuration andinstructions on the program operation areprovided by the help system.
3. Data Export (Fig. 152)
With graphics instruments, up to 9 mea-suring signals can be displayed on-line ona PC or laptop screen in analog and digitalform.For better resolution, the user can selectthe number of measuring instruments onthe screen and assign measuring signalsand ranges to the displays.The assignment does not depend on theanalog outputs of the device.If required, the measuring data can bestored or read to the local PC printer.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution6/82
Measurement and Recording
Hints for application
Fault recording
The OSCILLOSTORE P531 is used in allkinds of power systems to record fault his-tories for fast and precise fault analysis.It also supplements the fault recording ofnumerical relays with the following extend-ed recording capabilities: Independent recording of events with
high sampling rate (up to 5 kHz) andlong recording times (up to 14 days).
Integrated start selectors for recordingof frequency excursions and powerswings.
The recording channels are normallychosen as follows: Per busbar section:
4 analog values (4 x V) Per EHV bay:
8 analog values (4 x V, 4 x I)and 16 binary signals
Per HV bay:4 analog values (4 x I)and 16 binary signals
The following derivated values are addition-ally calculated and recorded: Frequency at busbar sections Optionally active, reactive power and
frequency at infeeds.
Power system quality
The QUALIMETRE/OSCILLOSTORE P512is normally installed at infeeds.It is general practice to record 8 channels:4 x V, 4 x I.
Measuring transducers
SIMEAS transducers are normally installedat busbars for voltage and frequencymeasurement, or at infeeds and feeders,where required, for the measurement ofactive/reactive power and cos phi.They can be connected to the low-voltagenetwork directly or to the secondary wind-ing of v.t.s and c.t.s. Standard rated inputvalues are for example 110/ 3 V and 1 or5 A.
The transducer outputs can either beanalog, for example, 4 to 20 mA (7KG61analog series) or serial at a RS485 port(7KG60 digital series). The transducers arein general used with devices that cannotbe directly connected to the LV networkor c.t.s and v.t.s. This range of devicesinclude meters, indicators, recorders andremote terminal units.The digital SIMEAStransducers (7KG60) series are intelligentelectronic devices (IEDs) that can be usedfor data acquisition and preprocessingof data. They can be directly connectedto control and automation systems throughtheir RS485 interface. Standard protocolIEC 870-5-103 is used for communication.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49-911-433-8589
Power Systems Control
Contents Page
SCADA, EMS, DMS 7/2–7/5
Control Room Technology 7/6–7/10
Power NetworkTelecommunication 7/11–7/24
7/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
SCADA/EMS/DMS
Introduction
The requirements on network control sys-tems are growing as secure and economicenergy management is becoming evermore important. Planning and implementa-tion of SCADA systems (Supervisory Con-trol and Data Acquisition), Energy Manage-ment Systems (EMS) as well as Distribu-tion Management Systems (DMS) involvecoordinating a wide range of engineeringtasks. Siemens is in a position to deliveroptimum, state-of-the-art solutions in closecooperation with the customers.SINAUT (Siemens Network Automation)is Siemens’ modern product family forPower Systems Control. It reflects the ex-perience of more than 540 electricity gridcontrol systems installed worldwide sincethe early sixties.As technological pacemaker Siemens in-vests considerable funds annually in thefurther development of the SINAUT prod-uct family. Planned for the long term, thisuser-oriented product line has release com-patibility to guarantee that the benefits oftomorrow’s R&D investments can still beadopted by systems delivered today.
Municipal utilities and Large industries with own networks Regional distribution utilities National and regional generation and
transmission utilities
Modular and distributed architecture
Each SINAUT Spectrum system consistsof individual functional subsystems whichare distributed among an optimum numberof workstations and servers. Shortest reac-tion times are achieved by assigning time-critical applications and applications requir-ing a lot of computation power to dedicatedservers (Fig. 1). The database is distributedamong the workstations and servers forfast and independent data access with lowLAN-loading.The modules of the network control sys-tem SINAUT Spectrum are shown inFig. 3 on page 7/4 and 7/5.Due to its modular and distributed systemarchitecture SINAUT Spectrum offersunlimited horizontal and vertical growthopportunities, e.g. from a small entry-levelSCADA system up to a large EMS or com-bined SCADA/EMS/DMS.
Siemens furthers this strategy by participat-ing in a variety of IEEE, IEC, EPRI, CIGREand CIRED committees and by enlistingsupport from active user groups.The quality management certified byDQS according ISO 9001 ensures qualityproducts and a smooth and reliable projectimplementation within contractual sched-ule and budget.Siemens Power Systems Control has alarge support staff of dedicated expertswith power industry experience.With its broad range of products Siemensis able to supply the control systems, allnecessary components (communicationequipment, control room equipment, un-interruptible power systems, etc.) fromone supplier on a turnkey basis.
SINAUT Spectrum
General
SINAUT Spectrum is the open, modularand distributed control system for electricalnetworks as well as for gas, water andremote heating networks.Its extensive and modular functionalityprovides scalable solutions tailored to theneeds and budgets of:
Basic componentsHot standby
Dataacqusition
Mimicdiagraminterface
Mimic diagram
SCADA
Administrator,archives,schedules
Networkanalysis
Operatorconsole
Power andschedulingapplications
Operatorconsole
Spare
Trainingsimulator
Expertsystem
Distributionmanagementfunctions
Bridge
Gateway
GIS PC
Communicationwith other controlcenters, e.g.ICCP or ELCOM-90
to/from RTUs
Data-base
Office LAN
LAN
Fig. 1: SINAUT Spectrum – system architecture of a large SCADA/EMS/DMS
7/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
SCADA/EMS/DMS
SINAUT Data Gateway
SINAUT Data Gateway exactly meets therequirements of an integration tool neededfor data maintenance. With SINAUT DataGateway control center data can be main-tained with one database instead of main-taining modeling information in severaldifferent formats for each application. Forthe update of an existing control centersystem, the necessary data can simply beexported in a format recognized by thenew control center system.
Available services
Siemens offers services for all importantareas: Studies, planning, engineering Project implementation Installation, supervision of installation Commissioning Training Hardware/software maintenance System upgrading System migration
Siemens Power Systems Control– a key to success
Network Control Centers have to operateeconomically and efficiently over long peri-ods. Therefore Siemens is committed to: Designing systems that can incorporate
new standards and technologies overtime to keep the system current
Avoiding dependence on proprietarytools and methods
Using accepted and de facto standards Meeting the growing need for informa-
tion management throughout a publicutility company
The long-term commitments also include: A full product spectrum Complete turnkey projects Complete spectrum of services An active user group Strong R&D
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49-911-4 33 -8122
Further SINAUT products
SINAUT ACESAccounting, Contracts andEnergy Scheduling
The volume of wholesale transactions willincrease dramatically due to regulatoryand economic pressures. SINAUT ACESprovides sophisticated software that canmanage commodity trading, accounting,billing, monitoring, and contract compli-ance. SINAUT ACES allows to take fulladvantage of the growing complexity ofcontract provisions. SINAUT ACES oper-ates within an open-systems environmentthat can be fully integrated with SCADA/EMS/DMS and corporate informationsystems.
SINAUT ICCPNET, SINAUT ICCPNTCommunications Products
Siemens offers a full range of communi-cation products which support ICCP.The field-proven SINAUT ICCPNET whichexecutes under UNIX, offers a commercialrelational database manager to handle con-figuration and object-set definition with anOSF/Motif operator interface.SINAUT ICCPNT executes on a PC plat-form and combines a low-cost solution andUCA (Utility Communications Architecture)open-systems technology in order to inter-connect utilities.
Open architecture
SINAUT Spectrum is solidly based onindustry standards. Therefore the systemcan be upgraded to take advantage of therapidly moving technology in the worksta-tion and server market, without losing anyof the software investment built up overthe years.SINAUT Spectrum runs under a UNIXoperating system, strictly adhering tothe IEEE POSIX standards, thus providinghardware platform independence.SINAUT Spectrum may be delivered eitheron SUN or on IBM workstations.The user interface employs a graphicalenvironment that the operator can tailor tohis specific tasks and preferences. Basedon the X-Window System and OSF/Motif,this user interface provides multiple-win-dow displays, full pan and zoom capabili-ties and excellent display call-up times.Other standards used inSINAUT Spectrum: Structured Query Language (SQL)
for relational database access TCP/IP for LAN/WAN communication IEC 870-5 as well as many other
protocols for RTU communication IEC 870-6 TASE 2 (ICCP), WSCC and
ELCOM 90 for communication withother control centers.
Fig. 2: Control room of Northern States Power Company, Minneapolis, MN
7/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
SCADA/EMS/DMS
Network Control System
UNIX server Database
UNIXworkstation
Informationmanagementsystem
Dataacquisitionsubsystem
Userinterface
Gateway Computernetworkmanagement
Ethernet-LAN Tools fortest anddiagnostics
Communi-cation system
Softbus
RTU UNIXoperatingsystem
High-levellanguagecompiler
Archives andschedules
Dataacquisitionandprocessing
Supervisorycontrol,control jobs,manual update
Reportgenerationsystem
Dynamicnetworkcolouring
Operationoptimization forgas and waternetworks
Energydemandcontrol
Loadmanagement
Energyaccounting
Data importfrom a GIS
Tracing
Switchingproceduremanagement
Outagemanagementsystem
Loadmodeling
Onlineshort-circuitcalculation
V/Varcontrol
Spatialcontrol andqueries
Jumpers,cuts, grounds
Fault locationand isolation;servicerestoration
Feederestimation
Onlineload flowcalculation
Transformerloadmanagement
Cold loadpickup
Distributionmanagementfunctions
SCADAfunctions
Basicsystem
Hardware
Fig. 3: Modules of the network control system SINAUT Spectrum
7/5Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
SCADA/EMS/DMS
Communication
Modelupdate
SINAUT Spectrum
Networkreduction
Stateestimator
Networkparameteradaption
Dispatcherpower flow
Faultcalculations
Securityanalysis
Networksensitivity
Optimalpower flow
Securitycheckedswitching
Voltagescheduler
Study casemanagement
Securitydispatch
Outagescheduler
Automaticgenerationcontrol
Interchangescheduling
Economicdispatch
Reservemonitoring
Interchangetransactionevaluation(A+B)
Loadforecast
Unitcommitment
Hydroscheduling
Hydrothermalcoordination
Productioncosting
Wheeling losscalculation
Waterworth valuecalculation
Instructorfunctions
Completefunctionalityof thecontrol system
User interfaceof thecontrol system
Processsimulation
Networkmodel
Generationmodel
Intelligentalarmprocessing
Disturbanceanalysis
Networkrestoration/load transfer
To othercontrol centers(ICCP)
Geographicalinformationsystem (GIS)
Multisitecontrol centeroperation
Other utilityIT systems
Planning
Maintenance
Protectionmodel
Billing
Expertsystem
Trainingsimulator
Power andschedulingapplications
Networkanalysis
7/6 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Control Room Technology
SINAUT Visualization
Introduction
With its SINAUT Visualization large-screenrear projection system, the Siemens AGoffers the solution for the large-screendisplay of text or graphics. Thanks to themodular design of SINAUT Visualizationwith projection modules which can stackedhorizontally and vertically without paths,screens of practically any size can be built.The SINAUT Visualization large-screen rearprojection system can be used whereevera large-area presentation of computer datais required. For example, in power distri-bution.SINAUT Visualization can be used in an en-ergy management system as a substitutefor or adddition to conventional mosaicpanels. All dynamic data, from an overviewof topological information about the areasupplied to detailed information and spe-cial messages for the operators in case offault, can be visualized so that all operatorscan read it (Fig. 4).
Description
Design of SINAUT Visualization-mX
The LCD projection technology used inSINAUT Visualization-mX is based on theTFT LCD (thin-film transistor liquid crystaldisplay) light-valve technology. This so-called active matrix LCD has a better con-trast and display switching rate than thelower-cost passive LCDs. Each individualred, green and blue color pixel of the LCDis controlled by a transistor that is, in turn,directly linked to the computer electronicsof the integrated mX-Terminal*.This eliminates color shift and drift effectsbecause no analog technology is used(Fig. 5).
Modularity
SINAUT Visualization-mX is a modularsystem in order to cover different require-ments for projection area, resolution andsize.Each projection module is an individual rearprojection system with a 50"-inch screenand a resolution of 640 x 480 or 1024 x768 pixels. It has no seam and the edgesof the module correspond with the pictureborders (Fig. 6).
* mX-Terminal designates the multiscreen-cablex-Terminal from Siemens AG
VGA, Video, X.11controller
Mirror, lamp
LCDlightvalve
Projection lens Screen Observer
Fig. 5: Principle of rear projection using an LCD
Fig. 6: Projection module with dimensions in mm
Illumina-tion unit
Darkbox
Screen module
340
1213
1000
750Screen
Fig. 4: Control room of Victorian Power Exchange, Australia
7/7Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Control Room Technology
Therefore seamless pictures of any sizecan be built by horizontal and verticalstacking of several modules.Fig. 7 shows an example of a 3 x 2 config-uration of modules, offering a resolution ofeither 1920 x 960 or 3072 x 1536 pixels.The more modules are configured horizon-tally or vertically, the higher is the resultingresolution. The projection modules can beset up in horizontal direction linear as wellas polygonal with an angle of 8 degrees toeach other in order to obtain a slightlycurved display wall. Other angles are pos-sible on request (Fig. 8).
Connectivity as mX-Terminal
The mX-Terminal integrated in OVERVIEW-mX and the X-server installed on it con-form 100% to the internationally standard-ized protocol definition X window system(X-Windows, X.11.). Up to 4 projectionmodules can be connected to one mX-Ter-minal. If they are arranged in a 2 x 2 de-signs, they provide a resolution of 1280 x960 or 2048 x 1536 pixels. The systemoperates like an X-Terminal with all X.11tool kits such as OSF/Motif and the X-appli-cations based on them. All X-clients canmake unrestricted use of the entire projec-tion area of 2 m x 1.5 m (Fig. 9).
Screen 0
Illumina-tion unit
Darkbox
Screen module
Screen 1 Screen 2
Screen 3 Screen 4 Screen 5
1213
3000
1500
Fig. 7: 3 x 2 horizontal and vertical stacking of projection modules
Operator Operator
SINAUTVisualization-mXprojection modules
mX-Terminal
Ethernet,TCP/IP X-Windows
Fig. 8: Linear or polygonal setup of several SINAUT Visualization-mX projection modules (top view)
Fig. 9: Integration of SINAUT Visualization-mX into a computer network based on Ethernet, TCP/IPand X-Windows
7/8 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Control Room Technology
Mosaic-tile systems
Introduction
Visualization of the electric systems to becontrolled and optimization of the workingenvironment are of utmost importance forthe control room operators’ ability to con-centrate.By combining the latest ergonomic find-ings with an appropriate design Siemensprovides an environment that allows theoperators to work well, even in criticalsituations.Control boards and mimic displays ofmosaic tile design must have a straight-forward layout. They must also be cost-effective and capable of being shaped tosuit customer requirements. It must bepossible to modify or extend them quickly,simply and at minimum cost.The ergonomics and design of Siemenscontrol rooms exceed the scope of all DINand international standards.A broad selection of standard modulesand components form the basis of our con-trol rooms. They range from mosaic tilesystems and control desks to large-screenrear projection systems, and from opti-mized mapboards to ergonomically perfectoperator workstations.Siemens manufacture of control roomtechnology is certified to ISO 9001.
Controlling of the mimic board
Control room technology by Siemenshas been developed generally over the lastfew years.Controlling of the mimic board is no longerdone by a costly 1:1 wiring system but viaan Ethernet bus (SINEC H1) tothe PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)system and an internal mimic board bus(SINEC L2).This new idea – Mimic Board Controlling(MBA-L2) – has been successfully realizedin several projects (Fig. 12).
LAN-controlled mimic board
The mimic board consists of the followingelements: PLC Power supply including fuses Bus terminal Main module for the control of
32 twincolored LEDs Extension module for the control of
32 twincolored LEDs Low consumption diodes Protocol as per DIN 19245
If more than 4 projection modules arerequired, there is the possibility to havenearly any number of modules as onelarge display. With the distributed X-Server(1 central device mX-Terminal with key-board and mouse and several renderingmachines) it is possible to control nearlyany number of modules as one singledisplay.
This means that both the user and theapplication software “see” one single dis-play. Installation, operation and service donot differ from that of a standard X-Termi-nal (Fig. 10).
6 mX-Terminals asrendering machines
mX-Terminalas central device
Ethernet TCP/IP,X-Windows
24 modules with3480 x 1920 pixels
DistributedX-Server
Workstations/Windows NT-PCs
Fig. 10: SINAUT Visualization-mX as 6 x 4 setup
7/9Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
SINEC H1/Ethernet
PLC
1 SINEC L2 32
1
32
1
8
RS 4851 16
1 2 3 4
LED 32Mainmodule
LED 32Mainmodule
Displaysubmodule
1234 MW
Analogoutputsub-module
1 Power supply module
2 CPU module
3 CP to SINEC H1
4 CP to mimic boardIan SINEC L2
Control Room Technology
Online testParametrizingCommissioning
Mimic board
SINEC L2
SINEC 1/Ethernet
PLC
SINAUTspectrum
Description
The PLC from theS5 automation system consists of:
Power supply module Central processing unit (CPU) Communication processor module
to a host processor Communication processor module
(CP 5430) to internal LAN connectionof the mimic board
Eventual memory extensions in caseof bigger systems
The use and the selection of the differenttypes of S5 PLCs depend on the require-ments of the controlled LEDs and on theparameters which are to be transmittedfrom the host processor to the PLC.The communication processor to a hostprocessor is determined by the structureof the protocol and the physical interface(e.g. SINEC H1, L1, L2 and so on).
Fig. 11: Control room of Schluchseewerke AG, Germany
Fig. 12: Mimic board wiring with MBA-L2
The bus terminal
The bus terminal is designed to connectto the internal LAN one main module and16 extension modules. In addition to theLAN connections, the following are con-nected to the bus terminal: power supply,shielding for the cables between bus ter-minals and modules, and digital input forsynchronization of blinking.
The bus system, protocol structure
The LAN controlling the main module isan RS 485 interface. The protocol is ac-cording to DIN 19245 (profibus). This LANis supplied by a communication processorCP 5430 which supports the protocolDIN 19245 by hardware implementation.
Fig. 13: Hardware structure of MBA-L2
7/10 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Control Room Technology
Main module
The main module is connected by a16-pole cable including power supply,LAN connection and synchronizing input.Each main module is a slave partner onthe SINEC L2 LAN and is able to control upto 32 twincolored LEDs. The intensity ofthe LEDs can be controlled via messagesfrom the PLC. Thus the brightness of theindicator lights can be adapted to the lightconditions in the control room.The LEDs can be operated in steady-statemode (on/off) or in flashing mode with afrequency of 0.5 to 8 Hz in 5 steps.A red LED on the module’s rear side indi-cates following errors: LED failure Number and color (monocolored,
twincolored) of LEDs to be used donot match with the number of plug-inLEDs
Failure or error of RAM, EPROM,E2PROM
A green LED indicates healthy operation.Errors can be read out and failures canbe exactly located. LED failures can belocated as well. Thus detection and re-placement of defective LEDs are not time-consuming.A defective LED can also be found bya ”lamp test“ message (operation of allLEDs).Each main module can be used to controlup to 16 extension modules. Each exten-sion module will be addressed directlyover Profibus by a subaddress.
Extension module
The extension module can control up to32 twincolored LEDs. As described above,the extension module is addressed by amain module. Each extension module iscyclicly updated by the main module. Thismessage can be interrupted by messagesof higher priority. These are: Synchronous blinking Lamp testAll further functions of the extensionmodule are the same as described abovefor the main module.
8RT8RU8RS
SINEC H1-Bus
User software
CPU
Process anddistribution ofLED data
Standard interface
Data areas forLED information
Data preparation
SINEC L2-Bus
Fig. 14: Software structure of Mimic Board Controlling(MBA-L2)
Fig. 15: 8RU-8RS-8RT mosaic tile systems
Parameteriziation software
The menu-driven software allows design-ing of main and extension modules locallyat the module or on line during operation.
Features of MBA-L2
Automatic background LED test,faulty LED can be detected at any time
All errors can be located and transmittedto host computer system
Steady-state mode, on/off Flushing mode, 0.5 up to 8 1/s in
5 steps Smooth brightness control No need for marshalling racks or distri-
bution units Reduced number
of cable connections to and inside themimic board
Simple erection on site, no wiring Easy extension and modification
because of using plug-in technology
Mechanical Design
The 8RU-8RS-8RT mosaic tile systems areof self-supporting and self-locking design.The tiles are in fact designed to supportone another and thus give the finishedcontrol board or mimic display a strongstructure. No metal supporting grid or anyother extra parts are needed for mountingthe individual tiles.All the systems can be modified or ex-tended quite simply. Once the board hasbeen erected, mosaic tiles can simply beexchanged or added.The 8RU-8RS-8RT mosaic tile systemshave been tested to DIN 40046 seismicrequirements and are thus fully able towithstand heavy mechanical loads.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49- 911-4 33 -81 83
7/11Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
AKEPLCCCCVTSWT F6FWTESBHicomSWT 2 DMUXLFHO.F.
Coupling unitPower line carrier communicationCoupling capacitorCapacitive voltage transformerTeleprotection signaling system for analog transmission linksTelecontrol – and data transmission systemPower line carrier systemISDN telephone systemTeleprotection signaling system for digital transmission linksMultiplex systemFiber optic transmission systemOptical fiber cable
AKE
Distance protection
50 ... 2400 Bd
64 kbit/s
Hicom
Line trap
CC or CVT
SWT F6
FWT
ESB
SWT D
LFH
MUX
Dig. currentcomparison anddistance protection
Data50 Bd ... n x 64 kbit/s
Speech
up to 500 km
O.F.
PLC
Fig. 16: General overview
Power Network Telecommunication
Introduction
Safe, reliable and economical energysupply is also a matter of fast, efficientand reliable transmission of informationand data.International operation, automation andcomputer-controlled optimization of net-work operations, as well as changing com-munications requirements and the rapidchange in technology have considerablyincreased the demands placed on systemsand components of communications net-works.The same careful planning and organizingof communications networks are as neces-sary in the power industry as for the gener-ation and distribution of energy itself.Siemens offers a wide range of systemsand network elements specifically de-signed to solve communications problemsin this area.All systems and network elements areadapted to one another in such a way thatthe power industry’s future communica-tions requirements can be satisfied opti-mally both technically and economically.Siemens is offering advice, planning,production, delivery, installation, operationand training – one source for the customer.Providing expertise and commitment asthe complexity of the problem requires.Put your trust in the extensive know-howof our specialists and in the solidity of theinternationally proven Siemens communi-cations systems.
Flexible network configurationwith communications systems andnetwork elements
The gradual transition from analog to digitalinformation networks in the power industryand other privately operated networks re-quires a great variety of systems and net-work elements for widely differing uses.Prior to a decision as to which systemcould be used for the best technical andeconomical solution, it is first necessary toclarify such requirements as quantity ofspeech, data and teleprotection channelsto be transmitted, length of transmissionlink, existing transmission media, infra-structure, reliability, etc.Depending on those clarifications the mostcost-efficient and best technical solutioncan be chosen.
As shown in the block diagram below,we are offering systems and networkelements for analog transmission as wellas systems for digital transmission.The systems and network elementsshown in this survey of products havebeen specially developed for power in-dustry applications and therefore fulfillthe requirements with regard to qualityand workmanship as well as reliabilityand security.
All systems and network elements de-scribed meet the relevant internationalrecommendations and are designed, devel-oped and manufactured in accordance withthe requirenments of the quality systemsof DIN EN ISO 9001.
7/12 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
A: Phase-to-groundcoupling
B: Phase-to-phasecoupling
C: Intersystemcoupling
PLC SystemAKE 100
CC or CVTLine trap
PLC SystemAKE 100
CC or CVTLine trap
PLC System
AKE 100
CC or CVTLine trap Line trap
CC orCVT
AKE 100HF hybrid
Coupling mode Costs
Minimum
Twice than A
Twice than A
A: Phase-to-ground coupling
B: Phase-to-phase coupling
C: Intersystem coupling
Attenuation Reliability
Greater than B&C
Minimum
Greater than B
Minimum
Greater than A
Maximum
1 Conduit with weather-resistantPLC cable screw connectionTerminal for coupling capacitorGrounding switch withswitch-rod eyeMain ground connectionExternal shock hazard protection1- or 2-pole coarse voltage arresterDrain and tuning coilIsolating capacitorIsolating transformerResistor for phase-to-phase coupling(balancing resistor)Gas-type surge arrester(optional extra)PLC cable terminalsHF hybrid transformer
23
456789
10
11
1213
Fig. 18: Coupling modes
Fig. 19: Comparison of the coupling modes
Fig.17: AKE 100 coupling unit with built-in HF hybrid transformer
Power Line Carrier (PLC)Communication
AKE 100 coupling unit
For carrier frequency communication viapower lines or via communication circuitssubject to interference from power lines,the high-frequency currents from and tothe PLC terminals must be fed into ortapped from the lines at chosen pointswithout the operating personnel or PLCterminals being exposed to a high-voltagehazard.The PLC terminals are connected to thepower line via coupling capacitors or viacapacitive voltage transformers and thecoupling unit. In order to prevent the PLCcurrents from flowing to the power switch-gear or in other undesired directions (e. g.spur lines), traps (coils) are used, which arerated for the operating and short-circuitcurrents of the power installation andwhich involve no significant loss for thepower distribution system.The AKE 100 coupling unit describedhere, together with a high-voltage couplingcapacitor, forms a high-pass filter for therequired carrier frequencies, whose lowercut-off frequency is determined by the rat-ing of coupling capacitor and the chosenmatching ratio.The AKE 100 coupling unit is supplied infour versions and is used for: Phase-to-ground
coupling to overhead power lines Phase-to-phase
coupling to overhead power lines Phase-to-ground
coupling to power cables Phase-to-phase coupling to power cables Intersystem coupling with two
phase-to-ground coupling unitsThe coupling units for phase-to-phasecoupling are adaptable for use as phase-to-ground coupling units. The versions forphase-to-ground coupling can be retrofittedfor phase-to-phase coupling or can be usedfor intersystem coupling.
13
1112
9
110
87
6
2
4 35
7/13Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
ESB 2000i power line carrier system
PAX/PABX
Communi-cationsysteme. g. Hicom
PAX/PABX
2/4-wireE&M
Protectionrelay
Data
Powersystemcontrol
LAN
V.24/V.28
MUX
BMX
DEE
So
Distance protection
Data V.28 up to2400 Bd or via MODEM
SDHPDH
Data V.28up to 2400 Bd
SWT 2000 F6
Modem, ≤ 19,2 kbits/s
FWT 2000i
Line trap
Couplingcapacitor
Couplingunit
ESB 2000i
Service PC
64 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
Remotesubscriber
Servicetelephone
Fig. 20: ESB 2000i power line carrier system
7/14 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
---
---Digitalsignalprocessing
Interface-modules
Modulation
Demodulation
Poweramplifier
Receiveselection
Central control
Fig. 21: ESB 2000i functional units
Fig. 22: ESB 2000i PLC System with 40 W amplifier
ESB 2000i power line carrier system
Modern PLC systems must not only takeinto account the specific characteristics ofthe high-voltage line but must guaranteefirst and foremost that they will be eco-nomically and technically usable in futuredigital networks.The ESB 2000i digital PLC system meetsthese requirements through Use of state-of-the-art digital signal pro-
cessor technology (DSP) User-oriented service features, e. g.
– automatic line equalization– automatic frequency control (AFC)– remote supervision/maintenance– programming of parameters by PC
Integration of data transmission systems(channel circuits KS 2000 and KS 2000i)
Digital interfaces for transmission upto 64 kbit/s
Use of the ESB 2000i PLC system alsoenables the full advantages of digital trans-mission to be exploited when employingthe high-voltage line as a transmission me-dium. The ESB 2000i PLC system also sat-isfies economic requirements such as lowinvestment costs, reduction of expenditurefor maintenance and service and technicalrequirements with respect to security,availability and reliability.
Application
The ESB 2000i PLC system permits carriertransmission of speech, fax, data, tele-control and teleprotection signals in thefrequency range from 24 kHz to 500 kHzvia: Overhead power lines and Cablesin high- and medium-voltage systems.The information is transmitted using thesingle-sideband (SSB) method with sup-pressed carrier. This method permits: Large ranges due to maximum utiliza-
tion of the transmitter energy for signaltransmission
The smallest possible bandwidth andtherefore optimum utilization of thespectrum space of the frequency rangepermitted for the transmission
Improved privacy due to carriersuppression
7/15Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Fig. 24: Transmission rates of the digital interface of the PLC system according to the available bandwidth
Fig. 23: Basic diagram of the ESB 2000i PLC System for digital transmission
ESB 2000i
DigitalinterfaceX.21/V.11orG 703.1orV.28
SSB-modulator/demodula-tor
PLC-line-unit
Service channel
Servicetelephone
Service PCnetwork management
Digitaltrans-missionfrom 1.2to 64 kbit/s
HF-bandwidth2.5 to8 kHz
Central processor
19.2 kbit/s
32 kbit/s
40 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
Bandwidth 2.5 kHz
Bandwidth 4 (3.75) kHz
Bandwidth 5 kHz
Bandwidth 8 (7.5) kHz
Note:A service channel forremote maintenance andfor service telephone isprovided in addition to theabove nominal bit rates.
Digital interface of the ESB 2000iPLC System
The ESB 2000i PLC system with ITU-Tstandardized digital interface for trans-mission rates up to 64 kbit/s significantlyincreases the possible applications.By using external multiplex systemsproviding ITU-T standardized interfacesX.21/V.11 or G 703.1, it is possible toadapt the ESB 2000i PLC system moreflexibly to the number of transmissionchannels and the various interfaces for thedigital transmission of speech and data.
7/16 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Fig. 25: SWT 2000 F6 teleprotection signal transmission system (stand-alone version)
IF 4
IF 4M
CLE
OMA
Distanceprotection Electrical line
connection
Annunciations
PUOptical lineconnection
PS
Alarms24 ... 60 V dc110/220 V dc/acService PC
SWT 2000 F6 protection signalingsystem for analog transmission links
The task of power system protectionequipment in the event of faults in high-voltage installations is to selectively dis-connect the defective part of the systemwithin the shortest possible time. In viewof constantly increasing power plant capac-ities and the ever closer meshing of high-voltage networks, superlative demands areplaced on power network protection sys-tems in terms of reliability and availability.Network protection systems featuring ab-solute selectivity therefore need secureand high-speed transmission systems forthe exchange of information between theindividual substations.The SWT 2000 system for transmission ofprotection commands provides optimumsecurity and reliability while simultaneouslyoffering the highest possible transmissiontime.
Application
The SWT 2000 F6 system is for fast andreliable transmission of one or more pro-tection commands and / or special switch-ing functions in power networks. Protection
– Protection commands can be trans-mitted for the protection of twothree-phase systems or one three-phase system with individual-phaseprotection
– High-voltage circuit-breakers can beactuated either in conjunction withselective protection relays or directly
Special switching functions– When the system is used for special
switching functions, it is possible totransmit four signals. Each signal isassigned a priority.
Transmission paths
Depending on the type of supply network,the following transmission paths can beutilized: High- and medium-voltage overhead
lines High- and medium-voltage cables Aerial and buried cables Radio relay links
Fig. 26: Block diagram of the SWT 2000 F6
7/17Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Fig. 27: FWT 2000i telecontrol and data transmission system
FWT 2000i telecontrol and data trans-mission system for analog/digital trans-mission links
In all areas related to the telemonitoring ofsystems, automation technology and thecontrol of decentralized equipment, it mustbe possible to transmit signals and meas-ured values economically and reliably.The new FWT 2000i System for telecontroland data transmission can be flexibly usedto perform the various transmission tasksinvolved in system management not onlyin public utility companies, railway compa-nies and refineries, but also in the areas ofenvironmental protection and civil defense,as well as in hydrographic and meteorolog-ical services.The following characteristics of theFWT 2000i system make it suitable formeeting users’ special requirements: Safe operating method around
high-voltage systems High degree of reliability and safety Short process cycle times Easy handling Economical useThe FWT 2000i system offers a variety ofmodules for the widest possible range oftransmission tasks. Thanks to the unlimit-ed equipping options of the frame, virtuallyall system variants necessary for operationcan be implemented on a customer-spe-cific basis.
Universal for all frequenciesand transmission rates up to 2400 Bd
The KS 2000i channel unit accommodatesa transmitter and receiver assembly. Alltransmission rates from 50 to 2400 Bd canbe set in all frequencies within the 30-Hzraster, including in the frequency raster toITU-T.
Transmission in the superimposedfrequency band
The FWT 2000i System permits transmis-sion in the frequency range from 300 to7200 Hz.
Modularity
The modularity of the KS 2000i channelunit is typified by its integration in variousother systems, i.e. its use is not limited tothe FWT 2000i system.For instance, the channel unit can beintegrated in: The ESB 2000i PLC system The SWT 2000 F6 protection signaling
system Telecontrol systems.
Transmitter and receiveras separate modules
Separate modules that function only asa receiver or only as a transmitter are avail-able for this operating method.
Flexibility
By using additional modules the systemcan be extended for alternative pathswitching or transmission of the controlfrequencies of a multistation controlsystem.
Fast and easy fault localization
A variety of supervisory facilities andautomatic fault signaling systems ensureoptimum operation and fault-free trans-mission of data.
Transmission media
Suitable transmission media are under-ground cables, grounding conductor aerialcables, aerial cables on crossarms ofpower line towers, PLC/carrier frequencychannels via power lines, carrier links,PCM links and Telecom-owned currentpaths.The overall concept of the FWT 2000i sys-tem meets the stringent demands placedon power supply and distribution networks.The FWT 2000i meets the special require-ments with regard to reliable operation andelectromagnetic compatibility.
Additional benefits
In addition to the system features, theFWT 2000i system provides all users withthe cost-effective and technical benefitsexpected and required when this systemis used. Economical stocking of spare parts
is possible since, from now on, onlyone module is needed for all rates andfrequencies.
The system can be placed in servicequickly and easily thanks to automaticlevel adjustment and automatic com-pensation of distortion.
The use of the state-of-the-art digitalprocessors and components ensuresthat the system will have a long servicelife and a high rate of availability.
7/18 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Fig. 28: KS 2000i channel unit
KS 2000i channel unit
The new KS 2000i channel unit is suitablefor transmission of asynchronous data onanalog media and such forms a completeand versatile VFT modem.Both transmitter and receiver are acco-modated on only one plug-in card eitherto be used as stand-alone unit (seperateframe) or to be integrated in ESB 2000iPLC terminal or in remote terminal unit(RTU).Frequency shift as well as transmissionspeed are independently adjustable.With a maximum transmission speed ofup to 2400 Bd the VFT channel approachesapplications traditionally realized with high-speed modems only.Beside others the KS 2000i channel unitprovides the following features: High reliability High flexibility Easy detection of faults Excellent transmission characteristics
7/19Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Fiber optic communication
4 x 2 Mbit/s
The LFH 2000 systemTelecommunication requirements in power utilities
34 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s
4 x 2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
OLE 2
SWT
MUX
ODF
MDF
PABX LSA
4 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s34 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
34Mbit/s
OLE 34
OLE 34
MUX/CC
DSMX
OLE 8
MUX/CC
SWT
ODF
ODF
MDF
PABX PABX
Energymanagement
system
Communi-cations networkmanagement center
LWL
Office
Communications room
LAN
Protection
Electrical link (CU)Fiber-optic link
Fig. 29: The LFH 2000 fiber optic transmission system – Telecommunication requirements in power utilities
7/20 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
DPU IF 4orOM
IF 4orOM
PS
Alarmandeventre-corder
OFC(Fiber-opticcables)
Distanceprotectionordigital currentcomparison
ServicetelephoneST-A orST-B
AUX orAUX 1+1 orAUX BUS
Tele-controlsystem
PABX
TRCV 2 orTRCV 8 orTRCV 34
LWL
TRCV 2 orTRCV 8 orTRCV 34
LWL
DPU
IF4
OM
PS
ST-A
ST-B
AUX
AUX 1+1
AUXBUS
TRCV
LWL
Digital processor unit
Interface module fordistance protection relays
Optomodule for connectionof digital current comparisonprotection system
Power supply
Module for service tele-phone with DTMF signaling
Module for nondialingservice telephone
Service channel unit
Service channel unit withprotection switching
Bus channel unit
Optical transceiver
Optical fiber
Power Network Telecommunication
Fig. 30: LFH 2000 fiber optic transmission system
LFH 2000 fiber optictransmission system
Flexible network configuration and futurecommunications requirements of privatenetwork users, such as power companies,call for universal network elements fortransmission in digital communications net-works.LFH 2000 has been designed and devel-oped on the basis of extensive experiencegained with fiber optic transmission sys-tems in public networks and transmissionelements specially developed for such sys-tems. It was tailored to the needs of pow-er companies and other private networkusers.In its basic version LFH 2000 consists ofa 19-inch subrack equipped with an opticalline terminating unit TRCV2 and a servicechannel module. Even in its simplest con-figuration, LFH 2000 offers various typesof interfaces for the transmission ofspeech and data channels such as: Line interfaces up to 34 Mbit/s So-interface for networking digital
telephone systems (e.g. Hicom) QD 2-interface for network manage-
ment
The incorporation of the SWT 2000 D digit-al protection data system provides addi-tional functions required for most applica-tions in power companies.The basic version can be optionallyequipped with service telephone units,optical line terminating units with highertransmission speeds or with other servicechannel modules so that the system canbe conveniently adapted to the individualtransmission requirements.Further network elements may be con-nected to LFH 2000 via internationallystandardized interfaces if the number ofrequired channels and the types of inter-faces, i.e. the capacity of the system,have to be extended.Depending on the number and type of thetransmission interfaces required, LFH 2000can be expanded by connecting flexiblemultiplex systems.
LFH 2000 is provided with internationallystandardized interfaces so that transmis-sion systems of other manufacturerswhich are also equipped with internation-ally standardized interfaces can communi-cate with LFH 2000. This also makes itpossible to combine LFH 2000 with digitaltransmission system of other manufactur-ers.The incorporation of LFH 2000 with theexpansion element e.g. flexible multiplexsystem into a network hierarchy withdiffering transmission rates as currentlyplanned and implemented by private net-work operates can be easily achievedusing the compatible network elementsavailable today.The call for a user-friendly network man-agement can be fulfilled by adding therequired hardware and software.LFH 2000 meets the requirements of thepower companies and private networkoperators due to its flexibility, availabilityof internationally standardized interfacesand compatibility with regard to its incor-poration into existing private networks.
7/21Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Fig. 32: Block diagramm SWT 2000 D
1300 nm1500 nm
IF 4
Alarms24 ... 60 V dc110/220 V dc/acService PC
Digitallongitudinaldifferentialprotection(7SD51)
Distanceprotection
O.F.820 nm
n x 64 kbit/s
X.21/V.11G.703
TRCV
OM
O.F.
O.F.
Alter-nativeroute
PCM 2 Mbit/s 40/60 V dc
IF 4
PS
DPU
SWT 2000 D protection signalingsystem for digital communication links
In comparison with analog protectionsignaling the use of digital transmissionlinks provide noise-free communication.Switching operations, atmospheric condi-tions and other sources of interferenceon power lines do not impair secure andreliable transmission of protection signals.The SWT 2000 D system for the transmis-sion of protection signals on digital trans-mission links, mainly fiber optics, providesoptimum security and reliability whilesimultaneously offering the quickest possi-ble transmission speed.
Uses
SWT 2000 D system is used for fast andsecure transmission of one or several in-dependent binary signals for protectionand special switching functions in powernetworks and/or the transmission of serialprotection data.The system is avaliable in versions for thetransmission of protection data on sepa-rate fibers and on 64 kbit/s PCM channels.As an optimized solution between thesetwo possibilities, the system offers trans-mission of the protection data in the serv-ice channel of an optical line terminationsystem (e. g. OLTS, OLTE 8) which en-sures maximum independence of the pro-tection data from voice and data transmis-sion despite the common use of fibers infiber optic cables.
Applications
All types of distance protection(permissive tripping, blocking, etc.)
Direct transfer tripping Special switching functions Digital current comparison protection
(differential protection) with optical serialinterface ≤ 19.2 kBd (e. g. with 7SD511).
Features
Up to 8 parallel (binary) commands,bi-directional
Up to 2 serial protection data,bi-directional
Simultaneous transmission of serialprotection data and up to 4 binary pro-tection commands
High-performance microcontroller Permanent self-supervision Automatic loop testing Event recorder with real-time clock
(readable via hand-held terminal or PC).
Fig. 31: SWT 2000 D for flush panel mounting with integrated TRCV2 optical line equipment
7/22 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Flexible Multiplexer (FMX)
Depending on the number and type ofthe transmission interfaces required, theLFH 2000 optical fiber transmission systemcan be extended by connecting the flexiblemultiplex system (FMX).The FMX multiplexer is based on a flexibledesign which is considerably different fromnormal PCM systems. For terminal oper-ation, it contains a central unit CU, CUADor CUDI unit and, for branch operation, aCUDI central unit as well as the withdraw-able channels.Thanks to the software-controlled configu-ration and parametrization of the multiplex-ers they can be integrated quickly andeasily into the network.The 19'' inset has sockets for two centralunits (CU, CUAD, CUDI), twelve channelunits, a supervision unit and two powersupply units.
User Interfaces(see Fig. 33)
The LFH 2000 System – overview(see Fig. 34 on page 7/23)
Fig. 33: FMX interfaces
ISDN Basic access unit I4SO 4 x
I4UK4 NTPI4UK4 LTP 4 x
DSC6-nx64G 6 x
DSC2-nx64 2 x
DSC8x21 8 x
DSC4V35 or DSC4V36 4 x
CU or CUDI or CUAD
DSC8V24 8 x
DSC104CO 10 x
SLB62 6 x
SLX62 6 x
SUB62 6 x
SEM106 or SEM108 10 x
CU or CUDI or CUAD
S0 interface
UK0 interface, 2B1Q or4B3T, NT-mode or LT-mode
n x 64 kbit /s G.703 codirectional orn x 64 kbit /s G.703 contradirectionalor centralized clock
X.21or V.24/V.28 bis(switchable)
X.21/V.11 ≤ 64 kbit/s
V.35 ≤ 64 kbit/s orV.36 ≤ 64 kbit/s
Central unit, standard,or central unit for add/drop operationor central unit for ADPCM
V.24/V.28 < 64 kbit/s
64 kbit /s G.703 co-directional
2-wire LB subscriber
Exchange, 2-wire
Subscriber, 2-wire
2-wire NF and 2 E&M or4-wire NF and 2 E&M
Central unit, standard,or central unit for add/drop operationor central unit for ADPCM
7/23Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
TRCV SMUQ Service channel MUX Cross connect
V.11
Speechfour-wire+ E&M
V.28
ServicetelephoneSpeech,two-wire
V.11
Protection
Speechfour-wire+ E&M
Data RTUV.28
PABX
PLCn x 64 kbit/s
The LFH 2000 System – Overview
EMOS QD2 Networkmanagement system
EMS Energymanagement system
SDH 155/622Mbit/s
Remotesubscriber
External and/orinternal exchange
Substationcontrol andprotectionsystem
Data interfacese.g. X.21,V.24, LAN
Data and voiceof PLC links
Distance protectionor digital currentcomparisonprotection
34Mbit/s
SDH155 Mbit/s2,5 Gbit/s
4 x 2 Mbit/s
Protection
PABX
RTU
Data
4 x 2 Mbit/s
34Mbit/s
4 x 2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
4 x 2Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s
4 x 2Mbit/s
Fig. 34: The LFH 2000 System – Overview
7/24 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Power Network Telecommunication
Conclusion
The described digital and analog networkelements are, of course, only a small se-lection from the multitude of network ele-ments which Siemens has on hand for theimplementation of transmission networks.We have focused on those products whichhave been specifically developed for thetransmission of information in power utili-ties and which are indispensable for theoperation of such companies.It has also been our intention to show theuses for our products and how they can beintegrated in transmission networks withvarying network elements and networkconfigurations.The great variety of products in the fieldof digital transmission systems and thedifferent requirements of our customerswith regard to the implementation of digit-al transmission networks make customer-specific planning, advice and selection ofnetwork elements an absolute necessity.Detailed descriptions of all products canbe sent to you upon request.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49- 89-722-2 44 53 or++49- 89-722-4 19 82
Energy Metering
Contents Page
General 8/2
Areas of application 8/2–8/4
8/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Energy Metering
Areas of application:
Domestic
Fig. 2
Single-phasemeasurement ofcurrent consumptionin low-voltage net-works with high andlow tariffs
High measuringaccuracy and stabilityin extended use(class 2)
Fig. 1
3-phase measure-ment of active andreactive energy con-sumption in 3- and4-wire systems
High measuring ac-curacy and stabilityin extented use(class 2)
1 and 2 tariff appli-cations
Direct connectionor connection viacurrent transformer
Fig. 4Fig. 3
Fig. 3: Static 3-phase meter 7EC49Fig. 4: Ferraris 3-phase meter 7CA54
Fig. 1: Adaptive meter (1-phase)Fig. 2: Ferraris single-phase meter
General
Energy meters are used for measuring theconsumption of electricity, gas, heat andwater for purposes of billing. In this regard,modern energy meters should be able tohandle differing regional tariff structures aswell as complex tariffs in industrial applica-tions. The meters must also comply to thegeneral regulations for measuring instru-ments laid down in OIML D11.
Specifications
The following international specificationslay down the requirements for the differ-ent meters in terms of measuring accura-cy, robustness, electromagnetic tolerance,burden, etc: IEC 1036: Electronic current meters with
measuring accuracy in class 1 and 2 IEC 687: Electronic precision meters,
class 0.5 s and 0.2 s IEC 521: Ferraris meters with measuring
accuracy in class 1 and 2 OIML R6: Static gas meters IEC 1107: Specification of optical
interfaces EN 50081 and EN 50082:
Specification of interferencerobustness and interference radiation
Siemens energy meters comply with allthese requirements. Stringent quality con-trol ensures functionality in all our prod-ucts.
Certifications
High product and service quality is ensuredby the implementation of internationallyaccepted procedures. An independant in-stitute has confirmed this by issuing theISO 9001 certificate.
8/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Energy Metering
Areas of application:
Domestic
Wear-free flowmeasurementthrough the use ofultrasonic technologyby the static heatmeter
Energy measure-ment in optimalrange (class C)
Prepaymentelectricity meteringin class 2
Single-phase,2-phase and3-phase meters
Keypad-based credittransfer
Programmablepower limiting
Intelligent overloadprotection
Fully integrated,flexible credit vend-ing systems
Current capabilityup to 80 A
Commerce and industry
Fig. 7: 7E.6 – One meter for all special tariffs
Measurement ofactive energy in twodirections with accu-racy class 1 and 2
4 tariffs each fordemand and energyconsumption
One tariffless, sum-total energy register
Integrated real-time clock for tariffswitching
Integrated ripplecontrol receiver(RCR)
Storage of up to15 previous energy/demand values
Maximum demand inall tariff periods
Storage of detailedload profile
Fig. 5: Sonic heat meter 2WR4
Fig. 6: Cashpower 2000. The keypad prepayment electricity metering system that uses no cards, tokens or coins
8/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Large-scale industry
Energy Metering
Areas of application:
Measurement of active and reactiveconsumption in both directions
Individual metering of all 4 quadrants 4 different tariffs for each
measurement parameter Direct connection or connection
via current transformers Reduced wiring requirements Apparent power calculation
Bulk-energy transfer stations
All of the abovefunctions of the 7E.6in the accuracy class0.5 s and 0.2 s
As build-in and plug-in meter
Fig. 9: High-precision energy meterFig. 8: The 7E.6 is able to replace a complete set ofmeters – at lower connection and operational costs
Siemens Energy Meter Management System SEMMSfor power supply and distribution companies and for industry
Interchange pointLoad management
Check meterEnergy cost allocation
Industry
SEMMS
Industry-standardfunctionmeter
Utilitybillingmeter
Specialtariff-ratecustomer
Tariff-rate customer
Utility
Siemens metering technology alsocontains a wide range ofinstruments for communication,registration and remote interrogation(such as Ripple Control Receiver)
MeterSet ist object-oriented.This means that it can be connected notonly to Siemens meters, but to allforeign manufacturers´ meters well.SEMMS + MeterSet allows consistentmanagement of meter information.All meter information is transferreddirectly from MeterSet into SEMMS,eliminating transfer errors and increasingoperational security.
MeterSet:The software for: configuration clarification interrogation
M
MeterSet
Fig. 10: Siemens Energy Meter Management: With SEMMS you can handle the future
SEMMS interrogates all models ofmeters installed by power supply anddistribution companies, eliminatingmanual meter reading, allowing fasterbilling and supporting simplified metermaintenance
SEMMS interrogates all kinds of metersin industrial applications automatically,helping to assign and optimize costs
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++49-911- 4 33 -80 37
Fig. 11
System Planning
Contents Page
Overall Solutions forElectrical Power Supply 10/2–10/6
10/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Fig. 1: Tasks, Solutions and Results
System Planning
Overall Solutions forElectrical Power Supply
Integral power system solutions are farmore than just a combination of switch-gear, transformers, lines or cables, togeth-er with equipment for protection, supervi-sion, control, communication and someothers more. Of crucial importance for thequality of power transmission and distribu-tion is the integration of different compo-nents in an optimized overall solution interms of:
System design, creative system layout,based on the load center requirementsand the geographical situation
Component layout, according to tech-nical and economical assumptions andstandards
Operation performance, analyzing andsimulation of system behavior undernormal and fault conditions
Siemens System Planning
Whether a new system has to be plannedor an existing system extended or updat-ed, whether normal or abnormal systembehavior has to be analyzed or a postfault
clarification done, the Planning Division,certified to DIN ISO 9001, is competentand has the know-how needed to findthe right answer. The investigations coverall voltage levels, from high voltage to lowvoltage, and comprise system studiesfor long-distance transmission systemsand urban power networks, as well as forparticular distribution systems in industrialplants and large-scale installation for build-ing centers in close cooperation with theircustomers and other Siemens Groups(Fig. 1).
Voltage qualitySystem perturbationsNeutral groundingFault clearingOverloadOvervoltageAsymmetryTransient phenomenaReactive power balancePower-station reserve
Operation performance
GeneratorTransformerCircuit breakerOverhead lineCableCompensationequipmentEquipment forneutral groundingProtection equipmentHVDCFACTSControl equipmentGrounding
Component layout
Load developmentCable restructuringUpgrading installationsSelecting voltage levelsSystem takeoverDefining new transfomersubstationsSystem interconnectionConnecting power stations
Tasks Solutions Results
System design System analysis,system documentation
System calculations,load-flow and short-circuit
Planning and calculating AC andDC transmission
Determining economic alternatives
Specifying the configuration ofthe system
Design of electrical installations
Design of protection system,selecting equipment, selectivityand excitation tests
Testing and customer acceptanceinspection of protection equipment
Simulation of complete systemand secondary equipment
Switching operations, layout ofovervoltage protection system,insulation coordination
Analysis of harmonics, layout offilter circuits, closed-loopand open-loop control circuitsfor power converters
Simulation of system dynamics
Layout of power electronicequipment (FACTS)
Method of neutral grounding
Reliability analysis
Earthing arrangement andmeasurement
Investigation of interference
Propagation of ripple-control signals
Economical solution of distributionand transmission systems
Simple and reliable operation
Minimization of losses
Reduction of the effects,extent and duration of faults
Priorities in system extensionReplacement of old installations,reconstruction, extension ornew constructions
Extensively standardizedsystem components
Compliance with specifiedperformance values
Safety for persons
Economical altenatives
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 10/3
Powergeneration
Transmission systemup to 550 kV with HV/HV
bulk substations
Subtransmission system up to 145 kVwith HV/MV main substations
Medium-voltage distribution system up to 36 kVMV/LV transformer public substationsand consumer connection substations
Low-voltage distribution system up to 1 kV.Public supply system or internal installation system
Consumer power application industry, commerce, trade,public services, private sector
Distribution function
Transmission function
influence or faults of components cannever be avoided completely, it has to beassured that the time of interruption isminimized. This is a question of reserve inthe system. Different degrees of reservecan be provided depending on the require-ments.
System Planning
Fig. 2: The Pyramid of Power Supply
The Power Supply System
The power supply system is like a pyramidbased on the requirements of consumersand the applications and topped by thepower generation (Fig. 2).The power system is basically tailored tothe needs of consumers. Main characteris-tics are the wide range of power require-ments for the individual consumers froma few kW to several MW, the high numberof similar network elements, and the wide-spread supply areas. These characteristicsare the reason for the comparatively highspecific costs of the distribution system.Thus, standardization of equipment, useof maintenancefree components, and ut-most simplification of system configurationhave to be considered for an economicalsystem layout.The load situation at the LV level deter-mines the most suitable location of publicMV/LV substations and consumer connec-tion stations and, to a high degree, theelectrical and geographical configuration ofthe superposed medium-voltage distribu-tion network as well.HV/MV main substations feeding themedium-voltage distribution system shouldbe located as close as possible to the loadcenters of the medium-voltage distributionareas. The subtransmission system feed-ing the main substations is configuredaccording on their location and the locationof the bulk power substations of the trans-mission system. The largely interconnect-ed transmission system, e.g. up to 550 kV,balances the daily and seasonal differencesbetween load requirements and differentavailable generation sources.
Basic conditions for system design
Industry, trade and commerce as well aspublic services (transportation and commu-nication systems), but not forgetting theprivate sector (households), depend highlyupon a reliable and adequate energy sup-ply of high quality at utmost economicalconditions. In order to achieve these aims,several aspects must be considered(Fig. 3). International and national stand-ards are the basic fundamentals for sys-tem design. The choice of system voltagelevels and steps is of decisive importancefor the economical design and operation.Reliability requires adequate dimensioningof components with regard to current-carrying capacity, short-circuit stress andother relevant parameters. Although inter-ruptions in supply due to environmental
Fig. 3: Aspects of system planning
Loaddevelopment
Systemarchitecture
Networkcalculation
Protectionanalysis
Protectioncoordination
Investmentplanning
Networkrepresentation
Systemanalysis
Energy Supply”reliable and economical“
10/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
System Planning
System Planning, a complex activity
System planning and configuration iscomparable with architectural work, findingthe best technical and economical solution.System planning has therefore to startwith a thorough task definition and systemanalysis of the present status, based onthe given quality requirements. Alternativesystem concepts (system architecture)in several expansion stages ensure thedynamic development of the system,adapted to structure and load requirementsof the subposed voltage level. Componentdesign and the infeed from the super-posed voltage level has to be consideredas well. Technical calculations and eco-nomic investigations complete the plan-ning work and are essential for the choiceof the final solution (Fig. 4).
Load Development
The load analysis and estimation in thedistribution system are always a matterof distributed loads in an certain area.In urban and rural areas, natural borders –such as rivers, railway lines or major roadsand parks or woodlands allows the wholesupply district to be subdivided into anumber of subareas.In large commercial complexes, such asairports or university and hospital centersas well as in industrial areas, the load esti-mation is based on the individual buildingsand workshops.Different methods are used for load esti-mation, such as annual growth rates forexisting public areas, load density for newdeveloping settlements, installed capacityand simultaneity factor for commercial andindustrial supply.
Distribution
Network configuration for power distribu-tion is a matter of visualization and will notbe executed successfully without the geo-graphical information of load and sourcelocation for public supply and industrial orlarge building supply as well. Thus, eachdistribution system must be planned indi-vidually. But, for the basic design, somestandard configuration has proved optimalin terms of Simple configuration Easy operation and Economical installation
Low-voltage systems are usually operatedas open radial networks. Industrial systemsin particular contain facilities for transfer tostandby. Meshed operation is usually onlyintended for special load situations, suchas single loads with great fluctuations orwelding systems.Medium-voltage systems are primarilygoverned in their configuration by the loca-tions of the system and consumer stationsto be supplied.The most suitable arrangements for publicsupplies are open-ring systems or line sys-tems to a remote substation.For industrial and building power supplysystems, the higher load densities resultin shorter distances between substations.This leads for reasons of economy to thespot system with radial-operated trans-formers.Industrial power supply differ from publicnetworks inasmuch as they have a highproportion of motor loads and often in-plant generation. Depending on the capaci-ty, units will be connected to normal low-voltage level, intermediate low-voltagelevel or medium-voltage.The technically and economically optimalconfiguration of distribution systems callsfor wide-ranging practical experience froma large number of different projects andmust determine switchgear configurationas well.
Transmission
The design of transmission systems is toa great extent individually tailored to thelocation of generating plants and bulksubstations feeding the subtransmissionsystem. Planning of high-voltage intercon-nected networks and transmission net-works is a complex matter since they areoperating over several different voltage lev-els and mostly meshed systems are used.This and the regional and seasonal differ-ence of generation input and consumerdemand as well as the many different sizeof lines, cables and transformers, makeload-flow distribution complicated andrequire detailed calculations of systembehavior and the operating conditions ofpower generation during planning work.As well as the actual planning, it includesnumerous investigations, for instance, todetermine the switchgear configurationand various equipment. This also entailsdetailed studies of the reactive power,voltage stability, insulation coordination,and testing of the dynamic and transientbehavior in the network resulting fromfaults. Connection of neighboring transmis-
sion systems via AC/DC coupling, the im-plementation of HVDC transmission or su-perposing a new voltage level needs com-prehensive planning and investigation work(Fig. 5).
Tools
Beside the great experience and know-how Siemens Power System Planningapplies powerful tools to assist the engi-neers and their highly responsible work.
SINCAL
(Siemens Networ Calculation) for analysisand planning purposes. Any size of sys-tems with line and cable routing are simu-lated, displayed and evaluated with theSINCAL program system. With the help ofan integrated database and easy-to-usegraphics system, schematic and topologi-cal equivalent systems can be digitized orconverted to other systems.
NETOMAC
(Network Torsion Machine Control) is aprogram for simulation and optimizationof electrical systems which consist of net-work, machines and closed-loop and open-loop control equipment. Two modes oftime simulation, instantaneous value modeand stability mode can be used separatelyor in combination. The program serves for Simulation of electromechanical
and magnetic phenomena Special load-flow calculations Frequency-range analysis Analysis of eigenvalues Simulation of torsional systems Parameter identification Reduction of passive systems Optimization
DISTAL
(Distance Protection Grading) calculatesthe setting values of the impedance forthe three steps and for the overreachzones (automatic reclosing and signal com-parison) of distance protection equipmentin any kind of meshed network.
CUSS
(Computer-aided Protective Grading) indi-cates grading paths and grading diagrams,checks the interaction of the current-timecharacteristics with regard to selectivityand generates setting tables for the pro-tection equipment.
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution 10/5
System Planning
DISCHU
simulation and testing of numerical pro-tection relays.
PRIMUS
works out the most suitable voltage fora DC transmission project together withthe most important electrical data andthe costs.
SECOND
is used to calculate the electrical character-istics and costs of a given AC transmissionproject.
FELD
permits calculation of electrical and mag-netic fields which occur during operationand fault conditions in the environment ofone-, two- and three-phase systems (e.g.overhead lines and railway lines) in a two-dimensional way.
LEIKA
permits calculation of the electrical charac-teristics of overhead lines and cables.
TERRA
is for calculating the potential fields ofgrounding installations.
KABEIN
is used for calculating the inductive inter-ference to which telecommunication linesand pipelines are subjected by the operat-ing currents or fault currents of high-volt-age overhead lines or cables at any levelsof exposure.
SUNICO
calculates how to make optimum use ofpower stations. It indicates the best choicefrom among the available power units andthe best way of dividing up the systemload among the individual units used.
HADICA
is used for calculating harmonic voltagesand currents in electrical systems.
ACFilt
(Filter-circuit design) is for dealing effi-ciently with harmonic compensation.
Fig. 5: Planning tasks for interconnected transmission system
Fig. 4: Steps for network planning
Weak pointdeterminationImmediate action
Task definitions,System analysis ofpresent status
Technical standards,Reliability require-ments
Technical/economicalcalculations andevaluations
System architectureAlternative systemconcepts for stages
Expansion projectLoad development
Superposedvoltage levelInfeed
Component designProtectivecoordinationMethod of neutralgrounding
Subposed voltage levelLoad structure
Proposal forsystem layout
Existing systemPlanned
Tasks
Load development andpower plant schedulesVoltage steps andtransformer substationsizesInstallation typeand configurationVoltage-controland reactive-powercompensationLoad-flow controland stability criteriaDynamic andtransient behaviorSystem management(normal and faulted)
10/6 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
System Planning
Advanced AC/DC real-time simulation
The development and testing of measur-ing, protection and control equipment oflarge power supply installations need totake place under real system conditions.Siemens System Planning utilize a real-time simulator based on a modular princi-ple so that different layouts and structuresof the projects can be dealt with flexibly.In the simulator, there are 6 test stationswhich enable parallel work to be carriedout. Four of them are specially designedfor testing large power converters such asHVDC and FACTS units. Station 5 has spe-cial interfaces for testing system protec-tion schemes. Custom power station 6 isused for Advanced Power Electronic Appli-cations such as SIPCON (Siemens PowerConditioner). In addition to the classic type
of simulator with physical elements, real-time injection of transient signals from dig-ital simulations is also possible, e.g. withNETOMAC or RTDS, so that computer andanalog simulation complement each other.
Measurements, Instruction and Training
Sometimes only field measurements canprovide an accurate picture of the actualsituation and will be conducted for acquisi-tion of data, clarification of disturbancesand verification of functions.Also, instruction and training matched tothe particular needs of the customers,acquainting them with installations or alsoprocedures for use of software and meth-ods of planning are important aspects,provided by Siemens System Planning.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31-73 44 45
=1 =1
∆u, ∆f, ∆φGPower Generation
AC/DC Systems
6 Test Stations
Simulator Interfaces
Real-Time ComputerSimulation
Signal Generation andRecording
Measuring, Protectionand Control
Positive and ZeroSequence Components
Digital SequenceConrollers
Playback ComputerSimulation
…
HVDC and FACTS
1 … 4
Custom Power
6
…
5
Protection
Signal Acquisition System
NETOMAC, EMTDC, EMTPRTDS
…
Fig. 6: Advanced AC/DC Real-Time Simulator facilities
High-Voltage Power Transmission Systems
Contents Page
High-voltage PowerTransmission Systems 11/2–11/4
11/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-Voltage Power Transmission Systems
Introduction
The supply of power means more than justthe combination of individual components.Particularly in countries where demand forpower is growing at an above-average rate,there are large-scale projects under way,e.g. transmission systems or industrialcomplexes (Fig. 1).Setting up such large-scale projects callsfor an expert partner, capable of diligentlyanalysing demand and of planning theproject integrally, taking all marginal condi-tions into account. This means a compe-tent partner who produces top-quality com-ponents both for power transmission andfor system management tasks. Such apartner must also ensure that the systemswill be properly installed.
Experienced project management –the way to the successful project
With all key technologies in house,Siemens can provide turnkey solutions forthe individual demands in the field of pow-er transmission and distribution.The scope of supply includes all compo-nents from the generator terminals, via ACor DC transmission and the high-voltagegrid to the HV, MV and LV distribution sys-tem going down to the individual custom-ers.The benefit of the turnkey projects are: All project coordination is in one hand
and The interfaces between customer and
supplier are minimized The turnkey responsibility of Siemens
reduces the project risk for the customer.In close cooperation with the customer,the task definition for the scheduledproject is drawn up, and all marginal condi-tions clarified (Fig. 2).
Fig. 1
Fig. 2: Scope of supply and services
PTS and componentsDevelopmentand production of keycomponents
Supply, manufacture
Quality assurancePersonnel trainingMaintenance
Services, e.g.
Project developmentFeasibility studiesFinancial engineeringPartner & shareholder
BOO/BOT projects
Planning, projectengineeringConsultancyCoordinationStudies, analyses
Planning, consultancyOverall projectmanagementOn-site implementationOn-site supervision
Site management,installation &commissioning
Consortium leadershipConsortium memberin the construction ofPTS
Consortium member
Planning and designof turnkey PowerTransmission Systems(PTS)
General contractor
PowerTransmissionSystems
11/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-Voltage Power Transmission Systems
Fig. 3: AC or DC transmission costs over distance
System optimization and engineering
One major task for the system engineeringexperts is the comparison and the assess-ment of various concepts. The basic param-eters are transmission capacity and volt-age, along with the transmission distance.Having the turnkey responsibility, Siemenscan optimize the transmission systemtechnically and economically in order tofind the transmission system whichis tailored to our customer‘s demands.
Depending on boundaryconditions
Breake-even-point HVAC
HVDC
Costs
Distance
Cost comparison between 3-phase HV AC trans-mission and HV DC transmission
Training
Customer training is a very important taskin project management and our servicedepartment specializes in customer train-ing. In the sessions and courses Siemensdistinguishes between operation and main-tenance staff training. The station opera-tors are mainly trained in handling of thecontrol and protection systems and theirfunctions, whereas the maintenanceteams are specially introduced to the maincomponents.The training activities comprise classroomsessions, giving the theoretical back-ground, as well as practical instruction onsite in order to familiarize the customerswith the individual items of equipment.
Tailored financial solutions
As a globally structured company, Siemensis prepared to participate in the financingof a power transmission project. Depend-ing on the requirements, there are differ-ent possibilities covering supplier’s creditas well as complete project financing likeBuild Operate and Transfer (BOT) or nu-merous alternative models.
11/4 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
High-Voltage Power Transmission Systems
Fig. 4
Service
Our service activities cover all necessarychecks, inspection and other maintenanceactivities. With the use of special diagnos-tic systems, also remote controlled, thecauses for outages or malfunctions of indi-vidual equipment can be found easily.
For further information please contact:
Fax: ++ 49 - 9131- 73 4672
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Conversion Factors and Tables
320°
305°
290°
275°
260°
245°
160°
150°
140°
130°
120°
110°
100°
90°
230°
212°
200°
185°
170°
155°
80°
70°
60°140°
50°
40°
30°
20°
10°
125°
110°
95°
80°
65°
50°
32°
20°
5°
–10°
–25°
0°
–10°
–20°
–30°
–40°–40°
°C°F
0.6530.8321.040
1.310
1.650
2.080
2.620
19 AWG18
1716
1514
13
0.75
1.50
2.50
12
1110
98
7
4.00
6.00
10.00
16.00
3.310
4.1705.260
6.6308.370
10.550
13.30016.770
21.150
26.67033.630
6
5
4
32
1
25.00
35.00
50.00
70.00
42.410
53.48067.430
95.00
120.00
150.00
85.030
107.200126.640152.000
202.710
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0250 MCM300
400500600700800
1000
253.350304.000354.710405.350506.710
185.00
240.00
300.00
400.00
500.00625.00
Cross-sectionalconductorarea
[mm2]
EquivalentMetric CSA
[mm2]
AWG or MCM
Metric cross-sectional areasacc. to IEC
American wire gauge
Non-metric system SI system
Length
1 mil
1 in
1 ft
1 yd
1 mile
0.0254 mm
2.54 cm = 25.4 mm
30.48 cm = 0.305 m
0.914 m
1.609 km = 1609 m
Non-metric systemSI system
1 mm
1 cm
1 m
1 km
39.37 mil
0.394 in
3.281 ft = 39.370 in = 1.094 yd
0.621 mile = 1.094 yd
Area
1 in2
1 ft2
1 yd2
1 acre
1 mile2
6.452 cm2 = 654.16 mm2
0.093 m2 = 929 cm2
0.836 m2
4046.9 m2
2.59 km2
1 mm2
1cm2
1 m2
1 km2
0.00155 in2
0.155 in2
10.76 ft2 = 1550 in2
= 1.196 yd2
0.366 mile2
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Cross-sectional conductor areasto Metric and US Standards
Temperature
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Conversion Factors and Tables
Volume rate of flow
1 gallon/s
1 gallon/min
1 ft3/s
1 ft3/min
3.785 l/s
0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h
101.941 m3/h
1.699 m3/h
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
1 l/s
1 l/h
1 m3/h
0.264 gallon/s
0.0044 gallon/min
4.405 gallon/min =0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s
Mass, weight
1 oz
1 lb
1 sh ton
28.35 g
0.454 kg = 453.6 g
0.907 t = 907.2 kg
1 g
1 kg
1 t
0.035 oz
2.205 lb = 35.27 oz
1.102 sh ton = 2205 lb
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Velocity
1 ft/s
1 mile/h
0.305 m/s = 1.097 km/h
0.447 m/s = 1.609 km/h
1 m/s
1 km/h
3.281 ft/s = 2.237 mile/h
0.911 ft/s = 0.621 mile/h
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Volume
1 in3
1 ft3
1 yd3
1 fl. oz.
1 quart
1 pint
1 gallon
1 barrel
16.387 cm3
28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3
0.765 m3
29.574 cm3
0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l
0.473 dm3 = 0.473 l
3.785 dm3 = 3.785 l
158,987 dm3 = 1.589 m3
= 159 l
1 cm3
1 dm3
= 1 l
1 m3
0.061 in3 = 0.034 fl. oz.
61.024 in3 =0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quart =2.114 pint = 0.264 gallon
0.629 barrel
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Force
1 lbf
1 kgf
1 tonf
4.448 N
9.807 N
9.964 kN
0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf
0.100 tonf
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
1 N
1 kN
Torque, moment of force
1 lbf in
1 lbf ft
0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m
1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m
8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft(= 0.102 kgf m)
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
1 Nm
Moment of inertia J.
Numerical value equation: J = = Wr 2GD2
4
1 lbf ft2 0.04214 kg m2
23.73 lb ft2
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
1 kg m2
Pressure
1 in HG
1 psi
1 lbf/ft2
1 lbf/in2
1 tonf/ft2
1 tonf/in2
0.034 bar
0.069 bar
4.788 x 10-4 bar =4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2
0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2
1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2
154.443 bar =157.488 kgf/cm2
1 bar= 105 pa= 102 kpa
29.53 in Hg =14.504 psi =2088.54 lbf/ft2 =14.504 lbf/in2 =0.932 tonf/ft2 =6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2
(= 1.02 kgf/cm2)
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Energy, work, heat
1 hp h
1 ft lbf
1 Btu
0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J= 2.737 x 105 kgf m
0.138 kgf m
1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J(= 0.252 kcal)
1 kWh
1 J
1 kgf m
1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m= 3.6 x 105 J
3.725 x 10-7 hp h =0.738 ft lbf =9.478 x 10-4 Btu(= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)
3.653 x 10-6 hp h =7.233 ft lbf
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission & Distribution
Conversion Factors and Tables
1 km = 1000 m;1 m = 100 cm = 1000 mm
1 km2 = 1000 000 m2;1 m2 = 10 000 cm2;1 cm2 = 100 mm2
1 m3 = 1000 000 cm3;1 cm3 = 1000 mm3
1 t = 1000 kg; 1 kg = 1000 g
1 kW = 1000 W
Specific steam consumption
1 lb/hp h 0.608 kg/kWh
1 kg/kWh 1.644 lb/hp h
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Power
1 hp
1 ft lbf/s
1 kcal/h
1 Btu/h
0.746 kW = 745.70 W =76.040 kgf m/s(= 1.014 PS)
1.356 W (= 0.138 kgf in/s)
1.163 W
0.293 W
1 kW
1 W
1.341 hp =101.972 kgf m/s(= 1.36 PS)
0.738 ft lbf/s = 0.86 kcal/h= 3.412 Btu(= 0.102 kgf m/s)
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
Temperature
°F °C°F K
(ϑF – 32) = ϑC
ϑF + 255.37 = T
Non-metric system SI system
Non-metric systemSI system
5659
°C °FK °F
ϑC + 32 = ϑF
ϑ T – 459.67 = ϑF
9595
Note:Quantity Symbol Unit
Fahrenheittemperature
Celsius (Centigrade)temperature
Thermodynamictemperature
* The letter t may be used instead of ϑ
ϑF*
ϑC*
T
°F
°C
K(Kelvin)
Examples for decimal multiplesand submultiples of metric units
Conditions of Sale and Delivery
Subject to the “General Conditions of Sup-ply and Delivery for Products and Servicesof the Electrical and Electronics Industry”.The technical data, dimensions andweights are subject to change unlessotherwise stated on the individual pagesof this catalog.The illustrations are for reference only.